WMF T25 002 R010v05 - RCT

WiMAX FORUM PROPRIETARY
WiMAX Forum Proprietary

Copyright 2011 WiMAX Forum. All Rights Reserved.
WiMAX Forum
Test Procedures
WiMAX Forum
Mobile Radio Conformance Tests

WMF-T25-002-R010v05
WMF Approved
(2011-07-14)
WiMAX Forum
Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - ii
Copyright Notice, Use Restrictions, Disclaimer, and Limitation of Liability 1
2
Copyright 2011 WiMAX Forum. All rights reserved. 3
4
The WiMAX Forum
owns the copyright in this document and reserves all rights herein. This document is available for 5
download from the WiMAX Forum and may be duplicated for internal use, provided that all copies contain all proprietary notices 6
and disclaimers included herein. Except for the foregoing, this document may not be duplicated, in whole or in part, or 7
distributed without the express written authorization of the WiMAX Forum. 8
9
Use of this document is subject to the disclaimers and limitations described below. Use of this document constitutes acceptance 10
of the following terms and conditions: 11
12
THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE GREATEST 13
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THE WiMAX FORUM DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED AND 14
STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF TITLE, 15
NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE WiMAX 16
FORUM DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THIS DOCUMENT IS COMPLETE OR WITHOUT ERROR AND 17
DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES TO THE CONTRARY. 18
19
Any products or services provided using technology described in or implemented in connection with this document may be 20
subject to various regulatory controls under the laws and regulations of various governments worldwide. The user is solely 21
responsible for the compliance of its products and/or services with any such laws and regulations and for obtaining any and all 22
required authorizations, permits, or licenses for its products and/or services as a result of such regulations within the applicable 23
jurisdiction. 24
25
NOTHING IN THIS DOCUMENT CREATES ANY WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER REGARDING THE 26
APPLICABILITY OR NON-APPLICABILITY OF ANY SUCH LAWS OR REGULATIONS OR THE SUITABILITY 27
OR NON-SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH PRODUCT OR SERVICE FOR USE IN ANY JURISDICTION. 28
29
NOTHING IN THIS DOCUMENT CREATES ANY WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER REGARDING THE 30
SUITABILITY OR NON-SUITABILITY OF A PRODUCT OR A SERVICE FOR CERTIFICATION UNDER ANY 31
CERTIFICATION PROGRAM OF THE WiMAX FORUM OR ANY THIRD PARTY. 32
33
The WiMAX Forum has not investigated or made an independent determination regarding title or noninfringement of any 34
technologies that may be incorporated, described or referenced in this document. Use of this document or implementation of any 35
technologies described or referenced herein may therefore infringe undisclosed third-party patent rights or other intellectual 36
property rights. The user is solely responsible for making all assessments relating to title and noninfringement of any technology, 37
standard, or specification referenced in this document and for obtaining appropriate authorization to use such technologies, 38
technologies, standards, and specifications, including through the payment of any required license fees. 39
40
NOTHING IN THIS DOCUMENT CREATES ANY WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NONINFRINGEMENT WITH 41
RESPECT TO ANY TECHNOLOGIES, STANDARDS OR SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCED OR INCORPORATED 42
INTO THIS DOCUMENT. 43
44
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE WiMAX FORUM OR ANY MEMBER BE LIABLE TO THE USER OR TO A THIRD 45
PARTY FOR ANY CLAIM ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, INCLUDING, 46
WITHOUT LIMITATION, A CLAIM THAT SUCH USE INFRINGES A THIRD PARTYS INTELLECTUAL 47
PROPERTY RIGHTS OR THAT IT FAILS TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE LAWS OR REGULATIONS. BY 48
USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, THE USER WAIVES ANY SUCH CLAIM AGAINST THE WiMAX FORUM AND ITS 49
MEMBERS RELATING TO THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT. 50
51
The WiMAX Forum reserves the right to modify or amend this document without notice and in its sole discretion. The user is 52
solely responsible for determining whether this document has been superseded by a later version or a different document. 53
54
WiMAX, Mobile WiMAX, Fixed WiMAX, WiMAX Forum, WiMAX Certified, WiMAX Forum Certified, the 55
WiMAX Forum logo and the WiMAX Forum Certified logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the WiMAX Forum. All 56
other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 57
58
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - iii
Table of Contents
1. OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................................... 1
2. SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................................. 2
3. PURPOSE ........................................................................................................................................................ 3
4. REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................................ 4
5. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS .................................................................................................... 5
5.1 Definitions ..................................................................................................................................................... 5
5.2 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................................ 6
6. MEASUREMENT SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 8
6.1 General requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 8
6.2 Test condition declarations ............................................................................................................................ 8
7. CONFORMANCE TESTS ........................................................................................................................... 10
8. TEST PROCEDURES .................................................................................................................................. 12
8.1 General statement for all tests ...................................................................................................................... 12
8.2 General statement for all test setups ............................................................................................................ 12
9. TEST FOR MOBILE STATION ................................................................................................................. 14
9.1 Test procedures ............................................................................................................................................ 14
9.1.1 MS-01.1: MS Receiver Maximum Tolerable Signal ............................................................................ 15
9.1.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 15
9.1.1.2 PICS coverage and test purposes ................................................................................................... 15
9.1.1.3 Testing requirements ..................................................................................................................... 15
9.1.1.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 15
9.1.1.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 16
9.1.1.6 Compliance requirements .............................................................................................................. 16
9.1.2 MS-02.1: MS receiver preamble .......................................................................................................... 17
9.1.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 17
9.1.2.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 17
9.1.2.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 18
9.1.2.5.1 Decoding preamble with all defined cell IDs and all segments .................................................................. 18
9.1.2.5.2 Decoding preambles while more than a single BS is transmitting .............................................................. 18
9.1.2.7 Uncertainties ................................................................................................................................. 22
9.1.2.8 Revision history ............................................................................................................................ 22
9.1.3 MS-02.2: MS receiver preamble .......................................................................................................... 24
9.1.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 24
9.1.3.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 24
9.1.3.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 25
9.1.3.5.1 Decoding preamble with all defined cell IDs and all segments .................................................................. 25
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - iv
9.1.3.5.2 Decoding preambles while more than a single BS is transmitting .............................................................. 25
9.1.3.7 Uncertainties ................................................................................................................................. 25
9.1.4 MS-03.1: Reserved ............................................................................................................................... 25
9.1.5 MS-04.1: MS receiver RSSI measurements ......................................................................................... 26
9.1.5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 26
9.1.5.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 28
9.1.5.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 28
9.1.6 MS-05.1: MS receiver Physical CINR measurements ......................................................................... 32
9.1.6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 32
9.1.6.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 34
9.1.6.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 34
9.1.6.7 Uncertainties ................................................................................................................................. 38
9.1.7 MS-06.2: MS receiver pilot-based Effective CINR measurement ....................................................... 39
9.1.7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 39
9.1.7.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 41
9.1.7.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 47
9.1.7.7 Uncertainties ................................................................................................................................. 53
9.1.8 MS-07.1: MS receiver adjacent and non-adjacent channel selectivity ................................................. 55
9.1.8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 55
9.1.8.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 56
9.1.8.5 Test procedures ............................................................................................................................. 57
9.1.8.7 Uncertainties ................................................................................................................................. 58
9.1.9 MS-08.1: MS receiver maximum input signal ..................................................................................... 59
9.1.9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 59
9.1.9.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 60
9.1.9.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 60
9.1.9.7 Uncertainties ................................................................................................................................. 61
9.1.10 MS-09.1: MS receiver sensitivity ......................................................................................................... 62
9.1.10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 62
9.1.10.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 64
9.1.10.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 64
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - v
9.1.11 MS-10.1: MS Transmit and Receive HARQ ........................................................................................ 71
MS-10a.1: MS Transmit HARQ .............................................................................................................................. 71
9.1.11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 71
9.1.11.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 73
9.1.11.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 74
9.1.11.7 Uncertainties ................................................................................................................................. 76
MS-10b.1: MS Receive HARQ ............................................................................................................................... 78
9.1.11.9 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 78
9.1.11.12 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 81
9.1.11.13 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 81
9.1.11.15 Uncertainties ................................................................................................................................. 87
9.1.11.16 Revision History ............................................................................................................................ 87
9.1.11.17 Appendix - finding maximum SNR for PER > 0.5 ....................................................................... 88
9.1.11.18 Appendix - finding maximum SNR for Burst Error Rate > 0.9 .................................................... 88
9.1.12 MS-11.1: MS receiver PHY support for handover ............................................................................... 90
9.1.12.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 90
9.1.12.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 91
9.1.12.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 92
9.1.12.7 Uncertainties ................................................................................................................................. 95
9.1.13 MS-11.2: MS receiver PHY support for inter-FA handover ................................................................ 96
9.1.13.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 96
9.1.13.4 Test setup ...................................................................................................................................... 97
9.1.13.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................... 98
9.1.13.6 Compliance requirements ............................................................................................................ 100
9.1.13.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 100
9.1.13.8 Revision history .......................................................................................................................... 100
9.1.14 MS-12.1: MS Transmitter Modulation and Coding, Cyclic Prefix and Frame Duration Timing ....... 102
9.1.14.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 102
9.1.14.2 PICS coverage and test purposes ................................................................................................. 102
9.1.14.3 Testing requirements ................................................................................................................... 103
9.1.14.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 103
9.1.14.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 103
9.1.14.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 105
9.1.15 MS-13.1: MS Transmit Ranging Support ........................................................................................... 106
9.1.15.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 106
9.1.15.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 108
9.1.15.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 108
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - vi
9.1.15.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 110
9.1.16 MS-14.1: Reserved ............................................................................................................................. 112
9.1.17 MS-15.1: MS transmit power dynamic range and relative step accuracy .......................................... 113
9.1.17.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 113
9.1.17.2 Coverage and test purposes ......................................................................................................... 113
9.1.17.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 114
9.1.17.5 Test procedure Dynamic range and Open loop / Closed Loop Power Step Accuracy ............. 115
9.1.17.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 117
9.1.18 MS-16.1: MS Transmit Power Control Support ................................................................................. 119
9.1.18.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 119
9.1.18.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 121
9.1.18.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 121
9.1.18.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 127
9.1.18.8 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................. 127
9.1.19 MS-17.1: MS transmitter spectral flatness ......................................................................................... 129
9.1.19.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 129
9.1.19.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 129
9.1.19.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 130
9.1.19.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 131
9.1.20 MS-18.1: MS transmitter relative constellation error ......................................................................... 133
9.1.20.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 133
9.1.20.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 135
9.1.20.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 135
9.1.20.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 136
9.1.21 MS-19.1: MS transmit synchronization .............................................................................................. 137
9.1.21.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 137
9.1.21.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 138
9.1.21.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 138
9.1.21.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 139
9.1.21.8 Revision History .......................................................................................................................... 140
9.1.22 MS-20.1: MS transmit/receive switching gap .................................................................................... 141
9.1.22.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 141
9.1.22.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 142
9.1.22.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 143
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - vii
9.1.22.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 145
9.1.23 MS-21.2: MS AMC receive and transmit operation ........................................................................... 147
9.1.23.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 147
9.1.23.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 147
9.1.23.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 149
9.1.23.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 154
9.1.24 MS-22.2: Part A, MS receiver MIMO processing .............................................................................. 157
9.1.24.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 157
9.1.24.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 159
9.1.24.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 161
9.1.24.8 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 174
9.1.24.11 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 175
9.1.24.12 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 176
9.1.24.14 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 180
9.1.25 MS-23.2 MS receive Beamforming processing.................................................................................. 182
9.1.25.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 182
9.1.25.4 Test setup for dedicated pilots zones ........................................................................................... 185
9.1.25.5 Frame structure and packet Sizes ................................................................................................ 186
9.1.25.6 PUSC frame parameters .............................................................................................................. 187
9.1.25.7 AMC frame parameters ............................................................................................................... 189
9.1.25.8 Receiver sensitivity test procedure for dedicated pilots zones .................................................... 191
9.1.25.10 Pass/Fail verdict .......................................................................................................................... 197
9.1.25.11 Test procedure for extra receiving power in beamformed zone .................................................. 197
9.1.25.13 Test requirements for PCINR reporting in dedicated pilots zone ................................................ 198
9.1.25.14 Test procedure for PCINR reporting in dedicated pilots zone .................................................... 199
9.1.25.16 Test requirements for dedicated pilots in STC zone .................................................................... 202
9.1.25.17 Test procedure for dedicated pilots in STC zone ........................................................................ 202
9.1.25.18 Pass/Fail Verdict ......................................................................................................................... 202
9.1.25.19 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 203
9.1.26 MS-24.2: MS transmit collaborative MIMO ...................................................................................... 206
9.1.26.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 206
9.1.26.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 207
9.1.26.5 Test procedures ........................................................................................................................... 207
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - viii
9.1.26.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 209
9.1.27 MS-25.2: MS transmit Beamforming support .................................................................................... 211
9.1.27.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 211
9.1.27.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 213
9.1.27.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 214
9.1.27.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 230
10. TESTS FOR BASE STATIONS ................................................................................................................ 233
10.1 Test procedures .......................................................................................................................................... 233
10.1.1 BS-01.1: BS receiver maximum tolerable signal ............................................................................... 234
10.1.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 234
10.1.1.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 235
10.1.1.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 235
10.1.1.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 235
10.1.2 BS-02.1: Reserved .............................................................................................................................. 237
10.1.3 BS-03.1: BS Receive Ranging Support .............................................................................................. 238
10.1.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 238
10.1.3.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 239
10.1.3.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 239
10.1.3.5.1 Subtest 1: Initial Ranging ....................................................................................................................... 240
10.1.3.5.2 Subtest 2: Periodic Ranging .................................................................................................................... 240
10.1.3.5.3 Subtest 3: Handover Ranging ................................................................................................................. 241
10.1.3.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 241
10.1.4 BS-04.1: BS receiver adjacent and non-adjacent channel selectivity ................................................. 243
10.1.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 243
10.1.4.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 244
10.1.4.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 244
10.1.4.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 246
10.1.5 BS-05.1: BS Rx Maximum Input Level On-channel reception tolerance ......................................... 247
10.1.5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 247
10.1.5.2 PICS Coverage ............................................................................................................................ 247
10.1.5.3 Test Setup .................................................................................................................................... 247
10.1.5.4 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 247
10.1.5.5 Compliance Requirements .......................................................................................................... 249
10.1.6 BS-06.1: BS receiver sensitivity ......................................................................................................... 250
10.1.6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 250
10.1.6.2 Test Setup .................................................................................................................................... 251
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - ix
10.1.6.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 252
10.1.6.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 259
10.1.7 BS-07.1 BS transmitter modulation and coding ................................................................................. 261
10.1.7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 261
10.1.7.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 263
10.1.7.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 263
10.1.7.7 Uncertainties/accuracies of the measurement system.................................................................. 265
10.1.8 BS-08.1: BS Transmitter Cyclic Prefix, Symbol Timing, and Frame Duration Timing ................... 266
10.1.8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 266
10.1.8.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 266
10.1.8.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 267
10.1.8.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 268
10.1.9 BS-09.1: BS Transmit Preambles ...................................................................................................... 269
10.1.9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 269
10.1.9.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 269
10.1.9.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 270
10.1.9.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 271
10.1.10 BS-10.1: BS transmitter power range ................................................................................................. 272
10.1.10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 272
10.1.10.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 273
10.1.10.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 273
10.1.10.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 274
10.1.11 BS-11.1: BS transmitter spectral flatness ........................................................................................... 275
10.1.11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 275
10.1.11.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 276
10.1.11.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 276
10.1.11.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 277
10.1.12 BS-12.1: BS Transmitter Relative Constellation Error ...................................................................... 279
10.1.12.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 279
10.1.12.2 PICS Coverage ............................................................................................................................ 280
10.1.12.3 Test Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 280
10.1.12.4 Test Setup .................................................................................................................................... 281
10.1.12.5 Test Procedure ............................................................................................................................. 281
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - x
10.1.12.6 Compliance Requirements .......................................................................................................... 282
10.1.13 BS-13a.1: BS synchronization............................................................................................................ 284
10.1.13.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 284
10.1.13.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 285
10.1.13.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 286
10.1.13.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 288
10.1.14 BS-13b.1: BS Network synchronization ............................................................................................ 290
10.1.14.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 290
10.1.14.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 291
10.1.14.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 291
10.1.14.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 293
10.1.15 BS-14.1: BS Receive and Transmit HARQ ........................................................................................ 294
10.1.15.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 294
10.1.15.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 295
10.1.15.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 295
10.1.15.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 298
10.1.16 BS-15.1: Reserved .............................................................................................................................. 300
10.1.17 BS-16.1: BS receive/transmit switching gaps .................................................................................... 301
10.1.17.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 301
10.1.17.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 303
10.1.17.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 303
10.1.17.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 305
10.1.18 BS-17.2: BS AMC receive and transmit operation ............................................................................ 307
10.1.18.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 307
10.1.18.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 308
10.1.18.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 311
10.1.18.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 314
10.1.19 BS-18.2: BS receive Collaborative MIMO ........................................................................................ 316
10.1.19.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 316
10.1.19.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 318
10.1.19.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 318
10.1.19.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 324
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xi
10.1.20 BS-19.2: BS transmit MIMO processing ........................................................................................... 326
10.1.20.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 326
10.1.20.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 327
10.1.20.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 327
10.1.20.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 333
10.1.21 BS-20.2: BS transmitter Beamforming .............................................................................................. 334
10.1.21.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 334
10.1.21.4 Test setup .................................................................................................................................... 337
10.1.21.5 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 339
10.1.21.7 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 344
10.1.22 BS-21.2: BS Receiver Beamforming Processing ............................................................................... 345
10.1.22.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 345
10.1.22.3 Prerequisite tests .......................................................................................................................... 346
10.1.22.4 Test equipment and test equipment requirements ....................................................................... 346
10.1.22.5 Test Parameter Configurations .................................................................................................... 347
10.1.22.6 BS Antenna port connection ....................................................................................................... 347
10.1.22.7 Test procedure ............................................................................................................................. 347
10.1.22.9 Uncertainties ............................................................................................................................... 349
APPENDIX 1. .......................................................................................................................................................... 351
A 1.1 Test Packets ............................................................................................................................................... 351
A 1.2 Receiver minimum sensitivity ................................................................................................................... 353
A 1.3 Bit Error Rate (BER) versus Packet Error Rate (PER) .............................................................................. 358
A 1.4 Qualitative tests and functional tests ......................................................................................................... 359
APPENDIX 2. .......................................................................................................................................................... 361
A 2.1 RF Center Frequency ................................................................................................................................. 361
A 2.2 MS Received Power Reference ................................................................................................................. 361
A 2.3 Downlink and uplink allocation ................................................................................................................. 362
A 2.4 Wave 1 Testing of 2-Antenna MSs............................................................................................................ 365
APPENDIX 3. .......................................................................................................................................................... 366
A 3.1 Measuring PER for MS ............................................................................................................................. 366
A 3.2 Measuring PER for BS .............................................................................................................................. 366
APPENDIX 4. .......................................................................................................................................................... 368
A 4.1 Test Channel Models ................................................................................................................................. 368
A 4.1.1 Purpose of channel modeling ............................................................................................................. 368
A 4.1.2 MIMO channels .................................................................................................................................. 368
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xii
A 4.2 Derivation of the correlation matrices ....................................................................................................... 373
A 4.3 Reference antenna configuration ............................................................................................................... 377
APPENDIX 5. .......................................................................................................................................................... 381
A 5.1 Sample Test Center Frequency .................................................................................................................. 381
APPENDIX 6. .......................................................................................................................................................... 383
A 6.1 RCTT functional requirements .................................................................................................................. 383
A 6.2 Signaling Unit (BSE) Requirements: ......................................................................................................... 384
APPENDIX 7. .......................................................................................................................................................... 385
A 7.1 Test Modes ................................................................................................................................................ 385

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xiii
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1. A) GENERAL INTERFACE DIAGRAM FOR MS UUT B) GENERAL INTERFACE DIAGRAM
FOR BS UUT ........................................................................................................................................................ 8
FIGURE 2. TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVER MAXIMUM TOLERABLE SIGNAL TEST. .............................. 15
FIGURE 3. TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVER PREAMBLES TEST. .................................................................. 18
FIGURE 4. TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVER PREAMBLES TEST. ................................................................... 24
FIGURE 5. TEST SETUP FOR RSSI TEST............................................................................................................... 28
FIGURE 6. TEST CONFIGURATIONS FOR THE CINR TEST .............................................................................. 34
FIGURE 7. TEST SETUP FOR ECINR TEST CASE 1 (PUSC WITH NO STC,) 4 (AMC WITH DEDICATED
PILOTS) AND 5 (PUSC WITH DEDICATED PILOTS WITH NO STC) ........................................................ 41
FIGURE 8. TEST SETUP FOR ECINR TEST CASE 2 (PUSC WITH MATRIX A,) 3 (PUSC WITH MATRIX B)
AND 6 (PUSC WITH DEDICATED PILOTS AND STC MATRIX B) ......................................................... 42
FIGURE 9. FRAME FORMAT FOR ECINR TEST CASES 1 (PUSC WITH NO STC), 2 (PUSC WITH MATRIX
A) AND 3 (PUSC WITH MATRIX B) N_SUBCH_PER_SEG = 10 FOR 1024 FFT, 5 FOR 512 FFT. .......... 42
FIGURE 10. FRAME FORMAT FOR ECINR TEST CASE 4 (AMC WITH DEDICATED PILOTS) .................... 43
FIGURE 11. FRAME FORMAT FOR ECINR TEST CASE 5 (PUSC WITH DEDICATED PILOTS AND NO
STC) N_SUBCH_PER_SEG = 10 FOR 1024 FFT, 5 FOR 512 FFT. ............................................................... 44
FIGURE 12. FRAME FORMAT FOR ECINR TEST CASE 6 (PUSC WITH DEDICATED PILOTS AND STC
MATRIX B) ........................................................................................................................................................ 45
FIGURE 13. TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVER ADJACENT AND NON-ADJACENT CHANNEL
SELECTIVITY TEST ......................................................................................................................................... 56
FIGURE 14. TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVER MAXIMUM INPUT SIGNAL.................................................... 60
FIGURE 15. TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVER SENSITIVITY TEST.................................................................. 64
FIGURE 16. TEST SETUP FOR MS TRANSMIT HARQ ........................................................................................... 73
FIGURE 17. TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVE HARQ ............................................................................................. 81
FIGURE 18. TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVE HARQ - MULTIPLE RX ANTENNAS ........................................ 81
FIGURE 19. TEST CONFIGURATIONS FOR THE CINR TEST. ........................................................................... 91
FIGURE 20. TEST CONFIGURATIONS FOR THE CINR TEST. ........................................................................... 97
FIGURE 21. MS TRANSMITTER MODULATION AND CODING, CYCLIC PREFIX AND FRAME
DURATION TIMING ...................................................................................................................................... 103
FIGURE 22. TEST SETUP FOR MS TRANSMIT RANGING SUPPORT ............................................................... 108
FIGURE 23. TEST SETUP FOR MS TRANSMIT POWER LEVEL DYNAMIC RANGE AND POWER LEVEL
CONTROL TEST. ............................................................................................................................................ 114
FIGURE 24. TEST SETUP FOR MS TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL SUPPORT ................................................ 121
FIGURE 25. TEST SETUP FOR MS SPECTRAL FLATNESS .............................................................................. 130
FIGURE 26. TEST SETUP FOR MS RELATIVE CONSTELLATION ERROR ................................................... 135
FIGURE 27. TEST SETUP FOR MS TRANSMIT SYNCHRONIZATION ........................................................... 138
FIGURE 28. DEFINITION OF SSRTG AND SSTTG ............................................................................................. 142
FIGURE 29. TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVE/TRANSMIT SWITCHING GAPS .............................................. 143
FIGURE 30. TEST SETUP FOR FUNCTIONAL TRANSMIT TEST & QUALITATIVE RECEIVE TEST OF
AMC SENSITIVITY ........................................................................................................................................ 148
FIGURE 31. TEST SETUP FOR ABSOLUTE AND DIFFERENTIAL CINR REPORTING TEST ...................... 148
FIGURE 32. FRAME FORMAT FOR MS AMC TEST........................................................................................... 149
FIGURE 33.TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVER MIMO PROCESSING ............................................................... 159
FIGURE 34. FRAME STRUCTURE FOR MIMO SENSITIVITY TEST ............................................................... 160
FIGURE 35. PROPOSED TEST SETUP FOR BOTH MATRIX A & B ................................................................. 176
FIGURE 36. BASIC TEST SETUP FOR MS RECEIVE BEAMFORMING TESTS WITH DEDICATED PILOTS
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 185
FIGURE 37. TEST SETUP FOR PCINR REPORTING WITH DEDICATED PILOTS ......................................... 186
FIGURE 38. TEST SET UP FOR MATRIX B WITH DEDICATED PILOT ZONES ............................................ 186
FIGURE 39. FRAME STRUCTURE FOR TEST OF PUSC ZONE WITH DEDICATED PILOTS ....................... 188
FIGURE 40. FRAME STRUCTURE FOR TEST OF AMC ZONE WITH DEDICATED PILOTS ........................ 191
FIGURE 41 TEST SETUP FOR MS TRANSMIT COLLABORATIVE MIMO .................................................... 207
FIGURE 42 TEST SETUP FOR MS TRANSMIT BEAMFORMING SUPPORT (MS-25.2) .................................... 214
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xiv
FIGURE 43 EXAMPLE FOR UPLINK FRAME STRUCTURE FOR TEST CASE #1 (MS25.2 UL FRAME
FORMAT 1)...................................................................................................................................................... 215
FIGURE 44 UPLINK FRAME STRUCTURE FOR TEST CASE #2 (MS25.2 UL FRAME FORMAT 2) ........... 216
FIGURE 45 UPLINK FRAME STRUCTURE FOR TEST CASE #2 SOUNDING ZONE LOCATION (MS25.2
UL FRAME FORMAT 3) ................................................................................................................................. 221
FIGURE 46 UPLINK FRAME STRUCTURE FOR TEST CASE #2 SOUNDING ZONE LOCATION (MS25.2
UL FRAME FORMAT 4) ................................................................................................................................. 221
FIGURE 47 : SEQUENCE OF FRAMES FOR PERIODIC SOUNDING TEST ..................................................... 223
FIGURE 48 UPLINK FRAME STRUCTURE FOR TEST CASE #3 AND TEST CASE #4 (MS25.2 UL FRAME
FORMAT 5)...................................................................................................................................................... 225
FIGURE 49 UPLINK FRAME STRUCTURE FOR TEST CASE #3 AND TEST CASE #4 (MS25.2 UL FRAME
FORMAT 6)...................................................................................................................................................... 225
FIGURE 50. TEST SETUP FOR BS RECEIVER MAXIMUM TOLERABLE SIGNAL ...................................... 235
FIGURE 51. TEST SETUP FOR BS RECEIVE RANGING SUPPORT TEST ...................................................... 239
FIGURE 52. TEST SETUP FOR BS RECEIVER ADJACENT AND NON-ADJACENT CHANNEL
SELECTIVITY TEST ....................................................................................................................................... 244
FIGURE 53. TEST SETUP FOR BS RECEIVER MAXIMUM INPUT SIGNAL TEST. ....................................... 247
FIGURE 54. TEST SETUP FOR BS RECEIVER SENSITIVITY TEST ................................................................ 251
FIGURE 55. TEST SETUP FOR BS TRANSMITTER MODULATION AND CODING TEST ........................... 263
FIGURE 56. TEST SETUP FOR BS TRANSMITTER CYCLIC PREFIX, SYMBOL TIMING, AND FRAME
DURATION TIMING ...................................................................................................................................... 267
FIGURE 57. TEST SETUP FOR BS TRANSMIT PREAMBLES ........................................................................... 270
FIGURE 58. TEST SETUP FOR BS TRANSMITTER POWER CONTROL RANGE.......................................... 273
FIGURE 59. TEST SETUP FOR BS SPECTRAL FLATNESS ............................................................................... 276
FIGURE 60. TEST SETUP FOR BS TRANSMITTER RELATIVE CONSTELLATION ERROR (BS-12.1) ............. 281
FIGURE 61. AN EXAMPLE TEST SETUP FOR BS SYNCHRONIZATION ....................................................... 286
FIGURE 62. AN EXAMPLE TEST SETUP FOR NETWORK SYNCHRONIZED BS SYNCHRONIZATION .. 291
FIGURE 63. BACKGROUND TRAFFIC MODEL FOR NETWORK-ASSISTED SYNCHRONIZATION ......... 292
FIGURE 64. TEST SETUP FOR BS RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT HARQ ............................................................ 295
FIGURE 65. DEFINITION OF RTG AND TTG ...................................................................................................... 302
FIGURE 66. TEST SETUP FOR BS RECEIVE/TRANSMIT SWITCHING GAPS ............................................... 303
FIGURE 67.TEST SETUP FOR BS AMC OPERATION ........................................................................................ 308
FIGURE 68. FRAME STRUCTURE WITH NORMAL MAP ................................................................................. 309
FIGURE 69. FRAME STRUCTURE WITH COMPRESSED MAP ........................................................................ 310
FIGURE 70 UL COLLABORATIVE MIMO TEST SETUP .................................................................................. 318
FIGURE 71 PILOT PATTERN-A ............................................................................................................................ 319
FIGURE 72 PILOT PATTERN-B ............................................................................................................................. 319
FIGURE 73. TEST SETUP FOR BS TRANSMIT MIMO PROCESSING (STATIC CHANNEL) ....................... 327
FIGURE 74. TEST CONFIGURATION FOR THE BS TRANSMITTER BEAMFORMING PROCESSING TEST
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 337
FIGURE 75. TEST CONFIGURATION FOR THE BS TRANSMITTER BEAMFORMING TEST IN DL PUSC
STC ZONE........................................................................................................................................................ 337
FIGURE 76. FRAME STRUCTURE FOR THE TEST OF PUSC WITH DEDICATED PILOTS.......................... 339
FIGURE 77. FRAME STRUCTURE FOR THE TEST OF AMC WITH DEDICATED PILOTS .......................... 339
FIGURE 78. TEST EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION FOR THE BS RECEIVER BEAMFORMING
PROCESSING TEST. ....................................................................................................................................... 346
FIGURE 79. DEFAULT FRAME STRUCTURE WITH NORMAL MAP .............................................................. 363
FIGURE 80. DEFAULT FRAME STRUCTURE WITH COMPRESSED MAP ..................................................... 364
FIGURE 81. PER TAP MIMO CORRELATION MATRICES ................................................................................ 369
FIGURE 82. BLOCK DIAGRAM OF CORRELATED CHANNEL COEFFICIENT GENERATION. ................. 372
FIGURE 83. HIGH CORRELATION ANTENNAS CONFIGURATION ............................................................... 377
FIGURE 84. MEDIUM CORRELATION ANTENNAS CONFIGURATION ........................................................ 377
FIGURE 85. LOW CORRELATION ANTENNAS CONFIGURATION ................................................................ 378
FIGURE 86. ANTENNA CONFIGURATION FOR DEDICATED PILOT IN STC ZONE ................................... 379

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xv

List of Tables
TABLE 2. CONDITION SUMMARY .......................................................................................................................... 9
TABLE 3 RADIO CONFORMANCE TESTS ........................................................................................................... 10
TABLE 4. PICS COVERAGE FOR MS01.1 .............................................................................................................. 15
TABLE 5. SYSTEM PROFILE COVERAGE FOR MS-02.1 .................................................................................... 17
TABLE 6. COMPLIANCE TABLE FOR MS-02.1 .................................................................................................... 19
TABLE 7. REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-02.1 ....................................................................................................... 22
TABLE 8. REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-02.2 ....................................................................................................... 25
TABLE 9. PICS COVERAGE FOR MS-04.1............................................................................................................. 27
TABLE 10. RSSI TEST POINTS AND LEVELS (SCENARIO-1) ........................................................................... 29
TABLE 11. RSSI TEST POINTS AND LEVELS (SCENARIO-2) ........................................................................... 30
TABLE 12. REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-04.1 ..................................................................................................... 31
TABLE 13. PICS COVERAGE FOR MS-05.1........................................................................................................... 32
TABLE 14. CINR TEST RANGES ............................................................................................................................ 33
TABLE 15: CINR TEST POINTS FOR PREAMBLE/PILOT-BASED PCINR ........................................................ 34
TABLE 16. CINR TEST POINTS FOR PREAMBLE-BASED PCINR..................................................................... 37
TABLE 17. CINR TEST POINTS FOR PILOT-BASED PCINR .............................................................................. 37
TABLE 19. TARGET BLOCK LENGTH FOR ECINR ............................................................................................. 39
TABLE 21. DL ZONE #2 CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................... 45
TABLE 22. CQICH CONFIGURATION. .................................................................................................................. 51
TABLE 23. DL SUB-BURSTS TO BE TRANSMITTED BY THE BSE FOR TEST CASES 1 (PUSC WITH NO
STC,) 2 (PUSC WITH MATRIX A,) 4 (PUSC WITH DEDICATED PILOTS AND NO STC) AND 5 (AMC
WITH DEDICATED PILOTS) ........................................................................................................................... 52
TABLE 24. DL SUB-BURSTS TO BE TRANSMITTED BY THE BSE FOR TEST CASE 3 (PUSC WITH
MATRIX B) ........................................................................................................................................................ 52
TABLE 25. SUB-BURST SIZE AND NUMBER OF MAXIMUM FEC BLOCKS PER SUB-BURST. .................. 53
TABLE 28. PARAMETERS FOR MS RECEIVER ADJACENT-CHANNEL SELECTIVITY TEST ..................... 58
TABLE 29. PARAMETERS FOR MS RECEIVER NON-ADJACENT CHANNEL SELECTIVITY TEST ........... 58
TABLE 32. PARAMETERS FOR MS RECEIVER MAXIMUM INPUT SIGNAL TEST ....................................... 60
TABLE 33. PACKET ERROR RATE LIMITS (64QAM) ......................................................................................... 61
TABLE 36. SENSITIVITY OFFSET IF NEED TO ACCOUNT FOR PILOT BOOSTING .................................... 63
TABLE 37. PARAMETERS FOR SINGLE-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY (CTC, PUSC, AWGN) ...... 65
TABLE 38. PARAMETERS FOR SINGLE-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY (CTC, PUSC, PED-
B@3KM/H) ........................................................................................................................................................ 66
TABLE 39. PARAMETERS FOR SINGLE-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY (CTC, PUSC, VEH-
A@60KM/H) ...................................................................................................................................................... 66
TABLE 40. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 3.5 MHZ BANDWIDTH........................................................ 67
TABLE 41. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 5 MHZ BANDWIDTH ........................................................... 68
TABLE 42. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 7 MHZ BANDWIDTH .......................................................... 68
TABLE 43. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 8.75 MHZ BANDWIDTH...................................................... 69
TABLE 44. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 10 MHZ BANDWIDTH ........................................................ 70
TABLE 46. PICS COVERAGE FOR MS-10A.1 ........................................................................................................ 71
TABLE 47. SERVICE FLOW DESCRIPTION FOR MS-10A.1 ............................................................................... 73
TABLE 48. NUMBER OF SYMBOLS FOR DL AND UL FOR MS-10A.1 ............................................................. 73
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xvi
TABLE 49. MINIMUM VALUES PER HARQ CATEGORY FOR UL HARQ ....................................................... 76
TABLE 50. RECEIVER INPUT LEVEL (DBM) FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTS OF HARQ TRANSMITTER ....... 76
TABLE 51. PARAMETERS FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE LIMIT ...................................... 76
TABLE 52. REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-10A.1 .................................................................................................. 77
TABLE 53. PICS COVERAGE FOR MS-10B.1 ........................................................................................................ 78
TABLE 54. SERVICE FLOW DESCRIPTION FOR MS-10B.1 ............................................................................... 80
TABLE 55. NUMBER OF SYMBOLS FOR DL AND UL FOR MS-10B.1 ............................................................. 80
TABLE 56. MINIMUM VALUES PER HARQ CATEGORY FOR DL HARQ ....................................................... 85
TABLE 57. PARAMETERS FOR QUALITATIVE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE LIMIT FOR MS-10B.1 .......... 86
TABLE 58. PARAMETERS FOR BUFFER SIZE TEST IN TEST SET 5 FOR MS-10B.1 .................................... 86
TABLE 59. PARAMETERS FOR BUFFER SIZE TEST IN TEST SET 6 FOR MS-10B.1 ..................................... 86
TABLE 60. RECEIVER INPUT LEVEL (DBM) FOR MS-10B.1 TEST ................................................................ 86
TABLE 61. PARAMETERS FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE LIMIT FOR MS-10B.1 ........... 87
TABLE 62. MAXIMUM DATA BYTES PER CODING RATE FOR EACH HARQ CHANNEL ......................... 87
TABLE 63. REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-10B.1 .................................................................................................. 87
TABLE 65. CINR TEST POINTS FOR HO CINR .................................................................................................... 92
TABLE 66. CINR TEST POINTS FOR HO CINR .................................................................................................... 94
TABLE 68. CINR TEST POINTS FOR HO CINR (INTER-FA) ............................................................................... 98
TABLE 69. CINR TEST POINTS FOR HO CINR (INTER-FA, PUSC REUSE 1) ................................................ 100
TABLE 70. LIST OF MS TRANSMITTER MCS OPTIONS .................................................................................. 102
TABLE 71. PICS COVERAGE FOR MS-12.1......................................................................................................... 102
TABLE 72. LIST OF MS TRANSMITTER TEST CASES ..................................................................................... 104
TABLE 73. LIST OF MS TRANSMITTER TEST CASES ..................................................................................... 104
TABLE 74. REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-12.1 ................................................................................................... 105
TABLE 76. TEST CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................ 109
TABLE 77. MAXIMUM ALLOWED ERRORS FOR INITIAL RANGING .......................................................... 110
TABLE 78. MAXIMUM ALLOWED ERRORS FOR PERIODIC RANGING ...................................................... 110
TABLE 80. TX POWER REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................... 113
TABLE 81. POWER CLASSES ............................................................................................................................... 113
TABLE 82. COVERAGE FOR MS-15 .................................................................................................................... 113
TABLE 83. REQUIRED ACCURACY FOR POWER LEVEL CONTROL. .......................................................... 115
TABLE 84. TESTING POWER STEP FOR ACTUAL MEASUREMENTS ......................................................... 116
TABLE 85. MEASURED P
OUT
VS P
IDEAL
................................................................................................................ 116
TABLE 86. REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-15 ...................................................................................................... 117
TABLE 88. TX POWER STEP ACCURACY REQUIREMENT ............................................................................ 120
TABLE 89. MS TX POWER, BS_EIRP = 0DBM, PMAX STANDS FOR MS MAX TX POWER ....................... 125
TABLE 90. INITIAL RANGING ............................................................................................................................. 126
TABLE 91. CLOSED LOOP POWER CONTROL .................................................................................................. 127
TABLE 92. OPEN LOOP POWER CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 127
TABLE 95. MS SPECTRAL FLATNESS TEST PARAMETERS .......................................................................... 130
TABLE 96. REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-17.1 MS SPECTRAL FLATNESS ................................................... 132
TABLE 97. RELATIVE CONSTELLATION ERROR REQUIREMENTS FOR MS ............................................. 133
TABLE 99. RCE RESULTS VS BURST TYPE AT X FREQUENCY .................................................................... 136
TABLE 100. REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-18.1 ................................................................................................. 136
TABLE 101. PICS COVERAGE FOR MS-19.1....................................................................................................... 137
TABLE 102. TIMING/FREQUENCY ERRORS FOR INITIAL TRANSMISSION ............................................... 139
TABLE 103. TIMING/FREQUENCY ERRORS DURING RANGING .................................................................. 139
TABLE 104. TIMING/FREQUENCY ERRORS DURING NORMAL OPERATION ........................................... 139
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xvii
TABLE 107. TEST PARAMETERS FOR MS RX/TX SWITCHING GAPS .......................................................... 143
TABLE 108. SSTTG AND SSRTG TIMING PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT FOR MS ................................ 145
TABLE 109. RTG TIMING PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT FOR BS ............................................................ 145
TABLE 110. PER REQUIREMENTS FOR RECEPTION DURING THE LAST PACKET POSITIONS OF DL . 145
TABLE 113 BSE SENSITIVITY VALUES FOR MS FUNCTIONAL TRANSMIT TEST.................................... 150
TABLE 114 MS SENSITIVITY FOR AMC IN AWGN FOR VARIOUS SYSTEM BANDWIDTHS .................. 150
TABLE 115 PARAMETERS FOR MS AMC RECEIVE SENSITIVITY TEST ..................................................... 151
TABLE 116. CINR TEST CONFIGURATIONS: MULTIPATH CHANNEL AND CINR
................................... 152
TABLE 117. CINR TEST CHANNEL CONFIGURATIONS: FIVE BANDS WITH THE HIGHEST CINR ........ 153
TABLE 120. PARAMETERS FOR MIMO RECEIVER PERFORMANCE (MATRIX-A, ONE PACKET PER
FRAME, 2 FEC BLOCKS PER PACKET) ...................................................................................................... 161
TABLE 121. SENSITIVITY NUMBERS FOR 3.5 MHZ CHANNEL BANDWIDTH ........................................... 162
TABLE 122. SENSITIVITY NUMBERS FOR 5 MHZ CHANNEL BANDWIDTH .............................................. 162
TABLE 124. SENSITIVITY NUMBERS FOR 8.75 MHZ CHANNEL BANDWIDTH ......................................... 163
TABLE 125. SENSITIVITY NUMBERS FOR 10 MHZ CHANNEL BANDWIDTH ............................................ 163
TABLE 126. PARAMETERS FOR MIMO RECEIVER PERFORMANCE (MATRIX-B, TWO FEC BLOCKS
PER PACKET) ................................................................................................................................................. 164
TABLE 132. PARAMETERS FOR MIMO RECEIVER PERFORMANCE (MATRIX-B, TWO FEC BLOCKS
PER PACKET, 4DB ANTENNA IMBALANCE) ........................................................................................... 167
TABLE 138. MODE SELECTION, MCS, AND CORRESPONDING SPECTRAL EFFICIENCY ...................... 171
TABLE 139. MCS LEVELS AND MIMO MODES FOR BURST-1 AND BURST-2 ............................................ 171
TABLE 141. PICS COVERAGE FOR MS-22.2 DL-MIMO PCINR REPORTS ..................................................... 174
TABLE 142. SNR TEST RANGES FOR MATRIX A ............................................................................................. 175
TABLE 143. SNR TEST POINTS FOR PILOT-BASED PCINR (MATRIX A) ..................................................... 176
TABLE 144. SNR TEST POINTS FOR PILOT-BASED PCINR (MATRIX B) ..................................................... 177
TABLE 145. REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................................................... 180
TABLE 146. PICS COVERAGE FOR MS 23.2 ....................................................................................................... 184
TABLE 147. MAJOR GROUP INDEX NUMBER FOR PUSC .............................................................................. 187
TABLE 148. MAJOR GROUP ALLOCATIONS FOR PUSC ................................................................................. 189
TABLE 149. MAJOR GROUPS FOR START OF ALLOCATION FOR PUSC ..................................................... 189
TABLE 150. MAJOR GROUP INDEX NUMBER FOR AMC ............................................................................... 190
TABLE 151. LENGTH AND SYMBOL OFFSET OF AMC ZONE ....................................................................... 190
TABLE 152. PARAMETERS FOR TWO-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY WITH DEDICATED PILOTS
(CTC, AMC, AWGN) ....................................................................................................................................... 193
TABLE 153. TWO-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY VALUES WITH DEDICATED PILOTS (CTC,
AMC, AWGN) .................................................................................................................................................. 193
(CTC, PUSC, AWGN) ...................................................................................................................................... 193
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xviii
TABLE 155. TWO-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY VALUES WITH DEDICATED PILOTS(CTC,
PUSC, AWGN) ................................................................................................................................................. 194
(CTC, PUSC, PED-B@3KM/H) ....................................................................................................................... 195
TABLE 157. TWO-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY VALUES WITH DEDICATED PILOTS ............... 195
(CTC, PUSC, VEH-A@60KM/H) .................................................................................................................... 196
TABLE 159. TWO-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY VALUES WITH DEDICATED PILOTS (CTC,
PUSC, VEH-A@60KM/H) ............................................................................................................................... 196
TABLE 160. PUSC SENSITIVY FOR EXTRA POWER TEST (CTC, PUSC, AWGN) ....................................... 198
TABLE 161. CINR TEST POINTS FOR DEDICATED PILOTS-BASED PCINR................................................. 199
TABLE 162. MAJOR GROUPS AND MAJOR GROUP BITMAPS FOR 1024 FFT ............................................. 201
TABLE 163. MAJOR GROUPS AND MAJOR GROUP BITMAPS FOR 512-FFT ............................................... 201
TABLE 164. PARAMETERS FOR MIMO RECEIVER FUNCTIONALITY WITH DEDICATED PILOTS (CTC,
MATRIX B, AWGN) ....................................................................................................................................... 202
TABLE 165. MIMO RECEIVER SENSITIVITY (PLUS 10 DB) WITH DEDICATED PILOTS (CTC, MATRIX
B, AWGN) ........................................................................................................................................................ 203
TABLE 167 PICS COVERAGE FOR MS-24.2........................................................................................................ 206
TABLE 168 LIST OF MS TRANSMIT TEST CASES ............................................................................................ 208
TABLE 169 REVISION HISTORY FOR MS-24.2 ................................................................................................. 209
TABLE 170. PICS COVERAGE FOR [MS-25.2] .................................................................................................... 212
TABLE 171. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS A .................................................................................................. 216
TABLE 172. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS B .................................................................................................. 217
TABLE 173. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS C .................................................................................................. 218
TABLE 174. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS D .................................................................................................. 218
TABLE 175. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS E .................................................................................................. 219
TABLE 176. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS F ................................................................................................... 219
TABLE 177. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS F ................................................................................................... 221
TABLE 178. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS G .................................................................................................. 222
TABLE 179. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS H .................................................................................................. 223
TABLE 180. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS I ................................................................................................... 224
TABLE 181. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS J ................................................................................................... 225
TABLE 182. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS K .................................................................................................. 226
TABLE 183. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS L .................................................................................................. 227
TABLE 184. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS M ................................................................................................. 227
TABLE 185. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS N .................................................................................................. 228
TABLE 186. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS O .................................................................................................. 228
TABLE 187. SEPARABILITY PARAMETERS P ................................................................................................... 229
TABLE 188. PICS COVERAGE FOR BS-01.1 ....................................................................................................... 234
TABLE 189. REVISION HISTORY FOR BS-01.1 .................................................................................................. 236
TABLE 191. PARAMETERS FOR BS RECEIVE RANGING-SUPPORT TEST .................................................. 239
TABLE 194. PARAMETERS FOR BS RECEIVER ADJACENT CHANNEL SELECTIVITY TEST ................. 245
TABLE 195. PARAMETERS FOR BS RECEIVE NON-ADJACENT CHANNEL SELECTIVITY TEST........... 245
TABLE 198. PARAMETERS FOR BS RECEIVER MAXIMUM INPUT SIGNAL TEST ................................... 248
TABLE 199. PARAMETERS FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE LIMIT .................................. 249
TABLE 201. PICS COVERAGE FOR BS-06.1 BS RECEIVER SENSITIVITY .................................................... 252
TABLE 202. NUMBER OF OFDM SYMBOLS IN DL AND UL. .......................................................................... 252
TABLE 203. PARAMETERS FOR SINGLE-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY (CTC, PUSC, AWGN) .. 254
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xix
TABLE 204. PARAMETERS FOR SINGLE-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY (CTC, PUSC, PED-
B@3KM/H) ...................................................................................................................................................... 255
TABLE 205. PARAMETERS FOR SINGLE-ANTENNA RECEIVER SENSITIVITY ( CTC, PUSC, VEH-
A@60KM/H) .................................................................................................................................................... 257
TABLE 206. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 3.5 MHZ BANDWIDTH .................................................... 258
TABLE 207. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 5 MHZ BANDWIDTH ........................................................ 258
TABLE 208. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 7 MHZ BANDWIDTH ....................................................... 258
TABLE 209. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 8.75 MHZ BANDWIDTH .................................................. 259
TABLE 210. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 10 MHZ BANDWIDTH ..................................................... 259
TABLE 211. REVISION HISTORY FOR BS RECEIVER SENSITIVITY BS-06.1 .............................................. 260
TABLE 212. BS TRANSMITTER MODULATION AND CODING IN WIMAX PROFILE AND PICS ............. 261
TABLE 214. PARAMETERS FOR BS TRANSMITTER MODULATION AND CODING TEST OF CTC......... 264
TABLE 217. USEFUL SYMBOL DURATION AND CYCLIC PREFIX DURATION.......................................... 268
TABLE 224. REVISION HISTORY FOR BS-11.1 BS SPECTRAL FLATNESS .................................................. 277
TABLE 225. ALLOWED RELATIVE CONSTELLATION ERRORS VS. MCS ................................................... 280
TABLE 227. TEST RESULTS FOR BS-12.1 ........................................................................................................... 282
TABLE 229. PICS COVERAGE FOR BS-13A.1..................................................................................................... 285
TABLE 230. TIME AND FREQUENCY ERROR UNDER SYNCHRONIZED CONDITIONS ........................... 287
TABLE 231. TIME AND FREQUENCY ERROR UNDER RESYNCHRONIZATION CONDITIONS ............... 288
TABLE 232. REVISION HISTORY FOR BS-13A.1 ............................................................................................... 289
TABLE 234. TIME AND FREQUENCY ERROR FOR NETWORK SYNCHRONIZED BS UNDER
SYNCHRONIZED CONDITIONS .................................................................................................................. 293
TABLE 235. TIME AND FREQUENCY ERROR FOR NETWORK SYNCHRONIZED BS UNDER
RESYNCHRONIZATION CONDITIONS ...................................................................................................... 293
TABLE 237. VALUES REQUIRED IN TESTING IN EACH STEP ....................................................................... 298
TABLE 240. MSE PATTERN PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................... 303
TABLE 241. TTG AND RTG TIMING PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT FOR BS ......................................... 304
TABLE 242. PER REQUIREMENTS FOR RECEPTION OF UL PACKETS. ....................................................... 305
TABLE 243. CQICH ERROR RATE REQUIREMENTS FOR RECEPTION DURING THE FIRST SYMBOLS OF
UL. .................................................................................................................................................................... 305
TABLE 246. NUMBER OF OFDM SYMBOLS IN DL AND UL ........................................................................... 310
TABLE 248. BS RECEIVER SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 3.5 MHZ BANDWIDTH IN AWGN CHANNEL ..... 313
TABLE 249. BS RECEIVER SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 5 MHZ BANDWIDTH IN AWGN CHANNEL ........ 313
TABLE 250. BS RECEIVER SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 7 MHZ BANDWIDTH IN AWGN CHANNEL ....... 313
TABLE 251. BS RECEIVER SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 8.75 MHZ BANDWIDTH IN AWGN CHANNEL .. 314
TABLE 252. BS RECEIVER SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 10 MHZ BANDWIDTH IN AWGN CHANNEL ..... 314
TABLE 253. PARAMETERS FOR SENSITIVITY TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE LIMIT ................................... 314
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xx
TABLE 255. MCS LEVEL AND CHANNEL MODELS OF MSE FOR TEST ...................................................... 316
TABLE 256. TEST BURST ALLOCATION (CTC, PUSC) .................................................................................... 317
TABLE 257. BASIC PARAMETERS FOR BS RECEIVE COLLABORATIVE MIMO (CTC, PUSC) ................ 317
TABLE 258. PICS COVERAGE FOR BS18.2 ........................................................................................................ 317
TABLE 259. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR BS RECEIVE COLLABORATIVE MIMO IN BW 3.5 MHZ
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 320
TABLE 260. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR BS RECEIVE COLLABORATIVE MIMO IN BW 5 MHZ
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 321
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 322
TABLE 262. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR BS RECEIVE COLLABORATIVE MIMO IN BW 8.75 MHZ
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 322
.......................................................................................................................................................................... 323
TABLE 264 REVISION HISTORY FOR BS RECEIVE COLLABORATIVE MIMO BS-18.2 ............................. 324
TABLE 266 PILOT MODULATION TEST RESULTS FOR BS-19.2 .................................................................... 328
TABLE 267 SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR DL PUSC IN AWGN CHANNEL ........................................................ 329
TABLE 268 PARAMETERS FOR FUNCTIONAL TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE LIMIT .................................... 329
TABLE 269 FORMATTING MIMO SIGNAL TEST RESULTS FOR BS-19.2 ..................................................... 330
TABLE 270. ALLOWED RELATIVE CONSTELLATION ERRORS VS. MCS ................................................... 331
TABLE 271 RCE TEST RESULTS FOR MATRIX-A FOR BS-19.2 ..................................................................... 331
TABLE 272 RCE TEST RESULTS FOR MATRIX B FOR BS-19.2 .................................................................... 331
TABLE 273 OUTPUT POWER TEST RESULTS FOR MATRIX-A FOR BS-19.2 ............................................... 332
TABLE 274 OUTPUT POWER TEST RESULTS FOR MATRIX-B FOR BS-19.2 ............................................... 332
TABLE 276. FRAME CONFIGURATION NUMBERS OF TEST PACKETS (PDUS), AND ERROR PACKETS
FOR DIFFERENT BANDWIDTHS. MCS IS ALWAYS QPSK, WITH RATE-1/2 CTC. ............................ 338
TABLE 277. SENSITIVITY LEVEL AT MS EMULATOR FOR DL PUSC IN AWGN CHANNEL ................... 342
TABLE 278. PARAMETERS FOR DEDICATED PILOT IN DL PIUSC STC ZONE FUNCTIONAL TESTS
AND ACCEPTANCE LIMIT ........................................................................................................................... 343
TABLE 279. REVISION HISTORY FOR BS-20.2 ................................................................................................. 344
TABLE 280. PICS COVERAGE FOR BS21.2 ....................................................................................................... 345
TABLE 281. DIVERSITY GAIN ............................................................................................................................. 348
TABLE 282. PARAMETERS FOR TESTS. ............................................................................................................ 349
TABLE 284. PAYLOAD CHARACTERISTICS FOR TEST MESSAGES ........................................................... 351
TABLE 285. PAYLOAD CHARACTERISTICS FOR TEST MESSAGES IN UPLINK TESTS FOR 512-FFT
(BANDWIDTHS OF 3.5MHZ AND 5MHZ) ................................................................................................... 351
TABLE 286. PAYLOAD CHARACTERISTICS FOR TEST MESSAGES IN UPLINK TESTS FOR 1024-FFT
(BANDWIDTHS OF 7, 8.75, AND 10MHZ) ................................................................................................... 352
TABLE 287. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 3.5 MHZ BANDWIDTH.................................................... 353
TABLE 288. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 5 MHZ BANDWIDTH ....................................................... 353
TABLE 289. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 7 MHZ BANDWIDTH ...................................................... 354
TABLE 290. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 8.75 MHZ BANDWIDTH.................................................. 355
TABLE 291. MAX MS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 10 MHZ BANDWIDTH .................................................... 355
TABLE 292. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 3.5 MHZ BANDWIDTH .................................................... 356
TABLE 295. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 8.75 MHZ BANDWIDTH .................................................. 357
TABLE 296. MAX BS SENSITIVITY LEVEL FOR 10 MHZ BANDWIDTH ..................................................... 357
TABLE 297. PARAMETERS FOR QUALITATIVE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE LIMIT ................................ 359
TABLE 299. MS RECEIVED POWER MESAUREMENT REFERENCE ............................................................. 361
TABLE 300. DEFAULT FCH CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................. 362
TABLE 301. DEFAULT NUMBER OF OFDM SYMBOLS IN DL AND UL SUBFRAMES ............................... 362
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - xxi
TABLE 302. DIMENSIONS OF BURST OF INTEREST FOR DEFAULT FRAME STRUCTURE WITH
NORMAL MAP ................................................................................................................................................ 363
TABLE 303. DIMENSIONS OF BURST OF INTEREST FOR DEFAULT FRAME STRUCTURE WITH
COMPRESSED MAP ....................................................................................................................................... 364
TABLE 304. PDP AND SPATIAL CHANNEL MODEL PARAMETERS ............................................................. 369
TABLE 305. MIMO CORRELATION PARAMETERS .......................................................................................... 371
TABLE 306. PDP AND SPATIAL CHANNEL MODEL PARAMETERS FOR LARGE DELAY SPREAD ....... 373
TABLE 307. RAY OFFSET ANGLES WITHIN A TAP, GIVEN FOR 1 RMS ANGLE SPREAD ..................... 374
TABLE 308. PER TAP PARAMETERS FOR PED B CHANNEL USING s ' | FROM TABLE 305 .................. 380
TABLE 309. SAMPLE TEST CENTER FREQUENCIES ....................................................................................... 381

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 1
1. Overview
This document specifies the scope, setup, procedures and conditions of Mobile Radio Conformance Testing of
Mobile Stations and Base Stations to Mobile WiMAX
air interface requirements.

In order to perform the tests listed in this document, specialized test equipment and testing capabilities are required.
These are outlined in Section Appendix 6.

This document specifies the scope, setup, procedures and conditions of WiMAX Forum
radio conformance testing

of Mobile Stations and Base Stations to WiMAX Forum Mobile System Profile and Mobile PICS requirements with
respect to Wave 2 certification.

This document is an amendment to the base WiMAX Forum Mobile Radio Conformance Testing document and
specifies the tests that are required for compliance to Wave 2 mobile certification in addition to those specified in
the base document.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 2
2. Scope
The tests included in this document cover the Radio Frequency and Physical Layer aspects of interoperability and
conformance testing of Mobile Stations and Base Stations to IEEE 802.16-2004 [1] as amended by IEEE 802.16e-
2005 [2] and profiled by Mobile WiMAX
System Profile [4] and PICS [7].

The tests included in this document provide the additional Wave 2 coverage of the Radio Frequency and Physical
Layer aspects of interoperability and conformance testing of Mobile Stations and Base Stations to IEEE 802.16-
2004 [1] as amended by IEEE 802.16e-2005 [2] and P802.16-2004/Cor2/D1 [3] and profiled by WiMAX Forum

Mobile System Profile [4] and PICS [7].

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 3
3. Purpose
These radio conformance testing methodologies and specifications will be used by the WiMAX Forum
designated
certification laboratories to perform the required conformance and interoperability testing to partially achieve
Mobile WiMAX
certification.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 4
4. References
The following documents contain provisions, which through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the
present document. References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number,
etc.) or non-specific. For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply. For non-specific references, the
latest versions apply.

[1] IEEE 802.16-2004: IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Part 16: Air Interface for
Fixed Broadband Wireless Access Systems
[2] IEEE P802.16e-2005: IEEE Standard for Local and metropolitan area networks Part 16: Air Interface for
Fixed and Mobile Broadband Wireless Access Systems Amendment 2: Physical and Medium Access
Control Layers for Combined Fixed and Mobile Operation in Licensed Bands and Corrigendum 1
[3] P802.16-2004/Cor2/D3: Air Interface for Fixed and Mobile Broadband Wireless Access Systems
Corrigendum 2
[4] WiMAX Forum

Mobile System Profile WMF-T23-001-R010v09, WiMAX Forum

Technical Working
Group
[5] WiMAX Forum Mobile Radio Specifications, T23-005-R015v04, WiMAX Forum, Technical Working
Group
[6] MTG Mobile WiMAX System Profile Certification Wave Recommendation v1.0.0, Mobile Task Group,
WiMAX Technical Working Group
[7] WiMAX Forum
Mobile Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) Proforma WMF-T24-

001-R010v07, WiMAX Forum

Technical Working Group
[8] RECOMMENDATION ITU-R M.1225, GUIDELINES FOR EVALUATION OF RADIO
TRANSMISSION, TECHNOLOGIES FOR IMT-2000, 1997

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 5
5. Definitions and abbreviations
5.1 Definitions
For the purposes of the present document, the following terms and definitions apply:

RCT Test System (RCTT): System that connects to the UUT and which is responsible for the initiation,
execution, termination and verdict assignment of the different test cases covered in this document.

Test System Controller: part of the RCTT intended to control, configure and synchronize the different
instruments involved in the test setup and which is responsible for the execution the different test scripts on
the UUT.

Signaling Unit: Part of the test system behaving as the UUT counterpart, intended to provide the necessary
signaling (i.e., protocol) capabilities at the MAC and PHY level to trigger the necessary UUT functions for
all possible test scenarios. This includes but is not limited to:

1. Connection procedures between the Test System and the UUT (burst
2. Allocations, Initial Ranging, service flow establishment, etc.)
3. Power control procedures
4. Remote configuration and reporting mechanisms
5. Invalid behaviour simulation (frequency errors, Round Trip Delay (RTD),
6. NAK signals, etc.)

Vector Signal Analyzer (VSA): part of the RCTT responsible for the advanced signal processing over the
RF signal including but not limited to: time and frequency domain analysis, frequency error measurements,
constellation measurements, etc.

Vector Signal Generator (VSG): part of the RCTT responsible for any additional signal generation in the
test setup (for example, interferer signals)

Power Meter: part of the RCTT responsible for accurate power measurements (this element may be
replaced by the VSA if enough measurement accuracy is ensured)

Reuse 1 (also noted by (1, 1, 3)): pattern implies a RF frequency usage pattern with each cluster
comprising of one BS Site. Each BS Sites have three sectors and all sectors are assigned the same RF
channel.

Reuse 3 (also noted by (1, 3, 3)): pattern implies a RF frequency usage pattern with each cluster
comprising of one BS Site. Each BS Site having three sectors where each of the three sectors is assigned a
unique RF channel.

An "arbitrary" value: is one value selected by the test operator from the set or range of values specified.
The test is only performed with the one selected value unless otherwise stated in the test. The DUT shall be
capable of fulfilling the requirements of the test for each value in the the set or range of values specified.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 6
A "random" value: is a value selected with equal probability from the set or range of values specified. For
each occasion of usage a new value is selected.

5.2 Abbreviations
For the purposes of the present document, the following abbreviations apply:

BER Bit Error Rate
BI Invalid Behavior
BO Inopportune Behavior
BS Base Station
BSE Base Station Emulator
BV Valid Behavior
BWR Bandwidth Request
CA Capability
CINR Carrier to Interference plus Noise Ratio
CP Cyclic Prefix
CQI Channel Quality Information
CQICH Channel Quality Information Channel
CS Channel Spacing
CTC Convolutional Turbo Code
DL Down Link
EVM Error Vector Magnitude
FA Frequency Allocation
HO HandOver
MAC Media Access Control
MRC Maximal Ratio Combining
MS Mobile Station
MSE Mobile Station Emulator
NF Noise Figure
OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Domain Multiplexing
PCINR Physical CINR
PER Packet Error Ratio
PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PUSC Partially Usage of Sub channels
RF Radio frequency
RMS Root Mean Squared
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 7
RTD Round Trip Delay
TLV Type Length Value
TP Test Purpose
TSS Test Suite Structure
UL Up Link
UUT Unit Under Test
VSA Vector Signal Analyzer

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 8
6. Measurement system
6.1 General requirements
The general block diagram, naming the test interfaces, is shown in Figure 1. The block diagram
describes the main system components and interfaces conceptually, without specifying the
implementation. The manufacturer shall make the signals in the listed interfaces available during
testing for measurements. In the figure, the following abbreviations are used:
A: Antenna interface
M: MAC interface
When the antenna interface is not accessible for conducted testing, the vendor may supply an antenna coupler for the
interface. In this case, the vendor shall be responsible to calibrate and certify the coupler loss and frequency
characteristics.
Some test procedures assume that the counterpart for the UUT, denoted Signaling Unit (BSE), Signaling Unit
(MSE) or Tester, has some additional features not mandated by [1], [2] and [4]. These features are solely there to
aid the test procedures. Typical tester functions are: capability to eject gating signals for the measurement
instruments, special software for requesting a special behavior of the UUT. The Tester also has significantly better
and known output signal quality than the UUT. The requirements of the Signaling Unit (MSE) and the Signaling
Unit (BSE) are outlined in Appendix 6.

The diagram in Figure 1 is bi-directional and assumes functioning paths in both the downlink and uplink.

Figure 1. a) General Interface Diagram for MS UUT b) General Interface Diagram for BS UUT
6.2 Test condition declarations
All conformance tests shall be carried out in normal environmental conditions. These are outlined in
Table 1. It is recognized that all requirements given in the standard are relevant for all combinations of
MSE
MAC PHY-BB PHY-RF
BS UUT
A
BS
A
SS

PHY-RF PHY-BB MAC
MS UUT
BSE
A
BS
A
SS

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 9
temperature and humidity of the chosen climatic class. However, some tests may be carried out only
in environmental reference conditions for reasons of practicality and convenience.
Table 1. Condition Summary
Parameter Test Condition Limits
Test Temperature Between +15C and +30C
Test Relative Humidity Between 45 % and 75 %

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 10
7. Conformance Tests
Table 2 lists the radio conformance tests and the sections in which they appear in the WiMAX Forum

Mobile PICS
[7] and System Profile [4].

Table 2 Radio Conformance Tests
RCT Reference Test Status
Capability for Mobile Station Receiver
MS-01.1 MS Receiver Maximum Tolerable Signal Complete
MS-02.1 MS Receiver Preambles Complete
MS-02.2 MS Receiver Preambles Complete
MS-03.1 MS Receiver Cyclic Prefix Merged
MS-04.1 MS Receiver RSSI Measurements Complete
MS-05.1 MS Receiver PCINR Measurements Complete
MS-06.2 MS Receiver Pilot-based ECINR Measurement Complete

MS-07.1 MS Receiver Adjacent and Non-Adjacent Channel Rejection Complete
MS-08.1 MS Receiver Maximum Input Signal Complete
MS-09.1 MS Receiver Sensitivity Complete
MS-11.1 MS Receiver PHY Support for Handoff Complete
MS-11.2 MS Receiver PHY Support for Handoff Complete
MS-22.2 MS Receiver MIMO Processing Complete
MS-23.2 MS Receive Beamforming Processing Complete
Capability for Mobile Station Transmitter
MS-12.1 MS Transmitter Modulation and Coding, Cyclic Prefix and Frame Duration
Timing
Complete
MS-13.1 MS Transmit Ranging Support Complete
MS-14.1 MS Transmitter Modulation and Coding Merged
MS-15.1 MS Transmit Power Dynamic Range Complete
MS-16.1 MS Transmit Closed and Open Loop Power Control Complete
MS-17.1 MS Transmitter Spectral Flatness Complete
MS-18.1 MS Transmitter Relative Constellation Error Complete
MS-19.1 MS Transmit Synchronization Complete
MS-24.2 MS Transmit Collaborative MIMO Complete

MS-25.2 MS Transmit Beamforming Support Complete
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 11

Capability for Mobile Station, Receiver/Transmitter and Performance
MS-10.1 MS Receive and Transmit HARQ Complete
MS-20.1 MS Transmit / Receive Switching Gap Complete
MS-21.2 MS AMC Receive and Transmit Operation Complete
Capability for Base Station Receiver
BS-01.1 BS Receiver Maximum Tolerable Signal Complete
BS-02.1 BS Receiver Cyclic Prefix Merged
BS-03.1 BS Receive Ranging Support Complete
BS-04.1 BS Receive Adjacent and Non-Adjacent Channel Rejection Complete
BS-05.1 BS Receiver Maximum Input Signal Complete
BS-06.1 BS Receiver Sensitivity Complete
BS-18.2 BS Receive Collaborative MIMO Complete
BS-21.2 BS Receiver Beamforming Processing Complete
Capability for Base Station Transmitter
BS-07.1 BS Transmitter Modulation and Coding Complete
BS-08.1 BS Transmitter Cyclic Prefix, Symbol Timing, and Frame Duration
Timing
Complete
BS-09.1 BS Transmitter Preambles Complete
BS-10.1 BS Transmitter Power Range Complete
BS-11.1 BS Transmitter Spectral Flatness Complete
BS-12.1 BS Transmitter Relative Constellation Error Complete
BS-19.2 BS Transmitter MIMO Processing Complete
BS-20.2 BS Transmitter Beamforming Complete
Capability for Base Station, Receiver/Transmitter and Performance
BS-13a.1 BS Synchronization Complete
BS-13b.1 BS Network synchronization
BS-14.1 BS Receive and Transmit HARQ Complete
BS-15.1 BS to Neighbor BS Synchronization in frequency Merged
BS-16.1 BS Receive/Transmit Switching Gaps Complete
BS-17.2 BS AMC Receive and Transmit Operation Complete

1. m: Mandatory test.
2. o: Optional test.
3. c: Conditional test.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 12
8. Test Procedures

8.1 General statement for all tests

1. Test procedures are provided below for all mandatory tests.
2. In any test the losses for all RF elements will be considered and compensated for. This procedure will be
called setup calibration.
3. If used, the Packet Generator is configured accordingly to the message(s) sent, the type of modulation used
and the data packet rate specified in the test procedure.
4. The measurement uncertainty for all RF level based measurements should be added to the tolerance for
absolute power measurements.
5. With the exception of the tests that test the ranging parameter, initial ranging should be completed, prior to
a measurement being recorded.
6. The meaning of the words "receives data correctly", as stated in the test procedures, is defined in Appendix
3.
7. In the case that PER measurements is required in a test, the following guidelines shall be followed.
- For Wave 1 certification, either Ping or ACK/NACK based methods (Refer to Appendix 3) can be
used based on vendor declaration. For Wave 2 certification, PER measurement shall be performed
based on ACK/NACK method.

Where there is a measurement uncertainty, this shall be declared by the test facility and be traceable. The tests
for which a measurement uncertainty is applicable shall have it stated in the test setup description of the test.

In order to perform this test, the UUT has to provide the necessary configuration interface to the Test Facility in
order to:

1. Modify the modulation and coding rates
2. Modify UL MAP and DL MAP as needed for the corresponding tests
3. Modify any applicable HARQ parameter as needed by corresponding tests. Examples are: UCD TLV,
ACIDs scheduling, maximum number of retransmissions etc.
4. Configure the preambles on the BS UUT.
5. Modify and set ID_cell and Perm_Base.

The equipment vendor shall be responsible for providing the necessary Man to Machine Interface (MMI) to the
Test Facility in order for the tests to be carried on.

[Test Lab to provide recommendation (based on their knowledge of test equipment capabilities) on uncertainty
requirements for various tests some time before Wave 1 certifications so that TWG can revisit the related
contents in the RCT doc.]

8.2 General statement for all test setups
1. Test setup for each test is abstract representation to execute test procedures described in each section
accordingly.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 13
2. Test labs detailing of test setup can be done to make sure that the test setup supports feasible execution,
provided that they are consistent with overall test procedures and measurement accuracy requirements
described in each test.
3. If any item in each test setup is not needed for a specific test case, then it will not be used.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 14
9. Test for Mobile Station
9.1 Test procedures
A test code of format XX-nn.m is assigned to all tests where XX is either MS for Mobile Station or Bs for Base
Station, nn is a number assigned to the test and m is 1 for Wave 1 tests and 2 for Wave 2 tests.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 15
9.1.1 MS-01.1: MS Receiver Maximum Tolerable Signal
This test verifies that the UUT can tolerate the required maximum input signal with no damage.
9.1.1.1 Introduction
The MS is required to tolerate a co-channel OFDM signal at 0dBm and still recover and operate
correctly when the co-channel is removed.
9.1.1.2 PICS coverage and test purposes
The following PICS items are covered by this test.
Table 3. PICS Coverage for MS01.1
Item Reference Item and Section
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Cyclic Prefix
A.5.1.1.1.2
T I

9.1.1.3 Testing requirements
This test requires the MS has successfully established a link with the Signaling Unit (BSE) using
QPSK3/4 DL and all sub-channels.
9.1.1.4 Test setup
Figure 2shows the test setup for testing the MS receiver maximum tolerable signal.

Figure 2. Test Setup for MS Receiver Maximum Tolerable Signal Test.

Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter

MS UUT
ABS
Attenuator
AMS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 16
9.1.1.5 Test procedure
Initial Conditions:
Step 1. Create and activate a DL service flow.

Procedure:
Step 1. Set the level into the MS receiver to the minimum sensitivity level as described by
Appendix 1.
Step 2. Perform a PER measurement as described by Appendix 3.
Step 3. Increase the RF power at the UUT input port in steps of 10 dB until the level into the MS
receiver is 0 dBm. The value of the last step is S
min
+ -S
min
/10 x10 dBm where S
min
is the
relevant min sensitivity number from Appendix 3.
Step 4. Wait for one minute.
Step 5. Set the level into the MS receiver to the minimum sensitivity level as described by
Appendix 1.
Step 6. Wait for one minute for MS to do network entry.
Step 7. Create and activate a DL service flow.
Step 8. Perform a PER measurement as described by Appendix 3.
Step 9. End of test.

9.1.1.6 Compliance requirements
Pass verdict:
a) The MS successfully acquires the downlink in Step 6
b) The PER measurements in Step 2 and Step 8 pass the minimum sensitivity requirement.

Fail verdict:
a) The MS does not acquire the downlink in Step 6, or
b) The PER measurement in Step 8 fails the minimum sensitivity requirement.

Inconclusive:
a) The PER measurement in Step 2 fails the minimum sensitivity requirement.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 17
9.1.2 MS-02.1: MS receiver preamble
The purpose of this test is to verify MS reception functionality and processing of preambles in DL sub-frame.

This test shall verify the ability of the MS to correctly sync and receive all types of preambles, cell and
segments ID, and to decode the preamble in minimal time.
There are 114 values of preambles that can be used by a BS (Tables 309a and 309b of [2]). Moreover, each
BS transmits the preamble on one of three carrier sets, consisting in one third of the used subcarriers as
given by Equation 109 [1]. Each carrier set shall carry the preamble corresponding to the segment of the
same numbering (for instance, carrier set 0 shall carry preamble defined for segment 0); hence, each of the
three carrier sets can carry one third of the preamble values.
We propose to verify that the terminal is able to decode the 114 possible configurations for the preambles.
This is indirectly verified by the correct decoding of bursts in the DL frame.

Table 4. System Profile Coverage for MS-02.1
Number in WiMAX Forum
Mobile System Profile [4]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Section 4.1.8.5, Table 42,
Preamble Modulation
T I

Target BSE and interferer BS shall be capable of transmitting using all 114 preamble types as specified in
Tables 309a and 309b of [2].

9.1.2.4 Test setup
Figure 3 shows the test setup for testing the MS receiver preamble parameters.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 18

Figure 3. Test Setup for MS Receiver Preambles Test.

9.1.2.5.1 Decoding preamble with all defined cell IDs and all segments

Initial Conditions:
Step 1. Set the RF center frequency to the mid value as specified in Appendix 5.
Step 2. It is allowed to direct MS to scan only this mid center frequency.
Step 3. Set the received signal level at A
MS
to be 10dB higher than the sensitivity level required (as
specified in Appendix 1) for 16QAM-1/2 CTC and the channel bandwidth under test.
Step 4. Prepare the setup for Preamble Index 0 with CP = 1/8.
Step 5. Default packets as specified in Appendix 2 are sent, continuously, one packet per burst per frame.
Step 6. Wait for 5 sec (1000 frames are transmitted) before actual test started (for every new preamble)
to enable MS to detect and synchronize to preamble.

Test Procedure:
Step 1. Make the BSE send one correct configuration of preamble (value and subcarrier sets) according
to Initial Conditions and allocates one packet per frame
Step 2. Wait up to for 1 minute to complete the MS initial ranging.
Step 3. Register within the test system whether the MS has completed the ranging successfully or not.
Step 4. Make the BSE change the preamble for all 114 possible configurations.

9.1.2.5.2 Decoding preambles while more than a single BS is transmitting
Add BS interferer, time synchronized with target BSE via wired connection, using a preamble
index of

mod (preamble_index_BSE, 32) + 32*mod(segment_BSE+1,3)
Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter

MS UUT
AMS/BS
Attenuator
ABS/MS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 19

for each case and combine its output -10dB lower to the target BS output. Repeat test
9.1.2.5.1with the new setup.

The MS shall successfully complete the ranging process before the 1 min time allowance.

1.- Pass verdict:
a.- The MS correctly completes the ranging process for all possible 114 preamble configurations for
both scenarios (with and without interference BS)

2.- Fail verdict:
a.- The MS DOES NOT correctly complete the ranging process for at least one of the possible 114
preamble configurations for both scenarios (with and without interference BS
Table 5. Compliance Table for MS-02.1
Preamble Index Pass (Single BS) Fail
(Single BS)
Pass
(Target and
Interfering (BS)
Fail
(Target and
Interfering (BS)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 20
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 21
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 22
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113

9.1.2.7 Uncertainties
9.1.2.8 Revision history
Table 6. Revision History for MS-02.1
Version Date Author/Editor Comment
0.0.1 2006-05-07 Laith Naaman Initial draft

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 23
0.2 2006-05-26 Laith Naaman Revised draft
0.3 2006-08-22 Paul Bazzaz New version after comment submitted by
Nextwave,

0.4 2006-08-24 Hassan Yaghoobi Further modified during the Aug FtF.
0.5 2006-09-04 Benny Getz and Hassan
Yaghoobi
- Proposed changes to Compliance Table,
- Add two test cases 1) Multiple BS 2)
Synching on a new preamble,
0.6 and 0.7 Hassan Yaghoobi Real time comment resolution changes applied.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 24
9.1.3 MS-02.2: MS receiver preamble

1) Test center frequency at lower and upper part of the band
2) Change figure 3 so that the VSA and VSG are after the attenuator.
3) Clarify Pass/fail criteria of MS-02.1

This test shall verify the ability of the MS to correctly sync and receive all types of preambles, cell and
segments ID, and to decode the preamble in minimal time when the RF channel is at low and high portion
of spectrum for various Band Classes as specified in Table 170, Appendix 5.

No additional PICS coverage beyond what is specified in MS-02.1.

No additional testing requirements beyond what is specified in MS-02.1.

9.1.3.4 Test setup
Figure 3 shows the test setup for testing the MS receiver preamble parameters.

Figure 4. Test Setup for MS Receiver Preambles Test.

Signaling
Unit
(BSE)

MS UUT
A
MS/BS

Attenuator
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter

ABS/MS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 25
9.1.3.5.1 Decoding preamble with all defined cell IDs and all segments
Repeat tests of Section 9.1.2.5.1 by modifying initial conditions to attain low and high values of RF center
frequencies as specified in Appendix 5.

9.1.3.5.2 Decoding preambles while more than a single BS is transmitting
Repeat tests of Section 9.1.2.5.2 by modifying initial conditions to attain low and high values of RF center
frequencies as specified in Appendix 5.

The MS shall successfully complete the ranging process before the 1 min time allowance.

1.- Pass verdict:
a.- The MS correctly completes the register request process for all possible 114 preamble configurations
for both scenarios (with and without interference BS). This means that BSE successfully receives REG-
REQ message from MS UUT.

2.- Fail verdict:
a.- The MS DOES NOT correctly complete the register request process for at least one of the possible
114 preamble configurations for both scenarios (with and without interference BS). This means that BSE
does not receive REG-REQ message from MS UUT.

No additional Uncertainties beyond what is specified in MS-02.1.

0.1.0 2007-04-15 Hassan Yaghoobi Initial draft

9.1.4 MS-03.1: Reserved
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 26
9.1.5 MS-04.1: MS receiver RSSI measurements
The purpose of this test is to verify that the MS receiver, when requested by the BS to report the RSSI
measurement, can meet the accuracy requirement defined in IEEE802.16-2004, IEEE802.16e-2005, and the
Mobile System Profile. Such a requirement is expected to be satisfied for the entire RSSI range and under
typical channel/interference conditions.

A BS could request the RSSI measurement from a MS via REP-REQ and the MS shall report it via
REP-RSP. In the REP-RSP message, the RSSI report shall follow the TLV encoding format with a
type value of 1.6 and a length of 2 bytes (one byte for the mean and one for standard deviation).

Section 8.4.11.2 (RSSI mean and standard deviation) of IEEE802.16e-2005 specifies the
quantization rule if RSSI is reported via REP-RSP messages:
Mean and standard deviation statistics shall be reported in units of dBm and dB, respectively. To
prepare such reports, statistics shall be quantized in 1 dB increments, ranging from 40 dBm
(encoded 0x53) to 123 dBm (encoded 0x00). Values outside this range shall be assigned the
closest extreme value within the scale.
The message time index is incremented every frame. The reported RSSI value shall be an
estimate of the total received power of the frame preamble of the segment of the connected BS.

Section 8.4.11.2 of IEEE 802.16-2004 further states:
The method used to estimate the RSSI of a single message is left to individual implementation,
but the relative accuracy of a single signal measurement, taken from a single message, shall be
+/- 2dB, with an absolute accuracy of +/-4dB. This shall be the case over the entire range of input
RSSIs.

Also during handover related RSSI reporting, a BS may request a scan report including RSSI
measurement from a MS via MOB_SCN-RSP, and the MS shall transmit a MOB_SCN-REP message
constructed according to the requests indicated in the MOB_SCN-RSP. A different range and
quantization are specified in Section 6.3.2.3.50 (Scanning Result Report (MOB_SCN-REP)
message) and 6.3.2.3.53 (MS HO Request (MOB_MSHO-REQ) message) of IEEE802.16e-2005:
The BS RSSI mean parameter indicates the Received Signal Strength measured by the MS from
the particular BS. The value shall be interpreted as an unsigned byte with units of 0.25 dB, such
that 0x00 is interpreted as 103.75 dBm, an MS shall be able to report values in the range
103.75 dBm to 40 dBm. The measurement shall be performed on the frame preamble and
averaged over the measurement period.

The RSSI measurement in both cases should be the received power from only the particular BS that
transmits its preamble from its associated segment.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 27
Table 8. PICS Coverage for MS-04.1
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.13, Table A.33: RSSI
Measurement
T D
2. A. 5.1.1.2.2.11 Table
A.104:HO/Scan/Report Trigger
Metrics(Mobile Station), Item
2
P I
3. A. 5.1.2.2.2.10. Table A.
214:HO/Scan/Report Trigger
Metrics (Base Station), Item 2
P I
4. A.7.1.12 Table A.328:REP-
RSP TLV for report, Item 2
T D

The testing requirements include:
1. The Test BS should support the REP-REQ/REP-RSP messages.
2. The tester should be able to adjust the received power from both the serving BS and the
neighboring BS to their appropriate levels, respectively. The power should be the average
only during the preamble. Measurement of the preamble power may be needed for setting the
power level. In this case, a time triggered measurement is needed. This can be achieved either
using an RF rise triggering, or using an external trigger signal from the tester. The latter may
be more reliable.
3. Even though the RSSI measurement is based on preamble, the transmit BS signal should still
reflect the normal operation condition to avoid MS mis-behaving. Refer to the default frame
structure in Appendix 2.
4. Both the serving and neighboring BSs should be synchronized in time (symbol and frame)
and in carrier frequency.
5. HO trigger condition: The Trigger TLV included in DCD shall be set as follows. (Tables 358a
and 358b in IEEE 802.16e)
Type = 0x0 (CINR metric)
Function = 0x6 (Metric of serving BS less than absolute value)
Action = 0x2 (Respond on trigger with MOB_MSHO_REQ)
Value=0xA8 (=-20dB)
Averaging duration=0x10 (=16frames)

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 28
9.1.5.4 Test setup
Figure 5 shows the test setup for RSSI test.

Attenuator 2
Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
MS UUT
ABS
Attenuator 1
AMS

+
Interference
Source
Combiner
Attenuator 3

Figure 5. Test Setup for RSSI Test.

Two test scenarios are specified to reflect the two typical operation conditions. Scenario-1 is the case when
there is negligible interference on the segment of the desired BS, and scenario-2 is the case when there is
non-negligible interference, typically from nearest neighbors. In the latter case, the RSSI measurement
should correspond to that of the segment of the connected or the particular BS, as required by the standard.

All DL bursts (DL-MAP, UL-MAP, bursts containing DCD, UCD, network entry related messages, REP-
REQ, etc.) should use QPSK with repetition 6 to ensure reliable demodulation by the MS DUT. (Note
that FCH is always transmitted using repetition 4, which cannot be changed.)

Scenario-1: No interference on desired segment

In this case, the interference BS illustrated in Figure 5 is absent. The serving BS preamble are determined
as segment ID=0 and cell ID=0.

Test procedure:
- Set the test center frequency to middle channel of declared band class according to Appendix 5.
- MS power on and perform network entry. Perform a series of BS/MS message exchange to enter
the operation condition of BS transmitting REP-REQ and MS transmit REP-RSP.
- For each RSSI test points in Table 9(see Note 1), set the signal power level at A
Ms
is at the level
specified according to the table.
- Signaling Unit (BSE) requests RSSI of the desired BS via REP-REQ issued at an interval of 60
frames (see Note 2).
- Record the RSSI feedbacks in REP-RSP as responses to REP-REQ
- Record 200 reports for each test point
- Repeat the test procedure for the low, and high channel of the declared Band Class.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 29
Table 9. RSSI test points and levels (scenario-1)
Test points RSSI test levels (dBm)
1 -40
2 -50
3 -60
4 -70
5 -80
6 -90

Note 1 RSSI test range and test points:
In the REP-RSP message, the RSSI report is quantized to 1dB for a range between -40 to -123
dBm. However, for the most robust MCS (QPSK rate-1/2 repetition-6), a RSSI lower bound of -
100.8dBm is needed for AWGN channel (assuming 8dB NF and no implementation loss) for a
10MHz receiver. Given the preamble is boosted by 4.23dB relative to data, the corresponding
RSSI during preamble will be around -96dBm (10MHz) and -99dBm (5MHz). Considering a
maximum of 5dB implementation loss allowed for sensitivity, the test uses -90dBm as the lowest
RSSI test point.
When an MS is tested as described in Appendix 2, Option 2 (single channel connected to dual
antenna), the maximum RSSI test point shall be set to -43 dBm.

Note 2 Time interval allowed between two reports:
With an averaging factor of 1/16 chosen to reflect desired RSSI averaging in typical operation,
instantaneous measurement older than 60 frames has only a contributing weight of 0.02.

Scenario-2: Single interfering BS (same segment ID, different cell ID)

In this case, the interference BS illustrated in Figure 5 is active. The serving BS preamble sequence is kept
the same (i.e., segment ID=0 and cell ID=0), and the neighboring BSs preamble is determined by a
segment ID of 0 and a different cell ID (cell ID=10). The interfering BS is required to be synchronized in
time (both symbol and frame) and in carrier frequency.

Test procedure:
- Set the test center frequency to middle channel of declared band class according to Appendix 5.
- Set the desired BS signal power level at the first test level in Table 10. With the neighboring BS
off, power on the MS and perform network entry. Perform a series of BS/MS message exchange
to enter the operation condition of BS transmitting REP-REQ and MS transmit REP-RSP.
- Tester requests RSSI of the desired BS via REP-REQ at an interval of 60 frames
- Record 200 RSSI reports. Compute the mean "RSSI_no_int".
- Turn on the neighboring BS and adjust its signal level to the three corresponding test levels in
Table 15 (see Note 3).
- Record 200 RSSI reports. Compute the mean "RSSI_int".
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 30
- Repeat above steps for other two power levels in Table 10.
- Repeat the test procedure for the low, and high channel of the declared Band Class.

Table 10. RSSI test points and levels (scenario-2)
Test points RSSI levels in dBm
(desired BS)
RSSI levels in dBm
(neighboring BS)
1 -70 -70
2 -80 -80
3 -90 -90

Note 3 The interference from the neighboring co-segment BS becomes more and more significant as
the mobile moves toward the cell edge. It is possible during handover that the RSSI of a neighboring
BS is equal to that of the desired BS. The test will verify that the MS estimates the RSSI from the
particular BS, not for example the total signal power.


The test verdict will be set as follows (example):
1.- pass :
a.- In scenario 1, all RSSI measurements taken should be within +/-4dB of the expected RSSI, and
b.- In scenario 1, the RMS error is lower or equal than 2dB, and
c.- In scenario 2, the difference (RSSI_no_int - RSSI_int) is lower or equal than 2dB

2.- fail verdict if any the following conditions are verified:
a.- In scenario 1, at least one of the RSSI measurements taken are bigger than +/-4dB of the
expected RSSI, or
b.- In scenario 1, the RMS error is higher than 2dB, or
c.- In scenario 2, the difference (RSSI_no_int - RSSI_int) is higher than 2dB

3.- inconclusive verdict if any the following conditions are verified:
a.- The initial condition cannot be achieved for any scenario, or
b.- A connection cannot be established between the tester and the UUT

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 31
0.1 2006-5-8 Jeff Zhuang Initial draft
0.2 2006-6-16 Jeff Zhuang Second draft
0.3 2006-8-16 Jeff Zhuang Third draft to incorporate comments from Intel,
Sequans, Agilent, Cetecom, and NextWave.
0.4 2006-8-28 Jeff Zhuang Incorporated consensus reached at the August F2F
ad-hoc comments

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 32
9.1.6 MS-05.1: MS receiver Physical CINR measurements
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of MS CINR measurements and reports. This test describes the tests
for CINR for the serving base station (SBS).

PCINR measurements are impacted by the receiver types due to different interference handling (e.g. MRC,
interference cancellation etc.). The test are designed such that MS with advanced capabilities e.g. - multiple
antenna receivers - are allowed to have better performance than basic standard compliant receivers without being
penalized by the test.
So, for the multiple antenna receivers, the vendor to select one of the two configurations:
1) Single channel connected to a single antenna
2) Single channel connected to dual antenna through splitter or alternatively through totwo equal channels
PCINR for SBS consists of several parts:
1) Instantaneous CINR calculation
2) Measurement is not averaged (Alpha = 1)
3) Measurement reporting in CQICH or REP-RSP
Test average CINR values:
The average CINR values shall be set to the target CINR for the different supported MCS levels, then well use that
baseline number, and adopt the values per the test set up to compensate for the fading etc.

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1.

A.5.1.1.1.13, table A.32, item 1
: Physical CINR measurement
from the preamble for
frequency reuse==1
F D
2. A.5.1.1.1.13, table A.32, item 2
frequency reuse==3
F D
3. A.5.1.1.1.13, table A.32, item 3
for a permutation zone from
pilot subcarriers
F D
4. A.5.1.1.1.17, table A.49, item 2
: Maximum number of
concurrent CINR measurement
processes = 2

P (just use the CQI
report capability)
I
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 33

All of the below tests require the MS to be receiving DL frames and bursts. The DL attenuation should
be aligned with the specified noise and interference to generate appropriate CINR appropriate for the
supported modulations (QPSK, 16-QAM, 64QAM).
Preamble PCINR: -
1. During the test the BSE shall assign a CQICH allocation with alpha = 1 to the MS and shall transmit
DL traffic to the MS in every frame.
2. Absolute accuracy is defined as D(i) = reported_dB(i) real_dB(i) per ensemble of measurements for
a given input average CINR
3. Relative accuracy is defined as E(i) = D(i) mean[D(i)] per ensemble of measurements for a given
input average CINR
4. Pass/Fail criterion recommendations are as follows:
Absolute CINR:
( )
min
10
10
1 10 log 10 1 [ ] 1
CINR D
dB QE mean D k dB QE
| |
+ s s + +
|
\ .

Relative CINR:
( ) Pr(| [ ] [ ] | 1 ) 70% D k mean D k dB QE s + + >
Where QE=0.5dB (quantization error), D
min
=30dB, Pr is empirical probability
5. PCINR accuracy of 1dB accuracy is evaluated over time: The tester collects all the MS measurement
reports during the duration of the test then validate that the mean report is within the required range as
above for the absolute CINR test and all reports were within 70% confidence for the relative CINR
test.
6. The average CINR range is as follows with step 5 dB
Table 13. CINR test ranges
Min Max
Reuse 1 -3dB 23dB
Reuse 3 +2dB 25dB

7. Channel test is performed for PedB 3km/h and VehA 60km/h respectively.
8. HO trigger condition:
a. The Trigger TLV included in DCD shall be set as follows. (Tables 358a and 358b in
IEEE 802.16e)
b. Type = 0x0 (CINR metric)
c. Function = 0x6 (Metric of serving BS less than absolute value)
d. Action = 0x2 (Respond on trigger with MOB_MSHO_REQ)
e. Value=0xA8 (=-20dB)
f. Averaging duration=0x10 (=16frames)

Pilot CINR: -
1. to use same accuracy requirements of the preamble CINR.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 34
9.1.6.4 Test setup
MS
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r
ToSource
Rx
Interfering Source 2
Fader
Fader
Sgnaling Unit (BSE)
Fader
Fader

Figure 6. Test configurations for the CINR test

Tests are performed for fading channels with interfering cells of a few cases

Test cases 1: preamble-based PCINR measurement (reuse-1 and reuse-3)
The scenarios for interfering cells are as follows:
Table 14: CINR test points for preamble/pilot-based PCINR
Average power of serving and interfering BS at MS antenna port [dBm] Average CINR
(informative)
Scen-
ario #
Signaling
Unit (BSE)
Serving BS
(segment 1) [dBm]
Interfering Source
2 (segment 2)
[dBm]
(segment 0 = MS
segment) [dBm]
Avg CINR
reuse 3
[dB]
Avg
CINR
reuse 1
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 35
[dBm] [dB]
1 -60 -62 -62 -62 2 -2.8
2 -60 -66 -70 -68 8 2.9
3 -60 -72 -76 -74 14 8.9
4 -60 -78 -82 -80 20 14.9
5 -60 -83 -87 -85 25 19.9
6 -60 -88 OFF -85 25 23.2

Initial Conditions:
Step 1. Turn on the BSE and Interfering Sources
Step 2. The Signaling Unit (BSE, serving BS) transmits via an independent timing-variant fading channel
(PedB3) with preambles segment ID=0 (preamble index= 0, single PUSC zone with reuse 3
configuration for both reuse 1 and reuse 3 CINR test, MAPs in lowest MCS, i.e. CTC QPSK 1/2,
CINR on MAPs is guaranteed to be > 2dB, EVM on preamble should be >> D
min,
). For 5 MHz
channel bandwidth, rep 2 is used. For all other bandwidth sizes, rep 6 is used.
Step 3. Interfering Source 1 (interfering BS) transmits via an independent timing-variant fading channel with
(PedB3) preambles segment ID=1 (preamble index= 33, same frame structure as BSE)
Step 4. Interfering Source2 (interfering BS) transmits via an independent timing-variant fading channel
(PedB3) with preambles segment ID=2 (preamble index= 65, same frame structure as BSE)
Step 5. Interfering Source3 (interfering BS) transmits via an independent timing-variant fading channel
(PedB3) with preambles segment ID=0 (preamble index= 9, same frame structure as BSE)
Step 6. Interfering Sources 1, 2 and 3 shall be synchronized in time and carrier frequency with Signaling
Unit (BSE).
Step 7. Configure the attenuators so that the average powers at the MS antenna input are according to Table
14. Note: the power of each source can be measured at the combiner input and the combiner loss can
be compensated, and there is no requirement on the accuracy of such compensation, as long as the
ratio between the signals is maintained as in Table 14.
Step 8. After preamble, the BSs all use 2 major groups
Step 9. Configure the MS UUT to use no averaging (i.e., alpha=1) and CQI feedback per frame
Step 10. The Signaling Unit (BSE) receiver (connected to the UUT transmit antenna) should receive the CQI
reports and report to the test utility synchronized to frame numbers. The BSE receiver should also be
able to detect a case that the MS failed to transmit CQI in a certain frame (e.g. by power
measurement on the CQI) and mark the report as invalid.
Test Procedure:
Step 11. Turn off the interfering sources first. Then turn on the MS UUT and let it settle for a few seconds.
The serving BS broadcasts DCD with the Trigger TLV as given in Item h of Testing requirements.
Step 12. After the MS UUT completes the initial entry to the serving BSE, turn on the interfering sources. For
each scenario specified in Table 14 set the power levels according to the table.
Step 13. After setting the power levels, let the UUT settle for few seconds.
Step 14. The following steps are repeated for reuse 1 and reuse 3 reporting. The differences are in the type of
measurement requested from the MS, and the way of calculating the true CINR.
- Request via CQI_alloc_IE the preamble-based PCINR for reuse-1 or reuse 3. Request per-frame
update.
- Record the quantized SINR feedback for each frame
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 36
- Record also the per-frame instantaneous fading channel gain for all BSs channels during each
preamble, in order to compute the instantaneous CINR. The true CINR (which is actually the true
C/I) is the instantaneous power of the preamble symbol transmitted by the serving BS, divided by:
for reuse 1: The sum of the instantaneous power of the preamble symbol transmitted by
the interfering Source
for reuse 3: The power of interfering Source 3 (which uses the same segment as the
serving BS)
- Continue the test until at least 1000 measurements are collected (~5 seconds)
- Assuming 1 frame CQI feedback delay, compare the SINR feedback received at frame-n relative
to the true instantaneous CINR at frame-n-1 according to the procedure specified below:
Collect all measurements for which
1. True_CINR_dB is within the range specified in Table 13.
2. CQI channel is correctly decoded (i.e. reported_CINR_dB(i+reportDelay) was
reported and received by the BS receiver)
Calcualte: D[k] = reported_CINR_dB(k + reportDelay) true_CINR_dB(k)
Calculate the average of D[k] over ensemble of measurements for a given input average
CINR
Check absolute accuracy criterion:
( )
min
10
10
1 10 log 10 1 [ ] 1
CINR D
| |
+ s s + +
|
\ .

Check relative accuracy criterion:
( ) Pr(| [ ] [ ] | 1 ) 70% D k mean D k dB QE s + + >

min
=30dB, Pr is empirical probability over the
ensemble of measurements.

Step 15. Repeat the test for the next scenarios illustrated in the Table 14above.
Step 16. Repeat the test above with the change of fading channel into VehA60.

Test cases 2: Pilot-based PCINR measurement (reuse-1 and 3 with PUSC)
Note: Reuse 3 test case is only applicable to channel bandwidth of larger than 5 MHz.
Similar test setup and procedure can be applied for pilot-based PCINR measurement.

Step 1. Follow the test procedure for preamble-based PCINR measurement (case 1) except the changes of
Use reuse 1 configuration for PUSC reuse 1 pilot CINR test and reuse 3 configuration for PUSC
reuse 3 pilot CINR test. For reuse 1 CINR test, scenario #1 should not be tested.
Use rep=2 for BW = 5MHz and rep= 6 for BW > 5MHz
The PUSC pilot CINR test will use two zones (default PUSC +PUSC) with reuse of 1 or 3
depending on the test scenario.
For second zone (CINR test zone): (1) the PermBase are set to the same values as ID_Cell
obtained from preamble index of each BSE and interfering BSs. (2) PRBS_ID are set to
mod(Segment Number-1, 3) for each BSE and interfering BSs.
To compute the instantaneous CINR, the following power measures are measured at the output
of channels.. The true CINR (which is actually the true C/I) is the total power from the symbols
within the test zone transmitted by the serving BS in PUSC zone, divided by :
o for reuse 1, PUSC: The sum of the total power from the symbols within the test zone
transmitted by the interfering Source in PUSC zone
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 37
o for reuse 3, PUSC: The total power from symbols within the test zone tramsmitted by
interfering Source 3 (which uses the same segment as the serving BS)
All slots in the test zone should not have any burst allocation for all BSs. In other words, only
the pilot tones are transmitted in the test zone. All BSs will have the same frame layout for the
pilot CINR test.
Request via CQI_alloc_IE the preamble-based PCINR into Request via CQI_alloc_IE the
pilot-based PCINR in the Step 14for PUSC (Full DL zone allocation with PUSC)
The Major Group bitmap in CQICH Allocation IE should be the same as the Major Group
bitmap in FCH.

Absolute and relative criterions should be tested and the tests should pass for all scenarios defined for the reuse 1
and reuse 3. This test pass if all the test items in the test result table below is pass.

Table 15. CINR test points for preamble-based PCINR
Average power of serving and interfering BS at MS antenna port
[dBm]
Test Result
Scen-
ario #
Signaling Unit
(BSE)
Serving BS
[dBm]
Interfering
Source 1
(segment 1)
[dBm]
Interfering
Source 2
(segment 2)
[dBm]
Interfering
Source 3
(segment 0)
[dBm]
Avg CINR
reuse 3 [dB]
(Pass/Fail)
Avg CINR
reuse 1 [dB]
(Pass/Fail)
1 -60 -62 -62 -62
2 -60 -66 -70 -68
3 -60 -72 -76 -74
4 -60 -78 -82 -80
5 -60 -83 -87 -85
6 -60 -88 N/A -85

Table 16. CINR test points for pilot-based PCINR
Average power of serving and interfering BS at MS antenna port
[dBm]
Test Result
Scen-
ario #
Signaling Unit
(BSE)
Serving BS
[dBm]
Interfering
Source 1
(segment 1)
[dBm]
Interfering
Source 2
(segment 2)
[dBm]
Interfering
Source 3
(segment 0)
[dBm]
Avg CINR
reuse 3 [dB]
(Pass/Fail)
Avg CINR
reuse 1 [dB]
(Pass/Fail)
1 -60 -62 -62 -62
2 -60 -66 -70 -68
3 -60 -72 -76 -74
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 38
4 -60 -78 -82 -80
5 -60 -83 -87 -85
6 -60 -88 N/A -85


0.0.1 2006-06-11 Gedon Rosner Initial draft based on introduction text agreed in
CINR ad hoc Caesarea MTG F2F meeting May
2006
0.1.0 2006-06-16 Jeff Zhuang Updated based on June Ad hoc discussions 2006
and agreed text for CINR on preamble and pilots
0.1.1 2006-07-15 Jaeyong Lee Updated based on July F2F discussion. Test
procedures are not reviewed so it is written in the
bellow as a reference.
0.2.0 2006-09-04 Jaeyong Lee, JSPARK,
Lomnitz Yuval
Update the contents according to the Aug F2F
agreements. Delete the contents which were not
agreed.
0.2.2 2006-09-21 Jaeyong Lee, Hurbert
Ruck
Update the contents according to the Sept F2F
agreements.
0.2.4 2006-10-19 Jaeyong Lee Update the contents according to the Oct F2F
agreements
0.2.5 2006-11-09 Jaeyong Lee Update the contents according to the Ad-hoc and
Nov F2F agreements.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 39
9.1.7 MS-06.2: MS receiver pilot-based Effective CINR measurement
The purpose of this test is to verify MS pilot-based Effective CINR (ECINR) measurement processing and reporting.

The purpose of this test is to verify the compliance of the MS on effective CINR (ECINR) mechanism as specified
in [2]. Specifically, this test verifies that:
- MS reports the correct ECINR for PUSC zone with no STC.
- MS reports the correct ECINR for PUSC zone with STC using Matrix A.
- MS reports the correct ECINR for PUSC zone with STC using Matrix B.
- MS reports the correct ECINR for AMC zone with dedicated pilots.
- MS reports the correct ECINR for PUSC zone with dedicated pilots and no STC.
- ECINR reported by the MS covers all MCS levels of interest for PUSC zone with dedicated
pilots and STC using Matrix B.

BS can request an MS to report the downlink channel quality in terms of physical CINR (PCINR) and
effective CINR (ECINR.) The purpose of this test is to verify the compliance of the MS on ECINR as
specified in [2]. Following is the definition of ECINR given in Section 6.3.18 of [2]:

The effective CINR is a function of physical CINR, varying channel conditions and implementation
margin. The exact measurement method used to derive the effective CINR is implementation specific.
The reported effective CINR feedback shall correspond to the MCS in Table 298a with which the
expected block error rate, assuming a specific block length, is closest to, but does not exceed, a
specific target average error rate. The target average error rate and assumed block length are defined
in profiles. When HARQ is employed, the computed block error rate shall only pertain to the first
HARQ transmission.

For this test, the target block length to be used by all MS in computing the ECINR shall be the
maximum possible length of a single FEC block for the given MCS level, shown in Table 18. The
target block length is the length of information bits being encoded by the FEC, and shall include all
overheads such as the MAC header, MAC CRC, HARQ CRC, etc. The target average error rate shall
be 10% for 1 FEC block packet.
Table 18. Target block length for ECINR
MCS Block length (bytes)
QPSK 1/2, repetition 6 60
QPSK 60
QPSK 54
16-QAM 60
16-QAM 54
64-QAM 54
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 40
64-QAM 2/3 48
64-QAM 3/4 54
64-QAM 5/6 60

Performance test is performed for the cases of ECINR for
- PUSC zone with no STC
- PUSC zone with STC using Matrix A
- PUSC zone with STC using Matrix B
- AMC zone with dedicated pilots
- PUSC zone with dedicated pilots and no STC.
Performance test consists of transmitting two DL HARQ sub-bursts to the MS, with one sub-burst
using the MCS level recommended by the MS via ECINR, and the other sub-burst using the MCS level
with the next higher spectral efficiency than that recommended by the MS. MS passes the test if
- the average block error rate (block length = target block length) of the sub-burst using the
recommended MCS level is less than or equal to 20% and
- the average block error rate of the sub-burst using the higher MCS level is greater than or
equal to 5%.

Note that for case of using Matrix B transmission in PUSC zones with MCS levels of 16-QAM , 16-
QAM and 64-QAM , the target block lengths do not fit into an integer number of slots. Therefore,
for the case of ECINR for PUSC zone with STC using Matrix B, each sub-burst shall consist of two
FEC blocks with each FEC block having the target block length. For the sake of a meaningful mode
selection process, Matrix A sub-bursts will also consist two FEC blocks with each FEC block having
the target block length. For all other performance tests, each sub-burst shall consist of one FEC block
having the target block length.

A functional test is performed for the case of ECINR for PUSC zone with dedicated pilots and STC
using Matrix B. The test is designed to check that the ECINR reported by the MS UUT covers all
MCS levels of interest as the SNR varies.

For test cases involving dedicated pilots, an additional non-HARQ DL burst is allocated to the MS
UUT to provide sufficient number of pilot subcarriers to be used in ECINR estimation.

Item Reference Item and Section Number in
PICS [6]
Partial or Total Coverage
(P/T)
Direct or Indirect Coverage
(D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.13, Table A.32,
Item 4: Effective CINR measurement
for a permutation zone from pilot
subcarriers
T D
2. A.5.1.1.1.17, Table A.49, P I
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 41
Item 2: Maximum number of concurrent
CINR measurement
processes = 2

The requirements on test equipment include:
- BSE can support PUSC zone with STC
- BSE can support PUSC zone with dedicated pilots
- BSE can support AMC zone with dedicated pilots
- BSE can supports PUSC zone with dedicated pilots and STC
- BSE can support HARQ allocation
- BSE can demodulate and detect ACK/NACK uplink transmission
- BSE can demodulate and detect ECINR codewords transmitted via the fast-feedback channel
in the uplink
- If the BSE receives an ECINR codeword in frame #N, then the BSE should be capable of
transmitting HARQ sub-bursts based on that ECINR codeword in frame #N+3

9.1.7.4 Test setup

Figure 7. Test setup for ECINR test case 1 (PUSC with no STC,) 4 (AMC with dedicated pilots) and
5 (PUSC with dedicated pilots with no STC)

MS
UUT
BSE
SIMO
Channel
Fader
(1x2)
Tx
Attenuator 1
Attenuator 2
Power
Meter 1
Power
Meter 2
Rx1
Rx2
Tx
AMS
AMS
ABS
Rx
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 42

Figure 8. Test setup for ECINR test case 2 (PUSC with Matrix A,) 3 (PUSC with Matrix B) and 6
(PUSC with dedicated pilots and STC Matrix B)

Figure 9. Frame format for ECINR test cases 1 (PUSC with no STC), 2 (PUSC with Matrix A) and 3
(PUSC with Matrix B) N_subch_per_seg = 10 for 1024 FFT, 5 for 512 FFT.

MS
UUT
BSE
MIMO
Channel
Fader
(2x2)
Tx1
Tx2
Attenuator 1
Attenuator 2
Power
Meter 1
Power
Meter 2
Rx1
Rx2
Tx
Rx
AMS
ABS
AMS
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d

D
L
/
U
L

M
A
P
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
Time
0
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub-frame
DL zone #1: PUSC
Downlink Sub-frame
DL zone #2: PUSC UL PUSC zone
D
L

S
u
b
-
b
u
r
s
t

#
1
D
L

S
u
b
-
b
u
r
s
t

#
2
1 3
P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
FCH
2 4
0
1
2
3
4
5
TTG RTG
mod(frame_number,3)*N_subch_per_seg
[subchannels]
HARQ region defined by
HARQ DL MAP IE
N_subch_per_seg [subchannels]
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 43

Figure 10. Frame format for ECINR test case 4 (AMC with dedicated pilots)
D
L

b
u
r
s
t
:

1
5

s
l
o
t
s
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d

D
L
/
U
L

M
A
P
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
Time
0
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub-frame
DL zone #1: PUSC
Downlink Sub-frame
DL zone #2: AMC UL PUSC zone
D
L

S
u
b
-
b
u
r
s
t

#
1
D
L

S
u
b
-
b
u
r
s
t

#
2
1 3
P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
FCH
2 4
0
1
2
3
4
5
TTG RTG
HARQ DL MAP IE
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 44

Figure 11. Frame format for ECINR test case 5 (PUSC with dedicated pilots and no STC)
N_subch_per_seg = 10 for 1024 FFT, 5 for 512 FFT.

D
L

b
u
r
s
t
:

1
0

s
l
o
t
s

C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d

D
L
/
U
L

M
A
P
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
Time
0
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub-frame
DL zone #1: PUSC
Downlink Sub-frame
D
L

S
u
b
-
b
u
r
s
t

#
1
D
L

S
u
b
-
b
u
r
s
t

#
2
1 3
P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
FCH
2 4
0
1
2
3
4
5
TTG RTG
HARQ DL MAP IE
N_subch_per_seg
[subchannels]
2 * 10 / N_subch_per_seg
[symbols]
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 45

Figure 12. Frame format for ECINR test case 6 (PUSC with dedicated pilots and STC Matrix B)

Table 20. DL zone #2 configuration
Field Value
OFDMA symbol offset First OFDMA symbol after the end of the MAP traffics (DL-MAP, UL-
MAP, DCD, UCD, etc.)
Permutation Test case 1: 0b00 (PUSC permutation)
Test case 2: 0b00 (PUSC permutation)
Test case 4: 0b11 (AMC permutation)
Use All SC indicator 1 (Use all subchannels)
STC Test case 1: 0b00 (No STC)
Test case 2: 0b01 (STC using 2/3 antennas)
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d

D
L
/
U
L

M
A
P
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
Time
0
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub-frame
DL zone #1: PUSC
Downlink Sub-frame
DL Burst
1 3
P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
FCH
2 4
0
1
2
3
4
5
TTG RTG
10 subchannels
8 symbols
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 46
Test case 4: 0b00 (No STC)
Test case 5: 0b00 (No STC)
Dedicated Pilots Test case 1: 0 (Broadcast pilots)
Test case 2: 0 (Broadcast pilots)
Test case 3: 0 (Broadcast pilots)
Test case 4: 1 (Dedicated pilots)

Figure 9, Figure 10, Figure 11 and Figure 12 show the frame structures employed for the ECINR tests.
DL zone #1 and UL PUSC zone shall follow the default configuration specified in the Appendix 2 with
the following exceptions:
- Repetition_Coding_Indication in FCH = 0b10 (Repetition 4)
- Compressed DL and UL MAP shall be employed
- The number of OFDMA symbols in DL subframe may need to be increased to have enough
number of symbols to transmit all the DL bursts required for testing. In any case, the number
of OFDMA symbols in DL and UL subframes should not be changed in the middle of a test.

Zone configuration for the DL zone #2 is listed in Table 20. The total number of symbols in the DL
zone #2 should be an even number for test cases 1 through 4, a multiple of 3 for test case 5 and a
multiple of 4 for test case 6. If not, the last one, two or three symbols of the DL sub-frame can be left
unused.

DCD, UCD and other broadcast messages required for test configurations should be transmitted using
QPSK with repetition 4. If there are not enough number of OFDMA symbols in the DL subframe to
transmit such broadcast messages (e.g. DCD, UCD) and the (sub-)bursts required for ECINR tests in
the same frame, then the BSE may skip the transmission of (sub-)bursts required for ECINR test in that
frame. For example, if the BSE needs to transmit DCD in frame #N, then the BSE may choose not to
transmit the (sub-)bursts required for ECINR testing in that frame. In this case, ECINR report received
in frame #N-3 should be discarded, and the MCS level for the (sub-)bursts transmitted in frame #N+1
should be based on the ECINR report received in frame #N-2.

For test cases 1 (PUSC with no STC,) 2 (PUSC with Matrix A,) and 3 (PUSCH with Matrix B) the
HARQ region defined by HARQ DL MAP IE shall use the following parameters:
- Subchannel offset = mod(frame_number, 3) * N_subch_per_seg
- Number of subchannels = N_subch_per_seg

where

N_subch_per_seg = 10 for 1024 FFT and 5 for 512 FFT.

For test case 4 (AMC with dedicated pilots,) Band-AMC Rectangular Sub-Burst Indicator shall be set
to 0 (frequency first allocation.)
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 47

For test cases 4, 5 and 6, the DL subframe includes at least 6 OFDM symbols for first PUSC zone.

Test case 1: ECINR for PUSC zone with no STC
Step 1. Set the channel model to be Ped-B with mobility of 1 km/hr.
Step 2. Turn on the BSE. Configure the BSE to use the frame format shown in Figure 9. Zone
configuration for DL zone #2 is specified in Table 20.
Step 3. Set the average received signal level at A
MS
per receive antenna port for the preamble duration to -50
dBm. Set the received signal level at A
BS
high enough to ensure that UL signals transmitted by the
MS UUT is received without error by the BSE.
Step 4. Turn on the MS UUT. Wait for network entry procedure to end.
Step 5. Transmit 1000 frames using the frame format in Figure 9, with both DL sub-burst #1 and #2
employing QPSK 1/2 with no repetition and burst size of 60 bytes (10 slots) AI_SN shall be toggled
for each sub-burst transmission (i.e. each transmission is a new transmission regardless of
ACK/NACK.)
Step 6. If the sum of the number of NACKs received by the BSE for both DL sub-burst #1 and #2 is less
than 180, then decrease the received signal level at A
MS
by 1 dB and go back to Step 5. Repeat this
process until the number of NACKs per 1000 frames is greater than or equal to 180. If the average
received signal level at A
MS
per receive antenna port for the preamble duration reaches -100 dBm
before the number of NACKs per 1000 frames is greater than or equal to 180, then abort the test.
Step 7. BSE assigns a CQICH to the MS UUT via CQICH Allocation IE as specified in Table 21.
Step 8. The BSE demodulates the ECINR reported by the MS UUT via CQICH in each frame. Then, the
BSE shall schedule the transmission of DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 as specified in Table 22. The
sub-burst sizes to be used are specified in Table 24. If the ECINR report was received in frame #N,
then the corresponding DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 should be transmitted in frame #N+3.
Furthermore, AI_SN shall be toggled for each sub-burst transmission (i.e. each transmission is a new
transmission regardless of ACK/NACK.) BSE should record the number of packet errors of the DL
sub-bursts #1 and #2 separately using the ACK/NACK corresponding to each sub-burst.
Step 9. Starting from Step 8, gradually increase the received signal level at A
MS
at a rate of 1dB per 3000
frames. Repeat Step 8 until either one of the following two conditions are met:
a) The number of ECINR reports recommending 64-QAM 5/6 is greater than or equal to 100, or
b) A
MS
per antenna port is greater than -30 dBm.

Test case 2: ECINR for PUSC zone with STC - Matrix A
Step 1. Set the channel model to be Ped-B with mobility of 1 km/hr and low spatial correlation.
MS
BS
employing Matrix A, QPSK 1/2 with no repetition and burst size of 120 bytes (20 slots) AI_SN
shall be toggled for each sub-burst transmission (i.e. each transmission is a new transmission
regardless of ACK/NACK.)
MS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 48
MS
BSE shall schedule the transmission of DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 as specified in Table 22 with
MIMO mode of Matrix A. The sub-burst sizes to be used are specified in Table 24. If the ECINR
report was received in frame #N, then the corresponding DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 should be
transmitted in frame #N+3. Furthermore, AI_SN shall be toggled for each sub-burst transmission
(i.e. each transmission is a new transmission regardless of ACK/NACK.) BSE should record the
number of packet errors of the DL sub-bursts #1 and #2 separately using the ACK/NACK
corresponding to each sub-burst.
MS

b) A
MS

Test case 3: ECINR for PUSC zone with STC - Matrix B
Step 1. Set the channel model to be Ped-B with mobility of 1 km/hr and low spatial correlation.
MS
BS
employing Matrix B, QPSK 1/2 with no repetition and burst size of 120 bytes (10 slots) AI_SN shall
be toggled for each sub-burst transmission (i.e. each transmission is a new transmission regardless of
ACK/NACK.)
MS
MS
BSE shall schedule the transmission of DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 as specified in Table 23 with
MIMO mode of Matrix B. The sub-burst sizes to be used are specified in Table 24. If the ECINR
report was received in frame #N, then the corresponding DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 should be
transmitted in frame #N+3. Furthermore, AI_SN shall be toggled for each sub-burst transmission
(i.e. each transmission is a new transmission regardless of ACK/NACK.) BSE should record the
number of packet errors of the DL sub-bursts #1 and #2 separately using the ACK/NACK
corresponding to each sub-burst.
MS
b) A
MS

Test case 4: ECINR for AMC zone with dedicated pilots (no STC zone)
Step 1. Set the channel model to be AWGN (no multipath).
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 49
MS
BS
ACK/NACK.) CID of the non-HARQ DL burst in the DL zone #2 shall also be that of the MS UUT.
This burst shall employ QPSK 1/2 with no repetition and burst size of 90 bytes (15 slots)
MS
MS
BSE shall schedule the transmission of DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 as specified in Table 22. The
sub-burst sizes to be used are specified in Table 24. If the ECINR report was received in frame #N,
then the corresponding DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 should be transmitted in frame #N+3.
Furthermore, AI_SN shall be toggled for each sub-burst transmission (i.e. each transmission is a new
transmission regardless of ACK/NACK.) BSE should record the number of packet errors of the DL
sub-bursts #1 and #2 separately using the ACK/NACK corresponding to each sub-burst. CID of the
non-HARQ DL burst in the DL zone #2 shall also be that of the MS UUT. This burst shall employ
QPSK 1/2 with no repetition and burst size of 90 bytes (15 slots).
MS
b) A
MS

Test case 5: ECINR for PUSC zone with dedicated pilots (no STC zone)
Step 1. Set the channel model to be Ped-B with mobility of 1 km/hr.
MS
BS
ACK/NACK). CID of the non-HARQ DL burst in the DL zone #2 shall also be that of the MS UUT.
This burst shall employ QPSK 1/2 with no repetition and burst size of 60 bytes (10 slots).
MS
MS
BSE shall schedule the transmission of DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 as specified in Table 22 The sub-
burst sizes to be used are specified in Table 24. If the ECINR report was received in frame #N, then
the corresponding DL sub-bursts #1 and/or #2 should be transmitted in frame #N+3. Furthermore,
AI_SN shall be toggled for each sub-burst transmission (i.e. each transmission is a new transmission
regardless of ACK/NACK.) BSE should record the number of packet errors of the DL sub-bursts #1
and #2 separately using the ACK/NACK corresponding to each sub-burst. CID of the non-HARQ
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 50
DL burst in the DL zone #2 shall also be that of the MS UUT. This burst shall employ QPSK 1/2
with no repetition and burst size of 60 bytes (10 slots).
MS
b) A
MS

Test case 6: ECINR for PUSC zone with dedicated pilots and STC Matrix B
Step 1. Set the channel model to be AWGN (no multi-path) with mobility of 1 km/hr and no spatial
correlation.
configuration for DL zone #2 is specified in Table 20. The DL burst in DL zone #2 shall employ
QPSK 1/2 with no repetition and its burst size shall be 8 OFDMA symbols by 10 subchannels. The
starting OFDMA symbol of the DL burst shall be the first OFDMA symbol of the DL zone #2 and
the subchannel offset shall be 0.
MS
BS
Step 6. Transmit 1000 frames using the frame format in Figure 12 and collect 1000 ECINR reports from the
MS UUT.
Step 7. If the received signal level at A
MS
is less than -100 dBm, then stop the test.
Step 8. If the sum of the number of ECINR reports recommending 16-QAM 3/4 or 64-QAM 1/2 is less than
100, then decrease the received signal level at AMS by 1 dB and go back to Step 6. Repeat this
process until the sum of the number of ECINR reports recommending 16-QAM 3/4 or 64-QAM 1/2
per 1000 frames is greater than or equal to 100.
Step 9. Decrease the received signal level at A
MS
by 1 dB.
Step 10. Keep transmitting frames using the frame format in Figure 12 and collect ECINR reports from the
MS UUT.
Step 11. Starting from Step 10, gradually increase the received signal level at AMS at a rate of 1dB per 3000
frames until either one of the following two conditions are met:
a) The number of ECINR reports recommending 64-QAM 5/6 is greater than or equal to 100,
or
b) AMS per antenna port is greater than -30 dBm.

Pass verdict:
MS UUT shall comply with all of the following requirements:
a. PER for the DL sub-burst #1 in Test case 1 should be lower than 20%.
b. PER for the DL sub-burst #2 in Test case 1 should be higher than 5%.
c. PER for the DL sub-burst #1 in Test case 2 should be lower than 36%.
d. PER for the DL sub-burst #2 in Test case 2 should be higher than 10%.
e. PER for the DL sub-burst #1 in Test case 3 should be lower than 36%.
f. PER for the DL sub-burst #2 in Test case 3 should be higher than 10%.
g. PER for the DL sub-burst #1 in Test case 4 should be lower than 20%.
h. PER for the DL sub-burst #2 in Test case 4 should be higher than 5%.
i. PER for the DL sub-burst #1 in Test case 5 should be lower than 20%.
j. PER for the DL sub-burst #2 in Test case 5 should be higher than 5%.
k. The received signal level at A
MS
did not go below -100 dBm before the number of NACKs per
1000 frames is greater than or equal to 180 in Test case 1.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 51
l. The received signal level at A
MS
m. The received signal level at A
MS
n. The received signal level at A
MS
o. The received signal level at A
MS
p. The received signal level at A
MS
did not go below -100 dBm before the BSE received at least 100
ECINR reports recommending 16-QAM or 64-QAM 1/2 per 1000 ECINR reports collected in
Test case 6.
q. The received signal level at A
MS
did not exceed -30 dBm before the BSE received at least 100
ECINR reports recommending 64-QAM 5/6 in total in Test case 6.
r. MCS levels 16-QAM and 64-QAM has been recommended by the MS UUT at least 100
times combined in Test case 6.
s. MCS levels 64-QAM and 64-QAM 5/6 has each been recommended by the MS UUT at least
100 times in Test case 6.

Fail verdict:
Otherwise.

Table 21. CQICH configuration.
Field Value
Period (p) 0b00 (CQI feedback in every frame)
Duration (d) 0b111 (Continue CQI reporting until instructed by BS to stop)
Feedback type 0b01 (Effective CINR)
Report type 1 (Report for specific permutation)
Zone permutation Test case 1: 0b001 (PUSC with use all SC = 1)
Test case 2: 0b001 (PUSC with use all SC = 1)
Test case 4: 0b101 (AMC)
Zone type Test case 1: 0b00 (Non-STC zone)
Test case 2: 0b01 (STC zone)
Test case 3: 0b01 (STC zone)
Test case 4: 0b10 (Non-STC zone w/ dedicated pilots)
Test case 5: 0b10 (Non-STC zone w/ dedicated pilots)
Test case 6: 0b11 (STC zone w/ dedicated pilots)
Zone PRBS_ID Zone PRBS ID of the DL zone #2
Major group indication 0
MIMO_permutation feedback_cycle 0b00 (No MIMO and permutation mode feedback)
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 52

Table 22. DL sub-bursts to be transmitted by the BSE for test cases 1 (PUSC with no STC,) 2
(PUSC with Matrix A,) 4 (PUSC with dedicated pilots and no STC) and 5 (AMC with dedicated
pilots)
ECINR reported by the
MS UUT
MCS level for
DL sub-burst #1
MCS level for
DL sub-burst #2
0 (QPSK , repetition 6) Do not transmit QPSK , repetition 4
1 (QPSK , repetition 4) QPSK , repetition 4 QPSK , repetition 2
2 (QPSK , repetition 2) QPSK , repetition 2 QPSK
3 (QPSK ) QPSK QPSK
4 (QPSK ) QPSK 16-QAM
5 (16-QAM ) 16-QAM BSE to arbitrarily (but different value
at each time) choose between
16-QAM and
64-QAM
6 (16-QAM ) 16-QAM 64-QAM 2/3
7 (64-QAM ) 64-QAM 64-QAM 2/3
8 (64-QAM 2/3) 64-QAM 2/3 64-QAM
9 (64-QAM ) 64-QAM 64-QAM 5/6
10 (64-QAM 5/6) 64-QAM 5/6 Do not transmit
11 (ECINR has not changed from
the previous CQICH slot)
Based on the most recent ECINR
reported less than 11
12~15 (Reserved) Do not transmit Do not transmit

Table 23. DL sub-bursts to be transmitted by the BSE for test case 3 (PUSC with Matrix B)
ECINR reported by the
MS UUT
MCS level for
DL sub-burst #1
MCS level for
DL sub-burst #2
0 (QPSK , repetition 6) Do not transmit Do not transmit
3 (QPSK ) Do not transmit QPSK
4 (QPSK ) QPSK 16-QAM
5 (16-QAM ) 16-QAM BSE to arbitrarily (but different value
at each time) choose between
16-QAM and
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 53
64-QAM
6 (16-QAM ) 16-QAM 64-QAM 2/3
7 (64-QAM ) 64-QAM 64-QAM 2/3
8 (64-QAM 2/3) 64-QAM 2/3 64-QAM
9 (64-QAM ) 64-QAM 64-QAM 5/6
10 (64-QAM 5/6) 64-QAM 5/6 Do not transmit
11 (ECINR has not changed from
the previous CQICH slot)
12~15 (Reserved) Do not transmit Do not transmit

Table 24. Sub-burst size and number of maximum FEC blocks per sub-burst.
MCS Sub-burst
size
(slots)
Number of max. FEC blocks per sub-burst
No STC

STC with Matrix A STC with Matrix B
QPSK-1/2, repetition 6 60 1 2 N/A
QPSK-1/2 10 1 2 2
QPSK-3/4 6 1 2 2
16QAM-1/2 5 1 2 2
16QAM-3/4 3 1 2 2
64QAM-1/2 3 1 2 2
64QAM-2/3 2 1 2 2
64QAM-3/4 2 1 2 2
64QAM-5/6 2 1 2 2


0.1 2007-02-27 Youhan Kim Initial draft. A working draft for ad-hoc discussion.
0.2 2007-03-04 Eilon Riess Second draft
0.3 2007-03-05 Youhan Kim Minor changes reflecting CC on 2/27.
0.6a Hassan Yaghoobi RCT comment resolution during Orlando F2F.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 54
0.7 2007-04-12 Youhan Kim Unharmonized changes made for discussion purposes in
CC on 4/12.
0.8 2007-04-12 Youhan Kim v0.7 was discussed during the CC on 4/12/2007 and is
being uploaded as v0.8 for basis for future discussions.
0.9a 2007-05-11 Youhan Kim Unharmonized proposal using target block length = 1
max. FEC block.
0.10a 2007-05-12 Youhan Kim Submit as Option A for RCT discussion.
A non-HARQ burst added to dedicated pilot test cases to
provide additional pilot subcarriers.
0.9a 2007-05-11 Youhan Kim Unharmonized proposal using target block length = 1
max. FEC block.
0.10a 2007-05-12 Youhan Kim Submit as Option A for RCT discussion.
A non-HARQ burst added to dedicated pilot test cases to
provide additional pilot subcarriers.
0.11 2007-06-10 Eilon Riess Incorporating decisions: 1 FEC block, 2 FEC blocks for
Matrix A and B. PER threshold of 5% and 20% (for 1
FEC block), decision on additional HARQ burst for
dedicated pilots,

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 55
9.1.8 MS-07.1: MS receiver adjacent and non-adjacent channel selectivity
The purpose of this test is to verify that the MS receiver can meet the Adjacent and Non-adjacent Channel
Selectivity defined in IEEE802.16-2004, IEEE802.16e-2005, and the Mobile System Profile.

The adjacent and non-adjacent channel selectivity performance depends on both ACLR (Adjacent
Channel Leakage power Ratio) of the interferer transmitter and the ACS (Adjacent Channel
Selectivity) of the receiver. The interference experienced in a realistic environment can come from
different sources depending on the type of interferers and their out-of-band emission masks, as well as
the channel spacing. The standard does not specify the type of interferers, but rather just describes the
test as:
The adjacent channel selectivity and alternate channel selectivity shall be measured by setting
the desired signals strength 3dB above the rate dependent receiver sensitivity and raising the
power level of the interfering signal until the specified error rate is obtained. The power
different between the interfering signal and the desired channel is the corresponding adjacent
channel selectivity. The interfering signal in the adjacent channel shall be a conforming
OFMDA signal, not synchronized with the signal in the channel under test. For non-adjacent
channel testing the test method is identical except the interfering channel shall be any channel
other than the adjacent channel or the co-channel.

ACS is a measure of a receivers ability to receive a OFDMA signal at its assigned channel frequency
in the presence of an adjacent channel signal at a given frequency offset from the centre frequency of
the assigned channel. ACS is the ratio of the receive filter attenuation on the assigned channel
frequency to the receive filter attenuation on the adjacent channel(s).

The Adjacent Channel Interference Power Ratio (ACIR) is the ratio of the total power transmitted from
a source (both BS and MS) to the total interference power affecting a victim receiver, resulting from
both transmitter and receiver imperfections.

When the ACLR of the interference source is much better than receiver ACS performance, the adjacent
channel selectivity performance is determined by the ACS performance.

1
1 1
ACIR
ACLR ACS
=
+
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 56
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.2.1.20 T D

1. The adjacent and non-adjacent channel leakage ratio of the test interfering sources should
have negligible impact to the receiver ACS measurement. In particular, the ACLR (adjacent
and non-adjacent) requirement should be better than 40dB and 60dB, respectively. ACLR
performance can be derived from the interfering sources spectrum mask and the channel
spacing (CS). The channel spacing (CS) is determined as the same as channel bandwidth of
the desired system, except for systems with a bandwidth of 8.75MHz. For 8.75MHz channel
BW, CS is defined as 9MHz.
2. Interfering source is an OFDMA conforming unsynchronized signal with a default frame
structure defined in Appendix 2. The averaged power of the interference is a time-triggered
measurement only over the duration of the data burst according to the specification defined in
the sensitivity test.

9.1.8.4 Test setup
Figure 13 shows the test setup for testing the MS receiver adjacent-channel and non-adjacent channel
selectivity.

Figure 13. Test Setup for MS Receiver Adjacent and Non-adjacent Channel Selectivity Test

Attenuator 2
Test
BS
Average
Power
Meter
MSS
UUT
A
BS

Attenuator 1
A
MSS

+
Interfering
Source
Combiner
Attenuator 3
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 57
9.1.8.5 Test procedures

Initial Conditions:

Interfering source turned off. DL Service Flow established between BSE and UUT.

Test Procedure:

Step 1. Adjust the received signal level at A
MS
to be 3dB above the maximum sensitivity level (Smin) for
16QAM rate-3/4 under AWGN channel condition. Note the signal level is measured over the time
period of the data burst only within the downlink sub-frame.
Step 2. Turn on the interfering source and configure it to transmit at +1 CS from the nominal (desired)
operation frequency.
Step 3. Increase the interfering source power to be 11 dB above the level of Smin+3 for 16QAM rate-3/4
(As described in Test Step 1 in Table 27)
Step 4. Perform a PER measurement according to Appendix 3 and record the number of error packets.
Step 5. Turn the interference source off.
Step 6. Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 above for the next Test Steps shown in Table 27 below.
Step 7. Repeat Step 1 to Step 5 above for the Test Steps shown in Table 28 below.
Step 8. Repeat the test procedure for the low, middle, and high channel of the declared Band Class.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 58
Table 27. Parameters for MS Receiver Adjacent-Channel Selectivity Test
Test Step Modulation and
Coding
Signal Level Interference
Level
Interference
Frequency Offset
1. 16QAM-3/4 S
min
+ 3 dB S
min
+ 14 dB +1 CS
2. -1 CS
3. 64QAM-3/4 S
min
+ 3dB S
min
+ 7 dB +1 CS
4. -1 CS

Table 28. Parameters for MS Receiver Non-Adjacent Channel Selectivity Test
Test Step Modulation and
Coding
Level
Interference
Frequency Offset
1. 16QAM-3/4 S
min
+ 3 dB S
min
+ 33 dB +2 CS
2. -2 CS
3. 64QAM-3/4 S
min
+ 3dB S
min
+ 26 dB +2 CS
4. -2 CS

1.- Pass verdict:
a.- For each of the 8 different PER measurements, the number of error packets is less or equal
than the limit specified in Appendix 1 Table 296.

2.- Fail verdict:
a.- For at least one of the 8 different PER measurements, the number of error packets is bigger
than the limit specified in Appendix 1 Table 296.
3.- Inconclusive verdict:
a.- The DL connection is not properly established between the BSE and the MS UUT.
Not applicable.

0.0.1 2006-5-11 Jeff Zhuang Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-8-22 Jeff Zhuang Updated for ad-hoc discussion
0.0.3 2006-8-28 Jeff Zhuang Updated to reflect August F2F ad-hoc consensus

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 59
9.1.9 MS-08.1: MS receiver maximum input signal
The purpose of this test is to verify MS is capable of decoding an on-channel input signal with maximum required
power.

Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE802.16e-2005 specification [Section 8.4.13.3.1] requires the
MS receiver shall be capable of decoding a maximum on-channel signal of -30dBm. This is verified
by measuring the packet error rates at least robust modulation and coding, and verifying that packet
error rate is lower than the defined limits.

The following PICS items are covered by this test. This test is applicable to all MS as a mandatory
requirement.

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Item 1 section A5.1.1.1.19 T D

This test requires the test system to be generating DL bursts as defined below. The MS UUT is to set
up a downlink connection with the test system at receive signal level of -30dBm, and measure packet
error rate for 64QAM DL modulation with packet lengths as specified in Appendix 1.

The test shall be performed with:
a) 5ms frame
b) a cyclic prefix of T
b
/8
c) a modulation and coding of 64QAM
d) one packet per burst per frame
e) number of packets as defined in Table 31.
f) channel bandwidth selected according to declared Band Class.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 60
9.1.9.4 Test setup

Figure 14. Test Setup for MS Receiver Maximum Input Signal

Initial Condition:
Step 1. Set up the UUT to be ready for network entry.
Step 2. Wait for test system to set up a downlink connection.

Test Procedure:
Step 3. The attenuator is adjusted to set the UUT received signal level at A
MS
to -30dBm.
Step 4. Set up the test system to send n packets at 64 QAM with coding rate of and packet
lengths as specified in Table 31 below.
Step 5. Measure the UUT receiver PER, and verify that it is lower than limits specified in Appendix
1 Table 296 required for Qualitative tests

Table 31. Parameters for MS Receiver Maximum Input Signal Test
Modulation Coding Rate
Packet Payload
Length, bytes
Packet Rate,
packets/second
Minimum number of
packets to be
transmitted
64QAM 3/4 576 200 30,000

Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
Avgerage
Power
Meter

MS UUT
AMS/BS
Attenuator
ABS/MS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 61
1- Pass verdict:
a- The number of error packets is less or equal than the limit specified in Appendix 1 Table 296.

2- Fail verdict:
a- The number of error packets is bigger than the limit specified in Appendix 1 Table 296.

3- Inconclusive verdict:
a- The DL connection is not properly established between the BSE and the MS UUT in Step 2.
Table 32. Packet Error Rate limits (64QAM)
Packet Length, bytes Threshold PER Number of packets sent
N
Maximum number of error
packets M
576+38 0.49% 30,000 147
576+10 0.47% 30,000 141
1. Not applicable.

0.0.1 2006-05-11 Eloise Tse Initial draft
Insert test details and requirement.
0.0.2 2006-06-16 Eloise Tse Update with accepted comment.
0.0.3 2006-06-23 Eloise Tse Delete 16QAM reference in table caption
Rename Test BS to test system as per Cetecom
request
Modify per comments from Cetecom

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 62
9.1.10 MS-09.1: MS receiver sensitivity
The purpose of the test is to verify that the receiver is compliant to the sensitivity requirements as specified
in the PICS document and the mobile profile. The requirements are for various MCS levels and the test
channel conditions include both AWGN and fading.

In order to be compliant to the receiver sensitivity requirement, the receiver is required to achieve a
Packet Error Rate (PER) equal to or better than a certain target level when the received signal is set at
the sensitivity level.

The PER, rather than the Bit Error Rate (BER), is calculated over a large number of frames to verify
that the performance is better than or equal to the target PER. For AWGN channels, the target PER is
converted from the packet size and the standard requirement of BER=1e-6, assuming independent error
event after decoding (Appendix 1). For fading channels, the target PER is 10%, which is assumed to
be near the target PER of a first HARQ transmission.

Two options of test mechanisms can be used for this test:
1. ACK/NACK mechanism (mandatory for wave-2): The packets are allocated in HARQ DL
MAP IE with assigned ACK channel for MS UUT to feed back either ACK or NACK for
each of the data packets (bursts) transmitted in the previous frame. The ACK/NACK
feedback mechanism is the same as used in HARQ operation, even though the Test BS will
not re-transmit in the case of receiving a NACK. Each packet transmitted in a frame is a new
packet (i.e., AI_SN toggles at each frame). The downlink allocation information for each
packet (burst) is conveyed in HARQ DL MAP IE and the receiver feeds back ACK/NACK in
the assigned ACK channels within the specified HARQ ACK region.
2. Ping mechanism (optional for wave-1): The Signaling Unit (BS emulator) uses the Ping
command to send some payload bits to the MS UUT at an interval of 5ms (one frame). The
MS will send the payload back if it is decoded successfully.

The packet size for AWGN, including all headers and CRC, is chosen to be 540 bytes. However for
fading test, the packet length is chosen to be, after encoding, a single FEC block with a maximum data
size allowed by the CTC subchannel concatenation rule, i.e., 60/54/48 bytes depending on the
particular MCS level. The actual number of payload bits for the two test mechanism is:
1. ACK/NACK mechanism: Each data packet consists of a 6-byte generic MAC header at the
beginning and a 2-byte CRC-16 at the end, leaving the remaining as payload bits. Random
payload bits are used. The CRC is calculated based on MAC header and the payload.
2. Ping mechanism (optional for wave-1): The header size in a Ping message is 28 bytes with 8
bytes of ICMP control message. In addition to the 28 bytes header in each Ping message,
there will be a 6-byte generic MAC header at the beginning and a 4-byte CRC-32 at the end.
The Ping payload data length can be variable from 0 to 65535 bytes. So, for AWGN test case,
the ping payload is 540-28-10=502 bytes and for fading test case, the ping payload will be
22/16/10 bytes, corresponding to PDU sizes of 60/54/48 bytes respectively. Random payload
bits are used. The CRC is calculated based on MAC header and the payload.

One (1) packet (burst) is allocated in a data PUSC/AMC zone after the first PUSC zone for control
message (MAP and DCD). The data zone extends to the end of the DL sub-frame. The allocation
starts from slot 1+mod(n, Nsch) where n is the frame index and Nsch is the number of slots in the
frequency domain (e.g., 15 in 512-point FFT PUSC). The rest of slots in the data zone (before and after
the allocated burst) can use random QPSK symbols. Corresponding to those slots, BSE should use a
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 63
different CID in the MAP meesage. The per-subcarrier transmit power level of the rest of the data
zone is kept the same as the per-subcarrier of the data burst so that the signal power measured for the
entire data zone is the same as that in the allocation to the MS UUT.

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.17 P D

The input signal level, averaged only over the data zone, needs to be set at the appropriate levels,
which may requires a time-triggered measurement. Moreover, the power level should be the average
over data subcarriers only. If this cannot be achieved, which means that the boosted pilots are also
included in the power density adjustment, the 2.5 dB (16/9) pilot boosting should be taken into
account. The input power level should be set as the sensitivity level given in the PICS tables plus an
offset computed as 10log10[(N_data+N_pilot*16/9)/(N_data+N_pilot)] (given in Table 35):

Table 35. Sensitivity offset if need to account for pilot boosting
Offset_pilot_boosting (dB)
PUSC +10log10[(360+60*16/9)/(360+60)]=0.46
AMC (wave-2) 0.36

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 64
9.1.10.4 Test setup
Figure 15 shows the test setup for testing the MS receiver sensitivity.

Figure 15. Test Setup for MS Receiver Sensitivity Test.
ACK/NACK test (For ACK/NACK mechanism only):
This test should be performed first to verify that the receiver can feed back ACK/NACK as expected, depending on
successful/unsuccessful CRC check. The test procedure is:
Step 1. Use HARQ DL MAP IE to allocate one 60-byte QPSK rate-1/2 packet in each frame
Step 2. Set the signal level at 10dB above sensitivity
Step 3. For a certain percentage (e.g., 50%) of 2000 packets (100 frames), the CRC bits are flipped
(negated). Test BS should detect NACK corresponding to those packets and detect ACK otherwise.
For those packets that the Test BS expects a ACK, only a single (1) error can be allowed (i.e., a
single NACK for 1000 packets).

Test case 1: Receiver sensitivity under AWGN
Step 1. Set the test frequency to the Mid channel of the declared band class according to Appendix 5.
Step 2. Set the signal level at the receiver input according the following equation
10
114 10log 13 _ _
s Used
ss required
FFT
F N
R SNR Offset pilot boosting
N
| |
= + + + +
|
\ .

where F
s
is

the sampling rate, N
used
is the number of used subcarriers, and SNR
required
is listed in
Table 36 according the different MCS levels to be tested.
Step 3. For each MCS level to be tested, the number of frames as specified in the table is transmitted from
the BSE
Step 4. Record the packer received in error according to either the ACK/NACK test method or the PING
method.
Step 5. Repeat the test procedure for Low and High channels of the band class.
Test
BS
Gated
Power
Meter
MS
UUT

A
BS

Attenuator
A
MS

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 65
Table 36. Parameters for Single-antenna Receiver Sensitivity (CTC, PUSC, AWGN)

MCS Min
Required
SNR
Payload
(ACK/PING)
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots
per
PDU
Packets
(PDUs)
per
frame
# of
frames
PER
(BER=1e-
6)
# of
error
packets
QPSK
rate-1/2
2.9 dB 532/502 540 90 1 30,000 0.43% 129
QPSK
rate-3/4
6.3 dB 532/502 540 60 1 30,000 0.43% 129
16QAM
rate-1/2
8.6 dB 532/502 540 45 1 30,000 0.43% 129
16QAM
rate-3/4
12.7 dB

532/502 540 30 1 30,000 0.43% 129
64QAM
rate-1/2
13.8 dB 532/502 540 30 1 30,000 0.43% 129
64QAM
rate-2/3

16.9 dB
532/502 540 22.5 1 30,000 0.43% 129
64QAM
rate-3/4

18 dB

532/502 540 20 1 30,000 0.43% 129
64QAM
rate-5/6
19.9 dB 532/502 540 18 1 30,000 0.43% 129

Test case 2: Receiver sensitivity under Ped-B @3Km/h
Step 1. Set the test frequency to the Mid channel of the declared band class according to the Appendix 5.
10
114 10log 13 _ _
s Used
ss required
FFT
F N
N
| |
= + + + +
|
\ .

where F
s
is

used
required
is listed in Table
37 according the different MCS levels to be tested.
the BSE.
method.
Step 5. Repeat the test procedure for low and top channels of the band class.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 66
Table 37. Parameters for Single-antenna Receiver Sensitivity (CTC, PUSC, Ped-B@3Km/h)

MCS Min
Required
SNR
Payload
(ACK/PING)
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots
per
PDU
Packets
per
frame
# of
frames
PER
target
# of
error
packets
QPSK
rate-1/2
7.0 52/22 60 10 1 10,000 10% 1000
QPSK
rate-3/4
12.0 46/16 54 6 1 10,000 10% 1000
16QAM
rate-1/2
12.5 52/22 60 5 1 10,000 10% 1000
16QAM
rate-3/4
17.5 46/16 54 3 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-1/2
17.0 46/16 54 3 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-2/3
21.0 40/10 48 2 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-3/4
23.0 46/16 54 2 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-5/6
25.0 52/22 60 2 1 10,000 10% 1000

Test case 3: Receiver sensitivity under Veh-A @60Km/h
Step 1. Set the test frequency to the middle channel of the declared band class according to the Appendix 5.
10
114 10log 13 _ _
s Used
ss required
FFT
F N
N
| |
= + + + +
|
\ .

where F
s
is

used
required
is listed in Table
38 according the different MCS levels to be tested.
the BSE
method.
Step 5. Repeat the test procedure for low and top channels of the band class.
Table 38. Parameters for Single-antenna Receiver Sensitivity (CTC, PUSC, Veh-A@60Km/h)

MCS Min
Required
SNR
Payload
(bytes)
PDU Size
(bytes)
Packets per
frame
# of
frames
PER
target
Maximum #
of error
packets
QPSK rate-1/2 8.0 52/22 60 1 10,000 10% 1000
QPSK rate-3/4 13.0 46/16 54 1 10,000 10% 1000
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 67
16QAM rate-1/2 13.5 52/22 60 1 10,000 10% 1000
16QAM rate-3/4 18.5 46/16 54 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM rate-1/2 18.0 46/16 54 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM rate-2/3 22.0 40/10 48 1 10,000 10% 1000

In order to be compliant to the minimum receiver sensitivity requirement, the receiver is required to, after
accounting for its noise figure and implementation loss, achieve an equal or better Packet Error Rate (PER)
target performance when the received signal is at the maximum sensitivity level.

[Note: Please refer to WiMAX Forum
Mobile Radio Conformance Tests, v1.0.0.]

Pass verdict:
For all modulation and coding combinations and test cases, the number of packets in error is less or equal
to the limits in Table 36, Table 37 and Table 38.

Fail verdict:
For at least one of the modulation and coding combinations in one of the test cases, the number of packets
in error is higher than the limits in Table 36, Table 37 and Table 38.

Table 39. Max MS Sensitivity Level for 3.5 MHz Bandwidth
Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -92.4 -88.37 -87.37
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -89.0 -83.37 -82.37
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -86.7 -82.87 -81.87
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -82.6 -77.87 -76.87
PUSC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -81.5 -78.37 -77.37
PUSC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -78.4 -74.37 -73.37
PUSC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -77.3 -72.37 N/A
PUSC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -75.4 -70.37 N/A
AMC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -92.4 TBD TBD Wave-2
AMC CTC_16QAM-1/2 -86.7 TBD TBD Wave-2
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 68
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -82.6 TBD TBD Wave-2
AMC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -77.3 TBD N/A Wave-2

Table 40. Max MS Sensitivity Level for 5 MHz Bandwidth
Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -91.0 -86.91 -85.91
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -87.6 -81.91 -80.91
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -85.3 -81.41 -80.41
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -81.2 -76.41 -75.41
PUSC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -80.1 -76.91 -75.91
PUSC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -77.0 -72.91 -71.91
PUSC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -75.9 -70.91 N/A
PUSC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -74.0 -68.91 N/A

Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -89.4 -85.36 -84.36
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -86.0 -80.36 -79.36
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -83.7 -79.86 -78.86
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 69
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -79.6 -74.86 -73.86
PUSC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -78.5 -75.36 -74.36
PUSC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -75.4 -71.36 -70.36
PUSC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -74.3 -69.36 N/A
PUSC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -72.4 -67.36 N/A

Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -88.5 -84.39 -83.39
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -85.1 -79.39 -78.39
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -82.8 -78.89 -77.89
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -78.7 -73.89 -72.89
PUSC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -77.6 -74.39 -73.39
PUSC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -74.5 -70.39 -69.39
PUSC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -73.4 -68.39 N/A
PUSC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -71.5 -66.39 N/A
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 70

Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -88.0 -83.90 -82.90
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -84.6 -78.90 -77.90
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -82.3 -78.40 -77.40
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -78.2 -73.40 -72.40
PUSC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -77.1 -73.90 -72.90
PUSC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -74.0 -69.90 -68.90
PUSC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -72.9 -67.90 N/A
PUSC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -71.0 -65.90 N/A

0.0.1 2006-05-07 Laith Naaman Initial draft

0.2 2006-5-26 Laith Naaman Revised draft
0.3 2006-6-16 Jeff Zhuang Revised draft
0.4 2006-8-21 Jeff Zhuang Revised draft based on July F2F ad-hoc
0.5 2006-8-28 Jeff Zhuang Revised draft after August F2F ad-hoc
Merged
version 1
2006-11-06 Jeff Zhuang Merged with the Ping version with also a few
corrections

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 71
9.1.11 MS-10.1: MS Transmit and Receive HARQ
MS-10a.1: MS Transmit HARQ
The purpose of this test is to verify proper handling of HARQ UL traffic, including: proper construction of HARQ
UL bursts per ACID allocations, performing retransmissions per AI_SN indication and accommodating sufficient
memory per category parameters.

According to the Mobile WiMAX System Profile, the only HARQ mode that is mandated and the only
one that will be tested is the Chase Combining with CTC mode.
The 802.16 standard and the WiMAX Mobile PICS require the MS to conform to the following
functional requirements on the UL direction:
- Construction of proper HARQ UL burst, including padding and CRC, per ACID allocation.
- Perform new data transmissions or retransmissions of HARQ bursts according to AI_SN
indication in the IE.
- Accommodate sufficient UL memory per HARQ channel according to MS declared HARQ
Category, or total UL memory, if the Aggregation Flag is set for the UL buffer capability.
- Support the MS declared number of HARQ channels (per MS Category).
- The MS should support up to 2 HARQ bursts in UL sub-frame (if there are no non-HARQ
bursts in the same frame).

Table 45. PICS Coverage for MS-10a.1
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.10, Table A.27 P (UL only, SN for
reordering not tested)
D
2. A.5.1.1.2.2.18, Table A.125 P (UL only, PDU SN
for reordering not
tested)
I
3. A.5.1.2.2.2.17, Table A.232 P (UL only, PDU SN
for reordering not
tested)
I
4. A.6.2, Table A.280, Items 14,
15, 18
T
I
5. A.7.1.16, Table 345, Items 38,
40
P
I

This test requires the Signaling Unit (BSE) to accept packets on the Test Control Network and send
them on the DL to the MS UUT. The PCT should be able to control the number of HARQ
retransmissions (with and without regard to the correctness of the HARQ burst received from the MS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 72
UUT), the repetition code of each burst, and the UIUC for all UL allocations (to control the MCS used
for each burst).

The Signaling Unit (BSE) should also be able to forward packets received from the MS UUT to the
PCT for inspection. Moreover, the Signaling Unit (BSE) should be capable of forwarding all
management messages received from the MS UUT, for inspection by the PCT.

Some control of the Signaling Unit (BSE)s scheduling is required (See details in Section 9.1.11.5).

The Signaling Unit (BSE) shall support category 4 HARQ UL (receive) buffer and support the
aggregate capability when receiving HARQ UL bursts sent by the MS UUT.

The Signaling Unit (BSE) shall be able to verify that burst retransmissions by the MS UUT are
identical to the original transmission of the same burst. (The signaling Unit may use HARQ combining
or any other method for this purpose.)

The RCTT shall control the Signaling Unit (BSE)s transmit power and the power with which the
Signaling Unit (BSE) instructs the MS UUT to transmit.

The Signaling Unit (BSE) shall be configured to comply with the appropriate band class for the MS
UUT, and will be configured to use a single zone in the UL or DL during this test. The DL/UL ratio
should be set according to Table 47.

Unless otherwise indicated in the test procedure, the MAPs sent by the Signaling Unit (BSE) should be
sent with the following MCS and repetition factor: QPSK-1/2, repetition factor = 4. Also, unless
otherwise indicated in the test procedure, the Signaling Unit (BSE) shall not include HARQ feedback
(ACKs and NACKs) in the MAPs.

The test requires that the PCT have packet generator and analyzer capabilities.
If not otherwise mentioned in the test procedure, the packet generator will output packets at a rate of
100 packets per second. These packets will be ICMP-echo-request packets, with random data for
payload, sent to the MS UUT through the Signaling Unit (BSE)s DL connection. The MS UUT shall
reply to these packets with ICMP-echo-reply sent back to the packet analyzer, through the UL
connection to the Signaling Unit (BSE). The packet analyzer shall be able to verify that the data
received is identical to the data sent according to the Identifier and Sequence Number fields in the
ICMP-echo-request and ICMP-echo-reply messages.

Also, an attenuator should be used to control the received power at the MS UUT.

The MS UUT shall support an IP stack (over the WiMAX stack) which includes the IP and ICMP
protocols. It shall reply with ICMP-echo-reply to all ICMP-echo-request messages. The minimum rate
in which the MS UUT is required to reply to ICMP-echo-request messages is 200 packets per second.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 73
The MS UUT vendor shall indicate what category the MS supports. This declared category will be
used to identify parameters to be used in this test.

Table 46. Service Flow description for MS-10a.1
Item
F
r
a
g
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n

E
n
c
r
y
p
t
i
o
n

P
a
c
k
i
n
g

P
H
S

C
R
C

H
A
R
Q

A
R
Q

More Service Flow Characteristics
1 N N N N Y Y N
Uplink UGS
Maximum Latency Infinity
2 Y N N N Y Y N
Uplink UGS
3 N N N N Y N N
Downlink BE

Table 47. Number of symbols for DL and UL for MS-10a.1
BW Number of symbols (DL,UL)
5 or 10 MHz (26,21)
8.75 MHz (27,15)
3.5 or 7 MHz (18,15)

9.1.11.4 Test setup

Figure 16. Test Setup for MS Transmit HARQ

Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
MS
UUT
ABS
Attenuator
AMS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 74
Initial Conditions:
Step 1. Create and activate a DL service flow, per Item 3 in Table 46, using a BS-initiates DSA-
REQ, and wait for the transaction to succeed. The MCS used for the DL SF is 64QAM-5/6.
MS
and at A
BS
to the limit specified in Table 49. (10dB
higher than sensitivity level set in standard and TWG System Profile) and no higher than
10dB below maximum transmit power. Preferably, use the closed loop power control
mechanism, controlled by the Signaling Unit (BSE) to achieve the proper transmit power of
the MS UUT.

[Test Set 1: The following steps verify that the MS UUT constructs proper HARQ UL bursts.
They also verify that the MS UUT supports the declared number of HARQ UL channels and
performs retransmissions per AI_SN. The MS UUTs conformance to buffer size per channel is
also verified:]

Initial Conditions:
Step 1. Verify that the initial conditions of the entire test (first paragraph of this section) are met.
Step 2. Create and activate an UL service flow, per Item 2 in Table 46, using a BS-initiated DSA-
REQ, and wait for the transaction to succeed.

Test Procedure:
Step 1. Configure the Signaling Unit (BSE) so that it schedules a different ACID in each frame, in a
round-robin manner (i.e., retransmissions occur only after n frames, where n is the number
of UL HARQ channels). Each ACID allocation is limited to the minimum between the
buffer size per channel, according to Table 48 and the needed allocation to transmit a single
packet per burst. In any case, the number of byte allocated per UL sub-frame shall not
exceed Maximum MAC data byte per UL sub-frame, as reported by the MS UUT in the
SBC-REQ message or the available capacity of the UL sub-frame.
Step 2. Configure the Signaling Unit (BSE) so that it schedules 2 transmissions per HARQ UL
burst (first transmission toggles AI_SN and in the next transmission AI_SN stays the same,
regardless of the success of the first transmission).
Step 3. Configure the Signaling Unit (BSE) to forward only the second transmission of each
received burst to the MAC layer (even if the first transmission was successful).
Step 4. Packet generator generates the packet number and size as specified in Table 50. A new
packet is generated as soon as the packet analyzer detects that a packet has been
successfully received by the BS. At the beginning of the test 2M packets are generated,
were M is defined in Table 50. This creates a sort of window of 2M packets and ensures
that no more than 2M packets are queued in the system,
.
Step 5. Repeat for all MCSs and all packet sizes (per Table 50).

[Test Set 2: The following steps verify that the MS UUT supports the declared number of HARQ
UL bursts per UL sub-frame:]

Initial Conditions:
Step 2. Create and activate n UL service flows, per Item 1 in Table 46, using a BS-initiated DSA-
REQ, and wait for the transactions to succeed. n is the maximum number of HARQ bursts
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 75
in UL sub-frame, as per declared category and Table 48 (currently, n = 2 for all categories).
DSA-REQs shall indicate that each SF is mapped to a different ACID.

Test Procedure:
Step 1. Set maximum number of HARQ transmissions to 1 (no retransmissions).
Step 2. Configure Signaling Unit (BSE) to allocate every 4 frames n 300-byte UL grants with MCS
= 16QAM-3/4.
Step 3. Packet generator generates n 288-byte packets every 4 frames (n x 50 packets per second),
one for each SF. Send the number of packets specified in Table 50 for 288-byte packet, per
SF.
Step 4. If the declared capability for HARQ UL buffer is with a cleared Aggregation Flag, end test.

[Test Set 3: The following steps verify that the MS UUT conforms to the declared total buffer
size when the Aggregation Flag is set:]

Initial Conditions:
Step 2. Create and activate an UL service flow using a BS-initiated DSA-REQ, per Item 2 in Table
46, and wait for the transactions to succeed.

Test Procedure:
Step 1. Configure the Signaling Unit (BSE) so that it schedules 2 transmissions per HARQ UL
burst (first transmission toggles AI_SN and in the next transmission AI_SN stays the same).
Step 2. Configure the Signaling Unit (BSE) to allocate to ACID 1 the minimum number of bytes
between Maximum MAC data bytes per UL sub-frame and of the total number of data
bytes according to buffer capability (per coding rate and declared category) in each even
frame and to allocate to ACID 2 the minimum number of bytes between Maximum MAC
data bytes per UL sub-frame and of the total number of data bytes according to buffer
capability (per coding rate and declared category) in each odd frame. Allocations should use
16QAM-3/4 as MCS.
Step 3. Packet generator generates 576-byte packets. Number of packets as specified in Table 50. A
new packet is generated as soon as the packet analyzer detects that a packet has been
successfully received by the BS. At the beginning of the test 2M packets are generated,
were M is defined in Table 50. This creates a sort of window of 2M packets and ensures
that no more than 2M packets are queued in the system,

Pass Verdict
1. For Test Set 1, the number of packets per MCS and packet size combination, not received by
the Signaling Unit (BSE) is less than the limit set in Table 50, and
2. For Test Set 2, the number of packets per SF not received by the Signaling Unit (BSE) is less
than the limit set in Table 50, and
3. For Test Set 3, if relevant, the number of packets not received by the Signaling Unit (BSE) is
less than the limit set in Table 50.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 76
Table 48. Minimum values per HARQ category for UL HARQ
CAT Min
Number of
HARQ
Channels
Min K
value
Min for Max HARQ
bursts in sub-frame
Aggregation
Flag
Pass Fail
1 4 20 2 OFF
2 8 20 2 ON
3 8 20 2 ON
4 8 20 2 ON
5 10 20 2 ON
6 10 22 2 ON
7 10 22 2 ON

Table 49 describes the receiver input levels which are 10dB above the sensitivity threshold defined in
the TWG System Profile.
Table 49. Receiver Input Level (dBm) for Functional Tests of HARQ Transmitter
Bandwidth,
MHz
QPSK 16QAM 64QAM
-1/2 -3/4 -1/2 -3/4 -1/2 -2/3 -3/4 -5/6
3.5 -82.9 -79.5 -77.2 -73.1 -72.0 -68.9 -67.8 -65.9
5 -81.5 -78.1 -75.8 -71.7 -70.6 -67.5 -66.4 -64.5
7 -79.9 -76.5 -74.2 -70.1 -69 -65.9 -64.8 -62.9
8.75 -79 -75.6 -73.3 -69.2 -68.1 -65 -63.9 -62
10 -78.5 -75.1 -72.8 -68.7 -67.6 -64.5 -63.4 -61.5

Table 50. Parameters for Functional tests and Acceptance Limit

Message Payload Length
(bits)
Threshold PER Number of
packets sent N
Maximum number
of error packets M
Short
8 288
0.23% 10,000 23
Default_Packet_Random 5768 0.47% 6,000 28


WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 77
Table 51. Revision History for MS-10a.1
0.0.1 2006-05-06 Aran Bergman Initial draft
Abstract, testing requirements and introduction
sections inserted.
0.1.0 2006-05-09 Aran Bergman Added draft test procedure and appendix.
0.1.1 2006-05-11 Aran Bergman Integrate contributors comments for 0.1.0.
Submitted first draft to MTG.
0.2.0 2006-05-21 Aran Bergman Changes due to comments and ad-hoc decisions in
MTG May FtF (Caesarea):
1. Separate the test into HARQ transmit and
HARQ receive tests
2. Use ICMP loopback (echo-request and echo-
reply)
3. Test only verifies compliance to category
values and not values reported by SBC-REQ.
4. Updated test setup.
0.2.1 2006-06-12 Aran Bergman Changes before MTG June FtF meeting.
Removed retransmissions with modified repetition
code. Moved success criteria tables into the test
(was formerly part of Appendix) and set success
criteria thresholds instead of TBDs.
0.2.2 2006-06-18 Aran Bergman Changed allocation from and of the total
buffer size to for a more uniform test.
0.3.0 2006-10-17 Aran Bergman Changed due to discussions with Mario from
Cetecom (compared to v0.8.0 of MRCT doc):
1. Changed Initial Conditions section
2. Numbering of test steps and Test Sets
3. Capability of BSE to verify correct
retransmissions by MS UUT
4. Change initial conditions for transmit power.
Adding explicit explanation of the window of
2M packets.
0.4.0 2006-11-10 Aran Bergman and
Hassan Yaghoobi
Packet sizes adjusted according to those of
Appendix 2.
3.5 MHz BW covered properly

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 78
MS-10b.1: MS Receive HARQ
The purpose of this test is to verify proper handling of HARQ DL traffic, including: sending ACK/NACK for proper
reception of HARQ bursts, conformance with category parameters and channel mapping. The test also verifies the
ability of the MS receiver to achieve increased gain from chase combining in loss scenario.

According to the Mobile WiMAX System Profile, the only HARQ mode that is mandated and the only
one that will be tested is the Chase Combining with CTC mode.

For the DL direction, the 802.16 standard and the WiMAX Mobile PICS mandate the following
functional capabilities:
- Sending ACK on the ACKCH upon correct reception of a HARQ burst and sending NACK
upon incorrect reception.
- Ability to support HARQ ACK Delay for DL burst of 1 frame.
- Conformance with category parameters (memory size, number of channels and maximum
HARQ bursts in a DL sub-frame).

Furthermore, the following performance requirements are described in the 802.16 standard:
- Performance improvement due to SNR gain by combining previously erroneously decoded
burst and retransmitted burst.

Table 52. PICS Coverage for MS-10b.1
Ite
m
Reference Item and Section Number
in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.10, Table A.27 P (DL only, SN for
reordering not tested)
D
2. A.5.1.1.1.10, Table A.28 T
D
3. A.5.1.1.2.2.18, Table A.125 P (DL only, PDU SN
for reordering not
tested)
I
4. A.5.1.2.2.2.17, Table A.232 P (DL only, PDU SN
for reordering not
tested)
I
5. A.6.2, Table A.279, Items 12, 13 T
I
6. A.7.1.3, Table 292, Item 23 T
D
7. A.7.1.16, Table 345, Items 38, 40 P
I

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 79
This test requires the Signaling Unit (BSE) to accept packets on the Test Control Network and send them on the DL
to the MS UUT. The PCT should be able to control the number of HARQ retransmissions (with and without regard
to the ACK/NACK received from the MS UUT), the repetition of each burst, and the DIUC for all DL allocations
(to control the MCS used for each burst).

The Signaling Unit (BSE) should also be able to forward packets received from the MS UUT to the
PCT for inspection. Moreover, the Signaling Unit (BSE) should be capable of counting or forwarding
ACKs and NACKs received from the MS UUT, and all management messages received from the MS
UUT, for inspection by the PCT.

The Signaling Unit (BSE) should be capable of transmitting a HARQ burst with modified CRC (e.g.,
CRC bar). Also, some control of the Signaling Unit (BSE)s scheduling is required (See details in
section 9.1.11.13).

The Signaling Unit (BSE) shall be configured to comply with the appropriate band class for the MS
UUT, and will be configured to use a single zone in the UL or DL during this test. The DL/UL ratio
should be set according to Table 54.

Unless otherwise indicated in the test procedure, the MAPs sent by the Signaling Unit (BSE) should be
sent with the following MCS and repetition factor: QPSK-1/2, repetition factor = 4.

The test requires that the PCT have packet generator and analyzer capabilities.
If not otherwise mentioned in the test procedure, the packet generator will output packets at a rate of
100 packets per second. These packets will be ICMP-echo-request packets (packet sizes are calculated
to make the burst sizes according to Table 27), with random data for payload, sent to the MS UUT
through the Signaling Unit (BSE)s DL connection. The MS UUT shall reply to these packets with
ICMP-echo-reply sent back to the packet analyzer, through the UL connection to the Signaling Unit
(BSE). The packet analyzer shall be able to verify that the data received is identical to the data sent
according to the Identifier and Sequence Number fields in the ICMP-echo-request and ICMP-echo-
reply messages.

A signal generator, capable of generating white Gaussian noise signal that will be combined with the
Signaling Unit (BSE) output, to generate AWGN channel, is needed for this test, to test the combining
performance. Also, an attenuator should be used to control the received power at the MS UUT,
circulators to separate the DL and UL channels and a combiner.

The MS UUT shall support an IP stack (over the WiMAX stack) which includes the IP and ICMP
protocols. It shall reply with ICMP-echo-reply to all ICMP-echo-request messages. The minimum rate
in which the MS UUT is required to reply to ICMP-echo-request messages is 200 packets per second.

The MS UUT vendor shall indicate what category the MS supports. This declared category will be
used to identify parameters to be used in this test. For Category 1, the vendor will declare whether the
aggregation flag for the DL buffer capability is set or cleared.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 80
Table 53. Service Flow description for MS-10b.1
Item
F
r
a
g
m
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n

E
n
c
r
y
p
t
i
o
n

P
a
c
k
i
n
g

P
H
S

C
R
C

H
A
R
Q

A
R
Q

More Service Flow Characteristics
1 N N N N Y Y N
Downlink BE
2 Y N N N Y Y N
Downlink BE
PDU extended subheader enabled.
3 Y N N N Y N N
Uplink UGS

Table 54. Number of symbols for DL and UL for MS-10b.1
BW Number of symbols (DL,UL)
5 or 10 MHz (26,21)
8.75 MHz (27,15)
3.5 or 7 MHz (18,15)

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 81
9.1.11.12 Test setup

Figure 17. Test Setup for MS Receive HARQ

If the MS UUT has more than one receive connector, the cable from the right attenuator should be
attached to a splitter and the output of this splitter should be connected to all the input connectors
(through the circulator to an antenna that is also use to transmit). See example in Figure 18.

Figure 18. Test Setup for MS Receive HARQ - Multiple Rx Antennas

Initial Conditions:
Step 1. Set the HARQ ACK Delay for DL bursts TLV in the UCD to 1 frame and configure the
Signaling Unit (BSE) to allocate ACKCH 1 frame after each DL HARQ burst.
Step 2. Turn MS power on. Wait for network entry procedure to end.
Step 3. Create and activate an UL service flow, per Item 3 in Table 53, using a BS-initiates DSA-
REQ, and wait for the transaction to succeed. The MCS for this SF shall be 16QAM-3/4
(allows up to 3780 bytes in an UL sub-frame with all 35 subchannels and 18 symbols for
M M
S
/BS

Signaling

Unit

(BSE/MSE)

VSA / Avg

Power
Meter

BS / MS
UUT

A
M S /BS

Attenuator 1

A
M
S
/BS

Attenuator 2
Circulator
Circulator
Splitter
Rx1/Tx
Rx2
Rx3
Interference
Source
+

Signaling

Unit

(BSE/MSE)

VSA / Avg

Power
Meter

BS / MS

UU
T

A
M S /BS

Attenuator 1

A
MS /BS

Attenuator 2
Circulator

Circulator

Interference
Source
+
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 82
data), and the allocations shall be according to the packet size defined for the test steps
below.
BS
to at least the limit specified in Table 59 (10dB higher
than sensitivity level set in standard and TWG System Profile) and no higher than 10dB
below maximum transmit power. Preferably, The Signaling Unit (BSE) shall use the closed
loop power control mechanism, controlled by the Signaling Unit (BSE) to achieve the
proper transmit power of the MS UUT.

[Test Set 1: The following steps verify that the MS sends ACK on the ACKCH for correctly
received DL HARQ bursts. They also verify that the MS is capable of receiving properly
constructed HARQ bursts, and that it can send the feedback within 1 frame:]

Initial Conditions:
Step 2. Create and activate a single DL service flow, per Item 1 in Table 53, using a BS-initiated
DSA-REQ, and wait for the transaction to succeed.
MS
to the limit specified in Table 59 for QPSK-3/4.

Test Procedure:
Step 1. Set the MCS (in the Signaling Unit (BSE)) for DL bursts to QPSK-3/4. Set the number of
transmissions per DL HARQ burst to 1 (no retransmissions).
Step 2. Set the grant interval for the UL SF (used for the loopback) to 4 frames.
Step 3. Send the number of packets specified in Table 60. The inter-arrival time of packets shall be
4 frames, thus the packets will be generated at a rate of 50 packets per second.
Step 4. Repeat for all packet lengths, as described in Table 60.

[Test Set 2: The following steps verify that the MS sends NACK on erroneously received bursts:]

Initial Conditions:
Same as initial conditions for Test Set 1.

Test Procedure:
Step 1. Configure the Signaling Unit (BSE) to send HARQ bursts to the MS UUT with modified
CRC (e.g., CRC bar).
Step 2. Set the grant interval for the UL SF (used for the loopback) to 4 frames.
Step 3. Send 2000 packet of 576 bytes, at a rate of 50 packets per second (a packet every 4 frames)

[Test Set 3: The following steps verify that there is performance gain from combining
retransmissions at the MS UUT receiver:]

Initial Conditions:
MS
to the limit specified in Table 59 for QPSK-1/2.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 83
Test Procedure:
Step 1. Set the MCS (in the Signaling Unit (BSE)) for DL bursts to QPSK-1/2.
Step 2. Configure the PCT to generate 240-bytes packets.
Step 3. Find the minimum AWGN signal level (and thus, the maximum received SNR at the MS
UUT) for which PER > 0.5. Mark this SNR as
MCS
SNR
n
, where MCS is the modulation and
coding scheme used (e.g., 16QAM-3/4) and n is the number of bytes in the packet. This
SNR should be found with at least 0.5dB resolution and for a DL SF with HARQ enabled
but with no retransmissions. (See Section 9.1.11.17 for a suggestion for an algorithm that
may be used to find this SNR.)
Step 4. Set the maximum number of transmissions per DL HARQ burst to 2 (1 retransmission).
Step 5. Set the grant interval for the UL SF (used for the loopback) to 2 frames and set the grant
size to accommodate the packets sent on the DL.
Step 6. Send the number of packets specified in Table 56. The inter arrival time of packets shall be
2 frames, thus the packets will be generated at a rate of 100 packets per second.
Step 7. Repeat for 64QAM-5/6.

[Test Set 4: The following steps verify that the MS UUT supports maximum number of HARQ
DL bursts in sub-frame in accordance with declared category:]

Initial Conditions:
Step 2. Create and activate n DL service flows, per Item 1 in Table 53, using a BS-initiated DSA-
REQ, and wait for the transactions to succeed. n is the maximum number of HARQ bursts
in DL sub-frame, as per the declared category. DSA-REQs shall indicate that each SF is
mapped to a different ACID. MCS for these DL bursts shall be 16QAM-3/4.
MS
to the limit specified in Table 59 for 16QAM-3/4.

Test Procedure:
Step 2. Set the UL grant interval to 4 frames and the grant size to n x 300 bytes.
Step 3. Packet generator generates n 288-byte packets every 4 frames (n x 50 packets per second),
one for each SF. Send the number of packets specified in Table 60 for 288-byte packet, per
SF.

[Test Set 5: The following steps verify that the MS UUT supports number of DL HARQ channels
per declared category and supports the declared memory for DL HARQ, if the Aggregation Flag
is cleared:]

Initial Conditions:
Step 2. Create and activate a DL service flow, per Item 2 in Table 53, using a BS-initiated DSA-
REQ, and wait for the transactions to succeed.
MS

Test Procedure:
Step 2. Configure the Signaling Unit (BSE) so that it schedules a different ACID in each frame, in a
round-robin manner (i.e., retransmissions occur only after n frames, where n is the number
of DL HARQ channels). Each ACID allocation is limited to the minimum among buffer size
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 84
per channel, Maximum MAC data per DL sub-frame and maximum available data
allocation size per DL sub-frame.
Step 3. Set the UL grant interval to 2 frames and the grant size to 1500 bytes.
UUT) for which Burst Error Rate > 0.9. Mark this SNR as
2
SNR . This SNR should be
found with at least 0.5dB resolution and for a DL SF with HARQ enabled but with no
retransmissions. (See Section 9.1.11.18 for a suggestion of an algorithm that may be used to
find this SNR.)
Step 5. Set maximum number of HARQ transmissions to 4 (3 retransmissions).
MS
to the limit specified in Table 59. Configure the signal
generator to transmit AWGN signal so that SNR at A
MS
is
2
SNR found in Step 4of Test Set
5.
Step 7. Packet generator generates packets of the size as in Step 2 of Test Set 5 (that is, the
minimum among buffer size per channel, Maximum MAC data per DL sub-frame, and
maximum available data allocation size per DL sub-frame) and packet number N as
specified in Table 57. A new packet is generated as soon as the packet analyzer detects that
a packet has been successfully received by the MS. At the beginning of the test 2M
packets are generated, were M is defined in Table 57. This creates a sort of window of
2M packets and ensures that no more than 2M packets are queued in the system,
Step 8. If the Aggregation Flag is cleared for the declared category, end test.

[Test Set 6: The following steps verify that the MS UUT supports the declared memory for DL
HARQ, if the Aggregation Flag is set:]

Initial Conditions:
MS

Test Procedure
Step 2. Configure Signaling Unit (BSE) to use 16QAM-3/4.
Step 3. Set the UL grant interval to 2 frames and the grant size to the minimum between of the
total number of data bytes according to the DL HARQ buffer capability and Maximum
MAC data bytes per DL sub-frame.
Step 4. Configure the Signaling Unit (BSE) to allocate to ACID 1 the minimum number of bytes
among Maximum MAC data bytes per DL sub-frame, of the total number of data bytes
according to buffer capability (per coding rate and declared category), and maximum
available data allocation size per DL sub-frame in each even frame and to allocate to ACID
2 the same number of bytes in each odd frame.
UUT) for which Burst Error Rate > 0.9. Mark this SNR as
3
SNR . This SNR should be
found with at least 0.5dB resolution and for a DL SF with HARQ enabled but with no
retransmissions. (See Section 9.1.11.18 for a suggestion of an algorithm that may be used to
find this SNR.)
MS
to the limit specified in Table 59. Configure the signal
generator to transmit AWGN signal so that SNR at A
MS
is
3
SNR found in Step 5 of Test Set
6.
Step 7. Set maximum number of HARQ transmissions to 4 (3 retransmission).
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 85
Step 8. Packet generator generates packets of the size as in Step 4 of Test Set 6 (that is, the
minimum number of bytes among Maximum MAC data bytes per DL sub-frame, of the
total number of data bytes according to buffer capability (per coding rate and declared
category), and maximum available data allocation size per DL sub-frame) and packet
number N as specified in Table 58. A new packet is generated as soon as the packet
analyzer detects that a packet has been successfully received by the MS. At the beginning of
the test 2M packets are generated, were M is defined in Table 58. This creates a sort of
window of 2M packets and ensures that no more than 2M packets are queued in the
system,

Pass Verdict
1. For Test Set 1, the number of packets not received by MS UUT is less than the limit set in
Table 60 and the number of bursts that were not ACKed is less than the same limit and the
feedback is sent 1 frame after the DL frame in which the HARQ burst was sent from the
Signaling Unit (BSE), and
2. For Test Set 2, at least 1980 NACKs were received by the Signaling Unit (BSE) from the MS
UUT, and all NACKs were received 1 frame after the HARQ DL burst was sent, and
3. For Test Set 3, the number of packets not received by MS, per MCS, is less than the limit set
in Table 56, and
4. For Test Set 4, the number of packets per SF not received by the MS is less than the limit set
in Table 60, (This is verified by the amount of packet looped back to the BS), and
5. For Test Set 5, the number of packets not received by the MS is less than the limit set per
HARQ category declared in Table 57, and
6. For Test Set 6, if relevant, the number of packets not received by the MS is less than the limit
set per the bandwidth under test in Table 58.

Table 55. Minimum values per HARQ category for DL HARQ
CAT Min Number
of HARQ
Channels
Min K value Min for Max HARQ
bursts in sub-frame
Aggregation Flag Pass Fail
1 4 12 2 Dont care
2 16 16 5 ON
3 16 20 5 ON
4 16 22 5 ON
5 16 24 5 ON
6 16 24 5 ON
7 16 26 5 ON

For testing combining gain, the SNR at the MS is set so that the PER > 50%. If no combining is done in the
MS, the minimum expected PER, when a maximum of 2 transmissions is used is 0.5
2
=25%. We expect that
a MS that does perform combining will experience PER better than 10%. The values of M in Table 56 were
chosen to that the probability that a MS that experiences PER > 10% will pass the test is less than 0.1%.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 86
Table 56. Parameters for Qualitative tests and Acceptance Limit for MS-10b.1
(bits)
Threshold PER Number of packets
sent N
Maximum number of
error packets M
Tiny
8 240
10% 1,500 108
Short
8 288
10% 1,500 108
Default_Packet_Random 5768 10% 1,500 108

For testing combining gain when verifying memory size, the SNR at the MS is set so that the PER > 90%.
If no combining is done in the MS, the minimum expected PER, when a maximum of 4 transmissions is
used is 0.9
4
=66%. We expect that a MS that does perform combining will experience BER better than 1e-6.

Table 57. Parameters for buffer size test in Test Set 5 for MS-10b.1

HARQ Category
declared
Payload Length (bits)
for Threshold PER
calculation only
packets sent N
Maximum number of
error packets M
1 or 3 12,288 1.22% 30,000 367
2 6,144 0.61% 30,000 184
4 17,378 1.72% 30,000 517
5 24,576 2.44% 30,000 732
6 24,576 2.44% 30,000 732
7 34,756 3.44% 30,000 1032

Table 58. Parameters for buffer size test in Test Set 6 for MS-10b.1
Bandwidth (MHz)
under test
Payload Length (bits)
for Threshold PER
calculation only
packets sent N
Maximum number of
error packets M
10 47,520 4.64% 30,000 1393
8.75 49,680 4.85% 30,000 1454
7 30,240 2.98% 30,000 894
5 23,760 2.35% 30,000 705
3.5 15,120 1.50% 30,000 451

Table 59. Receiver Input Level (dBm) for MS-10b.1 test
Bandwidth,
MHz
QPSK 16QAM 64QAM
-1/2 -3/4 -1/2 -3/4 -1/2 -2/3 -3/4 -5/6
3.5 -82.9 -79.5 -77.2 -73.1 -72.0 -68.9 -67.8 -65.9
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 87
5 -81.5 -78.1 -75.8 -71.7 -70.6 -67.5 -66.4 -64.5
7 -79.9 -76.5 -74.2 -70.1 -69 -65.9 -64.8 -62.9
8.75 -79 -75.6 -73.3 -69.2 -68.1 -65 -63.9 -62
10 -78.5 -75.1 -72.8 -68.7 -67.6 -64.5 -63.4 -61.5
SNR
Rx
, dB 2.9 6.3 8.6 12.7 13.8 16.9 18 19.9

Table 60. Parameters for Functional tests and Acceptance Limit for MS-10b.1
(bits)
sent N
Maximum number
of error packets M
Tiny
8 240
0.19% 13,000 25
Short
8 288
0.23% 10,000 23
Default_Packet_Random 5768 0.47% 6,000 28

Table 61. Maximum data bytes per coding rate for each HARQ channel
Category 1/2 2/3 3/4 5/6
1 (Wave 1) 256 341 384 426
1 1024 1365 1536 1706
2 512 682 768 853
3 1024 1365 1536 1706
4 1448 1930 2172 2413
5 2048 2731 3072 3413
6 2048 2731 3072 3413
7 2896 1730 4344 4826

Not applicable.

9.1.11.16 Revision History

Table 62. Revision History for MS-10b.1
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 88
0.0.1 2006-05-06 Aran Bergman Initial draft
Abstract, testing requirements and introduction
sections inserted.
0.1.0 2006-05-09 Aran Bergman Added draft test procedure and appendix.
0.1.1 2006-05-11 Aran Bergman Integrate contributors comments for 0.1.0.
Submitted first draft to MTG.
0.2.0 2006-05-21 Aran Bergman Changes due to comments and ad-hoc decisions in
MTG May FtF (Caesarea):
1. Separate the test into HARQ transmit and
HARQ receive tests
2. Use ICMP loopback (echo-request and echo-
reply)
3. Test only verifies compliance to category
values and not values reported by SBC
4. Use relative approach to test combining gain.
5. Updated Test setup.
0.2.1 2006-06-12 Aran Bergman Changes before MTG June FtF meeting.
Removed retransmissions with modified repetition
code.
Added test setup for multiple receive paths.
Moved success criteria tables into the test (was
formerly part of Appendix) and set success criteria
thresholds instead of TBDs.
0.2.2 Aran Bergman Added calibration of start SNR for DL HARQ
buffer tests, including adding another appendix
and a table.
Changed number of retransmission for the
memory verification tests.
Modified and of the total buffer size to .
Added one packet size of 240 bytes to fit into
QPSK-1/2 for CAT1 Wave 1.
0.4.0 2006-11-10 Aran Bergman and
Hassan Yaghoobi
Packet sizes adjusted according to those of
Appendix 2.
3.5 MHz BW covered properly

9.1.11.17 Appendix - finding maximum SNR for PER > 0.5
This section suggests a way to find
MCS
SNR
n
as needed in Step 3 of Test Set 3.
Step 1. Create and activate a DL SF with HARQ enabled, but with no retransmissions.
Step 2. Create and activate an UL SF (for the ICMP-loopback).
MS
to the limit specified in Table 59.
Step 4. Set the AWGN generator so that the SNR at A
MS
is as the standard specified for the MCS
used (can also be found in Table 59).
Step 5. Send the number of packets as specified in Table 57 (per the HARQ category declared).
Step 6. Verify that no more than M packet have been lost.
Step 7. Increase the AWGN signal level so that SNR at A
MS
is 0.5dB lower.
Step 8. Send 100 packets on the DL SF, with packet inter arrival time of 2 frames.
Step 9. If less than 58 packets were lost (verified by the feedback from the MS UUT
ACK/NACK), go to Step 7.
Step 10. If 58 packet or more were lost (verified by the number of NACKs), mark the SNR as
MCS
SNR
n
for the number of byte of the sent packets and the used MCS.

9.1.11.18 Appendix - finding maximum SNR for Burst Error Rate > 0.9
MS
to the limit specified in Table 59.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 89
Step 2. Set the AWGN generator so that the SNR at A
MS
is as the standard specified for the MCS
used (can also be found in Table 59).
Step 3. Send the number of packets as specified in Table 58 (per the bandwidth under test).
Step 4. Verify that no more than M packet have been lost.
Step 5. Increase the AWGN signal level so that SNR at A
MS
is 0.5dB lower.
Step 6. Send enough packets on the DL SF, so that 100 bursts will be transmitter on the DL.
Step 7. If less than 95 of the bursts were lost (verified by the feedback from the MS UUT
ACK/NACK), go to Step 5.
Step 8. If 95 of the bursts or more were lost, stop (verified by the number of NACKs).
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 90
9.1.12 MS-11.1: MS receiver PHY support for handover
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of MS averaged CINR measurement on preamble for Handover.
CINR for link adaptation will be covered by MS-05.1.

interference cancellation etc.).
PCINR for Target (Neighbor) BS consists of several parts:
1) Instantaneous CINR calculation (for the interference signaling BSs)
2) Measurement is averaged (Alpha = 1/16)
3) Measurement reporting in MOB_SCAN_REP
PCINR for handover validates the averaged CINR under AWGN conditions with several fixed mean combinations.

The test specifics HO trigger condition which prevents the handover even when the target CINR is better than the
serving CINR.

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.13, table A.32, item 1
frequency reuse==1
P I
2. A.5.1.1.1.13, table A.32, item 2
frequency reuse==3
P I

supported modulations. The EVM on preamble of BSE shall be less than -30dB. For all the test cases,
the CINR on MAPs guaranteed to be grater than 2dB.

Neighbor BS CINR:
1) For a Neighbor CINR measurement, absolute accuracy is defined as D(i) = reported_dB(i)
True_CINR_dB(i) per ensemble of measurements for a given input average CINR.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 91
2) Channel test is performed for AWGN.
3) HO trigger condition: The Trigger TLV included in DCD shall be set as follows. (Tables 358a and 358b in
IEEE 802.16e)
Type = 0x0 (CINR metric)
Function = 0x6 (Metric of serving BS less than absolute value)
Action = 0x2 (Respond on trigger with MOB_MSHO_REQ)
Value=0xA8 (=-20dB)
Averaging duration=0x10 (=16frames)

9.1.12.4 Test setup
MS
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r
ToSource
Rx
Atten
Atten
Sgnaling Unit (BSE)
Atten
Atten

Figure 19. Test configurations for the CINR test.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 92
Tests are performed for AWGN channels with interfering cells of a few scenarios. The AWGN channel environment
is achieved with thermal noise without inserting external noise sources.

There are two options of test procedure (uncoordinated or coordinated scan), and the test will be carried out upon
MS vendors declaration.

Test cases 1: HO CINR measurement (reuse-1 and reuse-3)
The scenarios for interfering cells are as follows:
Table 64. CINR test points for HO CINR

Average power of serving and interfering BS at
MS antenna port [dBm]
Average CINR (informative)
Scen-
ario#
Serving BS
(segment 0)
[dBm]
Interfering
BS 1
(segment 1)
[dBm]
Interfering
BS 2
(segment 2)
[dBm]
Interfering
BS 3
(segment 2)
[dBm]
Avg CINR
reuse 1
(Interfering
BS1) [dB]
Avg CINR
reuse 3
(Interfering
BS2) [dB]
Avg CINR
reuse 3
(Interfering
BS3) [dB]
Serving
BS CINR
1 -60 -57 -65 -85 1.8 20 -20 -3.6
2 -60 -58 -65 -79 0.8 14 -14 -2.8
3 -60 -59 -65 -73 -0.4 8 -8 -2.1
4 -60 -61 -71 -73 -1.5 2 -2 0.3
5 -60 -62 -76 -73 -2.3 -3 3 1.5
* Preamble Index: Serving BS = 0, Interfering BS1 = 33, Interfering BS2 = 65, Interfering BS3 = 98

Step 1. Initial Conditions: The Signaling Unit (BSE, serving BS) transmits via AWGN channel with
preambles segment ID=0 (PN=0,single PUSC zone with reuse 3 configuration for both reuse 1 and
reuse 3 CINR test, MAPs in lowest MCS, i.e. CTC QPSK 1/2, rep=6)
Step 2. Interfering Source 1 (interfering BS) uses preambles segment ID=1 (PN=33, same frame structure
as BSE)
Step 3. Interfering Source2 (interfering BS) uses preambles segment ID=2 (PN=65,same frame structure as
BSE)
Step 4. Interfering Source3 (interfering BS) uses preambles segment ID=2 (PN=98,same frame structure as
BSE)
Step 5. After preamble, all the BSs use 2 major groups (reuse 3).

Test Procedure:
Step 6. Turn off the MS UUT.
Step 7. Configure the attenuators so that the average powers at the MS antenna input are according to first
scenario in Table 64.
Note. The power of each source can be measured at the combiner input and the combiner loss can be
compensated, and there is no requirement on the accuracy of such compensation, as long as the
Step 8. The additional 10dB attenuation should be applied to all three interfering sources so that the UUT
can be connected to the serving BS
Step 9. The BSE should periodically broadcast MOB_NBR-ADV, DCD, and UCD message.
Step 10. Turn on the MS UUT and wait until the network entry on the serving BS is completed.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 93
Step 11. The additional 10dB attenuation should be removed from all three interfering sources.
Step 12.
Option 1: The BSE shall assign an Unsolicited MOB_SCN-RSP to the MS with Scan_Duration = 0,
Report Mode = periodic report, and report period = 50. The BSE may transmit DL traffic to the MS
in every frame.

Option 2: Set the DCD Trigger TLV as follows. (16-2004/Cor2/D3 table 358a)

type:function:action = 0b01 (RSSI metric):101(Metric of serving BS greater than
absolute value):011(On trigger) = 0x6b
trigger value: 0x00 (RSSI=-103.75dBm)
trigger averaging duration: 0x0A (10 frames)

The MS UUT shall generate a MOB_SCN-REQ filled with the proper values required to measure
intra-FA neighbor BS CINR. The Scan_Duration should be less than or equal to 15 frames.

The BSE shall assign a MOB_SCN-RSP as a response to the MOB_SCN-REQ
with the Scan_Duration which is equal to the value that MS requested, Interleaving
interval of 50 Scan Duration frames, Report mode = periodic report, and Report
period = 50 frames. The Report metric shall be BS CINR mean. The BSE may
transmit DL traffic to the MS in every frame.

Step 13. MS UUT shall measure the CINR value for the Interfering Source 1 and 2 and use averaging
parameter (i.e., alpha=1/16) according to the received DCD message.
Step 14. MS UUT shall respond with MOB_SCN-REP containing the CINR measurement of Interfering BS 1
for reuse 1 and Interfering BS 2 for reuse 3 to the BSE.
Step 15. The Signaling Unit (BSE) receiver (connected to the UUT transmit antenna) should receive the
Neighbor CINR reports. The BSE receiver should also be able to detect a case that the MS failed to
transmit MOB_SCN-REP in a certain frame (e.g. by checking the message CRC) and mark the
report as invalid.
Step 16. The BSE should record the correctly reported measurement results from the received MOB_SCN-
REP until the BSE received 200 MOB_SCN-REP measurement reports.
Step 17. Evaluate the accuracy of the reported Neighbor CINR feedback according to the procedure specified
below:
- Calculate: D[k] = reported_CINR_dB(k) true_CINR_dB
The True_CINR_dB is the value in the Table 64as an informative column.
The true CINR (which is actually the true C/I) is the instantaneous power of the preamble
symbol transmitted by the serving BS, divided by:
For reuse 1: The sum of the instantaneous power of the preamble symbol transmitted by the
interfering Source
For reuse 3: The power of interfering Source 3 (which uses the same segment as the
serving BS)
- Calculate a record the average of D[k] over ensemble of measurements for the given scenario.
Step 18. Fill the evaluation result of the Step 17in the relevant column of the Table 65.
Step 19. Go to the Step 6and repeat the test for the next scenarios in the Table 64above.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 94

The absolute accuracy criterion is defined as:

( )
min
10
10
1 10 log 10 1 [ ] 1
CINR D
| |
+ s s + +
|
\ .

min
=30dB, Pr is empirical probability over the ensemble
of measurements.

The accuracy will be checked for both reuse 1 and reuse 3 (Interfering BS1 or Interfering BS2
respectively).

Pass verdict:
The absolute accuracy criterion is met for all measurements made in Step 17.

Fail verdict:
For at least one of the measurements made in Step 17, the absolute accuracy criterion is NOT met.

Absolute criterions should be passed for all scenarios defined for the reuse 1 and reuse 3. This test will
be passed if both reuse 1 and reuse 3 tests in the table below are passed. (The indication of reuse factor
in the MOB NBR-ADV will be tested in Wave 2 test)

Table 65. CINR test points for HO CINR
Average power of serving and interfering BS at MS antenna
port [dBm]
Test Result
Scen-
ario#
Serving BS
(segment 0)
[dBm]
Interfering BS
1 (segment 1)
[dBm]
Interfering BS
2 (segment 2)
[dBm]
Interfering BS
3 (segment 2)
[dBm]
Avg CINR
reuse 1
(Interfering
BS1) [dB]
Avg CINR
reuse 3
(Interfering
BS2) [dB]
Pass or
Fail
1 -60 -57 -65 -85
2 -60 -58 -65 -79
3 -60 -59 -65 -73
4 -60 -61 -71 -73
5 -60 -62 -76 -73

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 95

Not applicable.

0.0.1 2006-06-14 Anat Zilber Initial draft

0.1.0 2006-07-15 Jaeyong Lee Update after F2F discussion
0.2.0 2006-08-27 Jaeyong Lee Update the contents according to the Aug F2F
agreements. Delete the contents which were not
agreed.
0.2.1 2006-09-21 Jaeyong Lee, Taegon
Kim, Kangkyu Lee
Update the contents according to the Sept F2F
agreements.
0.2.3 2006-10-19 Jaeyong Lee. Update the contents according to the Oct F2F
agreements.
0.2.5 2006-11-09 Jaeyong Lee Update the text based on the Ad-Hoc agreement at
the Nov F2F.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 96
9.1.13 MS-11.2: MS receiver PHY support for inter-FA handover
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of MS averaged CINR measurement of a different Frequency
Allocation (FA) on preamble for Handover. The measurement report accuracy will be tested for Reuse 1 scenario.

interference cancellation etc.).
PCINR for Target (Neighbor) BS consists of several parts:
1) Instantaneous CINR calculation (for the interference signaling BSs)
2) Measurement is averaged (Alpha = 1/16).
3) Measurement reporting in MOB_SCAN_REP
PCINR for handover validates the averaged CINR under AWGN conditions with several fixed mean combinations.

The test specifics HO trigger condition which prevents the handover even when the target CINR is better than the
serving CINR

PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.13, table A.32, item 1 :
Physical CINR measurement from the
preamble for frequency reuse==1
P I

supported modulations

Neighbor BS CINR: -
b. For a Neighbor CINR measurement, absolute accuracy is defined as D(i) = reported_dB(i)
True_CINR_dB(i) per ensemble of measurements for a given input average CINR.
c. Pass/Fail criterion recommendations are as follows:
Absolute CINR:
( )
min
10
10
1 10 log 10 1 [ ] 1
CINR D
| |
+ s s + +
|
\ .

min
=30dB
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 97
d. Channel test is performed for AWGN.

HO trigger condition:
The Trigger TLV included in DCD shall be set as follows. (Tables 358a and 358b in IEEE
802.16e)
a. Type = 0x0 (CINR metric)
b. Function = 0x6 (Metric of serving BS less than absolute value)
c. Action = 0x2 (Respond on trigger with MOB_MSHO_REQ)
d. Value=0xA8 (=-20dB)
e. Averaging duration=0x10 (=16frames)

9.1.13.4 Test setup
MS
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r
ToSource
Rx
Interfering (Neighbor)
Source 2
Atten
Interfering (Neighbor)
Source 1
Atten
Sgnaling Unit (BSE)
Atten
Atten

Figure 20. Test configurations for the CINR test.
The interfering sources 1, 2, and 3 shall be synchronized in time and carrier frequency with the signaling unit (BSE).

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 98
Tests are performed for AWGN channels with interfering cells of a few scenarios. The AWGN channel environment
is achieved with thermal noise without inserting external noise sources.

Test cases 1: Inter-Frequency Allocation HO measurement
Tests are performed with interfering cells using two adjacent carriers (Frequency Allocation). The scenarios for
interfering cells are as follows:
Table 67. CINR test points for HO CINR (Inter-FA)
Average power of serving and interfering BS at SS antenna port [dBm] Average CINR (expected
value)
Carrier Serving-F1 Neighbor-F2 Neighbor-F2 Neighbor-F2 Neighbor-F2
Scen-ario# Serving BS
(segment 0)
[dBm]
Interfering BS 1
(segment 1) [dBm]
Interfering BS 2
(segment 2)
[dBm]
Interfering BS 3
(segment 2)
[dBm]
Avg CINR PUSC reuse 1
(Neighbor BS2) [dB]
1 -60 -70 -65 -85 4.86
2 -60 -68 -65 -79 2.67
3 -60 -66 -65 -73 0.21
4 -60 -73 -71 -73 -1.01
5 -60 -85 -76 -73 -3.27

* Preamble Index: Serving BS = 0, Interfering BS1 = 33, Interfering BS2 = 65, Interfering BS3 = 98
* F1: Middle frequency defined for each certification RF Profile in the Appendix 5.
* F2: The frequency allocation next to F1 (High FA or Low FA with MS vender declaration).

Test setup:
Step 15. The Signaling Unit (BSE, serving BS) transmits on frequency F1(Vender can declare the frequency
within the certification range) via AWGN channel with preambles segment ID=0 (PN=0). (single
PUSC zone with PUSC reuse 1 configuration, MAPs in lowest MCS, i.e. CTC QPSK 1/2, rep=6,
CINR on MAPs is guaranteed to be > 2dB, EVM on preamble should be >> D
min
)
Step 16. Interfering Source 1 (interfering BS) transmits on frequency F2 using preamble segment ID=1
(PN=33, same frame structure as BSE)
Step 17. Interfering Source2 (interfering BS) transmits on frequency F2(declared by MS vendor with different
frequency allocation from FA1) using preamble segment ID=2 (PN=65, same frame structure as
BSE)
Step 18. Interfering Source3 (interfering BS) transmits on frequency F2 (declared by MS vendor with
different frequency allocation from FA1) using preamble segment ID=2 (PN=98, same frame
structure as BSE)

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 99
Test Procedure:
Step 19. Configure the attenuators so that the average powers at the SS antenna input are according to Table
68.
Note. The power of each source can be measured at the combiner input and the combiner loss can be
compensated, and there is no requirement on the accuracy of such compensation, as long as the
Step 20. The additional 10dB attenuation should be applied to all three interfering sources so that the UUT
can be connected to the serving BS
Step 21. The BSE should periodically broadcast MOB_NBR-ADV, DCD, and UCD message.
The DCD Trigger TLV shall be as follows. (16-2004/Cor2/D3 table 358a)
type:function:action = 0b01 (RSSI metric):101(Metric of serving BS greater than
absolute value):011(On trigger) = 0x6b
trigger value: 0x00 (RSSI=-103.75dBm)
trigger averaging duration: 0x0A (10 frames)
Step 22. Turn on the MS UUT and wait until the network entry on the serving BS is completed.
Step 23. The additional 10dB attenuation should be removed from all three interfering sources.
Step 24. The MS UUT shall generate a MOB_SCN-REQ filled with the proper values required to measure
different frequency neighbor BS CINR. The Scan_Duration should be less than or equal to 15
frames.
Step 25. The BSE shall assign a MOB_SCN-RSP as a response to the MOB_SCN-REQ with the
Scan_Duration which is equal to the value that MS requested, Interleaving interval of 50 Scan
Duration frames, Report mode = periodic report, and Report period = 50 frames. The Report metric
shall be BS CINR mean. The BSE may transmit DL traffic to the MS in every frame.
Step 26. MS UUT shall measure the CINR value for the Interfering Source 1 and 2 and use averaging
parameter (i.e., alpha=1/16) according to the received DCD message.
Step 27. MS UUT shall respond with MOB_SCN-REP containing the CINR measurement of Interfering BS 2
for F2 to the BSE.
Step 28. The Signaling Unit (BSE) receiver (connected to the UUT transmit antenna) should receive the
Neighbor CINR reports. The BSE receiver should also be able to detect a case that the SS failed to
transmit MOB_SCN-REP in a certain frame (e.g. by checking the message CRC) and mark the
report as invalid.
Step 29. The BSE should record the correctly reported measurement results from the received MOB_SCN-
REP until the BSE received 200 MOB_SCN-REP measurement reports.
Step 30. Evaluate the accuracy of the reported Neighbor CINR feedback according to the procedure specified
below:
* Calculate: D[k] = reported_CINR_dB(k) true_CINR_dB
The True_CINR_dB is the value in the Table 67 as an informative column.
The true CINR (which is actually the true C/I) is the instantaneous power of the preamble
symbol transmitted by the serving BS, divided by:
for PUSC reuse 1: The sum of the instantaneous power of the preamble symbol transmitted
by the interfering Source,
* Calculate the average of D[k] over ensemble of measurements for the given scenario.
* Check absolute accuracy criterion:
( )
min
10
10
1 10 log 10 1 [ ] 1
CINR D
| |
+ s s + +
|
\ .

min
=30dB.
The accuracy will be checked for reuse 1 Interfering BS2.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 100
Step 31. Fill the evaluation result of the step 16 in the relevant column of the Table 68.
Step 32. Go to the step 6 and repeat the test for the next scenarios in the Table 67 above.

Absolute criterions should be passed for all scenarios defined for the PUSC reuse 1. This test will be passed if PUSC
reuse 1 test in the table below is passed.

Table 68. CINR test points for HO CINR (Inter-FA, PUSC Reuse 1)
Average power of serving and interfering BS at SS antenna port
[dBm]
Test Result
Carrier Serving-F1 Neighbor-F2 Neighbor-F2 Neighbor-F2 Neighbor-F2 Pass or Fail
Scen-ario# Serving BS
(segment 0)
[dBm]
Interfering BS
1 (segment 1)
[dBm]
Interfering BS
2 (segment 2)
[dBm]
Interfering BS 3
(segment 2)
[dBm]
Avg CINR PUSC
reuse 1 (Neighbor
BS2) [dB]
1 -60 -70 -65 -85 4.86
2 -60 -68 -65 -79 2.67
3 -60 -66 -65 -73 0.21
4 -60 -73 -71 -73 -1.01
5 -60 -85 -76 -73 -3.27

Not Applicable.

0.0.1 2006-12-09 Jaeyong Lee Initial draft

0.0.2 2006-12-11 Jaeyong Lee Draft for the HO Ad-hoc discussion in the Nov. F2F.
0.3 2007-02-21 Jaeyong Lee Draft for the HO Ad-hoc discussion at CC on 2/22.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 101
0.4 2007-02-22 Jaeyong Lee Approved draft after the CC to submit to the Wave2 RCT
0.5 2007-02-28 Jaeyong Lee Approved draft after the CC to submit to the Wave2 RCT
- Reuse 3 test case and relevant contents were removed
- Editorial changes were applied
0.6 2007-03-08 Hassan Yaghoobi Approved version at the RCT comment resolution CC.
0.7 2007-03-18 Jaeyong Lee Applying the editorial changes and F2F results to be
included on the Wave 2 RCT amendments. (after
accepting all changes in version 0.6)
0.8 2007-04-17 Jiyun Seol Approved draft after the last CC before Nice Ftf meeting
to submit to the Wave2 RCT.
Clarification on the HO trigger condition and
MOB_SCN_REQ trigger condition is also added.
0.8a 2007-04-18 Jiyun Seol Applying the F2F results
0.11 2007-05-09 Jaeyong Applying the CC (5/3) discussion results,: Scan
parameters (15 frames), Fix editorial error (0x6d). Those
not finalized are not included in this draft (Fading
channel, accuracy requirement change, and etc).

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 102
9.1.14 MS-12.1: MS Transmitter Modulation and Coding, Cyclic Prefix and Frame
Duration Timing
The purpose of this test is to verify MS functional capability of transmitting various Modulation and Coding
Schemes (MCS) on Pilot and Data using Convolutional Turbo Encoding modes. This test also covers repetition
coding, interleaving and randomization functionalities. The test also verifies MS transmit functionality with regards
to the default Cyclic Prefix insertion and sub-frame timing.

[Note: Please refer to WiMAX Forum
Mobile Radio Conformance Tests, v1.0.0.]

Table 69 lists the MS transmitter Modulation and Coding Schemes options according to [4] and [6].
Table 69. List of MS Transmitter MCS Options

Proper transmission of all MCS levels is required for PUSC [PUSC w/o Subchannel Rotation and
AMC 2x3 to be added for Wave2]. Also [4] and [6] require a fixed Cyclic Prefix of 1/8 and Frame size
of 5 msec. The Interleaver and randomizer are tested indirectly.

Please note that H-ARQ is disabled in all test scenarios in this section. Please refer to MS-10a.1 for H-
ARQ related test cases.


PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
8. A.5.1.1.1.2 Cyclic Prefix P (transmitter only) I
9. A.5.1.1.1.3 Frame Duration P (transmitter only) I
10. A.5.1.1.1.14 Modulation Table A.34 T I
MCS
No.
Modulation and Coding Scheme
1. Convolutional Turbo Code QPSK-1/2 without Repetition
Convolutional Turbo Code QPSK-1/2 Repetition 2
Convolutional Turbo Coding QPSK-1/2 Repetition 4
Convolutional Turbo Coding QPSK-1/2 Repetition 6
2. Convolutional Turbo Code QPSK-3/4
3. Convolutional Turbo Code 16-QAM-1/2
4. Convolutional Turbo Code 16-QAM-3/4
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 103
11. A.5.1.1.1.14 Modulation Table A.37 T D
12. A.5.1.1.1.14 Modulation Table A.37 T D
13. A.5.1.1.1.9 Channel Coding Table 22 P (transmitter only) D
14. A.5.1.1.1.9 Channel Coding Table 23 P (transmitter only) I
This test requires the MS to be generating UL bursts as triggered by BSE using the Ping PER
measurement method in Appendix 3. Various subcarrier allocation modes of PUSC with and without
Subchannel Rotation and AMC 2x3 with various MCS and repetition levels are targeted.

The Test System needs to be able to generate data packets according to the sizes specified Appendix 1
but the payload data shall be random.

9.1.14.4 Test setup

Figure 21. MS Transmitter Modulation and Coding, Cyclic Prefix and Frame Duration Timing
Initial Conditions
Step 1. Make sure the data link connection has been established between UUT and RCTT according
to parameters defined in Appendix 2.

Test Procedure
Step 1. Select Item 1 of Table 71 for the UL MCS. The DL MCS used by the BSE may be any of
the MCS supported in Table 71..
Step 2. Set the received signal level at the MS UUT receiver input to be 10 dB higher than the
sensitivity numbers of Table 286-Table 290 minus 10log(Repetition factor) for the relevant
coding and channel bandwidth (see Appendix 1). Set the MS UUT transmit power and
attenuation such that the received signal level at the BSE receiver is at least 10dB higher
than the sensitivity of the BSE signaling unit (taking into account the number of
subchannels in use) for the relevant coding and channel bandwidth being used, taking into
consideration any repetition coding gain.
Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
MS
UUT
Attenuator
AMS
ABS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 104
Step 3. The BSE transmits ping commands with the proper test message (specified in Appendix 1
with the payload size set based on the repetition coding rate associated with the UL MCS
selected from Table 71). The MS shall decode the ping messages and transmit the Ping
response with the proper modulation and coding. Repeat transmission of N packets (using
random data) as specified in the Table 297 (corresponding to Functional Tests).
Step 4. Capture the number of packets in error (should be less than M as specified in Table 297 for
Functional Tests).
Step 5. Repeat Step 2-Step 4 for all cases in Table 71.
Step 6. [Wave 2: Repeat Step 1- Step 5 for AMC 2x3]
Step 7. [Wave 2: Repeat Step 1 Step 6 for PUSC w/o Subchannel Rotation]
Table 71. List of MS Transmitter Test Cases

Pass verdict:
a) The number of bursts in error is less than or equal M for Functional Tests.

Fail verdict:
a) The number of bursts in error is more than M for Functional Tests.
Table 72. List of MS Transmitter Test Cases
No. Modulation and Coding Scheme Packet Payload Length
1. Convolutional Turbo Code QPSK-1/2 without Repetition Default_Packet as specified in Appendix 1

2. Convolutional Turbo Coding QPSK-1/2 Repetition 2 Default_Packet as specified in Appendix 1
5. Convolutional Turbo Code QPSK-3/4 Default_Packet as specified in Appendix 1
6. Convolutional Turbo Code 16-QAM-1/2 Default_Packet as specified in Appendix 1
7. Convolutional Turbo Code 16-QAM-3/4 Default_Packet as specified in Appendix 1
No. Modulation and Coding Scheme Packet Payload Length Pass Fail
1. Convolutional Turbo Code
QPSK-1/2 without Repetition
Default_Packet as specified in Appendix 1

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 105

Not applicable.

V1 2006-06-18 Hassan Yaghoobi Initial draft
Proposed draft for merged MS-12.1 and MS-14.1.
V2 2006-11-11 Hassan Yaghoobi

Final Draft
Modified the test to use PER measurement based
approach.
2. Convolutional Turbo Coding
QPSK-1/2 Repetition 2
QPSK-3/4
6. Convolutional Turbo Code 16-
QAM-1/2
QAM-3/4
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 106
9.1.15 MS-13.1: MS Transmit Ranging Support
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of MS equipments against transmit ranging support requirements.
Mobile WiMAX

System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification requires the MS is able to adjust its transmission
according to ranging information that may be sent by the BS. The ranging information are power adjustment,
frequency adjustment and timing adjustment.

An MS is compliant if:
- its transmission signal timing is within Tb/128 duration with respect to the target time as commanded by
the Signaling Unit (BSE), and
- its transmission center frequency is within 2% of the subcarrier spacing compared to the Signaling Unit
(BSE) center frequency, and
- its transmission signal power level is within the specified accuracy for the requested step size
Furthermore, according to the profile, the MS shall have a UL symbol timing accuracy of Tb/128, that is, MS shall
compensate its own internal RF and digital delays to that degree. .

Moreover, (802.16e-2005 - section 8.4.14.1),
- At the MS, both the transmitted center frequency and the sampling frequency shall be derived from the
same reference oscillator. Thereby, the MS uplink transmission shall be locked to the BS, so that its center
frequency shall deviate no more than 2% of the subcarrier spacing, compared to the BS center frequency
- during the synchronization period, the MS shall acquire frequency synchronization within the specified
tolerance before attempting any uplink transmission. During normal operation, the MS shall track the
frequency changes and shall defer any transmission if synchronization is lost.

Since the accuracy that the MS should have when it applies the frequency corrections sent by the Signaling Unit
(BSE) is not defined, this will not be tested and the Signaling Unit (BSE) will not send any frequency correction.

The power control mechanisms included in the ranging process are not addressed in this test, but they are part of the
specific power control test.

There are two types of ranging codes mandated by the Mobile WiMAX System Profile:
- 2 symbols long (for Initial Ranging and HO ranging)
- 1 symbol long (for Periodic Ranging and BWR).

Ranging requirements are validated in two sub-tests:

- Subtest A: by verifying the initial phase of the network entry is passed by the MS though the MS was un-
ranged initially (by emulation).

- Subtest B: by verifying further phases during which MS is in Periodic Ranging are successful though MS
get unranged (by emulation). This additional phase follows previous one described in Subtest A and hence
assumes the MS has succeeded Initial Ranging and entered the Periodic Ranging phase.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 107
The following PICS items are specifically covered by this test.
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. MS performs timing, power ,
and frequency adjustment

11/Table A.94: Initial ranging
T D
2. MS adjusts PHY parameters in
response to RNG-RSP.

3/Table A.97: Periodic ranging
T D
3. 2 / 5.1.1.1.18 Tx power level
min relative step accuracy
P D
4. 1/ A.5.1.1.1.11 MS UL symbol
timing accuracy
P D
5. 2/ A.5.1.1.1.11 MS to BS
frequency synchronization
tolerance
P D

For this test, the MS shall implement all the features required for achieving successfully initial ranging phase as well
as the features for periodic ranging. The MS is connected to the Signaling Unit (BSE) through an attenuator on the
bidirectional path.

This assumes the Signaling Unit (BSE) has the needed characteristics specifically for measuring the arrival time, the
frequency and the power level of the received signals from the MS.

The Signaling Unit (BSE) is set such as to have a carrier frequency reference clock that is deviated of -2 ppm or +2
ppm compared to the value corresponding to the nominal frequency.

Moreover, the timing estimations reported by the Signaling Unit (BSE) shall be expressed as timing difference at the
BS antenna port between the first sample of the received symbol (including CP) versus the timing reference. In other
words, the timing estimation is zero when first sample of the symbol (including CP) transmitted by the MS is
aligned with the time reference at the BS antenna port.

The Signaling Unit (BSE) will emulate two situations: near and far MS. For this reason, the DL power level at the
MS antenna port (A
MS
) will be set to different target values by changing the transmit power level at the Signaling
Unit (BSE) and the attenuator value. The two will be modified in such a way that the received signal at the Signaling
Unit (BSE) antenna port is within the range of the Signaling Unit (BSE) receiver.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 108

The Signaling Unit (BSE) is set such as to have a target arrival time for the uplink data (initial or ranging codes for
this test) received from the MS UUT for emulating and modifying the RTD. Four values are considered in this test
(RTD_0 = 0 s, RTD_1 = 5 s, RTD_2 = 15 s, RTD_3 = 20 s). This modification shall be applicable during test
operation, i.e. even when the Signaling Unit (BSE) and MS are communicating with each other.

9.1.15.4 Test setup

Figure 22. Test Setup for MS Transmit Ranging support

Test 1 (Near MS):
Initial Conditions
Step 1. BSE in active state, ready to accept network entry requests. BSE transmits UCD either
without TLV Type 207 UL_initial_transmit_timing or with TLV Type 207
UL_initial_transmit_timing and Value set to 0b00000000.
Step 2. UUT is turned off.

Test Procedure:
Sub-test A (initial ranging)

Step 3. Set the round trip delay and A
MS
value to RTD_0 and P_0
Step 4. Set Signaling Unit (BSE) carrier frequency deviate from +2 ppm from nominal value.
Step 5. Turn UUT (MS) power on and let it pass the first network entry phases (scan DL,
synchronize on DL and obtain DL and UL parameters).
Step 6. Schedule IR opportunities
Step 7. Demodulate CDMA ranging code and record the timing errors.
Step 8. The BS measures needed corrections and sends RNG-RSP with continue status and
adjustments
Step 9. Allow the MS to complete the initial ranging.

Sub-test B (periodic ranging)

Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
MS
UUT
Attenuator
AMS
ABS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 109
Step 1. Once IR passed, BS allocates bursts for the MS in the UL sub-frame, PR codes and PR
opportunities
Step 2. Set the round trip delay value to RTD_1 and command a 10 dB power increase for the MS
Step 3. The Signaling Unit (BSE) sends RNG-RSP with continue status and adjustments.
Step 4. End of test 1.

Test 2 (Far MS):

Repeat Test 1 by replacing:
+2 ppm with -2ppm
RTD_0 with RTD_3
RTD_1 with RTD_2
10 dB with -10 dB

The following table summarizes the test conditions, where Smin is the minimum receiver sensitivity.
Table 75. Test conditions
Test Subtest
Signaling Unit
(BSE) carrier
frequency
deviation
RTD A
MS

Periodic
ranging power
adjustment
1 A +2 ppm RTD_0=0 us P_0=-30 dBm 0
1 B +2 ppm RTD_1=5 us P_0=-30 dBm +10 dB
2 A -2 ppm RTD_3=20 us P_3=Smin+10 0
2 B -2 ppm RTD_2=15 us P_3=Smin+10 -10 dB

In order for the UUT MS to be compliant, the Signaling Unit (BSE) shall verify that

the MS frequency error as measured on the first received ranging code is within the 2% of the subcarrier
spacing.
the power level at the MS antenna measured is below P
TX_IR_MAX
until the Signaling Unit (BSE) sends a RNG-
RSP
for Test 1 sub-test A, in order to fulfill the requirement of RF delays compensation, the timing error of all MS
transmissions shall be within Tb/128, even before any feedback from the Signaling Unit (BSE)
after receiving and applying the Power and Timing Adjustments from the BS emulator, the remaining MS
power deviation and timing error shall be, respectively, within the 1dB of the target power level and within the
Tb/128 duration of the target arrival time.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 110
Table 76. Maximum allowed errors for initial ranging
Maximum allowed MS timing
error for the first correction by
the Signaling Unit (BSE)
Maximum allowed MS timing
error after first correction by the
Signaling Unit (BSE)
Pass Fail
MS timing error before any
timing adjustment by the
Signaling Unit (BSE) in Test 1
sub-test A
+/-(Tb/32)/4
MS timing error after reception
of RNG-RSP with timing adjust
from the Signaling Unit (BSE)
+/-(Tb/32)/4

Table 77. Maximum allowed errors for periodic ranging
Metric Value Pass Fail
MS timing error after reception of RNG-RSP
with timing adjust from the Signaling Unit (BSE)
+/-(Tb/32)/4

The measurement accuracy for all measurements shall be at least an order of magnitude better than the allowed error
that needs be measured (e.g. 0.1 dB for power error measurement)

The measurement uncertainty shall be added to the MS accuracy requirement in favor of the MS (e.g. if the accuracy
of power measurement is 0.1 dB the maximum allowed power error for the MS is 1.1 dB)

v1 2006-04-28 Paul Bazzaz Initial draft

v2 2006-05-04 Paul Bazzaz Modified and completed test description
Added target values
v3 2006-05-11 Paul Bazzaz Incorporated comments from Bogdan
Franovici and Emmanuel Lemois
Restructured the test for clarity of the test
strategy
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 111
V4 2006-05-11 Paul Bazzaz Removed power control related test (to be
move to power control section)
Removed reties on IR
V5 2006-05-11 Paul Bazzaz Added Test BS timing estimation definition

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 112
9.1.16 MS-14.1: Reserved

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 113
9.1.17 MS-15.1: MS transmit power dynamic range and relative step accuracy
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of MS equipments for Transmit Power Control (TPC)
dynamic range and Power Step accuracy for both open loop and closed loop.
Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification requires a MS transmitter to have a
minimum Power Control Range with a minimum Power Level step size. The Power Level step size
must conform to a minimum Relative Step Accuracy.
In the Mobile WiMAX PICS section A.5.1.1.1.18 , Table A.81 the 16d standard is Referenced,
Section 8.4.12.1.

Table 79. Tx power requirements
Capability Minimum Performance
TX Dynamic Range
MS
= or > 45dB
Tx Power Level minimum Adjustment Step = or < 1dB
Tx Power Level minimum Relative Step Accuracy = or < +/- 0.5dB

In the Mobile WiMax PICS Section A5.1,under System Profiles, Table A.5 the vendor specified Power
Classes is provided for which the Transmit Power Dynamic Range and Relative Step Accuracy
requirements apply.

Table 80. Power classes
Item Transmit Power (dBm) for
16QAM
Transmit Power (dBm) for
QPSK
1 18 <= PTx,max < 21 20 <= PTx,max < 23
2 21 <= PTx,max < 25 23 <= PTx,max < 27
3 25 <= PTx,max < 30 27 <= PTx,max < 30
4 30 <= PTx,max 30 <= PTx,max

9.1.17.2 Coverage and test purposes
The following items are covered by this test.
Table 81. Coverage for MS-15
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. TX Dynamic Range
Standard Section 8.4.12.1 PICS
T D
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 114
[A.5.1.1.1.18 , Table A.81]
2. Min Adjustment step
[A.5.1.1.1.18 , Table A.81]
T D
3. Min Relative Step Accuracy
[A.5.1.1.1.18 , Table A.81]
T D
4. Power Classes PICS [A5.1,
Table A5]
T D
5. MS Maximum Transmission
Power Limitation PICS [A5.1,
Table A5]
T D

These tests will test the compliance of the MS to the requirements given in the 802.16e standard or
WiMAX profiles. In particular the tests concern the radio conformance of the MS unit. The tests are
designed to minimize the use of the MAC layer and do not rely on the performance of the BSE except
where conformance of this test is required.
These Tests require a BSE and MS connection. The BSE will command the MS to change its power in
m dB decrements. The BSE and a Vector Signal Analyzer will both monitor the MS power output. The
power level into the BSE will be adjusted so that it is always within its operating range.

9.1.17.4 Test setup
Figure 1 shows the test setup for testing MS power level dynamic range and Power Level Control.

Figure 23. Test Setup for MS Transmit Power Level Dynamic Range and Power Level Control
Test.

Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
Calibrated
VSA
MS
UUT
Attenuator
ABS/MS
AMS/BS

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 115
9.1.17.5 Test procedure Dynamic range and Open loop / Closed Loop Power Step Accuracy
Initial Conditions:
a. Create an uplink service flow, with an UL burst occupying all time slot duration and spanning
across all subchannels. In order to accomplish this, the BSE does a single data burst allocation
with all subchannels and a control channel as in the default frame structure of Appendix 2.

Test Procedure:

Step 1. Set the UUT to transmit at the maximum declared power level and verify that MS power is within
the limits of the declared power class and meet the declared maximum power level..
Step 2. Test BSE shall not transmit the MS Maximum Transmission Power Limitation Control TLV in the
UCD message.
Step 3. The Test BSE shall allocate a single data burst as defined in the initial condition as given in the
frame structure of Appendix 2.
Step 4. The UL burst is QPSK- 1/2.
Step 5. The attenuator is adjusted such that the signal level at A
BSE
is maintained at a level which is within
the operating range of the Test BSE, for all MS Transmit power levels.
Step 6. The Test BSE will request the MS UUT to decrease its output power in steps of 1 dB up to the
moment when the MS power cannot be reduced any further.
Step 7. At each step the power transmitted by the MS, measured in dBm, is recorded.
Step 8. The maximum power is P
0
, after the first message the power is P
1
, after the second one it is P
2
, and
so on until the last measurement being P
N
.
Step 9. For a compliant unit, P
0
-- P
N
shall be at least 45dB,as required by Test MS 15 -Power Level
Dynamic Range.
Step 10. Repeat Step 1 through Step 9 of Test Procedure to measure (P
0
-- P
N
) for Low, Mid and High
Frequency RF Channels as vendor specified in Appendix 5, Sample Test Center Frequency, Table
308 Test Center Frequencies. At each RF frequency the dynamic range of 45 dB must be met for a
compliant unit.
Step 11. The relative accuracy is calculated (not measured), from the sequence P
0
, P
1
, P
2
,, P
N
.
Step 12. For a step of m dB, the relative accuracy is calculated as P
n
[dBm]-- P
n+m
[dBm]-m[dB].
Step 13. If the relative accuracy is within the range of the required relative accuracy from Table 82, the unit is
compliant and meets the requirements for MS-15 Power level Control Accuracy.
Step 14. Two exceptions at least 10 dB apart are allowed over the sequence of 1 dB steps across the 45 dB
range, where in these two cases an accuracy of up to +/- 2 dB is allowed. Any larger steps
encompassing these exceptions are also allowed an accuracy of up to +/- 2 dB.
Step 15. Relative accuracy is defined as P
n
[dBm]-- P
n+m
[dBm]m [dB].

Table 82. Required accuracy for power level control.
Single Step Size m Required relative accuracy
ceil(|m|) = 1dB +/- 0.5 dB
ceil(|m|) = 2dB +/- 1 dB
ceil(|m|) = 3dB +/- 1.5 dB
4dB< ceil(|m|)< = 10dB +/- 2 dB

Step 16. Moreover for confirming measurements of step power levels the test proceeds as follows: the Test
BSE will request the MS UUT to reach the level specified in column Starting UUT, P
s
, rounded to
the closest integer value; then the Test BSE has to increase/decrease the MS UUT by a level
specified in column Step Size ie P
m
(step size, increment/decrement requested).
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 116
Step 17. The measured level at MS UUT, P
f
(final), shall not exceed the P
s+m
(desired level) plus the relative
accuracy specified in column Relative Accuracy, the unit is compliant and meets the requirements
for MS-15 Power level Control Accuracy.
Step 18. For Wave 2 testing, the BSE shall add the MS Maximum Transmission Power Limitation Control
TLV in the UCD message with an MS Maximum Transmission Power Limitation Control TLV
value of (Pmax_MS -5), where Pmax_MS is the Maximum Tx power declared by MS vendor. The
BSE will request the MS UUT to gradually increase the transmit power up to the moment when the
MS power cannot be increased any further, where the maximum power Pmax will be measured.

Table 83. Testing Power Step for Actual Measurements
Step Number Starting UUT
Power Level P
s
(starting)
Step Size
increase/decrease
P
m
relative accuracy
error expected;
1 P
0 (maximum)
- 10 dB +/- 2 dB
2 P
n (minimum)
+10 dB +/- 2 dB
3 (P
0 +
P
n
)/2 5dB +10dB +/- 2dB
4 (P
0 +
P
n
)/2 + 10dB -10dB +/-2dB
5 P
n
+5dB +/-2dB
6 (P
0 +
P
n
)/2 -5dB +/-2dB
7 (P
0 +
P
n
)/2 2dB +4dB +/-2dB
8 (P
0 +
P
n
)/2 +2dB -8dB +/-2dB
9 (P
0 +
P
n
)/2 -2dB +10dB +/-2dB
10 (P
0 +
P
n
)/2 +2dB -10dB +/-2dB

Table 84. Measured P
out
vs P
ideal

Ideal Power
Output MS
(dBm).
Measured Pout MS Relative Error
includes Round off error.
Pass

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 117

Pass verdicts:
For Step 1: For a compliant unit, MS maximum Tx power shall comply with declared power class
per Table 80and the maximum declared power level by vendor.
For Step 9: For a compliant unit, P
0
-- P
N
shall be at least 45 dB
For Step 10: For a compliant unit , P
0
-- P
N
shall be at least 45 dB
For Step 13: If the relative accuracy is within the range of the required relative accuracy from
Table 82, the unit is compliant and meets the requirements for MS-15 Power level Control
Accuracy.
For Step 17: The measured level at MS UUT, P
f
(final), shall not exceed the P
s+m
(desired level)
plus the relative accuracy specified in column Relative Accuracy, the unit is compliant and
meets the requirements for MS-15 Power level Control Accuracy.
For Step 18: The measured level at MS UUT, Pmax, shall not exceed Pmax_UCD_TLV + 2dB,
the unit is compliant and meets the requirements for MS-15 Maximum Transmission Power
Control. Here, Pmax_UCD_TLV is the MS Maximum Power Limitation value specified in the
UCD TLV and 2dB is the accuracy margin.

Fail verdicts:
For Step 9: For a Failed unit, P
0
-- P
N
shall be less than 45 dB.
For Step 10: For a Failed unit, P
0
-- P
N
shall be less than 45 dB.
For Step 13: If the relative accuracy exceeds the range of the required relative accuracy from
Table 82, the unit fails.
For Step 17: If the measured level at MS UUT, P
f
(final), exceeds the P
s+m
(desired level) plus the
relative accuracy specified in column Relative Accuracy, the unit fails.
For Step 18: If the measured level at MS UUT, Pmax, exceeds Pmax_UCD_TLV + 2dB, the unit
fails.

VSA Vector Signal Analyzer and BSE accuracy must be accounted for. Numerical Rounding Off of
power levels must also be accounted for and included in the Relative accuracy numbers.

Table 85. Revision History for MS-15
0.0.1 2006-05-01 Balvinder Bisla Initial draft

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 118
0.0.1.1 2006-07-10 Balvinder Bisla Combined power dynamic range with step size
accuracy for closed loop power control and open
loop power control. (The functional testing will be
in MS16)

0.0.1.2 2006-08-24 Balvinder Bisla Changed Target Step size table.
Changed the Measured step size table
0.0.1.3 2006-08-24 Balvinder Bisla Added 2 outliers in the sequence of 1dB
decrements to allow for PA step jumps.
Removed reference to closed loop as this is a
subset of Open Loop.
0.0.1.4 2006-09-19 Balvinder Bisla Remove line 1
st
iteration since removed closed
loop.
Use exception instead of allowance
The exception for +/-2db should apply for whole
table not just 1dB step.
Add Line Numbers to Procedure.
0.0.1.5 2006-10-16 Balvinder Bisla/Paul
Piggins/Paul
Bazzaz/Mario tanco
Added PICS table for Power Class that the vendor
must specify for the test and for which the MS15
is applicable.
Added pass / fail ; changed the UL message
format to TBD since this will be specified in the
Appendix in RCT. Changed BS to BSE.
Changed the BSE input power from absolute
numbers to operating values.
0.0.1.6 2006-10-16 Balvinder Bisla After Dallas FtF discussion it was decide to place
the Test wfm inside the MS15 text instead of
Appendix 2.
0.0.1.8 2006-10-16 Balvinder
Bisla/Youhan Kim/JK
Fwu
Details added to the Test wfm.
0.0.1.9 2006-12-11 Balvinder Bisla Request for Dynamic range test to be extended to
Low, Mid , High RF frequency channels added.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 119
9.1.18 MS-16.1: MS Transmit Power Control Support
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of MS equipments against transmit power control support
requirements.

In this test we aim to verify the transmit power control process as supported by the MS. As there may be some
overlap with MS-15.1 on Transmit Dynamic Range, it has been agreed on that MS-16.1 would validate the
following requirements.

In this test we will verify power control during initial ranging phase, Closed Loop and Open Loop Power Control
mode.

Requirements for each phase are detailed in next section.


Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. 11 / A.5.1.1.1.12
Close loop power control
T D
2. 1 / A.5.1.1.1.12
Open loop power control
T D


Testing requirements are given hereafter for each phase and mode.

Initial Ranging

1. Before the MS receives a RNG-RSP, the MS transmit adapt its Tx power in such way that it never exceeds
PTX_IR_MAX = EIRxPIR,max+ BS_EIRP RSSI (page 176 of [802.16-2004]).
2. When receiving RNG-RSP with Tx power correction the MS shall adapt its Tx power accordingly.

Test Procedure: Closed Loop Power Control

3. The MS shall aggregate the power correction issued by the BS in its current transmit PSD.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 120
4. The MS shall keep constant PSD when the number of sub-channel to transmit changes (page 621
of [802.16-2004]).
5. The MS shall use equation 138 (page 636 of [802.16e-2005]) to derive the PSD used for CDMA code
transmission.
6. In order to avoid saturation if necessary, the MS shall temporary limit its Tx PSD, distributing the
maximum power equally over the modulated subcarriers as specified in Section 8.4.10.3 and modified as
below. (Here we restrict the test to data allocation that are not overlapping in time):
In situations where the subcarrier power specified by power control mechanisms indicate that the
transmit power for a given transmission would exceed the maximum transmit power for the specified
MCS, the transmit power shall be limited to the maximum allowed. The MS shall evaluate the data
allocation transmit power for each zone independently. Within each zone, all data allocations that
are not overlapping in time shall be scaled by the same factor such that the OFDMA symbol with the
largest power is limited to the maximum allowed. Regions defined by UIUC=0,12,13 and extended
UIUC2=8 that do not overlap data allocations on any OFDMA symbol may be scaled independently
of data allocations. UIUC 13 regions used for Sounding Zone allocations shall be scaled
independently of data allocations and if such region contains multiple symbols, each symbol shall be
scaled independently.

Test Procedure: Open Loop Power Control

7. The MS shall derive its Tx PSD according to the equation 138a (page 638 of [802.16e-2005], using passive
mode only according to the WiMAX full mobility system profile):

In this equation, C/N depends on the used modulation and coding, as detailed in table 334 of [802.16e-
2005].
8. The MS shall keep constant PSD when the number of sub-channel to transmit changes (page 621
of [802.16-2004]).
9. In order to avoid saturation if necessary, the MS shall temporary limit its Tx PSD, distributing the
maximum power equally over the modulated subcarriers as specified in Section 8.4.10.3 and modified as
below. (Here we restrict the test to data allocation that is not overlapping in time):
In situations where the subcarrier power specified by power control mechanisms indicate that the transmit
power for a given transmission would exceed the maximum transmit power for the specified MCS, the
transmit power shall be limited to the maximum allowed. The MS shall evaluate the data allocation
transmit power for each zone independently. Within each zone, all data allocations that are not overlapping
in time shall be scaled by the same factor such that the OFDMA symbol with the largest power is limited to
the maximum allowed. Regions defined by UIUC=0,12,13 and extended UIUC2=8 that do not overlap
data allocations on any OFDMA symbol may be scaled independently of data allocations. UIUC 13
regions used for Sounding Zone allocations shall be scaled independently of data allocations and if such
region contains multiple symbols, each symbol shall be scaled independently.
10. At the CLPC to OLPC transition, the MS shall initialize OffsetSS_perSS as described in Cor2 TWG
comment 41/IEEE comment 17.

In the following sub-tests, PowerStepAccuracy should be at least taken into account for all power measurements
done on signal sent by the MS UUT. MS Tx power Accuracy is as detailed in Section 8.4.12.1:
Table 87. Tx power step accuracy requirement
Single Step Size m Required relative accuracy
ceil(|m|) = 1dB +/- 0.5 dB
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 121
ceil(|m|) = 2dB +/- 1 dB
ceil(|m|) = 3dB +/- 1.5 dB
4dB< ceil(|m|)< = 10dB +/- 2 dB

The power step accuracy shall meet the requirements according to test MRC-15.1 including the exception cases as
outlined in MRC-15.1

Furthermore, for Open Loop Power Control sub-test, these measurements shall take into account required absolute
accuracy on RSSI measurement which is respectively +/-4 dB according to test MS-04.

9.1.18.4 Test setup
Signalling
Unit (BSE)
Attenuator
Directional
Coupler
Attenuator MS UUT
Calibrated
VSA
MBS ABS MSS ASS

Figure 24. Test Setup for MS Transmit Power Control support

Sub-test IR0

In this test, we check the maximum transmit power of the MS-UUT before receiving the first RNG-RSP is in the
authorized range (Step 1.Step 6Then we verify the power corrections issued by the test-BS are properly applied
(Step 8).

Note that in Step 1.Step 6 we assume the MS should estimate its maximum transmit power based on RSSI
measurements with accuracy better than +/-4dB, and apply this power in the Tx with an accuracy of +/-2dB, so that
the global accuracy should be +/-6dB.

In this test, allocation for RNG-REQ through CDMA_Alloc_IE is PUSC on 2 sub-channels.

During this test, the MS-UUT transmit power is supposed to vary as detailed in Table 88 (presented at the end of the
section).

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 122

Step 1. Set Test BS output power to 0dBm. Set BS_EIRP to 0dBm in the DCD message.
Step 2. Adapt the attenuation in the DL so that the received signal level at A
MS
is -60 dBm.
Step 3. Set BS_EIRxPIRMAX to -50dBm in the DCD. Since the attenuation in the path is
60dB, we have PTX_IR_MAX=10dBm at the MS UUT.
Step 4. Turn On MS UUT.
Step 5. The Test BS schedules IR and PR opportunities
Step 6. The Test BS demodulates CDMA ranging code in the IR opportunities and records the
power statistics without issuing any DL message for a period of 10s. The recorded
statistics P on the IR CDMA codes received in the IR opportunities shall never exceed
BS_EIRxP
IRMAX
=-50dBm+6dB.
Step 7. Let P be the power measured on first IR code received after the 10s period expired. The
Test BS calculates the needed correction m=Ptarget-P and sends RNG-RSP with
continue status and adjustments. Ptarget is the target received power, set to -70dBm.
Step 8. The Test BS demodulates IR CDMA code in the periodic ranging region and records the
power statistic P
achieved
. The recorded statistic shall match the Ptarget, with accuracy
depending on the command m, as detailed in Table 87.
Step 9. The Test BS sends a RNG-RSP with status success, and BS allocates an opportunity
with QPSK and repetition factor of 1 for the RNG-REQ.
Step 10. The Test BS records the power on RNQ-REQ received in the CDMA_Alloc_IE P
RNG-
REQ
.

Sub-test IR1

In this test, we repeat the Sub-Test IR0, with different values for BS_EIRxPIRMAX and RNG-REQ allocation code
type.

Step 11. The Test BS aborts the MS.
Step 12. Repeat sub-test IR0 with BS_EIRxPIRMAX=-70 dBm (PTX_IR_MAX=-10dBm) and
allocates an opportunity with 16QAM and repetition factor of 1 for the RNG-REQ.

Sub-test CLPC

In this test, we validate that the MS-UUT behaves properly when receiving command from the test-BS (Step 20),
that it keeps its PSD constant when the number the number of sub-channel it transmits varies (Step 21), and that
even when instructed so by the Test BS it does not goes to saturation and recovers (Step 17 and Step 18).

In this test, all UL allocation is PUSC on 2 sub-channels 16QAM 3/4, except in Step 21. Moreover, the test-BS shall
ensure that data allocation to the MS-UUT does not overlap in time with other allocations.

During this test, the MS-UUT transmit power is supposed to vary as detailed in Table 88.

Step 13. A connection is setup between the MS UUT to the Test BS.
Step 14. The Test BS requests the MS UUT to report its maximum transmit power Pmax (in
dBm) and current transmitted power Pcurrent (in dBm per sub-carrier). The Test BS
sends a power correction to the MS UUT to get it at below saturation. The correction is
Pmax-Pcurrent-10log(48).
Step 15. The BS measures the received power on the received burst RxP
0
.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 123
Step 16. The Test BS requests the MS UUT to increase its output power by 10 dB using RNG-
RSP.
Step 17. It is verified that the received power RxP is in the range RxP
0
+/- 0.5 dB.
Step 18. It is also verified that the MS UUT will prevent saturation by monitoring the EVM of
the MS UUT uplink signal on the VSA. The EVM shall not show any degradation due
to compression even during this step.
Step 19. The Test BS requests the MS UUT to decrease its output power in steps of 10 dB, 3
times. At each step the power transmitted by the MS UUT, measured in dBm, is
recorded.
Step 20. The initial power is RxP
0
, after the first message the power is RxP
1
, after the second one
is RxP
2
, and RxP
3
after the third one. One data Burst per Frame is to be used with 5
frames to obtain an accurate reading in the Test BS. It is verified that at each step
(RxP
N
-RxP
N-1
= -10dB +/- 2dB).
Step 21. The Test BS allocates burst on 8 sub-channels, measure P
3
. The MS UUT is compliant
if (P
3
-P
3
) equal 6dB +/-2dB. One data Burst per Frame is to be used with 5 frames to
obtain an accurate reading in the Test BS.

Sub-Test OLPC
In OLPC passive mode, the Tx power is defined by equation 138a (page 638 of [802.16e-2005]):

In this test, we test that each term is applied properly: 10.log10(R) (Step 26), C/N (Step 27), NI (Step 29),
Offset_BSperSS (Step 31 and Step 33), L (Step 36 and Step 38). We also test that the term OffsetSS_perSS is
properly initialized (according to TWG comment #41, IEEE #157), but afterward it is kept constant (passive mode,
active mode is out of scope of the test).
Moreover, we ensure the transition between CLPC and OLPC is OK (Step 25), and that the MS-UUT keeps its PSD
constant when the test-BS lets the number of sub-channels vary (Step 39).

L shall be calculated based on the total power on the used sub carriers of the frame preamble in the DL on one side.
RSSI precision shall be better than +/-4dB on the other side. Here we assume that precision on L is as required on
the RSSI.

In this test, all UL allocation are PUSC on 12 sub-channels, except in Step 39. The Test BS and the MS UUT keep
the OLPC mode from Step 24 to Step 39.
Moreover, the test-BS shall ensure that data allocation to the MS-UUT does not overlap in time with other
allocations.

During this test, the MS-UUT transmit power is supposed to vary as detailed in Table 88.

Step 22. The power control mode of the MS is CLPC mode. Set BS_EIRP to 0dBm in the DCD
message.
The Test BS advertises NI = -100 dBm.
Step 23. The Test BS allocates UL bandwidth to the MS in QPSK 1/2, repetition 1, records the
received power per used sub-carrier on the corresponding allocation RxPsd, and sends
the correction to align the MS UUT Tx PSD to the expected Tx PSD in OLPC mode.
The correction is
Corr = (-100dBm++6dB) RxPsd.
This step is to ensure Offset_SSperSS is initialized to 0 during CLPC to OLPC
transition.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 124
Step 24. The Test BS Switch the MS to OLPC mode, with Offset_BS
perMS
=0dB.
Step 25. The Test BS allocates UL bandwidth to the MS in QPSK 1/2, R=1, records the received
power per used sub-carrier on the corresponding allocation RxPsd, and calculate
absolute Tx power error which is
TxAbsErr=RxPsd-(6dB-100dBm).
This error shall be in the range +/- 4 dB + PowerStepAccuracy .
Step 26. The Test BS allocates UL bandwidth to the MS in QPSK 1/2, and all admissible R
values, records the received power per used sub-carrier on the corresponding allocation
RxPsd, and calculate relative Tx power error which is:
TxRelErr=RxPsd-(6dB-10log10(R)-100dBm)-TxAbsErr
This error shall be in the range +/- 4dB + PowerStepAccuracy.
Step 27. The Test BS allocates UL bandwidth to the MS in all modulation and coding (expect
64QAM) and R=1, records the received power per used sub-carrier on the
corresponding allocation RxPsd, and calculate relative Tx power error which is:
TxRelErr=RxPsd-(C/N-100dBm)-TxAbsErr
Where C/N is as listed in Table 334 of [802.16e-2005]. This error shall be in the range
+/- 4 dB + PowerStepAccuracy.
Step 28. The Test BS advertises NI = -90dBm.
Step 29. The Test BS allocates UL bandwidth to the MS in QPSK 1/2, R=1, records the received
power per used sub-carrier on the corresponding allocation RxPsd, and calculate relative
Tx power error which is:
TxRelErr=RxPsd-(6dB-90dBm)-TxAbsErr
This error shall be less in the range +/- 4dB + PowerStepAccuracy.
Step 30. The Test BS advertises NI = -100dBm and sends a PMC-RSP with Offset_BS
perSS
=5
dB.
Step 31. The Test BS allocates UL bandwidth to the MS in QPSK 1/2, R=1 records the received
TxRelErr=RxPsd-(6dB-100dBm+5dB)-TxAbsErr
Step 32. The Test BS sends a PMC-RSP with Offset_BS
perSS
=-5 dB.
TxRelErr=RxPsd-(6dB-100dBm-5dB)-TxAbsErr
Step 34. The Test BS sends a PMC-RSP with Offset_BS
perSS
=0 dB.
Step 35. The Test controller increase by 10 dB the UL and DL attenuation,
Step 37. The test controller decrease by 20 dB the UL and DL attenuation,
Step 39. The Test BS will allocate burst on 8 sub-channels and records the received power per
used sub-carrier on the corresponding allocation RxPsd, and calculate relative Tx power
error which is:
This error shall be less in the range +/- 4dB + PowerStepAccuracy

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 125
For Information, the TX level on each UL transmission in the test is illustrated in Table 88 below, with BS_EIRP
=0dBm.

Table 88. MS Tx power, BS_EIRP = 0dBm, Pmax stands for MS max Tx power

Ref L MCS C/N R NI Offset_BSperSS N carrier Tx power (dBm)
Initial Ranging
Step 6 60 CDMA 3 N/A N/A N/A 144 <= 16dBm
Step 6,
when going
through
sub-test IR1
60 CDMA 3 N/A N/A N/A 144 <= -4dBm
Step 8 60 CDMA 3 N/A N/A N/A 144 -10
Step 10 60 QPSK 1/2 6 1 N/A N/A 48 -12
Step 10 60 16QAM
1/2
12 1 N/A N/A 48 -6
Close Loop Power Control
Step 14 60 16QAM
3/4
15 1 N/A N/A 48 Pmax
Step 16 60 16QAM
3/4
15 1 N/A N/A 48 Pmax
Step 19 60 16QAM
3/4
15 1 N/A N/A 48 Pmax-10dB
Pmax-20dB
Pmax-30dB
Step 21 60 16QAM
3/4
15 1 N/A N/A 192 Pmax-24dB
Open Loop Power Control
Step 25 60 QPSK 1/2 6 1 -100 0 288 -9.2
Step 26 60 QPSK 1/2 6 6 -100 0 288 -17.2
Step 27 60 QPSK 1/2 6 1 -100 0 288 -9.2
Step 27 60 QPSK 3/4 9 1 -100 0 288 -6.2
Step 27 60 16 QAM
1/2
12 1 -100 0 288 -3.2
Step 27 60 16QAM
3/4
15 1 -100 0 288 -0.2
Step 29 60 QPSK 1/2 6 1 -90 0 288 0.8
Step 31 60 QPSK 1/2 6 1 -100 5 288 -4.2
Step 33 60 QPSK 1/2 6 1 -100 -5 288 -14.2
Step 36 70 QPSK 1/2 6 1 -100 0 288 0.8
Step 38 50 QPSK 1/2 6 1 -100 0 288 -19.2
Step 39 50 QPSK 1/2 6 1 -100 0 192 -21
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 126

Table 89. Initial ranging
Step # EIRxPIR,max CDMA_Alloc_IE measurement Value Criteria Pass Fail
Step 6 -50 dBm
QPSK
on 2 sub-channels
Received power
on CDMA
codes
P <= EIRxPIR,max+ 6dB
Step 8 -50 dBm
QPSK
on 2 sub-channels
Received power
on CDMA
codes
P
achieved

| Pachieved-Ptarget | < =
|Required Relative
Accuracy in Table 87|
(Ptarget=-70dBm)

Step 10 -50 dBm
QPSK
on 2 sub-channels
Received power
on
RNG-REQ
P
RNG-REQ

| PRNG-REQ -Pachieved
- (difference in the
default Normalized C/N)
-10log(Ncarrier_RNG-
REQ / Ncarrier_CDMA)|
< =1.0dB ,
where the difference in
the normalized C/N
between QPSK-1/2 with
repetition 1 and CDMA
code is 3dB,
Ncarrier_RNG-REQ=48,
and
Ncarrier_CDMA=144

Step 6,
when
going
through
sub-test
IR1
-70 dBm
16QAM
on 2 sub-channels
Received power
on CDMA
codes
P <= EIRxPIR,max+ 6dB
Step 8,
when
going
through
sub-test
IR1
-70 dBm
16QAM
on 2 sub-channels
Received power
on CDMA
codes
P
achieved

| Pachieved-Ptarget | < =
|Required Relative
Accuracy in Table 87|
(Ptarget=50dBm)

Step 10 -70 dBm
16QAM
on 2 sub-channels
Received power
on
RNG-REQ
P
RNG-REQ

| PRNG-REQ -Pachieved
- (difference in the
default Normalized C/N)
-10log(Ncarrier_RNG-
REQ / Ncarrier_CDMA)|
< =2.0dB ,
where the difference in
the normalized C/N
between 16QAM-1/2 and
CDMA code is 9dB,
Ncarrier_RNG-REQ=48,
and
Ncarrier_CDMA=144

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 127
Table 90. Closed Loop Power Control
measurement Criteria Pass Fail
Step 17 Received power RxP | RxP-P
0
|<= 0.5 dB
Step 18 EVM <= -24 dB
Step 20 Received power RxP
1
,
RxP
2
and RxP
3

| RxP
N
- RxP(N-1) +10dB |<= 2 dB
N=1,2,3

Step 21 Received power RxP
3
| RxP
3
- RxP
3
+ 6

|<= 2 dB

Table 91. Open Loop Power Control
measurement Criteria Pass Fail
Step 25 TxAbsErr | TxAbsErr

|<6 dB
Step 26 TxRelErr | TxRelErr

|< 6 dB

|< 6 dB

|< 6 dB

|< 6 dB

|< 6 dB

|< 6 dB

|< 6 dB

|< 6 dB

- The measurement accuracy for all measurements shall be at least an order of magnitude better than the
allowed error that needs be measured (e.g. 0.1 dB for power error measurement)
- The measurement uncertainty shall be added to the MS accuracy requirement in favor of the MS (e.g. if the
accuracy of power measurement is 0.1 dB the maximum allowed power error for the MS is 1.1 dB)
- Any Roundoff errors of power level made by the BS must be included in the budget for calculating the
measurement accuracy.

9.1.18.8 Miscellaneous
[This section is to be removed. Its only purpose is to provide material to be incorporated in the common sections of
the RCT document.]

Add to A 4.3 (Test BS requirements):
- Unless required otherwise in a test, the Test BS shall be compliant with Mobile WiMAX System Profile
and IEEE 802.16 specification and shall behave as expected
- The Test BS is able to measure the needed corrections when receiving ranging codes from the MS.
- The Test BS shall be calibrated in power

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 128
0.0.1 2006-05-01 Balvinder Bisla Initial draft

0.0.12 2006-07-21 Bogdan Franovici/
Emmanuel Lemois/
Paul Bazzaz
Adding IR power control verification
Separating Closed Loop from Open Power
control mode
Completing Open Loop Power control mode
0.0.13 2006-08-10 Balvinder Bisla, Paul
Bazzaz
OLPC test steps detailed
OLPC needed accuracy corrected
EVM test purpose clarified

Bazzaz
input from MAC teams added
Bazzaz
Clean up doc comments before uploading to
MTG
0.0.16 2006-09-21 Emmanuel Lemois Updated document according to the
conclusions of the Ad hoc of sept 20
th
and
feedback from Bisla Balvinder and Jungnam
Yun.
0.0.17 2006-10-10 Emmanuel Lemois Feedback from Vincent Wolff and Anat
Zilber
0.0.18 2006-10-24 Paul Bazzaz,
Emmanuel Lemois
FeedBacks from Balvinder Bisla included.
Update the content according to MRCT ad
hoc CC on Oct 23th.
0.0.18a 2006-11-10 Paul Bazzaz,
Emmanuel Lemois
Corrections :
o Page 8 : Deletion of sentence on the
additional required accuracy
(PowerStepAccuracy) on L measurement
o Step 23 : the variable Corr was wrong

0.0.19 2006-11-10 Balvinder Bisla Accept all changes in doc. Comment #272 to
upload and accept v19 completed at FtF.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 129
9.1.19 MS-17.1: MS transmitter spectral flatness
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of MS equipments against spectral flatness requirements.

Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification requires a spectral flatness of 2 dB
from the measured energy averaged over all Nused active tones for spectral lines from Nused/4 to 1
and +1 to Nused/4 and +2/4 dB from the measured energy averaged over all Nused active tones for
spectral lines from Nused/2 to Nused/4 and +Nused/4 to Nused/2. Additionally, the absolute
difference between physically adjacent subcarriers shall not exceed 0.4 dB, excluding intentional
boosting or suppression of subcarriers and PAPR reduction subchannels are not allocated. Nor shall the
power transmitted at spectral line 0 shall not exceed 15 dB relative to total transmitted power.

This is to be measured with a vector signal analyzer using spectrum flatness measurement function. By
observing the amplitude deviations from the constellation points this function estimates the flatness as
a function of frequency from ordinary data transmission signals.

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.18 Minimum
Transmit Requirements
Item 4
T D

This test requires the MS to be generating UL bursts. A VSA is set to vector mode and the power
flatness is read across each burst. The flatness measurement shall be averaged over 40 to 60 OFDM-
symbols to remove spectral fluctuation due to modulation.

9.1.19.4 Test setup

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 130

Figure 25. Test Setup for MS spectral flatness


Test Pattern:
The parameters shall be combined in all combinations possible. Referred values for power and
frequency are relative to the vendor declared range.
Table 94. MS Spectral Flatness Test Parameters
Parameter Values
Number of subchannels used All subchannels
Spreading PUSC/(For Wave 2: AMC )
MCS and Transmit Power (QPSK 1/2 and Max Output Power)
Frequency (according to
Appendix 5)
Low/Mid/High

Step 1. Establish connection between MS and Signaling Unit (BSE) with the Low frequency of the
declared frequency range.
Step 2. Send uplink map corresponding to test configuration with Number of subchannels used= all
subchannels, PUSC (and AMC in wave2), QPSK-1/2, and max output power according to
Table 94 and Appendix 2.
Step 3. Repeatedly send uplink data packages from UUT.
Step 4. Measure the spectrum power with the VSA for the required number of OFDM-symbols.
Step 5. Extract the average power level for all active sub-carriers (including data and pilots) from
the measurement data obtained in Step 4.
Step 6. Report the average power level.
Step 7. Extract power measurement for sub-carrier 0.
Step 8. Compare sub-carrier 0 with average power level obtained in Step 5.
Step 9. Report result from Step 8.
Step 10. For each active subcarrier measured in Step 4, normalize the power reading by dividing by
the ideal magnitude for its constellation state, including any intentional power boosting.
Step 11. Compute the average normalized power by summing together the individual results of Step
10.
Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
MS
UUT
Attenuator
ABS/MS
AMS/BS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 131
Step 12. Using the results from Step 10, record minimum power reading and maximum power
reading for outer subcarrier
(Nused/2 to Nused/4 and +Nused/4 to Nused/2) for all active sub-carriers.
Step 13. Compare the values from Step 12 with average power level obtained in Step 11.
reading for inner sub-carriers
(Nused/4 to 1 and +1 to Nused/4) for all active sub-carriers from the measurement data
obtained in Step 4.
Step 16. Compare the values from Step 15 with average normalized power level obtained in Step 5.
Step 18. Compare amplitudes within the measurement data obtained in Step 4 for all active sub-
carriers which are physically adjacent and including pilots but excluding all non-allocated
sub-channels. Comparison shall be made after normalization to ideal constellation state and
compensation for intentional power boosting.
Step 19. Report neighbor sub-carrier deviation.
Step 20. Repeat Step 1- Step 19for Mid and High channel of declared frequency range.

Pass verdict:
a) The leakage power transmitted at spectral line 0 does not exceed 15 dB relative to the
corresponding total transmitted power for all specified combinations of test parameters.
b) All active inner sub-carriers shall be within 2 dB of the corresponding average power level for all
active sub-carriers power for all specified combinations of test parameters.
c) All active outer sub-carriers shall be within +2/4 dB of the corresponding average power level for
all active sub-carriers power for all specified combinations of test parameters.
d) The maximum neighbor sub-carrier deviation for all specified combinations of test parameters is
equal to or below 0.4 dB for all active sub-carriers.

Fail verdict:
a) The leakage power transmitted at spectral line 0 exceeds 15 dB relative to the corresponding total
transmitted power for any specified combination of test parameters.
b) Any active inner sub-carrier exceeds 2 dB of the corresponding average power level for all active
sub-carriers power for any specified combination of test parameters.
c) Any active outer sub-carriers exceed +2/4 dB of the corresponding average power level for all
active sub-carriers power for any specified combination of test parameters.
d) The maximum neighbor sub-carrier deviation for any specified combinations of test parameters
exceeds 0.4 dB for any active sub-carriers.


The maximum flatness measurement uncertainty for individual sub-carriers is 0.05 dB relative to
the average channel power.


WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 132
Table 95. Revision History for MS-17.1 MS spectral flatness
0.1.0 2006-05-11 Lars Carln First draft.
0.2.0 2006-06-16 Lars Carln Second revision Introduction revised. Test
Requirements corrected. Test Procedure
revised. Measurement uncertainty updated.
0.4.0 2006-10-27 Lars Carln Update according to comments 244, 245, 246
and 247,
0.5.0 2006-11-09 Lars Carln Steps 10, 13 and16 changed to compensate
for intentional boosting in order to measure
flatness on all modulated sub-carriers
including pilots.
0.6.0 2006-11-11 Lars Carln Modified test-procedure accordning to
suggestion by Agilent to better reflect the
workings of the VSAs.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 133
9.1.20 MS-18.1: MS transmitter relative constellation error
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of MS equipments against transmitter relative constellation error and
the declared power class of the MS.

Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification requires a burst type dependent relative
constellation error that does not exceed the values given in the following table.

Table 96. Relative constellation error requirements for MS
Burst type Relative constellation error for MS (dB)
QPSK-1/2 -15
QPSK-3/4 -18
16-QAM-1/2 -20.5
16-QAM-3/4 -24

Two RCE measurements will be preformed during the test for each modulation and output power:
A. Modulated sub-carrier RCE measurement (8.4.12.3.3. in 802.16e).
B. Un-modulated sub-carrier RCE measurement (8.4.12.3.4. in 80216e).

The required performance for both tests are the same for both type of test (at any given output power
and modulation).

In its simplest form, the RCE is the averaged magnitude of the vector difference between the measured
waveform and an ideal, reference waveform. This measurement is made with a vector signal analyzer.
The un-modulated RCE measurement is conducted to validate that the MS doesnt send any noise /
spurs out of its defined sub-carriers.

Power Classes are defined in Section 7 of Mobile System Profile.

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.18 Minimum
Transmit requirement
P D
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 134

This test requires the MS to be generating UL bursts.

The test case will be repeated for the UUT transmitting at the declared Maximum and Minimum
power. Please note that the minimum power declared by the vendor will not be higher than Maximum-
45dB as per 802.16e standard.

The Vector Signal Analyzer (VSA) should be configured as follows:

Demodulation: OFDMA
FFT Size: 512 (For 3.5 and 5 MHz bandwidth) or 1024 (for 7/8.75/10 MHz bandwidth)
Center Frequency: Depends on profile, DUT
Channel Bandwidth: Depends on profile, DUT
Cyclic Prefix: 1/8
UL subcarrier allocation: PUSC
Number of OFDMA UL/DL symbols: Refer to the default frame structure setting of Appendix 2.
No. of Subchanels: FFT 512 4, 17; FFT 1024 8, 35

The standard IEEE 802.16-e in 8.4.12.3.2 recommends for RCE measurements the use of of the
subchannels.

Number of frames for averaging: 10
Pilot Phase Tracking: ON
Pilot Timing Tracking: ON
Pilot Amplitude Tracking: ON
Channel Estimation: data+pilot
IDCell: 31
PermBase: 31

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 135
9.1.20.4 Test setup

Figure 26. Test Setup for MS Relative Constellation Error

Initial Conditions:

Step 1. UL Service Flow established between MS UUT and BSE at the lowest frequency within the
declared frequency range.

Test Procedures:
Step 2. BSE does allocations according to of total number of subchannels (4 subchannels for
512-FFT or 8 subchannels for 1K-FFT) and the default frame structure of Appendix 2.
Step 3. Configure the MS UUT to transmit at declaired maximum power for QPSK-1/2 modulation.
Step 4. Configure the UL Service Flow for QPSK-1/2 modulation.
Step 5. Read and record the displayed EVM and the displayed un-modulated EVM measured by the
VSA.
Step 6. Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 above for QPSK-3/4, 16QAM-1/2 and 16QAM-3/4 modulations,
setting the transmit power to the declared maximum power for the corresponding
modulations.
Step 7. Repeat Step 4 through Step 6 for middle frequency.
Step 8. Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for high frequency.
Step 9. Repeat Step 4 to Step 8 above with MS UUT transmitting at minimum Tx power that is at
least 45 dB below the max TX power of QPSK modulation.
Step 10. BSE does allocations using all subchannels and repeat Step 3 to Step 9 above.

Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
MS
UUT
Attenuator
AMS
ABS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 136
Table 98. RCE results vs Burst Type at X frequency
Burst Type Pout Measured
RCE
Modulated
Meaused
Un-modulated
RCE
No, Of
subchanel
Pass Fail
QPSK-1/2
QPSK-3/4
16-QAM-1/2
16-QAM-3/4

For each row in the table the pass fail criteria is specified below:

The Pass criteria
For all the EVM measurements recorded in Step 5 of test procedure, the recorded value is smaller
or equal than the EVM limit as specified in Table 96.

The Fail criteria
For at least one of the EVM measurements recorded in Step 5 of test procedure, the recorded value
is higher then the EVM limit as specified in Table 96.

0.0.1 20060430 Darcy Poulin
Hyo-sik Lee
Jae Yond Lee
Jeff Zhuang
Jiho Jang
Lars Carlen
Lisa Ward
Rady Opera
Rivel Shahar

0.0.2 20060515 See above
Peter Cain
Change no. of subchannel to 17 for 5MHz and
Changed total No. of subchannel
Change table format to include setup details
Changed No. of symbols to be max and min

0.0.3 2006-06-11 Shahar Rivel Add un-modulated EVM test
0.0.4 2006-11-20 Add changes according to comments
Define pass fail criteria

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 137
9.1.21 MS-19.1: MS transmit synchronization
The purpose of this test is to verify the MS compliance to the uplink symbol timing and frequency synchronization
to downlink signal from the BS.
In order to reduce interference between different MSs, Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16
specification require that the transmitted center frequency of the MS shall deviate no more than 2% of the subcarrier
spacing compared to the BS center frequency. Further, it is required that the MS sampling frequency and transmitted
center frequency shall be derived from the same reference oscillator.

The MS shall not attempt any transmission before achieving the required frequency synchronization; it shall
autonomously track the frequency changes and shall defer any transmission if synchronization is lost.

To reduce inter-symbol interference, it is required that on the uplink all the OFDMA symbols arrive at the same time
at the base station with an accuracy of +/- 25% of the minimum guard interval or better.


Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. 1/ A.5.1.1.1.11 MS UL symbol
timing accuracy
P D
2. 2/ A.5.1.1.1.11 MS to BS
frequency synchronization
tolerance
T D

This test will require the MS to initiate initial ranging, complete the initial ranging and start sending UL bursts for
the purpose of verifying the initial frequency error and the frequency error and timing error during ranging and
normal operation.

The Signaling Unit (BSE) shall be calibrated, and its carrier frequency and sampling frequency shall be tunable in
the range +/-2ppm, with steps of 0,005 ppm.

Note that the tests during initial ranging can be moved to MS-13.1 (MS Transmit Ranging Support) and the test
during normal operation (after ranging is completed) can be done together with other tests that require the MS to be
ranged.

A VSA is required or a Signaling Unit (BSE) capable of measuring frequency and timing error with the required
precision. If the VSA is used for measurements and the Signaling Unit (BSE) is used to generate DL frames, the
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 138
Signaling Unit (BSE) will be synchronized with the VSA and the relative errors between the Signaling Unit (BSE)
and the VSA will be included in the overall measurement uncertainty.

Throughout the test, only valid measurements will be kept (measurements done when the signal from the UUT is
strong enough to allow the Signaling Unit (BSE)/VSA to measure frequency error and timing error with the
requested precision). A low attenuation will be needed to ensure a strong enough signal at the Signaling Unit
(BSE)/VSA for the purpose of measuring the first transmission of the UUT.

9.1.21.4 Test setup

Figure 27. Test Setup for MS transmit synchronization

Initial Conditions:
Step 1. The Signaling Unit (BSE) will be configured to use the top channel in the band.
Step 2. The carrier frequency and sampling frequency of the Signaling Unit (BSE) will be deviated with 2
ppm from its nominal value.
Step 3. Turn UUT power on.

Test Procedure:
Step 4. Schedule initial ranging zone.
Step 5. Demodulate CDMA ranging code and estimate carrier and sampling frequency error (denoted in the
following as frequency errors).
Step 6. During the initiation of ranging, the first valid frequency errors measurements will be recorded,
denoted frequency error for initial transmission.
Step 7. No frequency correction information will be sent to the UUT before the firs valid set of
measurements.
Step 8. Complete the ranging process.
Step 9. During the ranging process, the valid frequency errors and timing error measurements will be
recorded, denoted frequency/timing error during ranging.
Step 10. Establish a UL connection.
Step 11. The MS is scheduled to send uplink bursts for at least 200 frames.
Step 12. The carrier frequency and sampling frequency of the Signaling Unit (BSE) will be deviated to -2
ppm from its nominal value, with steps of 0,005 ppm/s.
Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
MS
UUT
Attenuator
AMS
ABS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 139
a. During the normal operation part, the valid frequency errors and timing error measurements will
be recorded, denoted frequency/timing error during normal operation. A total of 10
measurements, equally distributed within range +2 ppm to -2ppm, are made.
Step 13. Repeat Step 2 through Step 12, with -2 ppm deviation in Step 2, and deviation to 2 ppm with steps of
0,005 ppm/s in Step 12 .

In order for the UUT to be compliant, the following conditions must be met:
- The carrier frequency error shall be less than +/- 2% of the carrier spacing for any UL transmission: |f
C,UUT
-
f
C,Signaling Unit (BSE)
|< Af
C,max
, where Af
C,max
= 2% of the carrier spacing, and f
c,UUT
and f
c,TestBS
are function
of time.
- The UL timing accuracy under all conditions shall be better than of the minimum guard interval
Table 101. Timing/frequency errors for initial transmission
RF channel
Signaling Unit
(BSE) frequency
deviation
Maximum allowed MS
carrier frequency error
Maximum allowed
timing error
Pass Fail
T +2 ppm +/-Af
C,max
N/A
T -2 ppm +/-Af
C,max
N/A

Table 102. Timing/frequency errors during ranging
RF channel
Signaling Unit
(BSE) frequency
deviation
Maximum allowed MS
Maximum allowed
timing error
Pass Fail
T +2 ppm +/-Af
C,max
+/-(T
b
/32)/4
T -2 ppm +/-Af
C,max
+/-(T
b
/32)/4

Table 103. Timing/frequency errors during normal operation
RF channel
Signaling Unit
(BSE) frequency
deviation
Maximum allowed MS
Maximum allowed
timing error
Pass Fail
T +2 ppm>
deviation >= -
2ppm
+/-Af
C,max
+/-(T
b
/32)/4

The measurement accuracy for all three measurements shall be at least an order of magnitude better than
the allowed error that needs be measured (e.g. +/-0.2% of the subcarrier spacing for carrier frequency)

The measurement uncertainty shall be added to the MS accuracy requirement in favor of the MS (e.g. if the
accuracy of the carrier frequency measurement is +/-0.2% of the subcarrier spacing, the maximum allowed
frequency error for the MS is +/-2.2% of the subcarrier spacing)
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 140


0.0.1 2006-05-03 Bogdan Franovici Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-05-10 Bogdan Franovici Added clarifications in response to comments
from Philippe
Added requirements for Test BS
0.0.3 2006-05-16 Bogdan Franovici Replaced frequency step at the base station by a
frequency ramp. Added frequency precision
constraints at the BS.
0.0.4 Fixed typo 2ppm to 2% in section Compliance
requirements.
Clarification on frequency deviation at BS vs
reference frequency deviation.
Clarification on measurement point, that shall be
periodic during the normal operation, not only at
the beginning and at the end of the test.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 141
9.1.22 MS-20.1: MS transmit/receive switching gap
The purpose of this test is to verify MS compliance to the min Transmit/receive Transition Gap
(SSTTG) and Receive/transmit Transition Gap (SSRTG) requirements.

This test shall make certain that the MS can perform switching between receive and transmit states
quick enough to meet the PICS requirements. In order to perform these measurements the start and end
of the two switching events must be defined.

For testing purposes the SSRTG is defined as the time between end of the last sample of the last
OFDM-symbol of the DL and the start of the first sample of the first OFDM-symbol of the UL frame,
see Figure 28.

For testing purposes the SSTTG is defined as the time between end of the last sample of the last
OFDM-symbol of the UL and the start of the first sample of the preamble of the following DL frame.
The SSTTG will be actually bounded by the RTG in practical operation since TTG and RTG are fixed
values in the WiMAX profile and the TTG portion accommodates the RTD(round-trip-delay), which is
always positive value in practice, as well as the SSRTG.

To be certain that the UUT can perform the switching it is not sufficient to measure that an RF-signal
is present at these positions of the MAC-frame, the UUT also need to have some level of performance
at these points. In order to ensure this both downlink and uplink traffic must be tested. When testing
SSRTG performance, the Signaling Unit (BSE) shall command the MS to send and receive data at
fixed positions in the MAC-frame, the pattern to be repeated continuously for the duration of test. PER
shall be measured on a PDU positioned as late as possible in the DL frame and Relative Constellation
Error shall be measured on the first symbol of the UL frame averaged over 100 bursts.

The SSTTG shall be tested with the same approach. The Signaling Unit (BSE) shall command the MS
to send and receive data at fixed positions in the MAC-frame, the pattern to be repeated continuously
for the duration of test. Relative Constellation Error shall be measured on the last symbol of the UL
frame averaged over 100 bursts and PER shall be measured on a PDU positioned as early as possible in
the DL frame.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 142

Time
1st Sample DL 1st Sample UL
Last Sample DL Last Sample UL
Test BS
Transmission
Preamble
MS
Transmission
1st UL OFDM
Symbol
SSRTG
SSTTG
Amplitude

Figure 28. Definition of SSRTG and SSTTG


Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Table A.47 MS Minimum
performance, A.5.1.1.1.17MS
Minimum Performance
Requirements
T D

This test requires the MS to show sufficient performance in both transmission and reception for the guard times as
listed in Table 107. This test shall be done with default frame structure described in Appendix 2 modified according
to Table 106.

9.1.22.4 Test setup

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 143

Figure 29. Test Setup for MS Receive/Transmit Switching Gaps


Table 106. Test Parameters for MS Rx/Tx Switching Gaps
Parameter Values
Number of subchannels used in DL/UL All subchannels
Spreading in DL/UL PUSC
MCS for DL/UL burst 16QAM 3/4
MS Transmit Power Max Output Power
Frequency (according to Appendix 5) Low Mid High

Other frame structure parameter not specified here will be set according to that described in Appendix
2. The test packets transmitted by the BSE should reach the end of the DL frame for the test of SSTTG.
The packet-size that corresponds to this is dependent on the size of the FFT of the profile, the
modulation and coding and the type of PER-measurement mechanism to be used.
The MS shall be configured to transmit on 8 subchannels during the initial and final OFDM-symbols
of the UL-subframe.

The RCE-measurements shall be averaged over 100 packets.

Number of frames for averaging: 100
Pilot Amplitude Tracking: ON
Channel Estimation: data
Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
MS
UUT
Attenuator
ABS/MS
AMS/BS
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
Combiner
+
Attenuator
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 144
Premable Index = 4

Procedure for SSRTG:
Step 1. Establish connection between Signaling Unit (BSE) and MS.
Step 2. Configure uplink map to allocate the CQICH feedback so that the MS can send CQI report
every frame, based on the default frame structure described in Appendix 2.
Step 3. Configure downlink map to consist of minimum duration packets containing user data at the
last possible instants in the frame.
Step 4. For the duration of the test repeatedly send user data both UL and DL with the set
configuration.
Step 5. Measure the SSRTG gap with the VSA. Note the value.
Step 6. Check that the gap duration is according to the requirement in Table 107. If not, BSE shall
adjust the MS timing position so that SSRTG becomes 50 and steps shall be repeated
from Step 5.
Step 7. Measure PER for the DL connection. The PER must conform to receiver sensitivity
requirements. Note the value.
Step 8. Measure RCE for the first symbol of the UL connection using the CQICH report from MS.,
with the measurement-window centered within the OFDM-symbol, averaged over 100
frames.. The RCE must conform to Relative Constellation Error requirements, which is -
12dB. Note the value.
Step 9. Report the values from Step 5, Step 7 and Step 8.

Procedure for SSTTG:
Step 1. Establish connection between Signaling Unit (BSE) and MS.
Step 2. Configure uplink map to allocate user data so that it contains 8 subchannels in last 3
symbols of 16 QAM modulation.
Step 3. Configure downlink map to consist of minimum duration packets containing user data at the
first possible instants in the frame, based on the default frame structure described in
Appendix 2.
configuration.
Step 5. Measure the SSTTG gap with the VSA. Note the value.
Step 6. Check that the gap duration is according to the requirement in Table 108. If not, BSE shall
adjust the MS timing position so that SSTTG becomes the RTG value for the bandwidth
under test as specified in Table 108and steps shall be repeated from Step 5.
Step 7. Measure PER for the DL connection. The PER must conform to receiver sensitivity
Step 8. Measure RCE for the last symbol of the UL, with the measurement-window centered within
the OFDM-symbol, averaged over 100 frames.. The RCE must conform to Relative
Constellation Error requirements. Note the value.
Step 9. Report the values from Step 5, Step 7 and Step 8.

The MS must meet the requirements stated in PICS Table A. 47 MS Minimum performance,
A.5.1.1.1.17 MS Minimum Performance Requirements.

For the applicable SSTTG and SSRTG switching time values in Table 107, the MS must meet the
requirements stated in Table 109 and the RCE requirement as stated in Section 9.1.18.1 for the
applicable MCS.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 145

Table 107. SSTTG and SSRTG timing performance requirement for MS
Maximum SSTTG and SSRTG Switching Time
Parameter Duration (s)
SSTTG 50
SSRTG 50

Table 108. RTG timing performance requirement for BS
RTG
Bandwidth (MHz) Duration (sec)
3.5 60.0
5 60.0
7 60.0
8.75 74.4
10 60.0

Table 109. PER requirements for reception during the last packet positions of DL

Conformance requirements for packet reception
Test Method FFT
size
Packet length w/
header (bytes)
Payload Packet
length (bytes)
No. packets Threshold
PER [%]
Maximum No.
of error packets
HARQ 512 270 262 60000 0.183 110
PING 512 270 232 60000 0.183 110
HARQ 1024 540 532 30000 0.367 110
PING 1024 540 502 30000 0.367 110

The measurement accuracy for SSTTG and SSRTG should be 1s or better.
The PER rates are calculated for a confidence level of 95%.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 146
0.0.1 2006-05-11 Lars Carln Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-05-15 Lars Carln Revised test-method with more explicit details of
the test. Open issues resolved.
0.3.0 2006-10-18 Lars Carln Additional information on test signal requirements
added. Added table for SSRTG and SSTTG
requirement values. Test signal updated with
regards to PER-measurements based on HARQ
and PING methods. Resolved TBD-items.
Updated according to comments.
0.3.1 2006-11-02 Jaeyong Lee Correction of PER requirement and test changes in
the procedure.
0.4.0 2006-11-03 Lars Carln Changes corresponding to corrections made in
chapter 10.1.16 as described in Mobile WiMAX
RCT BS Receive-Transmit Switching Gaps v0 7
1.doc
0.5.0 2006-11-10 Lars Carln and
Jaeyong Lee
Specified measurement-window centered within
the OFDM-symbol for RCE measurements.
Clarification of UL sub-frame allocation for
SSTTG test.
0.6.0 2006-11-10 Lars Carln and
Jaeyong Lee
Procedure in step 6 for SSRTG and SSTTG
clarified.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 147
9.1.23 MS-21.2: MS AMC receive and transmit operation
The purpose of the test is to verify proper handling of AMC subchannel and the band-AMC mechanisms at the MS.
The following aspects of AMC operation are tested:
1. Proper construction of AMC subchannel in the uplink,
2. Receiver sensitivity for AMC subchannel in the downlink,
3. Absolute CINR measurement for best 5 bands and generation of REP-RSP messages to report CINR
values,
4. Differential CINR measurement and reporting using 6-bit CQICH and

This test suite contains a set of test cases designed to ensure compliance with the AMC requirements set forth in the
Mobile WiMAX System Profile and 802.16e standard. As such, this test suite consists of all the tests required to
ensure compliance and interoperability of AMC operation at the MS. Some tests in this suite are based on Wave-1
tests such as MS-05.1 (MS receiver Physical CINR measurements) and MS-09.1 (MS receiver sensitivity). In
addition new tests are specified for band-AMC operation which is unique to this test suite.

PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
1. Table A.13 UL subcarrier allocation for
MS: AMC 2x3
T I
2. Table A.12 DL subcarrier allocation for
MS: AMC 2x3
T I
3. Tables A.57, A.60, A.63, A.66, A.69:
Max MS Sensitivity Level for CTC, DL
AMC
T D
4. Table A.295: UL-MAP Information
Element(s): Slot offset field for AMC
allocations
T I


9.1.23.4 Test setup
Figure 30 and Figure 31 show the test setup for testing the MS AMC operation.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 148
MS
UUT
Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
Attenuator 2
Attenuator 1
VSA &
Power
Meter

Figure 30. Test setup for functional transmit test & qualitative receive test of AMC sensitivity
MS
UUT Combiner
Channel
emulator
Signaling
unit (BSE)
Interfering
source
Attenuator 1
Attenuator 2
Attenuator 3
Attenuator 4

Figure 31. Test setup for absolute and differential CINR reporting test
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 149
P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d

D
L

M
A
P
Time
0 1 2 3
0
1
2
3
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub-frame
DL PUSC zone
TTG RTG
4 0 1 2 3 4
4
5
Downlink Sub-frame
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d

U
L

M
A
P
Rectangle allocated with
HARQ DL MAP IE for
DL AMC Zone
UL AMC Zone
FCH
DL AMC zone UL PUSC zone UL AMC zone
DL Burst
#1
UL
Burst #1
R
a
n
d
o
m

o
f
f
s
e
t
D
L

B
u
r
s
t

#
2
:

F
r
e
q
e
n
c
y

f
i
r
s
t

H
A
R
Q

s
u
b
-
b
u
r
s
t

f
o
r

M
S

r
e
c
e
i
v
e

s
e
n
s
i
t
i
v
i
t
y

t
e
s
t
UL Burst #2: default packet
with 8 bytes overhead for
MS transmit functional test.

Figure 32. Frame format for MS AMC test

Initial Test Setup for Functional Transmit Test and Qualitative Receive Test of AMC Sensitivity
to parameters defined in Appendix 2. For AMC operation, the BSE makes use of all sub-
channels that are available in the UL and the DL. This is the default mode, and does not
require any TLVs to be sent in the UCD or DCD.

Procedure for Functional Transmit Test (AMC Permutation and Pilot Modulation)
Step 1. BSE to do N repeated uplink allocation of data bursts of the default packet with 8 bytes
overhead as specified in Table 165 (corresponding to Functional Tests), in an UL AMC
zone. The following IEs are used:
i. UL Zone Switch IE: The UL_PermBase parameter is set to 0b0000111, and the zone is
according to the frame format shown in Figure 32.
ii. UL MAP IE: The slot offset parameter is set arbitrarily (but different value at each time)
according to the frame format above. The MCS format is QPSK with rate CTC.
Step 2. Set the received signal level at the receiver input to be 10 dB higher than the sensitivity
numbers shown in Table 112 for QPSK rate CTC (no repetition) and channel bandwidth.
Step 3. The BSE transmits ping commands with the proper test message (specified in Appendix 1).
The MS shall decode the ping messages and transmit them with the proper modulation and
coding, etc. N such test packets are generated as specified in table 165 for functional tests. .
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 150
Step 4. Capture the number of packets in error (should be less than M as specified in Table 165 for
Functional Tests).
Step 5. Vector signal analyzer is used to verify on at least ten bursts that the power for the pilots in
the bursts are boosted correctly.

Table 112 BSE sensitivity values for MS functional transmit test
Bandwidth
(MHz)
Sensitivity
(dBm)
3.5 -92.8
5 -91.4
7 -89.8
8.75 -88.8
10 -88.3

Procedure for Qualitative Receive Test of AMC Sensitivity
Step 1. Set the test frequency to the Mid channel of the declared band class according to Appendix
5.

10
114 10log 13 _ _
s Used
ss required
FFT
F N
N
| |
= + + + +
|
\ .

where F
s
is the sampling rate, N
Used
required
is
listed in Table 113 for the different MCS levels to be tested. The Offset_pilot_boosting
quantity represents the adjustment to account for the increase in the average power of the
burst due to pilot boosting. For AMC, this value is calculated as
10*log10[(8+1*16/9)/(8+1)]=0.36 dB.
Step 3. For each MCS level to be tested, the number of frames transmitted and other parameters are
specified in Table 114. The frame format is specified in Figure 32.
Step 4. Record the packet received in error according to the ACK/NACK test method.
Step 5. Repeat the test procedure for Low and High channels of the band class.

Table 113 MS sensitivity for AMC in AWGN for various system bandwidths
MCS
Min
Required
SNR
AWGN sensitivity for bandwidth (MHz)
3.5 5 7 8.75 10
QPSK rate-1/2 2.9 -92.4 -91.0 -89.4 -88.5 -88.0
QPSK rate-3/4 6.3 -89.0 -87.6 -86.0 -85.1 -84.6
16QAM rate-1/2 8.6 -86.7 -85.3 -83.7 -82.8 -82.3
16QAM rate-3/4 12.7 -82.6 -81.2 -79.6 -78.7 -78.2
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 151
64QAM rate-1/2 13.8 -81.5 -80.1 -78.5 -77.6 -77.1
64QAM rate-2/3 16.9 -78.4 -77.0 -75.4 -74.5 -74.0
64QAM rate-3/4 18 -77.3 -75.9 -74.3 -73.4 -72.9
64QAM rate-5/6 19.9 -75.4 -74.0 -72.4 -71.5 -71.0

Table 114 Parameters for MS AMC receive sensitivity test
Parameter Value
PDU size (bytes) 540
PDUs per frame 1
Number of frames 30000
Number of PDUs in error 129

Procedure for Testing Absolute & Differential CINR Reporting
Note: This test covers absolute CINR reporting via REP-RSP and differential CINR reporting via 6-bit
CQICH.
Setup:
Step A-1. Turn off MS UUT.
Step A-2. Turn on BS emulator. Wait for the emulator to be ready.
Step A-3. Configure the BSE to transmit according to the setup in Appendix 2, with preamble index =
0.
Step A-4. Configure the interfering source to transmit according to the setup in Appendix 2, with
preamble index = 33. The interfering source shall be synchronized in time and carrier
frequency with the BSE. Set the output signal power of the BSE and that of the interfering
source such that the difference between the two is 20 dB.
Step A-5. Arbitrarily (but different value at each time) select a channel from Table 115, record the
selected channel number, and configure the channel emulator according to the selected
channel information. Adjust the output signal power of the channel emulator and the level of
attenuation at each attenuator, such that the average received signal power at the MS UUT is
-60 dBm, and the average CINR of the whole bandwidth is kept at 20 dB. Any change in the
average CINR in this test is to be accomplished via appropriate variation of the output signal
power of the interfering source while keeping the BSE signal power constant.
Step A-6. Turn on the MS UUT. Wait for the MS to be ready. Ensure that the data link connection is
established between the MS and RCTT. Allocate a CQICH to the MS, via CQICH
Allocation IE with period = 0, MIMO_permutation_feedback_cycle = 0b00, and CINR
averaging parameter
avg
= 1/4. CQICH type of preamble PCINR with reuse factor 1 shall
be employed. In order to prevent MS from initiating a BAMC transition, UCD shall not
include any of the TLVs associated with MS initiated BAMC transition (that is, BAMC
allocation threshold, BAMC release threshold, BAMC allocation timer, BAMC release
timer, Band status reporting max period, BAMC retry timer, CQICH BAMC transition
delay, BAMC entry average CINR).

Absolute CINR Test:
Step B-1. BSE to send REP-REQ for band CINR report.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 152
Step B-2. When the MS sends REP-RSP, record the reported bands and their CINRs.

Differential CINR Test:
Step C-1. Once the MS starts to report the differential CINR on CQICH, start recording the
differential CINR values.
Step C-2. Gradually and monotonically change the average CINR of the whole bandwidth at the rate
of 1.0 dB per 50 frames, until the average CINR reaches 20 dB + CINR
, where CINR
for
the selected channel is tabulated in Table 115. Maintain this final average CINR for 50
frames.
Step C-3. Stop recording the differential CINR values. Sum all the recorded differential CINRs for
each band.

Trial control:
Step D-1. Turn off the MS.
Step D-2. Repeat Step A-4 to Step D-1 for 9 times, for a total of 10 trials. In each new iteration of Step
A-4, select a channel among the channels that have not been previously selected in this test.
Step D-3. End of test.

Table 115. CINR test configurations: Multipath channel and CINR

Ch.
#
Path 0 Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4 CINR

(dB) rel.
delay
ch.
coeff.
rel.
delay
ch.
coeff.
rel.
delay
ch.
coeff.
rel.
delay
ch.
coeff.
rel.
delay
ch.
coeff.
1 0 1 2 0.43
- i 0.77
4 -0.72
- i 0.48
11 -0.19
- i 0.18
28 0.03
- i 0.09
+3
2 0 1 2 0.74
+ i 0.84
4 -0.97
+ i 0.17
10 -0.08
+ i 0.07
26 -0.05
- i 0.09
+2
3 0 1 3 0.16
+ i 0.98
6 -0.89
+ i 0.52
10 0.10
+ i 0.02
18 0.09
- i 0.03
-2
4 0 1 2 -0.04
- i 0.88
4 -0.92
- i 0.40
15 -0.12
- i 0.43
24 0.02
+ i 0.04
-3
5 0 1 2 0.09
+ i 0.86
4 -0.96
+ i 0.64
6 -0.03
- i 0.09
24 -0.01
- i 0.10
+3
6 0 1 1 -0.47
+ i 0.99
2 -0.63
- i 0.48
18 -0.05
+ i 0.07
25 0.04
+ i 0.01
+2
7 0 1 1 -0.76
+ i 0.75
2 0.23
- i 0.64
18 0.10
- i 0.04
28 0.04
+ i 0.04
-2
8 0 1 2 0.55
+ i 0.93
4 -0.88
+ i 0.27
16 0.08
+ i 0.06
27 0.04
- i 0.01
-3
9 0 1 2 0.17
- i 0.91
4 -0.63
- i 0.37
24 0.01
+ i 0.10
27 0.05
- i 0.02
+3
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 153
10 0 1 1 -0.60
+ i 0.91
2 -0.81
- i 0.41
8 0.05
- i 0.05
10 -0.08
+ i 0.06
-3

Table 115 lists the time-invariant multipath channels used in the CINR measurement test. All the
channels listed above have non-symmetric power spectrum, so as to have five (an odd number) bands
with significantly higher band CINRs than the rest. In this table, relative delay is in units of samples,
measured from the first path, where the sampling time is 1/sampling frequency (no oversampling).
This is to maintain the same frequency selectivity characteristics of a given channel among different
Bandwidth profiles. Channel coefficients, in linear scale, are constant over time, and are relative to the
magnitude of the strongest path, which is normalized to 1. In this table, i denotes the square root of -1,
i.e., channel coefficients are complex valued.
Table 116. CINR test channel configurations: Five bands with the highest CINR
Ch.
#
Band with highest
CINR
Band with 2
nd

highest CINR
Band with 3
rd

highest CINR
Band with 4
th

highest CINR
Band with 5
th

highest CINR
5
th
/6
th

(dB)
Band # CINR
(dB)
Band # CINR
(dB)
Band # CINR
(dB)
Band # CINR
(dB)
Band # CINR
(dB)
1 4 24.46 11 24.18 5 22.68 10 21.75 3 21.50 6.19
2 0 24.10 7 23.95 8 22.76 1 22.25 6 21.33 5.26
3 11 24.27 2 23.85 7 23.22 6 23.06 1 21.91 5.69
4 11 24.40 4 24.24 3 22.41 10 21.60 5 21.51 5.32
5 7 24.65 0 24.58 6 22.26 8 21.81 1 21.23 5.32
6 10 24.62 9 24.27 11 23.94 8 22.86 7 20.08 5.03
7 11 24.47 10 23.80 9 22.07 0 19.20 8 18.87 5.22
8 0 24.42 7 24.38 8 22.64 1 22.19 6 21.81 6.74
9 4 24.49 11 24.42 5 22.41 3 22.30 10 21.82 7.68
10 9 24.55 10 24.41 11 23.46 8 22.92 7 20.80 5.17

Table 116 shows the five best bands and their band CINRs associated with each channel in Table 115.
This table also shows the CINR difference between the 5
th
best band and the 6
th
best band for
supplemental information. The band number ranges from 0 to 11. As the table shows, the difference
between the 5
th
best band CINR and the 6
th
best band CINR is at least 5.0 dB, for all channels.

In order for the MS to pass this test, all the compliance requirements stated below must be met by each
test issuing a pass verdict. If any of the requirements below are not met, and a fail verdict is issued, the
MS does not pass this test.

Compliance for Functional Transmit Test:
Pass verdict:
a) The number of bursts in error is less than or equal to M for Functional Tests, AND
b) The boosting on the pilots, as verified by the VSA, is 2.5 0.5 dB higher than the average power
on the data sub-carriers.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 154

Fail verdict:
a) The number of bursts in error is more than M for Functional Tests OR
b) The boosting on the pilots is not 2.5 0.5 dB higher than the average power on the data sub-
carriers.

Compliance for Receive Sensitivity Test:
In order to be compliant to the minimum receiver sensitivity requirement, the receiver is required to,
after accounting for its noise figure and implementation loss, achieve an equal or better Packet Error
Rate (PER) target performance when the received signal is at the maximum sensitivity level.

Pass verdict:
For all modulation and coding combinations and test cases, the number of packets in error is less than
or equal to the value specified in Table 114.

Fail verdict:
For at least one of the modulation and coding combinations in one of the test cases, the number of
packets in error is higher than the limits in Table 114.

Compliance for Absolute & Differential CINR Reporting Test:
Pass verdict: All of the following conditions are satisfied.
- Condition 1 (MS functionalities): The MS UUT sends REP-RSP within 100 frames of REP-REQ
transmission assuming that the BSE allocates uplink BW every frame, and starts sending
differential CINR report on the next frame after REP-RSP.
- Condition 2 (Best band selection): For all trials, the five reported bands correspond to the highest
CINR bands. The order in which the 5 best bands are reported in REP-RSP is not tested.
- Condition 3 (Absolute CINR): For at least 70% of the 50 reported absolute CINRs (5 best band
CINRs per trial 10 trials), the difference between the reported CINR and the actual CINR is
within the 3 dB range.
- Condition 4 (Differential CINR): At least 70% of the 50 summed differential CINRs for each band
(5 summed CINRs per trial 10 trials) are in the range of CINR
3 dB.

Fail verdict: Otherwise.

0.0.1 6
th
November,
2006
Arvind Raghavan Initial draft containing only abstract

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 155
0.0.2 2006-11-08 Jiho Jang Modified test abstract (included AMC subchannel
construction and receiver sensitivity test)
0.0.3 2006-11-10 Jiho Jang Modified test abstract (transmission of CQI codeword
based on triggering conditions)
0.0.4 2006-11-11 Jiho Jang Modified test abstract (Band-AMC transition based on
triggering conditions). Removed test setup
0.0.5 2006-12-07 Arvind Raghavan Added draft intro, PICS coverage, test setup, procedure
and compliance requirements for AMC transmit
functional and receive qualitative tests.
0.0.6 2007-01-10 Yu-Chang Eun Added procedure and compliance requirements for
absolute CINR reporting via REP-REQ, Differential
CINR reporting via 6-bit CQICH, and Band-AMC
transition triggers.
0.0.7 2007-01-23 Yu-Chang Eun and
Yongsun Hwang
Modified procedure and compliance requirements for
absolute CINR reporting via REP-REQ, Differential
CINR reporting via 6-bit CQICH, and Band-AMC
transition triggers.
0.0.8 2007-01-23 Arvind Raghavan Modified procedure for functional transmit test (VSA
cant decode), added full test name to sensitivity test, and
added C2 test to compliance requirements for the
transition trigger test
0.0.9 2007-02-02 Hassan Yaghoobi Editor-approved.
0.1.0 2007-02-13 Yongsun Hwang Modified procedures and compliance requirements for
absolute CINR reporting test, differential CINR reporting
test, and Band-AMC transition triggering test, as
discussed in the FtF session at Kona, Hawaii.
0.1.0 2007-02-14 Arvind Raghavan Modified the functional transmit test to be an indirect test
using the BSE. Added explicit procedure and AWGN
sensitivity table for the receive test. Fixed compliance
requirements for the first two tests.
0.1.1 2007-02-21 Arvind Raghavan Added frame format, BSE sensitivity table, and
description of offset for pilot boosting.
0.1.2 2007-02-28 Yongsun Hwang Modified the test as discussed in the conference call.
0.1.4 2007-03-02 Arvind Raghavan Minor edit to specify use of all subchannels.
0.1.6 2007-03-12 Yongsun Hwang Edits and clarifications as discussed in the conference
call.
0.1.7 2007-03-17 Yongsun Hwang Fixed incorrect test channel information; replaced the
contents of Tables 5 & 6.
0.1.8 2007-03-17 Jiyun Seol Modified during Orlando FtF meeting
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 156
0.1.9 2007-04-10 Yongsun Hwang Added an interfering source to test setup, as discussed in
the FtF session at Orlando, FL.
0.2.0 2007-04-15 Yongsun Hwang Clarified the test setups for CINR reporting tests and
Band-AMC transition triggering test. Changed the
channels in Tables 5 & 6 to those with smaller delay
spreads, with a bug fix in best band selection.
0.2.1 2007-05-08 Arvind Raghavan Fixed errors in the AWGN sensitivity table values

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 157
9.1.24 MS-22.2: Part A, MS receiver MIMO processing
The purpose of this test is to verify MS compliance to reception of MIMO signal. It includes testing related to
Matrix A, Matrix B, and Mode Selection. This test will cover testing of all IO-MIMO related features to MS such as
CINR processing in MIMO mode and Fast DL measurement feedback w/ more than one Rx antenna.

The purpose of the test is to verify that the MS receiver can support the MIMO features as specified in the PICS
document and the Mobile System Profile. The MIMO functionalities to be verified for MS receivers include the
demodulation and decoding performance for matrix A and B MIMO transmission for common pilots at various
MCS levels and under various channel conditions, and the MS capabilities to recommend the correct MIMO mode
to BS (switching between matrix A and B) under various channel conditions. In addition, PCINR measurements for
MIMO modes at the MS are tested for common pilots.

In the mobile profile, the MS is required to be able to support the two MIMO transmission modes (i.e.,
matrix-A and B) in an STC zone under PUSC permutation. In particular, the MS MIMO support
includes the capability of demodulating and decoding both matrix-A and B formats with a certain
performance, and the capability of link adaptation support in the form of ECINR reporting and MIMO
mode selection.

MIMO matrix-A and matrix-B demodulation:

To verify that the MS receiver can demodulate and decode the MIMO transmission with a certain
performance, the MS is required to achieve a Block Error Rate (BLER) equal to or better than the
target of 10% at a received signal level that is specific to the MCS level and the fading channel
conditions. The fading channel conditions include a combination of several power delay profiles (i.e.,
Ped-B @ 3kmph, Veh-A @ 60kmph, and a modified Veh-A @ 120kmph with the last path moving to
10us) and spatial correlations (low, medium, and high as defined in Appendix 4). Additional test cases
are also included to test the receiver performance under receive antenna imbalance.

The PER is computed from the number of NACKs sent from the MS UUT via the ACK channel that is
assigned by the BSE. In each frame, one packet is sent from the BSE and the MS UUT will feed back
in the next frame either ACK or NACK for each packet. The downlink burst and uplink ACK channel
allocation information is conveyed in HARQ DL MAP IE. Unlike the normal HARQ operation, the
BSE will not re-transmit a packet in the case of receiving a NACK. The packet transmitted in each
frame is a new packet (i.e., AI_SN field toggles at each frame). The details of STC zone location,
burst allocation size and position, and packet size will be described in the test setup section.

MIMO mode selection between matrix-A and matrix-B:

In order for the BS to use the MIMO format that best suits the downlink channel condition, the MS is
required to be able to feed back trustworthy information that includes PCINR/ECINR, as well as
matrix-A/B mode recommendation.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 158
As the standard states in section 6.3.18: The reported effective CINR feedback shall correspond to the
MCS in Table 298a with which the expected block error rate, assuming a specific block length, is
closest to, but does not exceed, a specific target average error rate. The target average error rate and
assumed block length are defined in profiles. It is reasonable to follow the same concept to define the
MIMO selection reporting requirement for MS, i.e., the MS should provide the MIMO mode
recommendation that corresponds to the highest spectral efficiency while still meeting the target block
error rate. The spectral efficiency here is derived from both the MCS levels and the MIMO mode. It is
also necessary to specify the block length for which the target BLER is defined. Since the block size
and target BLER were not defined in either the system profile or the PICS document, in the test, the
block length is assumed to be the maximal FEC block length allowed for different MCS (i.e., 60/54/48
bytes) and the target BLER is 10%.

The test concept is to send two bursts from the BSE to the MS UUT, one with the mode and MCS as
recommended by the MS (burst-1), and the other with a mode and MCS that deliver the next higher
spectral efficiency (burst-2). Both packets consist of two FEC blocks of maximal size allowed in the
standard according to the MCS level. The packet error rates (PER) for both bursts are then recorded.
The PER for burst-1 is expected to meet or exceed a target FER value that is equivalent to the target
BLER for the defined block size while BLER for burst-2 is expected to be higher than the target FER
value. Margins to the target FER are provided in the test.The mode recommendation is expected to
depend on the spatial correlation and the mean SNR operation point.


PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.13 Channel Quality
Measurements Table A.32 (item 6)
P I
2. A.5.1.1.1.16 Multiple Input
Multiple Output (MIMO). Table A.42
T D
3. A.5.1.1.1.16 Multiple Input
Multiple Output (MIMO). Table A. 44
T D
4. A.6.2 MAP IEs. Table A.281 (item 13)

T D

- BSE can support STC zone allocation and pilot transmission
- BSE can support HARQ allocation (HARQ DL MAP IE)
- Test apparatus should be able to adjust the input signal level at each of the MS UUT antenna
ports accurately, as well as the total signal levels. The sensitivity levels are defined as the
total signal power of the two receiver ports.Note that the signal level is measured over the
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 159
entire STC zone (time-triggered) and over enough frames for a stable read-out. Note also that
if the measurement is made over the entire band including both data and pilot subcarriers, the
measured power density is then P_data+offset due to the 2.5dB (16/9) pilot boosting, where
P_data is the average power per data subcarrier and offset is 0.46dB as determined from
10log10[(N_data+N_pilot*16/9)/(N_data+N_pilot)] for PUSC.

9.1.24.4 Test setup
Figure 33 shows the test setup for testing the MS receiver MIMO Processing

Figure 33.Test Setup for MS Receiver MIMO Processing
The MIMO channel implementation in the test system must guarantee that the spatial and
polarization correlation properties are consistent with the model specified in Appendix 4.
If MIMO channel simulation is done other than at base band level the RF phase of combined
signals must be calibrated to ensure phase alignment.
The transmitted baseband signal should consist of a preamble, a non-STC zone with PUSC
permutation for MAP/DCD/UCD payload, and a STC zone starting from the symbol right after the
MAP traffic to the end of the DL subframe. The total number of symbols in the STC zone should be an
even number. If not, the last symbol of the DL subframe can be left unused. Also, all subcarriers are
used in the STC zone (i.e., the use all SC indicator is set to 1 in STC_DL_Zone_IE). The
MAP/DCD/UCD messages should be sent with QPSK rate and repetition 4. The non-STC zone
(including preamble) could be sent from a single BSE antenna under the spatial fading channel that
will be applied to the STC zone for various MIMO tests. In this case, all the data and pilot symbols in
the non-STC zone are boosted by 3dB.


The burst allocation always starts from the 5
th
symbol of the STC zone with a starting subchannel
offset of mod(frame_index, N_subch), where N_subch is the total number of subchannels in PUSC
permutation over the entire band (i.e., 30 for 1024-point FFT and 15 for 512-point FFT). The frame
structure to be used for the test of MIMO matrix-A and matrix-B sensitivity is depicted in Figure 34.
Attenuator 2
MIMO Channel
Fader
(2x2)
Attenuator 1
Rx
1
Rx
2
Tx
Tx1
Rx
Power
Meter 1
Power
Meter 3
Power
Meter 2
BSE MS
UUT
Power
Meter 1
Tx2
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 160
P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
D
L

M
A
P
Time
0 1 2 3
0
1
2
3
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub- frame
DL PUSC (MAP)
zone
TTG RTG
4 0 1 2 3 4
4
5
Downlink Sub- frame
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
U
L

M
A
P
HARQ DL MAP IE
FCH
DL PUSC STC
Zone
UL PUSC zone

4 symbols
m
o
d
(
f
r
a
m
e
_
i
n
d
e
x
,

N
_
s
u
b
c
h
)
A
l
l
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

(
1

b
u
r
s
t

o
f

2

F
E
C

b
l
o
c
k
s
)
A
l
l
o
c
a
t
i
o
n

m
a
y

c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
s

h
e
r
e

Figure 34. Frame structure for MIMO sensitivity test

The burst size (i.e., number of slots), for matrix B transmission, is 10/6/5/3/3/2/2/2, corresponding to
the eight MCS levels, which results in a packet size that is equal to two FEC blocks of maximum size
(i.e., maximal size of 60/54/60/54/54/48/54/60 bytes respectively for the eight MCS levels). In matrix-
A transmission, in order to keep the packet sizes the same as in matrix-B, the burst size is doubled, so
the packet in each frame always contains 2 FEC blocks. Since MS can only acknowledge on a per
packet basis, only PER (not BLER) can be measured. Assuming independent error in the two FEC
blocks, a 10% BLER translates into 19% PER in the test. Each data packet consists of a 6-byte generic
MAC header at the beginning and a 2-byte CRC-16 at the end, leaving the remaining as payload bits.
Random payload bits are used. The CRC is calculated based on MAC header and the payload.

The slots before and after the burst in the STC zone are filled with dummy random QPSK symbols. In
the HARQ DL MAP IE, the CID associated with the MS UUT is used for the desired burst allocation,
while a dummy CID could be used for the dummy data bursts before and after the desired one.

MIMO mode selection between matrix-A and matrix-B:
In this test, the size and position of the STC zone is the same as before. In addition, the test is
configured as follows:
- BSE assigns via UL MAP a fast feedback channel periodically (one per frame) to the MS
UUT. BSE requests per-frame CQI feedback via CQICH Alloc IE by setting the period
field to 00.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 161
- Two types of bursts will be sent from BSE and they may correspond to different modes.
[Note: A standard clarification is needed here, i.e., ECINR reporting always corresponds to
the MIMO mode used in the last allocation in the latest frame.]



Test case 1: MS receiver sensitivity for matrix-A (no antenna imbalance)

Step 7. Configure the MIMO channel emulator to high spatial correlation according to Appendix 4.
Configure the BSE to transmit in matrix-A mode.
Step 8. Set the sum of power levels at the two received antenna portsof the MS UUT according the
following equation (two input signals should always have the same attenuation factor) and as
tabulated in Table 120 to Table 124
10
114 (3 ) 10log 0.46
s Used
MS ideal
FFT
F N
R SNR NF ImplementationLossMargin
N
| |
= + + + + + +
|
\ .

where F
s
is

the sampling rate in MHz, N
used
is the number of used subcarriers, NF is the maximal
noise figure allowed (8dB), and SNR
ideal
and ImplementationLossMargin are listed in Table 119
according the different MCS levels to be tested. SNR
ideal
is the average data subcarrier power to the
noise power ratio in frequency domain, and it is also the average SNR across two receive antennas.
The equation above defines the sum of signal power levels at the two receive antenna ports of the
MS UUT.
Step 9. For each MCS level to be tested, the number of frames as specified in Table 119 is transmitted from
the BSE.
Step 10. Record the packet received in error (i.e., NACKs) according the ACK/NACK test method.
Step 11. Repeat Step 2-5 for Low and High channels of the band class.

Table 119. Parameters for MIMO Receiver Performance (Matrix-A, one packet per frame, 2 FEC
blocks per packet)
SNR
ideal
and
Implementation
LossMargin for
Ped-B@3kmph
(dBm)
SNR
ideal
and
ImplementationLoss
Margin for Veh-
A@60kmph (dBm)
SNR
ideal
and
ImplementationLo
ssMargin for
modified Veh-
A@120kmph
(dBm)
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots
per
PDU
# of
frames
# of
error
packets
MIMO
channel
High Corr. High Corr. High Corr.
QPSK
rate-1/2
0.75 (5) 0.90 (5) 1.20 (6.25) 60x2 10x2 20,000 3800
QPSK
rate-3/4
4.38 (5) 4.52 (5) 5.00 (6.25) 54x2 6x2 20,000 3800
16QAM
rate-1/2
6.23 (5) 6.58 (5) 7.31 (6.25) 60x2 5x2 20,000 3800
16QAM 10.40 (5) 10.69 (5) 11.30 (6.25) 54x2 3x2 20,000 3800
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 162
rate-3/4
64QAM
rate-1/2
10.90 (5) 11.15 (5) 11.81 (6.25) 54x2 3x2 20,000 3800
64QAM
rate-2/3
14.16 (5) 14.74 (5) No test 48x2 2x2 20,000 3800
64QAM
rate-3/4
15.58 (5) 16.09 (5) No test 54x2 2x2 20,000 3800
64QAM
rate-5/6
17.49 (5) 18.36 (5) No test 60x2 2x2 20,000 3800

Table 120. Sensitivity Numbers for 3.5 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Sensitivity Levels for Ped-
B@3kmph (dBm)
Sensitivity Levels for Veh-
A@60kmph (dBm)
Sensitivity Levels for
modified Veh-A@120kmph
(dBm)
MIMO channel High Corr. High Corr. High Corr.
QPSK rate-1/2 -91.62 -91.47 -89.92
QPSK rate-3/4 -87.99 -87.84 -86.12
16QAM rate-1/2 -86.14 -85.79 -83.81
16QAM rate-3/4 -81.97 -81.68 -79.82
64QAM rate-1/2 -81.47 -81.22 -79.31
64QAM rate-2/3 -78.21 -77.63 No test
64QAM rate-3/4 -76.79 -76.28 No test
64QAM rate-5/6 -74.87 -74.01 No test
Table 121. Sensitivity Numbers for 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth
B@3kmph (dBm)
A@60kmph (dBm)
(dBm)
QPSK rate-1/2 -90.16 -90.01 -88.46
QPSK rate-3/4 -86.53 -86.38 -84.66
16QAM rate-1/2 -84.68 -84.33 -82.35
16QAM rate-3/4 -80.51 -80.22 -78.36
64QAM rate-1/2 -80.01 -79.76 -77.85
64QAM rate-2/3 -76.75 -76.17 No test
64QAM rate-3/4 -75.33 -74.82 No test
64QAM rate-5/6 -73.41 -72.55 No test

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 163
B@3kmph (dBm)
A@60kmph (dBm)
(dBm)
QPSK rate-1/2 -88.61 -88.46 -86.91
QPSK rate-3/4 -84.98 -84.84 -83.11
16QAM rate-1/2 -83.13 -82.78 -80.80
16QAM rate-3/4 -78.96 -78.68 -76.81
64QAM rate-1/2 -78.46 -78.21 -76.30
64QAM rate-2/3 -75.20 -74.63 No test
64QAM rate-3/4 -73.78 -73.28 No test
64QAM rate-5/6 -71.87 -71.01 No test

B@3kmph (dBm)
A@60kmph (dBm)
(dBm)
QPSK rate-1/2 -87.64 -87.50 -85.95
QPSK rate-3/4 -84.01 -83.87 -82.15
16QAM rate-1/2 -82.16 -81.81 -79.84
16QAM rate-3/4 -78.00 -77.71 -75.85
64QAM rate-1/2 -77.50 -77.24 -75.34
64QAM rate-2/3 -74.23 -73.66 No test
64QAM rate-3/4 -72.81 -72.31 No test
64QAM rate-5/6 -70.90 -70.04 No test

B@3kmph (dBm)
A@60kmph (dBm)
(dBm)
QPSK rate-1/2 -87.15 -87.00 -85.45
QPSK rate-3/4 -83.52 -83.38 -81.65
16QAM rate-1/2 -81.67 -81.32 -79.34
16QAM rate-3/4 -77.50 -77.21 -75.35
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 164
64QAM rate-1/2 -77.00 -76.75 -74.84
64QAM rate-2/3 -73.74 -73.17 No test
64QAM rate-3/4 -72.32 -71.81 No test
64QAM rate-5/6 -70.41 -69.55 No test

Test case 2: MS receiver sensitivity for matrix-B (no antenna imbalance)

Step 2. Configure the MIMO channel emulator to Low spatial correlation according to Appendix 4.
Configure the BSE to transmit in matrix-B mode.
Step 3. Set the sum of power levels at the two received antenna ports of the MS UUT according the
10
114 (3 ) 10log 0.46
s Used
MS ideal
FFT
F N
N
| |
= + + + + + +
|
\ .

where F
s
is

used
ideal
ideal
MS UUT.
the BSE
Step 6. Repeat the Step 3-5 for other spatial correlation conditions for the MIMO channel defined in Table
125.

Table 125. Parameters for MIMO Receiver Performance (Matrix-B, two FEC blocks per packet)
SNR
ideal
and
(ImplementationLos
sMargin ) for Ped-
B@3kmph (dB)
SNR
ideal
and
(ImplementationLo
ssMargin ) for
Veh-A@60kmph
(dB)
SNR
ideal
and
(ImplementationLoss
Margin ) for
Modified Veh-
A@120kmph (dB)
PDU
Size
(byte
s)
Slots
per
PDU
# of
frames
# of
error
packets
MIMO
channel
Low High low High low High
QPSK
rate-1/2
6.30 (5) 7.48 (5) 6.59 (5) 7.82 (5) 6.80
(6.25)
7.44
(6.25)
60x2 10 20,000 3800
QPSK
rate-3/4
11.45 (5) 13.30
(5)
11.80
(5)
13.20
(5)
12.40
(6.25)
13.50
(6.25)
54x2 6 20,000 3800
16QAM
rate-1/2
13.73 (5) 14.70
(5)
14.23
(5)
14.94
(5)
14.64
(6.25)
16.79
(6.25)
60x2 5 20,000 3800
16QAM
rate-3/4
19.00 (5) 20.95
(5)
19.83
(5)
22.00
(5)
No test No test 54x2 3 20,000 3800
64QAM 18.59 (5) 20.58 19.16 21.35 No test No test 54x2 3 20,000 3800
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 165
rate-1/2 (5) (5) (5)
64QAM
rate-2/3
22.70 (5) No test No test No test No test No test 48x2 2 20,000 3800

B@3kmph (dBm)
A@60kmph (dBm)
Sensitivity Levels for Modified Veh-
A@120kmph (dBm)
MIMO channel Low High low High low High
QPSK rate-1/2 -86.07 -84.89 -85.78 -84.55 -84.32 -83.68
QPSK rate-3/4 -80.92 -79.07 -80.57 -79.17 -78.72 -77.62
16QAM rate-
1/2
-78.64 -77.67 -78.13 -77.43 -76.48 -74.33
16QAM rate-
3/4
-73.37 -71.42 -72.54 -70.37 No test No test
64QAM rate-
1/2
-73.78 -71.78 -73.21 -71.02 No test No test
64QAM rate-
2/3
-69.67 No test No test No test No test No test

B@3kmph (dBm)
A@60kmph (dBm)
A@120kmph (dBm)
QPSK rate-1/2 -84.61 -83.43 -84.32 -83.09 -82.86 -82.22
QPSK rate-3/4 -79.46 -77.61 -79.11 -77.71 -77.26 -76.16
16QAM rate-
1/2
-77.18 -76.21 -76.67 -75.97 -75.02 -72.87
16QAM rate-
3/4
-71.91 -69.96 -71.08 -68.91 No test No test
64QAM rate-
1/2
-72.32 -70.32 -71.75 -69.56 No test No test
64QAM rate-
2/3

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 166
B@3kmph (dBm)
A@60kmph (dBm)
A@120kmph (dBm)
QPSK rate-1/2 -83.06 -81.88 -82.78 -81.55 -81.31 -80.67
QPSK rate-3/4 -77.92 -76.06 -77.56 -76.16 -75.71 -74.61
16QAM rate-
1/2
-75.63 -74.66 -75.13 -74.43 -73.47 -71.32
16QAM rate-
3/4
-70.36 -68.42 -69.54 -67.37 No test No test
64QAM rate-
1/2
-70.78 -68.78 -70.20 -68.01 No test No test
64QAM rate-
2/3

B@3kmph (dBm)
A@60kmph (dBm)
A@120kmph (dBm)
QPSK rate-1/2 -82.10 -80.91 -81.81 -80.58 -80.35 -79.70
QPSK rate-3/4 -76.95 -75.10 -76.60 -75.20 -74.75 -73.65
16QAM rate-
1/2
-74.66 -73.70 -74.16 -73.46 -72.50 -70.35
16QAM rate-
3/4
-69.40 -67.45 -68.57 -66.40 No test No test
64QAM rate-
1/2
-69.81 -67.81 -69.24 -67.05 No test No test
64QAM rate-
2/3

B@3kmph (dBm)
A@60kmph (dBm)
A@120kmph (dBm)
QPSK rate-1/2 -81.60 -80.42 -81.31 -80.09 -79.85 -79.21
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 167
QPSK rate-3/4 -76.46 -74.60 -76.10 -74.70 -74.25 -73.15
16QAM rate-
1/2
-74.17 -73.20 -73.67 -72.97 -72.01 -69.86
16QAM rate-
3/4
-68.90 -66.96 -68.08 -65.91 No test No test
64QAM rate-
1/2
-69.31 -67.32 -68.74 -66.55 No test No test
64QAM rate-
2/3

Test case 3: MS receiver sensitivity for matrix-B (4dB antenna imbalance)

Step 2. Configure the MIMO channel emulator to Low spatial correlation and to emulate additionally a 4dB
received signal imbalance at the two MS received antenna ports by applying the appropriate
attenuation on each branch, i.e., diag(sqrt(a), sqrt(b))*H, where H is the channel matrix and
a/b=4dB. (An alternative method is to absorb the antenna gain imbalance into the spatial correlation
definition, in which case we define the new correlation matrix as
diag(sqrt(a),sqrt(b),sqrt(a),sqrt(b))*R* diag(sqrt(a),sqrt(b),sqrt(a),sqrt(b)) where R is the
correlation matrix without antenna imbalance) . Configure the BSE to transmit in matrix-B mode.
Step 3. Set the sum of power levels at the two received antenna ports of the MS UUT according the
10
114 (3 ) 10log 0.46
s Used
MS ideal
FFT
F N
N
| |
= + + + + + +
|
\ .

where F
s
is

used
ideal
ideal
MS UUT.
the BSE

Table 131. Parameters for MIMO Receiver Performance (Matrix-B, two FEC blocks per packet, 4dB
antenna imbalance)
SNR
ideal
and
(ImplementationLossMargin ) for Ped-
B@3kmph (dB)
PDU Size
(bytes)
Slots per
PDU
# of
frames
# of error packets
MIMO
channel
Low Correlation
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 168
QPSK
rate-1/2
6.66 (5) 60x2 10 20,000 3800
QPSK
rate-3/4
12.40 (5) 54x2 6 20,000 3800
16QAM
rate-1/2
13.96 (5) 60x2 5 20,000 3800
16QAM
rate-3/4
19.80 (5) 54x2 3 20,000 3800
64QAM
rate-1/2
19.50 (5) 54x2 3 20,000 3800
64QAM
rate-2/3
23.97 (5) 48x2 2 20,000 3800

Sensitivity Levels for Ped-B@3kmph (dBm)
MIMO channel Low Correlation
QPSK rate-1/2 -85.71
16QAM rate-1/2 -78.40
16QAM rate-3/4 -72.57
64QAM rate-1/2 -72.87
64QAM rate-2/3 -68.40

16QAM rate-1/2 -76.94
16QAM rate-3/4 -71.11
64QAM rate-1/2 -71.41
64QAM rate-2/3 -66.94

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 169
16QAM rate-1/2 -75.40
16QAM rate-3/4 -69.56
64QAM rate-1/2 -69.86
64QAM rate-2/3 -65.39

16QAM rate-1/2 -74.43
16QAM rate-3/4 -68.60
64QAM rate-1/2 -68.90
64QAM rate-2/3 -64.42

16QAM rate-1/2 -73.94
16QAM rate-3/4 -68.10
64QAM rate-1/2 -68.40
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 170
64QAM rate-2/3 -63.93

Test case 4: MS mode selection

Step 1. Set the channel model to be Ped-B at 1kmph and low spatial correlation
Step 2. Set the average total signal power at the two antenna ports level equal to the Sensitivity Levels for
Ped-B@3kmph and QPSK rate given in the Test Procedure Test case 1 Sensitivity Numbers tables
appropriate for the MS units channel bandwidth.
Step 3. BSE assigns via UL MAP a fast feedback channel periodically (one per frame) to the MS UUT. BSE
requests per-frame ECINR(MCS) feedback with every fourth CQICH used for MIMO mode
selection via CQICH Alloc IE (i.e., set the period field to 00, feedback type filed to 01, and
MIMO_permutation_feedback_cycle filed to 01)
Step 4. Initialization: BSE starts with sending in matrix-A format a single FEC block with MCS level 1
(QPSK, rate-1/2, 60bytes) in the STC zone. After that, MS UUT feeds back to the BSE the
recommended MCS level in each frame. The BSE should always send a burst according to the
recommended MCS in the next frame within three frames (i.e., upon receiving CQI at frame-n, the
BS uses it no later than frame-n+3). After the first mode selection feedback from the MS UUT, the
BSE sends a burst according to the recommended mode and with a MCS level so that the total
spectral efficiency in bit/subcarrier is x, where x is the smallest value allowed in Table 137 with
x>=y (y is the bits/subcarrier of the previous burst). (Note that this initial MCS level will be updated
in the next frames from the MS UUT).
Step 5. Starting from the second mode selection feedback, the BSE sends two bursts to the MS UUT in each
frame and record their PERs via ACK/NACK of each burst. Both bursts consist of two FEC blocks,
each of which is of the maximal size defined for the MCS. Burst-1 always uses the mode and MCS
recommendation while burst-2 uses a mode and MCS that can deliver the next higher spectral
efficiency i.e., if burst-1 uses one of the MCS levels and MIMO modea in the first column of Table
138, the MCS and mode for burst-2 is set according to the second column of Table 138. Table 138 is
based on Table 137 that lists the achievable spectral efficiencies with an increasing order..In case of
burst-1 that has already used the highest MCS level and matrix-B, there will not be any burst-2
transmission). Burst-2 is always sent before burst-1(just as example, burst-2 starts from the 5th
symbol of the STC zone and burst-1 starts from the 7
th
symbol).
Step 6. Starting from step 5, gradually increase the total signal SNR at a rate of 1dB per 3000 frames. Run
the test for 60,000 frames.
Step 7. Whenever a mode selection feedback is received that is different from the previous mode (i.e., mode
transition), the BSE will send within three frames only burst-1 to allow MS UUT to settle on a stable
mode and MCS recommendation. In the frame immediately after BSE changes the MIMO mode in
the downlink only single burst is sent with the recommended mode and a MCS defined by the
following rule: a) If the transition is from matrix-A to B, the initial MCS level is decided so that the
total spectral efficiency in bit/subcarrier is x, where x is the smallest value allowed in Table 137
with x>=y (y is the bits/subcarrier used in the previous frame); b) If the transition is from matrix-B
to A, the initial MCS level is decided so that the total spectral efficiency in bit/subcarrier is z,
where z is the largest value allowed in Table 137 with z<=y (y is the total bits/subcarrier used in
previous frame). The BSE resumes two-burst transmission after the mode transition was confirmed
in next mode selection feedback (i.e., the new mode was recommended again). The received
ACK/NACK corresponding to burst-1 will not be counted in the meantime.
Step 8. Change the spatial correlation to high, repeat step 2 to 7.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 171
Table 137. Mode selection, MCS, and corresponding spectral efficiency
Total
bits/subcarrier
1 1.5 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4.5 5 6 6 8 9 10
Mode A A A B A A B B A A A B B B B B
MCS level 1 2 3 1 4 5 2 3 6 7 8 4 5 6 7 8

Table 138. MCS levels and MIMO modes for burst-1 and burst-2
Burst-1 Burst-2
QPSK 1/2, matrix A QPSK 3/4, matrix A
QPSK 3/4, matrix A QPSK 1/2, matrix B
16-QAM 1/2, matrix A QPSK 3/4, matrix B
16-QAM 3/4, matrix A 16-QAM 1/2, matrix B
64-QAM 2/3, matrix A 64-QAM 3/4, matrix A
64-QAM 3/4, matrix A 64-QAM 5/6, matrix A
QPSK 1/2, matrix B 16-QAM 3/4, matrix A
QPSK 3/4, matrix B 64-QAM 2/3, matrix A
16-QAM 1/2, matrix B 64-QAM 3/4, matrix A
16-QAM 3/4, matrix B 64-QAM 2/3, matrix B
64-QAM 5/6, matrix B No burst-2

In order to be compliant to the requirement, the receiver is required to, after accounting for its noise figure
and implementation loss, achieve an equal or better Packet Error Rate (PER) target performance when the
received signal is at the maximum sensitivity level.

Pass verdict:
For all modulation and coding combinations in test case 1, 2 and 3, the number of packets in error is less or
equal to the limits in Table 119, Table 125, and Table 131 respectively. In the mode selection test, the
recorded PER for burst-1 must not exceed the target PER of 36% (Assuming a target BLER of 10% and a
positive margin of 10% allowed. The PER for the two-block packet is then 1-(1-0.2)^2=36%). At the same
time, the PER for burst-2 must be worse than the target PER of 9.75% (Assuming a target BLER of 10%
and a negative margin of 5% allowed. The PER for a two-block burst is then 1-(1-0.05)^2=9.75%).

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 172
Fail verdict:
For at least one of the modulation and coding combinations in test case 1, 2 and 3, the number of packets in
error is higher than the limits in Table 119, Table 125, and Table 131 respectively, or the MS fails the mode
selection test.


0.1 2006-11-05 Jeff Zhuang Initial draft. A working document for ad-hoc discussion
(reflect discussion in Seoul F2F and Nov. 2
nd
ad-hoc #2
conf. call)
0.2 2007-01-04 Jeff Zhuang Reflected the status after the Shanghai F2F meeting in
December 10-14. A working document for further ad-hoc
discussion.
0.3 2007-01-11 Jeff Zhuang Further revised with mode selection test added for ad-hoc
discussion on Jan. 11th.
1.0 2007-01-25 Jeff Zhuang Revised before submission to call-for-comments and
after giving ad-hoc three weeks to review
2.0 2007-01-31 Jeff Zhuang Revised to reflect ad-hoc consensus in F2F
2.1 2007-01-31 Jeff Zhuang Add the test case of modified Veh-A @ 120kmph
3.0 2007-04-17 Jeff Zhuang Editorial revisions made and frame structure added
3.2 2007-04-17 Jeff Zhuang Sensitivity values added as TBD and comment 162
incorporated to version 3.1 (after April F2F)
3.3 2007-06-10 Jeff Zhuang 1) Updated a few sensitivity values as TBD
2) A few minor editorial changes
3) Fixed an error in correlation definition for antenna
imbalance case
4) Added a missing row in table 5 (16QAM rate
matrix-B)
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 173
5) Removed all TBDs, except for the sensitivity tables

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 174
MS-22.2: Part B, MS receiver Physical CINR measurements for DL-MIMO
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of MS CINR measurements and reports for DL-MIMO in PUSC
permutation. This text describes the method and the test for this case.

PCINR measurements are impacted by the receiver types due to different possible implementations of the DL-
MIMO receiver at the MS side. The tests are designed such that MS with advanced capabilities are allowed to have
better performance than basic standard compliant receivers without being penalized by the test. Channels under test
are chosen carefully so that for variety of receiver implementations, including ZF, MMSE and ML receivers the
reference PCINR metric results in the same value. Additional implementation margin is included to the compliance
requirement to accommodate various other receiver types not explicitly covered by the reference PCINR equations
used in this RCT. Currently, the standard defines two possible methods for MIMO operation in DL PUSC -STC
zone which are:
1. Matrix A Alamouti scheme
2. Matrix B Spatial multiplexing.

Matrix A transmission is used for achieving spatial diversity while Matrix B transmission is used to maximize
transmission rate by transmitting two symbols from two different antennas. Therefore, upon BS command the MS is
supposed to receive transmissions in one of the two possible MIMO modes. In this sub-test the ability of the MS-
UUT to compute post-processing PCINR (i.e., after performing combining) from DL-PUSC broadcast pilots is
examined using pre-defined mechanism. This mechanism is based on section 8.4.5.4.10.1 in the standard that
specifies the methods for preparing feedback through CQI_CH_Alloc_IE for STC/MIMO zones. We note here that
the frame structure, burst size and CQI reports are the same in the above tests (this refers to sensitivity and MIMO
mode selection in MS22.2).



Table 140. PICS Coverage for MS-22.2 DL-MIMO PCINR reports
PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
5. A.5.1.1.1.13, table A.32, item3:
Physical CINR measurement for a
permutation zone from pilot
subcarriers
T D

All of the below tests require the MS to be able to receive DL frames and bursts. The DL attenuation
should be aligned with the specified noise and to generate appropriate SNR appropriate for the
supported modulations (QPSK, 16-QAM, 64QAM). All transmissions are done assuming Reuse-1
scheme on the PUSC data (payload) zone assuming use_all_SC = 1 bit is configured. All post-
processing PCINR reports are reports from zone broadcast pilots only. The profile states that PCINR
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 175
should be calculated from zone pilots only. In this test the burst PCINR report of the MS UUT will be
computed over all available pilots of the zone. It should be noted however that the pilots are boosted
by 5.5[dB] relative to the non-boosted average power of each data tone. The PCINR that is computed
from pilots subcarriers applies to the data subcarriers. The MS UUT should compensate for this pilot
boosting when preparing the PCINR report over the CQICH. The reference or true PCINR that is
used for comparing with the reports is computed after proper compensation of pilots boosting and
reflects the PCINR on data tones. Note that the equations for computing the reference PCINRs in this
test are intended for RCT testing, and are not intended to impose any specific implementation scheme
to the MS.

a. During the test the BSE shall assign a CQICH allocation with alpha = 1 to the MS and shall
b. Absolute accuracy is defined as D(i) = reported_dB(i) real_dB(i) true_dB(i) per ensemble of
measurements for a given input average SINR. Channels under test are chosen carefully so that
absolute accuracy of the computed PCINR (after combining) will be common to different types of
receivers including ZF, MMSE and ML.
c. Pass/Fail criterion recommendations are as follows:
Absolute PCINR:
QE IM AM k D mean QE IM AM
D SNR
+ + s s +

]) [ ( ) 1 10 ( 10 log * 10
10
min

Relative PCINR:

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) % 70 Pr > + + s QE IM AM i D mean k D
Where QE= 0.5 dB and QE= 1.0 dB are the quantization error for fading channels and static channels,
respectively.Furthermore, D
min
=30dB is the Dynamic range of a typical receiver, and IM= 2.5[dB] is the
implementation margin which accommodates for any remaining differences in receiver implementations.
AM = 1 dB is the Accuracy Margin. Pr is empirical probability.
d. PCINR accuracy is evaluated over time: For given average CINR point, the tester collects all the
MS measurement reports during the duration of the test then validate that the mean report is within the
required range as above for the absolute PCINR test and 70% of all reports were within confidence
interval for relative PCINR test.
e. The per MS receive antenna average CINR points in the test are taken from following range:
Table 141. SNR test ranges for Matrix A
Min Max
Reuse 1 -4dB 20dB

Note: For MIMO matrix B the SNR range is a subset and is defined on the closed interval [10
20][dB]
f. For MIMO matrix A test the spatially non-correlated 2x2 MIMO frequency flat fading channel
with 3 km/h mobility is used for both the interfering BSE signal and the desired BSE signal. For
MIMO matrix B a single tap static orthogonal 2x2 MIMO channel [1 1; 1 1] will be used for both the
desired BSE signal and the interfering BSE signal. The detailed various MIMO channel configurations
are shown in Figure 35.

The general setup for this test is captured at Figure 35.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 176

For the different MIMO matrix types a different time domain channel PDP is used as described above.

Figure 35. Proposed Test setup for both matrix A & B

In all tests the data transmitted on the data subcarriers (for both the desired channel and the interfering channel) is
dummy QPSK symbols and the loading factor is 1 (i.e. Use all_subcarriers = 1).

The scenarios for the different CINR values are shown in Table 142 for MIMO matrix A and in Table 143 for
MIMO matrix B. It should be noted that the detailed PCINR values are per a single MS antenna.
Table 142. SNR test points for pilot-based PCINR (Matrix A)
Scen-ario # Signaling Unit (BSE)
Serving BS
P
S
[dBm]
Interfering Unit (BSE)
Interfering BS
P
I
[dBm]
Informative CINR per Rx
antenna
P
S
/ P
I
[dB]
1 -60 64 4
2 -60 -70 10
3 -60 74 14
4 -60 -78 18
5 -60 80 20

I
P
S
P
S
P
Tx
1
Tx
2
Rx1
Rx1
Rx2
Serving
BSE
MS
UUT
MIMO
channel
H
Attenuator
Attenuator
Combiner
Combiner
Power
meter
Tx
1
Tx
2
Rx1
MIMO
channel
H
Attenuator
Attenuator
Interferin
g
BSE
Tx1
Power
meter
Power
meter
Power
meter
I
P
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 177
Table 143. SNR test points for pilot-based PCINR (Matrix B)
Scen-ario # Signaling Unit (BSE)
Serving BS
P
S
[dBm]
Interfering Unit (BSE)
Interfering BS
P
I
[dBm]
Informative CINR per Rx
antenna
P
S
/ P
I
[dB]
1 -60 -70 10
2 -60 74 14
3 -60 -78 18
4 -60 80 20

For both matrix A and matrix B the post-processing PCINR should be computed according to mutual information
PCINR equations that appear in the section 8.4.5.4.10.1 in the IEEE802.16e-2005 standard.

Section 8.4.5.4.10.1 states that MIMO capable MS shall measure post processing CINR for each individual layer as
shown in Figure 230a. For vertically encoded SM (Matrix B), since there is only a single layer (coding/modulation
path), a single CINR should be fed back. The specification of section 8.4.5.4.10.1 defines Avg_CINR for both ML
and LMMSE demodulator as:
1 _
) , (
=
H y d C
e CINR Avg

For ML receiver, the following mutual information is specified
( ) H R H I
N
H y d C
H
N
1
det log
1
) , (

+ =

where N denotes the number of spatial layers. For linear MMSE receiver, the mutual information takes the form of
( )
=
+ =
N
n
n
SINR
N
H y d C
1
1 log
1
) , (

where SINR,n denotes the post-processing SINR for layer n. For Matrix A mutual information is given by
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ =

2
2
1
1 log ) , (
F
H R H y d C

In above expressions, Log denotes logarithm of base e. Note that the standard does not clearly specify if the above
expressions are defined per sub-carrier basis or are defined as the average mutual information over frequency. For
the purpose defining the reference equations for this RCT, the above expressions are assumed to be defined per sub-
carrier basis. It is not the intent of this RCT to require that all MS assume the above expressions to be defined per
sub-carrier basis.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 178
For frequency flat non-correlated 2x2 MIMO fading channels, the following equation shall be used by the RCTT as
the reference equation for computing the MIMO post-processing PCINR metric for Matrix A:
| | ( )
( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
+
+
=
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
=

= = =
=
) ( ) (
) ( ) (
2 log
10 log
10
) ( log
1
10 log
10
) ( log
1
10 log
10
) ( ,
1
10 log
10
) ( _
2 1
2 1
1
2
1 1
,
1
t P t P
t P t P
t
K
t
K
t H y d C
K
dB t CINR Avg
I I
S S
K
k
k
K
k
N
n
k n
K
k
k k k k STTD
Tx
o

(1)

where P
Si
and P
Ii
are signal and interference power measured on receive antenna i in frame t.
Similarly, for static (not function of t) orthogonal 2x2 MIMO channels [1 1; -1 1], the following equation shall be
used by the RCTT as the reference equation for computing the MIMO post-processing PCINR metric for Matrix B:

( )
( ) ( )
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
=
=

= = =
=
I
S
K
k
k
K
k
N
n
k n
K
k
k k k k SM
P
P
K NK
H y d C
K
dB CINR
log
10 log
10
log
1
10 log
10
log
1
10 log
10
,
1
10 log
10
] [
1
2
1 1
,
1
o

(2)

Equations (1) and (2) will be used as the true reference metrics for the Matrix A and Matrix B tests, respectively.
Values in Table 142 are informative.

Test case x.1: Pilot based post processing PCINR measurement (reuse-1) for DL-PUSC MIMO matrix A broadcast
pilots zone
Initial Conditions:

Step 1. Turn on the BSE. The time domain PDP of both the desired BSE signal and the interfering BSE
signal has a single tap (frequency flat fading channel) with a mobility of 3[Km/h].
Step 2. The Signaling Unit (BSE, serving BS) transmits via its channel a DL transmission with preambles
segment ID=0 (preamble index= 0, MAPs transmitted with CTC QPSK 1/2, rep=4, The serving
BSE should transmit its payload with PermBase = 1 and PRBS_ID = 0.
Step 3. Interfering Source 1 (interfering BSE) transmits via its channel a DL transmission with preambles
segment ID=1 (preamble index= 33, same frame structure as BSE) The interfering source will have
the same PermBase as the serving BSE (PermBase = 1), but different PRBS_ID (PRBS_ID = 1) .The
interferer allocation will be identical to that of the BSE such that the desired signal subcarriers will
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 179
be fully hit by the interference signal subcarriers. Configure the attenuators so that the average
powers at the MS antenna input and the input CINR are according to Table 142. Note: the power of
each source can be measured at the combiner input and the combiner loss can be compensated, and
there is no requirement on the accuracy of such compensation, as long as the ratio between the
signals is maintained as in Table 142.
Step 4. Configure the MS UUT to use no averaging (i.e., alpha=1) and CQI feedback per frame

Test Procedure:

Step 6. Turn on the MS UUT and let it settle for a few seconds
Step 7. For each scenario specified in Table 142 set the power levels according to the Table 142.
Step 8. After setting the power levels, let the UUT settle for few seconds.
Step 9. For the purpose of measuring PCINR the following tests are performed. Request via CQI_alloc_IE
PCINR measurements for a permutation zone from pilot sub-carriers (feedback type = 0b00) and
zone type = 0b01 (STC) for each frame.
Step 10. The following steps are requested for Matrix A
Step 11. Request via CQI_alloc_IE zone pilots-based PCINR. Request per-frame update.
- Record the quantized CINR feedback for each frame (Note: The PCINR reports are quantized in
1[dB] steps and these fact should be taken into account in designing the margins for the test)

- Assuming 1 frame CQI feedback delay, compare the CINR feedback received at frame-n relative
2. Collect all measurements for which CQI channel is correctly decoded (i.e.
reported_SNR_dB (i+reportDelay) was reported and received by the BS receiver)
3. Any True_CINR_dB(t) value which is higher then 28dB should be clipped to 28dB.
Likewise, any True_CINR_dB(t) value which is lower then -3dB should be clipped to -
3dB. This is to create fair reference to Reported_CINR_dB which is always clipped to
CQICH reporting range of -3dB to 28dB.
Calculate: D[t] = reported_CINR_dB(t + reportDelay) true_CINR_dB(t)
Calculate the average of D[t] over ensemble of measurements for a given input average CINR
Check absolute accuracy criterion:
QE IM AM k D mean QE IM AM
D SNR
+ + s s +

]) [ ( ) 1 10 ( 10 log * 10
10
min

Check relative accuracy criterion:

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) % 70 Pr > + + s QE IM AM i D mean k D

Where QE= 0.5 dB, D
min
=30dB, IM= 2.5 dB and AM=1 dB.
Step 12. Repeat the test for the next scenarios described in Table 142.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 180
Test case x.2: Pilot based post processing PCINR measurement (reuse-1) for DL-PUSC MIMO matrix B
broadcast pilots zone.

1. Repeat test procedure (steps 1- 12) for MIMO matrix B transmission with the test scenarios as described in
Table 143 and with the MIMO matrix B channel setup as demonstrated in Figure 35. For MIMO matrix B a
static orthogonal 2x2 MIMO channel [1 1; 1 1] will be used for both the desired BSE signal and the
interfering BSE signal. Since channel is static, the QE= 1 dB for MIMO Matrix B test. The same IM= 2.5
dB and AM = 1 dB are applied here.

Absolute and relative criterions should be tested and the tests should pass for all scenarios defined. This test passes
if all the test items in the test result Table 142 and Table 143 are pass.


Table 144. Revision History
0.0.1

0.0.2

0.0.3

0.0.4

0.0.5
12/4/2007

25/4/2007

12/5/2007

13/5/2007

14/5/2007
Amir Franocs

Amir Franocs

Amir Francos

Amir Francos, Shlomo
Malka

Shlomo Malka

First draft before April 07 FTF meeting

Second draft that incorporates Samsungs
proposal for test setup after Nice FTF meeting.

Draft with 2 options for test setup, first is
Samsung's proposal and the second option is
using same setup as DL-MIMO test. Also insert
Alvarion suggestion for 3dB margin
Suggest 2 options to the absolute accuracy
measurement and suggest equations for
calculating the average PCINR.

Add comments from Samsung & Intel &
Motorola regarding the absolute accuracy and
CINR averaging equations.

0.0.6 9/6/2007 Amir Francos Incorporate comments from DL-MIMO ad-hoc
group to the text. Incorporate test setup
proposal by BeeCeem.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 181
0.0.7 15/6/2007 Amir Francos Updating the test with margins suggested by
BeeCeem and Alvarion. Updating the test
setup as dicussed in 14/6 Conference call.
Setting the True_CINR calculation according to
the PCINR computed from a reference MMSE
receiver.

0.0.8 18/06/2007 Djordje Tujkovic Update based on latest conf call
0.0.8.1 20/06/2007 Amir Francos Increasing the IM to 2[dB] and adding few
more explanations from Motorola (Jeff).
0.0.9 21/06/2007 Amir Francos Incorporating comments received during
Madrid FTF meeting

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 182
9.1.25 MS-23.2 MS receive Beamforming processing
The purpose of this test is to verify MS receiver processing with AMC and PUSC transmissions
with dedicated pilots. This test includes four main parts:
1. This test checks receiver sensitivity for DL PUSC and DL AMC with dedicated pilots for
various MCS levels and test channel conditions
a. DL AMC: AWGN only
b. DL PUSC: AWGN and fading conditions
2. This test checks pilot based PCINR reporting for DL PUSC and DL AMC with dedicated
pilots for various MCS levels and test channel conditions. This includes major group
PCINR reporting for DL PUSC.
a. DL AMC: AWGN only
b. DL PUSC: Fading conditions
3. This test checks the ability of the MS to operate properly with extra received power in a
beamforming zone relative to a non-beamformed zone.
4. Finally, this test also addresses MS operation in DL-PUSC STC zone with dedicated
pilots and matrix B.

A MS receiver has to be tested for correct processing of bursts configured for beamforming (i.e., in zones with
dedicated pilots) as transmitted from the BS, either in an AMC or PUSC zone. This processing includes receiver
sensitivity and items associated with it, namely, PCINR estimation based on dedicated pilots and major group
PCINR report when in a PUSC zone.

The test setup includes a single BSE that transmits DL data to the MS UUT which has two receive antennas. The
transmitted data is received via both antennas (i.e., SIMO case) by means of combining the data from the two
antennas (e.g. MRRC).

The four main test sections are described below:

Receiver Sensitivity with dedicated pilots:

The first test deals with receiver sensitivity in beamforming (dedicated pilots) zone. For the receiver sensitivity
tests, the transmitting signal is not required to be beamformed since the main difference between this test and other
non-beamformed test cases is the use of dedicated pilots. Hence, a BSE with single antenna and a MS receiver
with two antennas are sufficient for the tests as shown in the test set up section below. To be compliant to receiver
sensitivity requirements, the MS UUT receiver is required to achieve a PER/BER equal or better than a specific
target level at specified channel conditions. For fading channels the target PER is 10% and for AWGN channels the
target BER is 10
-5
.

For beamforming in an AMC zone, allocations should be made with a time-first subchannel allocation using the
HARQ_DL_MAP_IE() with the rectangular sub-burst indicator set. For beamforming in a DL-PUSC zone, the
basic allocation unit in the frequency domain is a single major group. For receiver sensitivity tests, each MS (unless
otherwise stated) is allocated only a single slot by one or more major groups. Finally, it was decided not to check
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 183
antenna imbalance issues in this test and these (typically) small imbalances can be considered as part of the
receivers implementation loss
1
.

Accommodation of extra received power due to beamforming:

In the second part of the test, accommodation of additional received power due to beamforming by the MS is
verified. For this test, the BSE is required to be capable of emulating a BS transmitter with 4 antennas as well as
transmitting both beamformed and non-beamformed zones in one DL subframe. Note that actual beamforming is
not required and the BSE transmission is still with a single antenna, however the transmit power of the beamformed
zone must be boosted as appropriate for the (emulated) number of transmit antennas.

In order to emulate BF gain at the receiver, the BSE must either internally boost just the beamformed zone, or be
connected to an external amplifier which can provide gain to just the beamformed zone. In this later case, an
external control circuit is required to synchronize the BF power boosting to the BF zone.

The DL subframe will be configured with a DL PUSC zone that contains the maps, DCD/UCD and non-
beamformed data and is transmitted with no BF gain boosting. The dedicated pilots zone that contains data symbols
is boosted by 10*log10(Nant) dB where Nant = 4. To emulate worst case additional received power, all major
groups are transmitted and are boosted by this factor. The per-subcarrier power of all allocated subcarriers in the
allocated major groups should be the same.

This test verifies that there is no degradation in receiver performance when receiving allocations with dedicated
pilots that are received with higher power due to beamforming. This test also checks the receiver sensitivity of non-
boosted allocations and ensures the same sensitivity with and without power boosting.

PCINR reporting with dedicated pilots:

The purpose of this part of the test is to verify the MS PCINR computations and report mechanisms via the CQICH
channel for both PUSC and AMC in dedicated pilot zones. The reference for this part of the test is PCINR with
broadcast pilots for single antenna MS as described in MS05.1.

For this test, the MS has two receiver antennas and the PCINR computations should take this fact into account. Also,
in this test only PCINR reports from permutation zones with dedicated pilots using pilot based measurements are
considered.

For dedicated pilots PUSC zones, if the report was requested through CQICH_Alloc_IE() and the major group
indication bit = 0, then the MS should measure CINR on all pilots of the clusters that contain bursts for that MS. If
the CINR report is requested using major group indication = 1 then the MS should measure CINR on all pilots that
belong to the major groups specified in the PUSC major group bitmap, even if the zone does not contain a burst for
the MS under test.

1
Additionally, this issue will be tested in MS MIMO sensitivity test.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 184
For AMC permutation zone with dedicated pilots, the MS should always measure CINR on slots that contain bursts
for that MS. If the zone does not contain burst for the MS under test, it should not measure CINR or update the
report.

The PCINR reports are based on summing the per receiver antenna CINRs.

DL-PUSC STC with Dedicated Pilots:

This test addresses MS operation in DL-PUSC STC zone with dedicated pilots and matrix B, but only verifies the
functionality rather than the performance of the MS receiver. The test is similar to the sensitivity test in measuring
PER but with diagonal AWGN MIMO channels and SNR at least 10dB higher than the minimum SNR required for
the maximum sensitivity levels.


Table 145. PICS Coverage for MS 23.2

PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
1. A.12.3 PUSC with dedicated pilots T D
2. A.12.6 AMC 2x3 with dedicated pilots T D
3. A.32.3 Physical CINR measurement for
a permutation zone from pilot
subcarriers.
T D
4. A.32.5 Major group indication
(applicable to PUSC only) both 0 and 1
T D
5. Table A.157
Item6. Pilot modulation for MIMO
PUSC with dedicated pilots
P D

- BSE can support DL zone allocations with dedicated pilot transmission
- BSE can support HARQ allocation (HARQ DL MAP IE) with support for rectangular sub-burst indicator
- BSE can boost individual DL zones by up to 6 dB to emulate the extra received power due to beamforming
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 185
- The RCTT should be able to adjust the input signal level at each of the MS UUT antenna ports accurately, as
well as the total signal levels. The sensitivity levels are defined as the total equivalent data signal power of the
two receiver ports.
The RCTT should be able to measure the received signal power level over an individual allocation (time-
triggered) and over enough frames for a stable read-out. Note that if the measurement is made over the entire band
including both data and pilot subcarriers, the measured power density is then P_data+offset due to the 2.5dB (16/9)
pilot boosting, where P_data is the average power per data subcarrier and offset is determined from the following
equation: 10log10[(N_data+N_pilot*16/9)/(N_data+N_pilot)]. This results in offset values of 0.46 dB for PUSC and
0.36 dB for AMC.

9.1.25.4 Test setup for dedicated pilots zones
The following diagrams show the test set ups for MS receive beamforming tests with dedicated pilots. The test
setup in Figure 36is used for receiver sensitivity tests and tests for the accommodation of extra power. Figure
37shows the test setup used for PCINR tests which is similar to Figure 36with the addition of an interfering source.
Both test setups should support both AWGN and fading channels. Since the MS UUT has two receiver antennas, the
fading channels will be two uncorrelated, same type ITU-VehA or ITU-PedB channels with speed at 60km/h and
3km/h, respectively. The third diagram shows the test set up for MS operation test in DL-PUSC STC zone with
dedicated pilots, which uses uncorrelated AWGN channels.

Figure 36. Basic Test Setup for MS receive beamforming tests with dedicated pilots

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 186

Figure 37. Test setup for PCINR reporting with dedicated pilots

BSE
MS
UUT
Power
Meter 1
Attenuator 1
Power
Meter 2
Attenuator 2

Figure 38. Test set up for Matrix B with dedicated pilot zones

9.1.25.5 Frame structure and packet Sizes

The DL/UL ratio that is used in this test is listed below:
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 187

- (35,12) for 5 & 10 MHz channels
- (30,12) for 8.75 MHz channels
- (24, 09) for 7 & 3.5 MHz channels.

The frame structure contains 1 preamble symbol and some number of DL PUSC symbols that contain the FCH, DL & UL
maps, and DCD & UCD. There is a single DL beamformed zone in each frame. Hence, the DL subframe contains a
downlink preamble and two zones one regular DL-PUSC zone (for the control symbols) and the second one is the BF zone
with dedicated pilots.

The packet length is chosen to be, after encoding, a single FEC block with a maximum data size allowed by the CTC subchannel
concatenation rule, i.e., 60/54/48 bytes depending on the particular MCS level. One packet is one FEC block (thus PER =
BLER).

The BF zone should be either PUSC (PUSC dedicated pilots) zone or AMC (AMC 2x3 with dedicated pilots) zone. The zone
(PUSC or AMC) should be defined with STC_DL_ZONE IE with Use All SC indicator = 1. All allocations are made in
HARQ mode (frequency first along the subchannel axis for PUSC, time first allocations for AMC), but with no
retransmissions allowed. Transmissions will be allocated in the DL map using HARQ_DL_MAP_IE and
DL_HARQ_Chase_Sub_burst_IE.

The UL sub-frame should support UL PUSC and the ability to transmit CQICH feedback on fast feedback channels (6 bits
CQI reports). The UL sub-frame contains three symbols control region in the beginning of the UL subframe, a single
sounding symbol and payload symbols up to the end of the UL subframe.

9.1.25.6 PUSC frame parameters

The length of the first DL PUSC zone excluding 1 symbol for preamble shall be multiple of 2 symbols and should be at least
6symbols to accommodate FCH, MAP, DCD, UCD, and other MAC messages. The rectangular HARQ region allocated in
the DL PUSC BF zone shall have the number of symbols of even numbers and the number of subchannels of all
subchannels.For PUSC mode the frequency axis allocation is done on a time varying major group index number as defined in
the Table 146. Note that for 1024 FFT, special care is taken to insure that the same sized major group is transmitted in each
frame such that the transmitted power does not alternate from frame-to-frame.

Table 146. Major group index number for PUSC
FFT
Size
Number of slots
in allocation
Major groups
allocated
Major Group for start of
allocation
Number of used
Subcarriers (Nused)
1024 10 Even and odd mod(frame_number,5) 280
1024 6 Even 2*mod(frame_number,3) 168
1024 5 Even 2*mod(frame_number,3) 168
1024 3 Odd 2*mod(frame_number,3)+1 112
1024 2 Odd 2*mod(frame_number,3)+1 112
512 10 Two major groups 2*mod(frame_number,2) 280
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 188
512 6 Two major groups 2*mod(frame_number,2) 280
512 5 One major group 2*mod(frame_number,3) 140

It is desired to test the smallest possible allocation since this will have the fewest pilots available and result in worse case
performance. For regular BF-PUSC tests, an HARQ region is allocated for the specified number of major groups in Table 146by
one slot duration (2 symbols). This HARQ region will occupy the first slot of the beamformed zone.
For single slot duration allocations, the number of subchannels required is 10/6/5/3/2 according to the
chosen MCS. Therefore, an allocation can occupy either entire major group(s) or part of a major group
depending on the MCS and the starting position of the allocation.
If there are not enough payload bits to fill all the subchannels in the specified major group(s), then dummy symbols with the same
MCS level as the one used in the test will be stuffed after the desired payload burst (with a different CID than the desired burst).

The frame structure to be used for the test of PUSC zone with dedicated pilots is depicted in the following Figure
39.

P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
D
L

M
A
P
Time
0 1 2 3
0
1
2
3
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub-frame
DL PUSC zone
TTG RTG
4 0 1 2 3 4
4
5
Downlink Sub-frame
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
U
L

M
A
P
HARQ DL MAP IE
FCH
DL PUSC BF
Zone
UL PUSC zone
DL Burst
#1
D
L

B
u
r
s
t

#
2
:

F
r
e
q
e
n
c
y

f
i
r
s
t

H
A
R
Q

s
u
b
-
b
u
r
s
t

f
o
r

M
S

r
e
c
e
i
v
e

s
e
n
s
i
t
i
v
i
t
y

t
e
s
t

Figure 39. Frame structure for test of PUSC zone with dedicated pilots

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 189
MIMO-BF allocations are required to be at least two slots in duration. To insure this, one or two HARQ regions are allocated that
are two slots in duration and sum of these HARQ regions completely fill an integer number of major groups. The first HARQ
region will contain four FEC blocks and be used to contain the test PDU. The second HARQ region is allocated if needed to fill
in any unused subchannels in the allocated major groups. This is summarized in Table 147:

Table 147. Major group allocations for PUSC
FFT
Size
FEC Block
Size (slots)
Major groups
Allocated
Allocation
size (slots)
Subchannels for test/dummy
bursts
Number of used
Subcarriers (Nused)
1024 10 Even and Odd 20 10 / 0 280
1024 6 Even 12 6 / 0 168
1024 5 Even 10 5 / 1 168
1024 3 Odd 6 3 / 1 112
1024 2 Odd 4 2 / 2 112
512 10 Two major groups 20 10 / 0 280
512 6 Two major groups 12 6 / 4 280
512 5 One major group 10 5 / 0 140
512 3 One major group 6 3 / 2 140
512 2 One major group 4 2 / 3 140

The starting major group for these MIMO-BF allocations is based on the frame number as shown in Table 148:
Table 148. Major groups for start of allocation for PUSC
FFT
Size
Major groups
allocated
Major Group for start of
allocation
1024 Even and Odd mod(frame_number,5)
1024 Even 2*mod(frame_number,3)
1024 Odd 2*mod(frame_number,3)+1
512 Two major groups 2*mod(frame_number,2)
512 One major group 2*mod(frame_number,3)

9.1.25.7 AMC frame parameters
For the AMC permutation the DL allocations are time stripes along the time axis with a single subchannel granularity in the
frequency axis. For AMC mode, the frequency axis allocation is done on a time varying subchannel index number as shown in
Table 149, where total_subchannels denotes the number of AMC subchannels in the DL (48 for 1024 FFT, 24 for 512 FFT).

To ensure that the allocation is a multiple of the zone length (this is required when using the HARQ DL MAP IE with support for
rectangular sub-burst indicator), the AMC zone length depends upon the size of the allocation. Table 149 lists the zone length
based upon the allocation sizes used in this test. In all cases, the first DL PUSC zone (for FCH, MAP, DCD, UCD, etc.)
excluding 1 symbol for preamble shall be multiple of 2 symbols, and the AMC zone should occupy the last symbols in the DL
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 190
subframe with multiple of 3 symbols. The symbol offset and the length of the AMC zone shall be as specified in Table 150-1. A
rectangular HARQ region with number of symbols as specified in Table 150 and spanning all subchannels is allocated within the
AMC zone.

Table 149. Major group index number for AMC
Number of slots
in allocation
Number of
symbols of HARQ
region (symbols)
Allocation size Allocation Start Subchannel
10 15 2 subchannel x 5 slots mod(frame_number, total_subchannels-1)
6 9 2 subchannel x 3 slots mod(frame_number, total_subchannels-1)
5 15 1 subchannel x 5 slots mod(frame_number, total_subchannels)

Table 150. Length and Symbol offset of AMC zone
Bandwidth (MHz) Zone length
(symbols)
Symbol offset of the zone
(symbols)
10 or 5 18 17
8.75 15 15
7 or 3.5 15 9

The frame structure to be used for the test of AMC zone with dedicated pilots is depicted in the following Figure 40.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 191
P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
D
L

M
A
P
Time
0 1 2 3
0
1
2
3
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub-frame
DL PUSC zone
TTG RTG
4 0 1 2 3 4
4
5
Downlink Sub-frame
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d
U
L

M
A
P
HARQ DL MAP IE for
AMC BF Zone
FCH
AMC BF Zone
UL PUSC zone
DL Burst
#1
D
L

B
u
r
s
t

#
2
Length of HARQ region

Figure 40. Frame structure for test of AMC zone with dedicated pilots

9.1.25.8 Receiver sensitivity test procedure for dedicated pilots zones
This test uses the same ACK/NACK test as the one described in the MS09.1 MS receiver sensitivity test to measure
PER. Namely, the ACK/NACK feedback mechanism used to measure MS performance is the same as used in
HARQ operation, even though the BSE will not re-transmit in the case of receiving a NACK. Each packet
transmitted in a frame is a new packet (i.e., by toggling the AI_SN bit). The downlink allocation information for
each packet (burst) is conveyed in HARQ DL MAP IE and the receiver feeds back ACK/NACK in the assigned
ACK channels within the specified HARQ ACK region.

Test case #1.1: Beamforming with AMC in AWGN channel
Step 1. Configure the BSE to transmit beamformed AMC zone with appropriate numbers of subchannels
(as described in the Frame structures and packet sizes section above) being allocated to the MS
UUT and the pilots within the allocated subchannels beamformed the same way while the other
subchannels unused.
Step 2. Set the receivers per-antenna input level as specified in Table 152 which is based on the
following sensitivity equation:

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 192
boosting pilot offset
N
N F
R SNR R
fft
used s
required ss
_ _ 13 ) ( 10 log * 10 ) ( 10 log * 10 114 + + + + =

Equation 1
Where
s
F is the sampling frequency in [MHz], R is the repetition factor,
used
N is the number of
used subcarriers (18 per AMC subchannel stripe) and
required
SNR is listed in Table 151 according
to the different MCS levels to be tested. Offset_pilot_boosting is an offset factor due to the 2.5dB
pilot boosting and the RCTT measuring power over the entire band including data and pilot
subcarriers. Its value should be 0.36dB for AMC.
Step 3. For each MCS level to be tested, the number of frames as specified in the Table 151 transmitted
from the BSE.
Step 4. Using the ACK/NACK test to record the packet received in error and verify that the PER is lower
than or equal to the requirements as defined in Table 151.

Test case #2.1: Beamforming with PUSC in AWGN channel
Step 1. Configure the BSE to transmit beamformed PUSC zone with the allocations corresponding to the
chosen MCS levels as described in the Frame structures and packet sizes section above and the
pilots within the same major group beamformed same way while the other subchannels are
unused.
Step 2. Set the average per-antenna received signal level at the MS UUT input input as specified in Table
154.
Step 3. For each MCS level to be tested, the number of frames as specified in Table 153 is transmitted
from the BSE.
Step 4. Using the ACK/NACK test to record the PER and verify that the PER is lower than or equal to the
requirements as defined in Table 153.

Test case #2.2: Beamforming with PUSC in ITU PedB channel at 3km/h
Step 1. Repeat Test case #2.1 in ITU PedB channel at 3km/h but using sensitivity values listed inTable
156.

Test case #2.3: Beamforming with PUSC in ITU VehA channel at 60km/h
Step 1. Repeat Test case #2.1 in ITU VehA channel at 60km/h but using sensitivity values listed in
Step 2. Table 158.


The required SNR table, PER requirements and receiver sensitivity values for the receiver sensitivity tests described
above are listed in the tables below.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 193
Table 151. Parameters for Two-antenna Receiver Sensitivity with dedicated pilots (CTC, AMC,
AWGN)
Required
SNR (dB)
Payload
(bytes)
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots per
PDU
Packets
(PDUs)
per frame
# of
frames
PER
(BER=1e-
5)
# of error
packets
QPSK
rate-1/2
0.5 50 60 10 1 30,000 0.48% 144
QPSK
rate-3/4
4 44 54 6 1 30,000 0.432% 129
16QAM
rate-1/2
6 50 60 5 1 30,000 0.48% 144
16QAM
rate-3/4
10

44 54 3 1 30,000 0.432% 129
64QAM
rate-1/2
11.5 44 54 3 1 30,000 0.432% 130
64QAM
rate-2/3
14.5 38 48 2 1 30,000 0.384% 115
64QAM
rate-3/4
16

44 54 2 1 30,000 0.432% 129
64QAM
rate-5/6
19

50 60 2 1 30,000 0.48% 144

Table 152. Two-Antenna Receiver Sensitivity Values with Dedicated Pilots (CTC, AMC, AWGN)
Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) Specified Per-Antenna
10 MHz 8.75 MHz 7 MHz 5 MHz 3.5 MHz
64 QAM 5/6 -88.70 -89.19 -90.16 -88.70 -90.16
64 QAM -91.70 -92.19 -93.16 -91.70 -93.16
64 QAM 2/3 -93.20 -93.69 -94.66 -93.20 -94.66
64 QAM -96.20 -96.69 -97.66 -96.20 -97.66
16 QAM 3/4 -97.70 -98.19 -99.16 -97.70 -99.16
16 QAM -101.70 -102.19 -103.16 -101.70 -103.16
QPSK -100.69 -101.18 -102.15 -100.69 -102.15
QPSK -104.19 -104.68 -105.65 -104.19 -105.65

Table 153. Parameters for Two-antenna Receiver Sensitivity with dedicated pilots (CTC, PUSC,
AWGN)
Required
SNR
Payload
(bytes)
PDU
Size
Slots per
PDU
Packets
(PDUs)
# of
frames
PER
(BER=1e-
# of
error
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 194
(bytes) per
frame
5) packets
QPSK
rate-1/2
0.5 50 60 10 1 30,000 0.48% 144
QPSK
rate-3/4
4 44 54 6 1 30,000 0.432% 129
16QAM
rate-1/2
6 50 60 5 1 30,000 0.48% 144
16QAM
rate-3/4
10

44 54 3 1 30,000 0.432% 129
64QAM
rate-1/2
11.5 44 54 3 1 30,000 0.432% 130
64QAM
rate-2/3
14.5 38 48 2 1 30,000 0.384% 115
64QAM
rate-3/4
16

44 54 2 1 30,000 0.432% 129
64QAM
rate-5/6
19 50 60 2 1 30,000 0.48% 144

Table 154. Two-Antenna Receiver Sensitivity Values with Dedicated Pilots(CTC, PUSC, AWGN)
64 QAM 5/6 -80.66 -81.15 -82.12 -79.69 -81.15
64 QAM -83.66 -84.15 -85.12 -82.69 -84.15
64 QAM 2/3 -85.16 -85.65 -86.62 -84.19 -85.65
64 QAM -88.16 -88.65 -89.62 -87.19 -88.65
16 QAM 3/4 -89.66 -90.15 -91.12 -88.69 -90.15
16 QAM -91.90 -92.39 -93.36 -92.69 -94.15
QPSK -93.90 -94.39 -95.36 -91.68 -93.14
QPSK -95.18 -95.67 -96.64 -95.18 -96.64

Note that the 512 FFT sensitivity numbers may be different than the corresponding 1024 FFT values due to a
different number of used subcarriers.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 195
Ped-B@3Km/h)
Required
SNR
Payload
(bytes)
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots
per
PDU
Packets
per
frame
# of
frames
PER
target
# of
error
packets
QPSK
rate-1/2
2.5 50 60 10 1 10,000 10% 1000
QPSK
rate-3/4
6 44 54 6 1 10,000 10% 1000
16QAM
rate-1/2
7.5 50 60 5 1 10,000 10% 1000
16QAM
rate-3/4
12 44 54 3 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-1/2
12.5 44 54 3 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-2/3
16 38 48 2 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-3/4
17.5 44 54 2 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-5/6
20 50 60 2 1 10,000 10% 1000
Table 156. Two-Antenna Receiver Sensitivity Values with Dedicated Pilots
(CTC, PUSC, Ped-B@3Km/h)

64 QAM 5/6 -79.66 -80.15 -81.12 -78.69 -80.15
64 QAM -82.16 -82.65 -83.62 -81.19 -82.65
64 QAM 2/3 -83.66 -84.15 -85.12 -82.69 -84.15
64 QAM -87.16 -87.65 -88.62 -86.19 -87.65
16 QAM 3/4 -87.66 -88.15 -89.12 -86.69 -88.15
16 QAM -90.40 -90.89 -91.86 -91.19 -92.65
QPSK -91.90 -92.39 -93.36 -89.68 -91.14
QPSK -93.18 -93.67 -94.64 -93.18 -94.64


WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 196
Veh-A@60Km/h)
Required
SNR
Payload
(bytes)
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots
per
PDU
Packets
per
frame
# of
frames
PER
target
# of
error
packets
QPSK
rate-1/2
2.5 50 60 10 1 10,000 10% 1000
QPSK
rate-3/4
6 44 54 6 1 10,000 10% 1000
16QAM
rate-1/2
8 50 60 5 1 10,000 10% 1000
16QAM
rate-3/4
12 44 54 3 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-1/2
12.5 44 54 3 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-2/3
16.5 38 48 2 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-3/4
18 44 54 2 1 10,000 10% 1000
64QAM
rate-5/6
20 50 60 2 1 10,000 10% 1000

Table 158. Two-Antenna Receiver Sensitivity Values with Dedicated Pilots (CTC, PUSC, Veh-
A@60Km/h)
64 QAM 5/6 -79.66 -80.15 -81.12 -78.69 -80.15
64 QAM -81.66 -82.15 -83.12 -80.69 -82.15
64 QAM 2/3 -83.16 -83.65 -84.62 -82.19 -83.65
64 QAM -87.16 -87.65 -88.62 -86.19 -87.65
16 QAM 3/4 -87.66 -88.15 -89.12 -86.69 -88.15
16 QAM -89.90 -90.39 -91.36 -90.69 -92.15
QPSK -91.90 -92.39 -93.36 -89.68 -91.14
QPSK -93.18 -93.67 -94.64 -93.18 -94.64


WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 197
9.1.25.10 Pass/Fail verdict
Pass Verdict - For the receiver sensitivity values listed in Table 152, Table 154, Table 156 and
Table 158, the number of packets in error is less or equal to the limits in Table 151, Table 153, Table 155 and Table
157.

Fail Verdict For at least one tested receiver sensitivity value in Table 152, Table 154, Table 156 and
Table 158, the number of packets in error is higher than the limit inTable 151, Table 153, Table 155 and Table 157.

9.1.25.11 Test procedure for extra receiving power in beamformed zone
Two test cases are described here. The first test case is to test that the MS receiving sensitivity in the beamformed
zone has not been affected by the extra power in that zone. Vice versa, the second test case is to verify that the MS
receiving sensitivity in the non beamformed zone has not been affected by the extra power in the beamformed zone.
For the second test case, due to the unavailability of ACK/NACK for MAP in the first mandatory PUSC zone,
following the MAP and UCD/DCD, a data burst is allocated for PER measurement. The test is conducted only over
AWGN channel.

Test case 1: Accommodation of extra power of beamformed PUSC zone: beamformed zone receiving sensitivity.
Step 1. Configure the BS to transmit (in a DL subframe) non-beamformed PUSC zone that corresponds to the
MAP and DCD/UCD followed by beamformed PUSC zone in which burst allocation spans over
single slot duration in time domain and over all major groups in frequency domain with MCS of
64QAM, rate 5/6. The unused parts of the subframe are stuffed with dummy random data with the
same MCS of 64QAM, rate 5/6.
Step 2. Set the transmit power of the beamformed zone equal to that of the broadcast zone.
Step 3. Set the received power level at the sensitivity level for 64QAM rate = 5/6 (which requires the
highest SNR for correct decoding by the MS) using the values specified in Table 159.
Step 4. Add additional 6dB transmit power to the beamformed zone and add an additional 6dB path loss
between the BSE and the MS UUT (this will decrease the SNR of the broadcast zone by 6dB, but
the SNR of the beamformed zone remains the same.).
Step 5. Transmit (from BS) the number of frames as defined in Table 153for sensitivity level test of
beamformed PUSC zone over AWGN channel.
Step 6. Use ACK/NACK to record the packets in the beamformed zone received in error. Verify the number of
error packets is equal to or below 15 times the number listed in Table 153for sensitivity level test of
beamformed PUSC zone over AWGN channel. The increase in target PER corresponds to the fact
that the burst size in this test is 15 times of the burst size for the original sensitivity test of
beamformed PUSC zoneThe burst size is intentionally increased to increase the total amount of
boosting. . Using the formula of PER = 1 (1 -BER)^Sp, where Sp is the packet size in bits, the PER
is calculated to be 15 times of the previous one assuming the same BER.

Test case 2: Accommodation of extra power of beamformed PUSC zone: broadcast zone receiving sensitivity.
Step 1. Configure the BS to transmit a non-beamformed (broadcast) PUSC zone that contains the MAP
and DCD/UCD. Following the MAP and UCD/DCD, a data burst is allocated in the same zone
with allocation size the same as defined in the SISO sensitivity test MS09.1 for AWGN with MCS
of 16QAM, rate . Then, the broadcast zone is followed by a beamformed PUSC zone with burst
allocations the same as defined in Test case 1 above. The unused parts of the subframes are stuffed
with dummy random data with MCS of 16QAM, rate 1/2.
Step 2. Set the transmit power of the beamformed zone equal to that of the broadcast zone.
Step 3. Set the received power level at 3 dB below the maximum sensitivity level for 16 QAM rate as
defined in Test Case 1 in MS-09.1 (Table 28). Note that the 3 dB is subtracted from the defined
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 198
sensitivity since this tests utilizes two antenna reception and will benefit from a 3 dB combining
gain with AWGN conditions.
Step 4. Add additional 6dB transmit power to the beamformed zone.
Step 5. Transmit (from BS) the number of frames as defined in MS09.1 Table 28.
Step 6. Use ACK/NACK to record the packets in the broadcast pilot PUSC zone received in error. Verify
the number of error packets is equal to or below the number listed in MS09.1 Table 28.

Table 159. PUSC Sensitivy for Extra Power Test (CTC, PUSC, AWGN)
64 QAM 5/6 -71.91 -72.40 -73.37 -74.92 -76.38

Pass Verdict The number of error packets is equal to or below the required number with or without beamformed
zone power boosting for both test cases 1 and 2.

Fail Verdict The number of error packets is larger than the required number either with or without beamformed
zone power boosting for either test cases 1 or 2.

9.1.25.13 Test requirements for PCINR reporting in dedicated pilots zone
The PCINR test requires the MS to be receiving DL frames and bursts where the data and pilot symbols are
beamformed together. The DL received signal power should be aligned with the specified noise and interference to
generate CINR appropriate for the supported modulations (QPSK, 16-QAM, 64QAM). Desired signal should have
6dB BF gain in dedicated pilots PUSC and AMC zones while interfering signals should have no BF gain. MAPs of
desired and interfering BS should be scheduled in segmented PUSC zone with two major groups to assure sufficient
protection. The test set up is depicted in Figure 37.

Pilot PCINR:
a. During the test the BSE shall assign a CQICH allocation with alpha = 1 to the MS and shall
b. Absolute accuracy is defined as D(i) = reported_dB(i) real_dB(i) per ensemble of measurements
for a given input average CINR
c. Relative accuracy is defined as E(i) = D(i) mean[D(i)] per ensemble of measurements for a
given input average CINR
d. Pass/Fail criterion recommendations are as follows:
i. Absolute CINR:
QE dB k D mean QE dB
D CINR
+ s s +

3 ]) [ ( ) 1 10 ( log 10 3
10
10
min

ii. Relative CINR:

% 70 ) 3 | ]) [ ( ] [ Pr(| > + s QE dB k D mean k D
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 199

iii. Where QE=0.5dB (quantization error), D
min
=30dB, Pr is empirical probability
e. PCINR accuracy of 3dB accuracy is evaluated over time: The tester collects all the MS
measurement reports during the duration of the test then validate that the mean report is within the
required range as above for the absolute CINR test and all reports were within 70% confidence for
the relative CINR test. The average reported CINR range is from 2dB to 23dB. Detailed test points
are listed in Table 160. Note that the average CINR listed in Table 160below is the reported
CINR which is the sum of the per RX antenna CINR values over the 2 RX antennas.
f. Channel test is performed for PedB 3km/h and VehA 60km/h respectively for dedicated pilots
PUSC zones, and AWGN channel for AMC dedicated pilots zones.

Table 160. CINR test points for dedicated pilots-based PCINR
scenario # Signaling Unit (BSE)
Serving BS [dBm]
Interfering Source 1 [dBm] Avg CINR [dB]*
1 -60 -53 2
2 -60 -57 6
3 -60 -63 12
4 -60 -69 18
5 -60 -74 23

* Informative column

9.1.25.14 Test procedure for PCINR reporting in dedicated pilots zone

Tests are performed for fading channels with a single interfering cell for PUSC dedicated pilots zone and AWGN channels
with AMC permutation zones.

Test case 1.1: Pilot based PCINR measurement for PUSC dedicated pilots zone
Step 1. Set the channel for the BSE and Interfering Sources to be ITU-PedB with speed of 3km/h.
Step 2. Choose QPSK, rate as the MCS to be used.
Step 3. The Signaling Unit (BSE, serving BS) transmits via an independent timing-variant fading channel
(PedB3) with preambles segment ID=0 (preamble index= 0), MAPs in reuse 3 over Segment 0 and
in lowest MCS, i.e. CTC QPSK 1/2, rep=6. The payload should be transmitted with PermBase = 1
and PRBS_ID = 0 and with the chosen MCS.
Step 4. In a DL PUSC zone with dedicated pilots, the BSs will transmit two major groups with burst size of
10 subchannels by 1 slot duration being allocated to the MS UUT. The position of the 10 slot burst is
randomized across frames according to the procedure specified in 9.1.25.6 on PUSC frame
parameters. The rest of the subchannels are unoccupied.
Step 5. Interfering Source 1 (interfering BS) transmits via an independent timing-variant fading channel with
(PedB3) preambles segment ID=1 (preamble index= 33, same frame structure as BSE), MAPs in
reuse 3 over Segment 1 and in lowest MCS, i.e. CTC QPSK 1/2, rep=6. The payload of the
interfering source will have the same PermBase as the serving BS (PermBase = 1), but different
PRBS_ID (PRBS_ID = 1) and with the same MCS as the desired signal. The interferer allocation
will be identical to that of the BSE such that the desired signal subcarriers will be fully hit by the
interference signal subcarriers.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 200
Step 6. The Interfering source shall be synchronized in time and carrier frequency with Signaling Unit
(BSE).
Step 7. Set the average powers at the MS antenna input according to the first test point listed in Table 160.
Note: the power of each source can be measured at the combiner input and the combiner loss can be
compensated, and there is no requirement on the accuracy of such compensation, as long as the ratio
between the signals is maintained as in Table 160.
Step 8. Turn on the MS UUT and let it settle for a few seconds.Configure the MS UUT to use no averaging
(i.e., alpha=1) and CQI feedback per frame
Step 10. For each scenario specified in Table 160set the power levels according to the Table 160. After
setting the power levels, let the UUT settle for few seconds such that all the gain control loops
converged.
Step 11. For the purpose of measuring PCINR, the following steps are performed. Request via CQI_alloc_IE
dedicated pilots PCINR measurement. Request per-frame update.Additionally, set zone_type =
0b10, Zone_permutation = 0b001 and major group indication = 0. This test is performed on two
major groups and all PCINR computations are done based on these major group allocated clusters
alone.
- Record the quantized CINR feedback for each frame
- Record also the per-frame instantaneous fading channel gain for the all BSE and interferer, in
order to compute the instantaneous CINR. The true CINR (which is actually the true C/I) is
calculated from per antenna values and for each antenna is the sum of the instantaneous receive
power of the pilot symbols transmitted by the serving BS, divided by:
: The sum of the instantaneous recieve power of the pilot symbols transmitted by the
interfering source. The two values calculated per antenna are summed to provide the true
CINR value.
- Assuming 1 frame CQI feedback delay, compare the CINR feedback received at frame-n relative
1. Collect all measurements for which the CQI channel is correctly decoded (i.e.
reported_CINR_dB(i+reportDelay) was reported and received by the BS
receiver)
2. Clip the true_CINR_dB(k) to -3dB whenever it is lower then -3dB. Clip the
true_CINR_dB(k) to 28dB whenever it is higher then 28dB.
3. Calculate: D[k] = reported_CINR_dB(k + reportDelay) true_CINR_dB(k)
4. Calculate the average of D[k] over ensemble of measurements for a given input
average CINR
5. Check absolute accuracy criterion:
QE dB k D mean QE dB
D CINR
+ s s +

3 ]) [ ( ) 1 10 ( log 10 3
10
10
min

6. Check relative accuracy criterion:

% 70 ) 3 | ]) [ ( ] [ Pr(| > + s QE dB k D mean k D

min
=30dB, Pr is empirical probability over the
ensemble of measurements.
Step 13. Repeat Step 6 through Step 12 for the next test point listed in Table 160above.
Step 14. Repeat Step 2 through Step 12 with MCS of 64 QAM, rate 5/6.
Step 15. Repeat all the steps above with ITU-VehA channel with speed of 60km/h.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 201

Test case 1.2: Pilot based PCINR measurement for PUSC dedicated pilot zone with major group indication = 1

Repeat all the steps above while asserting in CQICH_alloc_IE major group indication = 1 with a dedicated pilot zone
of duration of one slot. For both QPSK and 64 QAM tests, two major groups are transmitted. The BSE and interferer
transmit on the same major groups and the CQICH_alloc_IE Major Group Bitmap should be set to correspond to the
transmitted major groups. Each pair of major groups are transmitted such that 200 valid results are received, then the
major group allocations are changed Therefore, for this test, the allocation variation is not on a per-frame basis, but
fixed until 200 valid results are received. The results from the 1000 valid measurements are averaged to get the test
result. Table 161indicates the used major groups and associated major group bitmaps:

Table 161. Major groups and major group bitmaps for 1024 FFT
Major Groups Transmitted Major Group Bitmap
0,1 MSB[000011]LSB
1,2 MSB [000110] LSB
2,3 MSB [001100] LSB
3,4 MSB [011000] LSB
4,5 MSB [110000] LSB

Table 162. Major groups and major group bitmaps for 512-FFT
Major Groups Transmitted Major Group Bitmap
0,2 MSB[000101]LSB
2,4 MSB[010100] LSB

Test case 1.3: Pilot based PCINR measurement for AMC dedicated pilots zone:

Follow the test procedure for Test case 1.1: PUSC dedicated pilots-based PCINR measurement for
PUSC zone, but with AWGN channel only and set CQICH_alloc_IE zone_permutation = 0b101.
An allocation size of 10 slots should be used (2 subchannels by 5 slots duration) and the position of
the 10 slots burst should be randomized according to the procedure specified in Section 9.1.25.7 on
AMC frame parameters.

Pass Verdict For all the test points in Table 160, the ensemble PCINR measurements meet both the absolute and
the relative accuracy requirements as defined in the test procedures.

Fail Verdict For any one of the test points in Table 160, the ensemble PCINR measurements did not meet either
the absolute or the relative accuracy requirements as defined in the test procedures.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 202
9.1.25.16 Test requirements for dedicated pilots in STC zone
The set up for this test is depicted in Figure 38. Diagonal 2x2 AWGN channels are used for the test. As specified in
the PUSC Frame Structure section, the minimal allocation duration is 4 symbols, which provides the minimal time
interval for the MS to estimate (channel) parameters. Since the purpose of this test is to verify the functionality of
the MS receiver beamforming processing in STC zone with dedicated pilots, allocations with minimal symbol
duration should be used for the test. As this test is not a performance test, the input power levels are set according to
the values listed in Table 164, which are 10dB higher than the minimum required SNR derived from the
corresponding maximum sensitivity levels.

Since a Diagonal AWGN channel will be used for this test, the first zone including preamble, FCH, DL-MAP, and
UL-MAP shall be transmitted from both Tx antennas of the BSE.

9.1.25.17 Test procedure for dedicated pilots in STC zone
Test case 1: Receiver operation of dedicated pilot in STC zone with dedicated pilots.

Step 1. Configure the BSE to transmit beamformed STC zone with the appropriate number of subchannels
for the test MCS level (e.g., 10 subchannels for QPSK, rate ) and 4 symbols duration.
Step 2. Set the receivers input level according to Table 164for the MCS level and band class being tested.
Step 3. Transmit the number of frames for the test MCS level as listed in Table 163.
Step 4. Use the ACK/NACK test to record the packet received in error and verify that the PER is lower
than or equal to the requirements as defined in Table 163.
Step 5. Repeat above steps for all the MCS levels listed in Table 163.

9.1.25.18 Pass/Fail Verdict
Pass Verdict - For the receiver sensitivity values listed in Table 164, the number of packets in error is less or equal
to the limits in Table 163.

Fail Verdict For at least one tested receiver sensitivity value in Table 164, the number of packets in error is higher
than the limit in Table 163.

Table 163. Parameters for MIMO Receiver Functionality with dedicated pilots (CTC, Matrix B,
AWGN)
Required
SNR
PDU Size
(bytes)
Slots per
PDU
Packets
(PDUs) per
frame
# of frames PER
(BER=1e-5)
# of error
packets
QPSK rate-
1/2
5.5 60x4 20 2 30,000 1.90% 570
QPSK rate-
3/4
8.5 54x4 12 2 30,000 1.71% 514
16QAM
rate-1/2
11 60x4 10 2 30,000 1.90% 570
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 203
16QAM
rate-3/4
15.5 54x4 6 2 30,000 1.71% 514
64QAM
rate-1/2
16 54x4 6 2 30,000 1.71% 514
64QAM
rate-2/3
19.5 48x4 4 2 30,000 1.52% 457
64QAM
rate-3/4
20.5 54x4 4 2 30,000 1.71% 514
64QAM
rate-5/6
24.5 60x4 4 2 30,000 1.90% 570

Table 164. MIMO Receiver Sensitivity (plus 10 dB) with Dedicated Pilots (CTC, Matrix B, AWGN)
64 QAM 5/6 -65.16 -65.65 -66.62 -64.19 -65.65
64 QAM -69.16 -69.65 -70.62 -68.19 -69.65
64 QAM 2/3 -70.16 -70.65 -71.62 -69.19 -70.65
64 QAM -73.66 -74.15 -75.12 -72.69 -74.15
16 QAM 3/4 -74.16 -74.65 -75.62 -73.19 -74.65
16 QAM -76.90 -77.39 -78.36 -77.69 -79.15
QPSK -79.40 -79.89 -80.86 -77.18 -78.64
QPSK -80.18 -80.67 -81.64 -80.18 -81.64

Not applicable.

0.0.1 2006-11-1 Amir Francos, Yi Ling

Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-12-12 Amir Francos, Yi Ling,
Dave Pechner
Additions of frame structures and allocations. Also Figure
x.1 was modified to reflect the SIMO channel testing
environment and figure x.2 was removed. Reflects
understandings after Shanghai FTF meeting.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 204
Dave Pechner
Additions of PCINR tests in dedicated pilots zone and
sensitivity definitions and equations
Dave Pechner
Corrections and modifications according to Kona FTF
meeting and addition of MIMO+BF test skeleton.
0.0.5

2007-02-22 Amir Francos, Yi Ling,
Dave Pechner
Corrections and modifications according to BF Adhoc.
0.0.6

Dave Pechner, Djordje
Tujkovic
Incorporating contribution from Djordje Tujkovic for the
extra receiving power test,
0.0.7

Dave Pechner,
Reflecting the latest discussions from BF Adhoc
Dave Pechner, Hassan
Yaghoobi
Incorporating diagrams from Elektrobit and editorial
change by Hassan at comment resolution cc.
Dave Pechner
Incorporating diagrams from Beceem
0.0.10 Amir Francos, Dave
Pechner
Incorporating comment resolution decisions and adding
simulation results. Included comments from Alvarion,
Beceem and Rohde-Schwartz
0.0.10b 2007-05-12 Dave Pechner Updated PCINR test with Major Group Indicator = 1.
Removed TBD for MIO-BF tests certification values.
0.0.10c 2007-05-13 Dave Pechner Removed range check on True_CINR value in PCINR
test.
0.0.10d 2007-05-13 Hassan Yaghobi Changes during Portland f2f
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 205
0.0.11 2007-05-22 Dave Pechner 1) Corrected number of errored packets in tables y and z,
and corrected table zz.
2) Added receiver sensitivity tables
3) Added clipping for True_CINR values for PCINR test
4) All changes marked in document relative to version
0.0.10d
0.0.11e 2007-06-21 Dave Pechner 1) Modified MIMO-BF test to support two HARQ
regions to insure all allocations are two slots in duration
2) Modified CINR table to contains reported CINR
values.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 206
9.1.26 MS-24.2: MS transmit collaborative MIMO
The purpose of this test is to verify MS functional capability of transmitting UL PUSC MIMO. In particular, the
following aspects of MS UL MIMO are tested:
1) Proper subchannel assignment for an MS for uplink MIMO
2) Verify MSs capability of generating pilot pattern A or pilot pattern B with single transmit antenna, and
3) Pilot power is boosted 3 dB higher than data subcarrier

Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification requires the MSs are able to send uplink
collaborative MIMO by sending data over the same sub-channels with different pilots. This test is to verify correct
sub-channel assignment for an MS and the MS is capable of generating pilot pattern A or B with single transmit
antenna.

Table 166 PICS Coverage for MS-24.2
PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.16 Multiple Input Multiple
Output (MIMO), Table A.43 Supported
Features for UL PUSC MIMO for MS
T D

This test requires the MS to be generating UL bursts at the same sub-channels with different pilot
patterns, pilot pattern A and pilot pattern B. Testing equipment demodulates and decodes the received
packet in uplink and measures the packet error rate at functional test.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 207
9.1.26.4 Test setup

Figure 41 Test Setup for MS Transmit Collaborative MIMO

9.1.26.5 Test procedures
Initial Conditions

Step 1. Make sure the data link connection has been established between MS UUT and RCTT
according to parameters defined in Appendix 2.

Test Procedure

Step 1. Select the first item in Table 167 for the UL MCS. The DL MCS used by the BSE may be
any of the MCS supported in Table 167
Step 2. BSE to do allocation of data bursts using the test vectors of Appendix 1 for PUSC. Frame
Size and Cyclic Prefix to be set according 5 msec and 1/8 values as the only options in
WiMAX Forum Mobile System Profile. Set the received signal level at the receiver input of
the MS UUT to 10dB higher than the sensitivity numbers for PUSC of Table 286 to Table
290and at the receiver input of the BSE so that UL signals transmitted by the MS UUT are
received without errors being caused by the BSE.
Step 3. The BSE transmits ping commands with the proper test message (specified in Appendix 1).
The MS shall decode the ping messages and transmit it with the proper pilot pattern
allocation, etc., as commanded by the UL-MAP message, and transmit to the BSE. N such
test packets are generated as specified in the Table 165 (corresponding to Functional Tests)
and transmitted by the MS UUT in the uplink subframe. Make sure that the MS UUT use
pilot pattern A at certain data sub-channels.

S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
Data subcarrier
Pilot subcarrier
Null subcarrier
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
Data subcarrier
Pilot subcarrier
Null subcarrier

Signaling
Unit
(BSE)
VSA / Avg Power
Meter
MS
UUT
Attenuator
AMS
ABS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 208
Step 4. Testing equipment demodulates and decodes the received packet in uplink and measures the
packet error rate at functional test.
Step 5. Capture the number of packets in error (should be less than M as specified in the Table 165
for Functional Tests.
Step 6. Vector Signal analyzer to measure the average power of data, pilot and null carrier over the
N packets.
Step 7. Repeat Steps 2-6 with pilot pattern B. Make sure the same data sub-channels that have been
used with pilot pattern A are used for data.

S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
Data subcarrier
Pilot subcarrier
Null subcarrier
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
Data subcarrier
Pilot subcarrier
Null subcarrier

Step 8. Repeat Step 2Step 7 for all cases in Table 167.


Pass verdict:
a. The MS successfully transmit all allocated bursts with pilot pattern A and pilot pattern B at the
same data sub-channels as it is captured and decoded correctly by Testing Equipment. The number
of packets in error is less than or equal to M for functional tests
b. The measured average pilot power should be 3 dB +/- 0.5 dB greater than the average power of
data subcarriers.
c. The measured average power of the null pilot subcarriers compared with the average power of the
allocated data subcarriers (see 8.4.12.3.4 in IEEE Std. 802.16) should be less than or equal to the
value specified in Table 96(see MS-18.1).

Fail Verdict
a) The number of packets in error is more than M for functional tests.
b) The measured average pilot power is not greater than the data carriers by 3 dB +/- 0.5 dB. .
c) The measured average power of the null pilot subcarriers compared with the average power of the
allocated data subcarriers (see 8.4.12.3.4 in IEEE Std. 802.16) is greater than the value specified
in Table 96(see MS-18.1).

Table 167 List of MS Transmit Test Cases
No. Modulation and Coding
Scheme
Packet Payload Length Pass Fail
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 209

Not applicable.

Table 168 Revision History for MS-24.2
0.0.1 2006-10-30 SangYoub Kim Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-12-11 Hongsup Shin
Byoung Seong park
Add appendix
0.0.3 2007-01-09 SangYoub Kim Modified Figure, test procedure, compliance requirement,
and uncertainties.

0.1.0 2007-01-25 SangYoub Kim Added null subcarrier power level.
0.1.0 2007-01-28 SangYoub Kim Editorial correction
Add +/- 0.5 dB margin for pilot power requirement
Modified null subcarrier power requirement

0.1.3 2007-02-01 SangYoub Kim Add functionality of RCTsystem/Testing equipment
which is marked as [TBD]
QPSK-1/2
Packet as specified in Appendix 1

QPSK-3/4
QAM-1/2

QAM-3/4

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 210
0.1.4 2007-02-28 SangYoub Kim Clean up TBDs
0.1.5 2007-04-18 SangYoub Kim Modified Pass/Fail verdict, removed 10 frame
0.1.5a 2007-4-20 Hassan Yaghoobi Added ) in step 5
0.1.6 2007-04-26 SangYoub Kim Modified Step 6 and Compliance Requirement

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 211
9.1.27 MS-25.2: MS transmit Beamforming support
The purpose of this test is to verify the conformance of MS transmitting the necessary information to support BS
beamforming reception and transmission. In particular, this test verifies MS ability of transmitting with PUSC
subchannel rotation disabled and the ability of transmitting different sounding zone types in support of BS
beamforming reception and transmission. The test checks proper transmission of cyclic shifted and decimated
sounding zone sequences with and without periodicity. The test covers one symbol and two symbol sounding zone
regions.

To support BS beamforming reception and transmission, the MS needs to be tested for the ability of transmitting
with PUSC subchannel rotation disabled and the ability of transmitting different sounding zone types.

The tests cover the channel bandwidths and FFT sizes appropriate to the band class of the MS under test. The tests
also cover a wide variety of conditions and parameter choices.

Six UL frame formats are used in the tests:
- MS25.2 UL Frame Format 1: [No sounding zone]: Mandatory UL PUSC Zone, UL_Zone_IE(), PUSC
without subchannel rotation
- MS25.2 UL Frame Format 2: [Single-symbol sounding zone at end of UL]: Mandatory UL PUSC Zone,
Sounding Zone (one symbol)
- MS25.2 UL Frame Format 3: [Single-symbol sounding zone near beginning of UL]: Mandatory UL
PUSC Zone, Sounding Zone (one symbol), UL_Zone_IE(), AMC or PUSC without Subchannel Rotation
- MS25.2 UL Frame Format 4: [Single-symbol sounding zone at end of UL]: Mandatory UL PUSC Zone,
UL_Zone_IE(), AMC or PUSC without Subchannel Rotation, Sounding Zone (one symbol)
- MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5: [Two-symbol sounding zone at end of UL]: Mandatory UL PUSC Zone,
Sounding Zone (two-symbols)
- MS25.2 UL Frame Format 6: [Two-symbol sounding zone near beginning of UL]: Mandatory UL
PUSC Zone, Sounding Zone (two-symbols), UL_Zone_IE(), one of {AMC, PUSC, PUSC without
Subchannel Rotation}.

The frame structure for the test shall have following DL/UL ratios;

For one symbol sounding zone;
- (31, 16) for 5 & 10 MHz channels
- (29, 13) for 8.75 MHz channel
- (23, 10) for 3.5 & 7 MHz channel

For two symbols sounding zone;
- (27, 20) for 5 & 10 MHz channels
- (25, 17) for 8.75 MHz channel
- (19, 14) for 3.5 & 7 MHz channel

The following outline shows the organization of the tests and which frame format is being used in the tests. .

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 212
Test Case #1 Verify UL PUSC Subchannel Rotation on and off (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 1)
Test Case #2 Single-Symbol Sounding Zone Tests
- Non periodic tests for testing proper waveform generation
o Cyclic Shift Separability (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 2)
Normal allocation mode full band sounding
Normal allocation mode partial band sounding
Band-AMC allocation mode
o Decimation Separability (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 2)
Normal allocation mode full band sounding
Normal allocation mode partial band sounding
Band-AMC allocation mode
o Sounding Zone Location and SZ Shift value Test - cyclic shift separability and decimation
separability (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 3 and MS25.2 UL Frame Format 4)
- Periodicity tests for validating periodic sounding capability (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 4)
o Sounding with Cyclic Shift Separability
o Sounding with Decimation Separability
Test Case #3 Two-Symbol Sounding Zone Tests for validating two-symbol sounding zones.
- Non-periodic tests
o Cyclic time shift index parameter (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5)
o Max cyclic shift index (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 6)
o Decimation value (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5)
o Decimation offset (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 6)
- Periodicity tests (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5)
Test Case #4 Relative Constellation Error for Sounding Symbols (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5)

Throughout these tests, the parameters / variables of the sounding signaling are generally listed in terms of their
mathematical values rather than the binary (or decimal equivalent) field values signaled in the relevant IEs. Refer to
the 802.16e standard for the actual signaled bit values that correspond to the specified mathematical values. The
cases where this is of particular interest are:
- Max Cyclic shift index P: possible values are P=4,8,16,32,9,18, which are indicated by binary values
0b000 through 0b101 respectively in the UL_Sounding Command_IE()
- Decimation Value D: possible values are 2,4,8,16,32,64,128,5, which are indicated by binary values 0b000
through 0b111 respectively in the UL_Sounding Command_IE().
- Cyclic shift index n: possible values are n=0,1, , P-1, which are indicated by the equivalent binary
values in the UL_Sounding_Command_IE().
- Decimation offset d: possible values are d=0D-1, which are indicated by the equivalent binary values in
the UL_Sounding_Command_IE().

Table 169. PICS Coverage for [MS-25.2]
Item Reference Item and Section Number in PICS [6] Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.1.1.5 Subcarrier Allocation Mode, Table
A.13 UL subcarrier allocation for MS, Item 2:
PUSC without subchannel rotation
T D
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 213
2. A.5.1.1.1.6 UL Channel Sounding,
Table A.14 UL Sounding 1 for MS
T D
3. A.5.1.1.1.6 UL Channel Sounding,
Table A.15 UL Sounding 2 for MS
T D

These tests require the MS UUT being able to receive and decode correctly the OFDMA UL_ZONE_IE( ),
UL_Sounding Command_IE( ) and PAPR_Reduction_Safety_and_Sounding_Zone_Allocation_IE( ) from the BS
emulator for correct configuration of the UL transmission.

9.1.27.4 Test setup
The channel between BS Emulator or Signaling Unit and the MS will be assumed to be AWGN. The channel is
realized by appropriate attenuation and RF cables. A directional coupler will provide access to the UL signal for the
Vector Signal Analyzer. Only one out of all the available antenna ports is needed for multi-antenna testing in the BS
emulator. The RCTT analyzes the subchannel rotation and the subcarrier allocation for the sounding symbols and
modulation on these sounding symbols for the specific test procedure.

The specific RCTT capability needed for this test can be explained as follows: we need to the check the compliance
of a succession of sounding signals sent by the CPEs in reaction to the BS request. When the BS sends a periodic
sounding command, the CPE should in reaction send sounding signals in specified time and frequency location, and
using specified sounding sequence. These signals should be sent every N frames, depending on the sounding
command parameter. The test should basically check that the signals sent by the CPE comply with the BS command
(validity of time and frequency location, repetition period, and sounding signal).

The tests will be repeated for each FFT size supported by the MS in accordance with the band class of the MS.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 214

Figure 42 Test Setup for MS Transmit Beamforming Support (MS-25.2)

Test case #1 : UL transmission with subchannel rotation off and on
Test setup:
- Instruct the MS UUT to transmit UL bursts in a UL PUSC zone that spans at least 2 slots in the
time dimension. For this zone, the subchannel rotation is disabled by setting the Disable subchannel
rotation bit (Comment 200 of Cor2) to 1 in OFDMA UL_ZONE_IE(), Table 294.
- Verify using RCTT that the subchannel rotation being switched off.
- Repeat the steps above with subchannel rotation on by set the same Disable subchannel rotation
bit to 0 and verify that the subchannel rotation being enabled.

Verification that the MS UUT transmits the UL data using proper permutation & subchannel rotation state
(ie ON or OFF) is performed by confirming that the UL transmissions can be decoded properly by the BSE
via a functional PER test. The PER shall be measured using the Ping Method outlined in Appendix 3. In
measuring the PER, the allocations can be transmitted with QPSK rate at an SNR that is 10dB above the
sensitivity for that modulation/coding rate. The PER should be 5% or less to pass this test. The number of
packets to be generated in the verification is 20. The length of the packets used in the verification is 60
bytes.

Figure 43 shows an example for the uplink frame structure

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 215

Figure 43 Example for uplink frame structure for test case #1 (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 1)

Test case #2 : UL transmission of sounding zones of 1 symbol
Common parameters
The detailed descriptions of the parameters influencing this test are located in the following information elements of
the UL-MAP:
- UIUC 13 allocation for the up-link sounding zone allocation. The size and location of the sounding zone is
described by PAPR_Reduction_Safety_Sounding_Zone_Allocation_IE( ) as defined in [2] 8.4.5.4.2. (and
modified in [8])
- One UL_Sounding_Command_IE( ) as defined in [2]: 8.4.6.2.7.1, Table 316a, (and modified in [8]) describing
a sounding allocation of Type A ([6] Table A.14).

For all the tests the following parameters are fixed as follows:
- UL_ZONE_IE():
- Not required for frame format 2 where the the sounding zone is allocated in the last symbol of the
mandatory UL PUSC zone.
- Required for frame formats 3 and 4 to specify the start of the zone following the mandatory UL PUSC
zone.
- UL_Sounding_Command_IE fixed parameters
- Send Sounding Report Flag = 0 (no reporting)
- Include additional feedback = 0b00 (No additional feedback)
- Num_Sounding_symbols = 1
- Sounding_Type (0 =Type A)
- Sounding_Relevance_Flag (0 = Sounding relevance is the same for all CIDs)
- Sounding_Relevance (1 = All CIDs respond in next frame)
- Fixed Parameters for each Separability Type (for each sounding symbol)
- Number of CIDs = 1 (Number of CIDs sharing this sounding allocation. Only one MS under test)
- Shorted basic CID = (select the CID of MS under test)
- Power Assignment Method = 0 ( = equal power ([6]: Table A.134, item 4))
0 n uplink symbols
PUSC
PUSC without
subchannel rotation
UL_ZONE_IE()
0 n uplink symbols
PUSC
PUSC without
subchannel rotation
UL_ZONE_IE()
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 216
- Power boost = 0 (no power boost)
- Multi-Antenna Flag = 0 (MS sounds first antenna only)
- Allocation Mode = 0 (0: Normal, 1: Band AMC)
- PAPR_Reduction_Safety_Sounding_Zone_Allocation_IE( )
- Sounding Zone (1 = sounding zone allocation)
- OFDMA Symbol offset = Sounding Zone location: Set equal to the last symbol in the UL frame unless
otherwise specified below
- No. OFDMA symbols = 1
- SZ Shift Value = BS & Sector-specific shift value u that shifts the Golay sequence used in sounding to
prevent different cells & sectors from having identical sounding waveforms: Set equal to zero unless
otherwise specified below

Figure 44 shows the uplink frame structure to be used unless otherwise specified below.

Figure 44 Uplink frame structure for test case #2 (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 2)
Periodicity parameter set to 0
BSE repetitively sends frames with an UL_MAP containing
- PAPR_Reduction_Safety_Sounding_Zone_Allocation_IE()
- UL_sounding_Command IE with parameters as specified in the common parameters section above for fixed
parameters, and in the tables below, for variable parameters.

Cyclic Shift Separability test Normal Allocation Mode Full bandwidth sounding
Tests for all sounding bands occupied.
Allocation mode = 0 (normal)
Starting frequency band=0
Number of Frequency bands is 24 for 512 FFT and 48 for 1024 FFT.

Table 170. Separability parameters A
Value
PUSC zone
0
n
uplink symbols
n-1,
U
I
U
C
=
1
3
PUSC zone
0
n
uplink symbols
n-1,
U
I
U
C
=
1
3
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 217
Separability type 0 Cyclic Shift
Max cyclic Shift Index (P) 4,8,16,32 Possible values 4, 8, 16, 32, 9 and 18
Cyclic time shift index (n)
Assumption: In Table 315d of
COR2/D3, cyclic shift index is n
rather than m, where n is put
directly into Eq 109
For P=4: n=0, 3
For P=8:
n=0, 3, 7
For P=16:
n=0, 3, 15
For P=32:
n=0, 15, 31
Possible values for n:
0, 1, ..., P-1
Periodicity (q) 0 0= single command, not periodic,

Tests are performed for each possible combination of Max cyclic shift index (P) and Cyclic time Shift index (n)
values.

Cyclic Shift Separability Test Normal Allocation Mode Partial Bandwidth Sounding
Tests for sounding that occupies a subset of the total sounding bands.
Allocation mode=0 (normal)
FFT Size= 512:
Case 1: Start frequency band = 2, Number of frequency bands = 8
FFT Size=1024

Table 171. Separability parameters B
Value
Max cyclic Shift Index (P) 4, 9 and 18 Possible values 4, 8, 16, 32, 9 and 18
COR2/D3, cyclic shift index
is n rather than m, where n is
put directly into Eq 109
For P=4:
n=0, 3.
For P=9:
n=0, 3, 7.
For P=18:
n=0, 3, 15
0, 1, ..., P-1
Periodicity (q) 0 0= single command, not periodic

Tests are performed for each combination of Max Cyclic Shift index P and cyclic time shift index n in the above
table and for each of the two cases for the start frequency band and the number of frequency bands specified above.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 218

Cyclic Shift Separability Test Band AMC Allocation Mode
Tests for sounding allocated with the Band AMC allocation mode.
Allocation mode=1 (Band AMC)
Band Bit Map = 001001000010
Band Bit Map = 010010010100

Table 172. Separability parameters C
Value
Max cyclic Shift Index (P) 4, 18 Possible values 4, 8, 16, 32, 9 and 18
Assumption: In Table 315d of COR2/D3,
cyclic shift index is n rather than m, where n
is put directly into Eq 109
For P=4:
n=0, 3.

For P=18:
n=0, 15
0, 1, ..., P-1

Tests are performed for the four combinations of Max Cyclic Shift index P and cyclic time shift index n in Table
172and for the two band bit map examples specified above.

Decimation Separability test Normal Allocation Mode Full bandwidth sounding
Table 173. Separability parameters D
value
Separability type 1 Decimation
Decimation value (D)
Assumption: In table 316a a
value X of 3 bits can be
assigned. D=2^(X+1)
D=8,16,32,64 Possible values for D= 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64, 5
Decimation Offset (d) for D=8: d=0, 7
for D=16: d=1,12
for D=32:
d=2, 30
for D=64:
d=4,60
Possible values d=0D-1

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 219
Tests are performed for each combination of Decimation value D and Decimation offset d in the above Table 173.

Decimation Separability test Normal Allocation Mode Partial bandwidth sounding
Tests for sounding that occupies a subset of the total sounding bands.
Allocation mode=0 (normal)
FFT Size= 512:
Case 1: Start frequency band = 2 Number of frequency bands = 8
FFT Size=1024
Case 1: Start frequency band = 2 Number of frequency bands = 8

Table 174. Separability parameters E
value
Decimation value (D) 2,4,8,16 Possible values 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 5
Decimation Offset (d) for D=2: d=0,1
for D=4: d=1,3
for D=8: d=2,7
for D=16: d=3, 10

Tests are performed for each combination of Decimation value D and Decimation offset d in the above Table 174
and for each of the two cases for the start frequency band and the number of frequency bands specified above.

Decimation Separability test Band AMC Allocation Mode
Tests for sounding that is allocated according to the Band AMC bitmap.
Allocation mode=1 (Band AMC mode)
Band Bit Map = 100001000010
Band Bit Map = 011010010101

Table 175. Separability parameters F
value
Decimation value (D) 2,4 Possible values 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 5
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 220
Decimation Offset (d) for D=2: d=0,1
for D=4: d=1,3

Tests are performed for the four combinations of Decimation value D and Decimation offset d in the above Table
175 and for the two examples of the band bitmap specified above.

Sounding Zone Location and SZ Shift Value test
This test checks that the MS can properly transmit the sounding waveform in a sounding zone located at the
beginning of the UL Frame after the mandatory UL PUSC zone (a location different from the sounding zone
position used in the previous test cases). This test also checks that the MS can properly transmit the sounding
waveform in a sounding zone located at the end of the UL Frame, but preceded by both the mandatory UL PUSC
zone and a PUSC zone with no subchannel rotation. (Note that in the previous test cases, the Sounding Zone was
located at the end of the UL Frame, but was preceded only by a single PUSC zone with no UL Zone IE() being
required). This test also checks that the MS can properly rotate the Golay sequence by the SZ shift value (u)
indicated in the PAPR_Reduction/Safety Zone/Sounding Zone IE().

- UL_ZONE_IE():to allocate a second zone behind the mandatory UL PUSC zone, e.g. an AMC or PUSC zone
without subchannel rotation
- UL_sounding_Command IE with parameters as specified in the common parameters section above for fixed
parameters, and in the tables below, for variable parameters.

Figure 45 show the uplink frame structures to be used for these tests.

PUSC
0,1,2,3
n n-1,
U
I
U
C
=
1
3
AMC or PUSC without
subchannel rotation
uplink symbols
UL_ZONE_IE()
PUSC
0,1,2,3
n n-1,
U
I
U
C
=
1
3
AMC or PUSC without
subchannel rotation
uplink symbols
UL_ZONE_IE()
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 221
Figure 45 Uplink frame structure for test case #2 sounding zone location (MS25.2 UL Frame
Format 3)

PUSC
U
I
U
C

=

1
3

UL_ZONE_IE()
AMC or PUSC without
subchannel rotattion
0,1,2 Uplink Symbols n-1, n

Figure 46 Uplink frame structure for test case #2 sounding zone location (MS25.2 UL Frame
Format 4)

The first case considers one example of sounding with cyclic shift separability with full bandwidth sounding. The
test is repeated for both values of the SZ shift value u. The frame format MS25.2 Frame Format 3 is used for the
first SZ shift value u. The frame format MS25.2 Frame Format 4 is used for the second SZ shift value u. Both
frame formats require the UL_ZONE_IE() to specify the start time of the second zone after the mandatory UL
PUSC zone.

Table 176. Separability parameters F
Value

Max cyclic Shift Index (P) 8 Possible values 4, 8, 16, 32, 9 and 8
Cyclic time shift index (n) 0
Periodicity (q) 0 Single Sounding
Sounding Zone: OFDMA symbol Offset 3 4
th
UL symbol (specified in PAPR
Reduction/SafetyZone / Sounding Zone
allocation IE)
SZ shift value (u) 4, 120 0u127 and u is signalled in the PAPR
Reduction/ SafetyZone / Sounding Zone
allocation IE

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 222
The second case considers an example of sounding with decimation separability with full bandwidth sounding. The
test is repeated for both values of the SZ shift value u. The frame format MS25.2 Frame Format 3 is used for the
first SZ shift value u. The frame format MS25.2 Frame Format 4 is used for the second SZ shift value u.

Table 177. Separability parameters G
Value
Decimation value (D) 32
Decimation Offset (d) 17 6 bits
Periodicity (q) 0 Single Sounding
Sounding Zone: OFDMA symbol Offset 3 4
th
UL symbol (specified in PAPR
Reduction/SafetyZone / Sounding Zone
allocation IE)
SZ shift value (u) 3, 57 0u127 and u is signalled in the PAPR
Reduction/ SafetyZone / Sounding Zone
allocation IE

Periodicity parameter set to 1
At least one of the periodicity parameter is set to a non zero value. BSE repetitively sends a sequence of K frames
with an UL_MAP containing
o UL_ZONE_IE()
o PAPR_Reduction_Safety_Sounding_Zone_Allocation_IE()
The frame format to be used for the UL is MS25.2 UL Frame Format 4.

The first frame contains an UL_sounding_Command IE with parameters as specified in the subsections below.

The following frames do not contain UL_sounding command_IE.

The test consists in checking that the MS sends sounding signals every 2^(q-1) frame, and stops sending sounding
when it receives a UL_sounding command_IE with q=0 (q=0 resets to a single sounding command mode).

To make this test, the BSE sends a sequence of frames as indicated in Figure 47.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 223

MS
transmit
BSE transmit
Sounding
command with
periodicity q=2
Sounding
command with
periodicity q=0
Sounding
signals
Sequence of K frames
L frames

Figure 47 : Sequence of frames for periodic sounding test

Values for frame sequence parameters:
- Number of frames between sounding commands : L=10 * 2^(q-1)
- Total number of frames in the sequence : K=L+10

Tests for all sounding bands occupied.
Allocation mode = 0 (normal)
Starting frequency band=0
Number of Frequency bands is 24 for 512 FFT and 48 for 1024 FFT.
Sounding Zone location = last symbol of the UL unless otherwise indicated.

Periodicity test (cyclic shift separability)
Table 178. Separability parameters H
Value

Periodicity (q) 1, 2, 4, 7 Repeat every 2^(q-1) frames, q=1
7

Tests are performed for each Periodicity parameter listed in the Table 178 above.

Periodicity test (decimation separability)
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 224
Table 179. Separability parameters I
Value
Periodicity (q) 1, 2, 4, 7 Repeat every 2^(q-1) frames, q=1
7


Test case #3 : UL transmission of sounding zones of 2 symbols
Common parameters

- UL_ZONE_IE( ): not required in MS25.2 UL Frame format 5, because the sounding zone is allocated in the
last symbol of the mandatory UL PUSC zone. Required in MS25.2 UL Frame Format 6 to specify the end of
the SZ and the start of the next zone.
- PAPR_Reduction_Safety_Sounding_Zone_Allocation_IE( )
- OFDMA Symbol offset = Sounding Zone location: Set equal to one symbol before the last symbol (n-1) in
the UL frame unless otherwise specified.
- No. OFDMA symbols = 2
- SZ Shift Value = BS & Sector specific shift value u that shifts the Golay sequence used in sounding: Set
equal to all zeros unless otherwise specified below.
- UL_Sounding_Command_IE parameters
- Send Sounding Report Flag = 0 (no reporting)
- Include additional feedback = 0b00 (No additional feedback)
- Num_Sounding_symbols = 2
Parameters for sounding symbol 1:
- Separability Type = 0 (cyclic shift, occupy all subcarriers in the assigned band)
- Sounding symbol index = 0
- Starting Frequency Band = 0
- Number of frequency bands = 48 (value valid for 1024 FFT)
Parameters for sounding symbol 2:
- Separability Type = 1 (decimating, occupy decimated subcarriers)
- Sounding symbol index = 1
- Starting Frequency Band = 0
- Number of frequency bands = 48 (value valid for 1024 FFT)

Arbitrarily, first symbol uses a separability type=0 (cyclic shift), and second symbol a separability type of 1
(Decimation).
Figure 48 shows two uplink frame structures, where the first is used in this test (test 3) and the next test (test 4), and
the second is used in this test (test 3).
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 225

Figure 48 Uplink frame structure for test case #3 and test case #4 (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5)

PUSC
U
I
U
C

=

1
3

UL_ZONE_IE()
0,1,2, 3,4 Uplink Symbols n
PUSC or AMC or PUSC
without subchannel rotattion

Figure 49 Uplink frame structure for test case #3 and test case #4 (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 6)

Periodicity parameters set to 0
- UL_sounding_Command IE with parameters as specified in the subsections below

Cyclic time shift index parameter test
Table 180. Separability parameters J
value
Symbol #1
PUSC zone
0
n
uplink symbols
n-1,
U
I
U
C
=
1
3
PUSC zone
0
n
uplink symbols
n-1,
U
I
U
C
=
1
3
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 226
Max cyclic Shift Index (P) 4 Possible values 4, 8, 16, 32, 9 and
18
COR2/D3, cyclic shift index is
n rather than m, where n is put
directly into Eq 109
n=0, 3 Possible values for n:
0, 1, ..., P-1
Periodicity (q) 0 Single sounding
Symbol #2

Tests are performed for each possible Cyclic Shift index values and with MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5.

Max cyclic shift index test
Table 181. Separability parameters K
value
Symbol #1
Max cyclic Shift Index (P) 4, 8, Possible values 4, 8, 16, 32, 9 and 8
Symbol #2
Decimation Offset (d) 5 6 bits value

Tests are performed for each possible Max Cyclic Shift index values and with MS25.2 UL Frame Format 6.

Decimation Value test
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 227
Table 182. Separability parameters L
Value
Symbol #1
Symbol #2
Decimation value (D) D=8,16
Decimation Offset (d) 5 Possible values d=0D-1

Tests are performed for each possible Decimation value and with MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5.

Decimation Offset test
Table 183. Separability parameters M
Value
Symbol #1
Symbol #2
Decimation Offset (d) 5, 15 Possible values d=0D-1

Tests are performed for the list of Decimation offset listed in Table 183 above and with MS25.2 UL Frame Format
6.
Periodicity parameters set to 1
At least one of the periodicity parameter is set to a non zero value. BSE repetitively sends a sequence of K frames
with an UL_MAP containing
o PAPR_Reduction_Safety_Sounding_Zone_Allocation_IE()

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 228
The first frame contains an UL_sounding_Command IE with parameters as specified in the subsections below.

The following frames do not contain UL_sounding command_IE.

The test consists in checking that the MS sends sounding signals every 2^(q-1) frame, and stops sending sounding
when it receives a UL_sounding command_IE with q=0 (q=0 resets to a single sounding command mode).

To make this test, the BSE sends a sequence of frames as indicated in Figure 47 (MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5).

Suggested values for frame sequence parameters:
- Number of frames between sounding commands : L=10 * 2^(q-1)
- Total number of frames in the sequence : K=L+10

Periodicity test #1
Table 184. Separability parameters N
Value
Symbol #1
Periodicity (q) 1, 2, 7 2^(q-1), q=1 7
Symbol #2


Periodicity test #2
Table 185. Separability parameters O
Value
Symbol #1
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 229
Symbol #2
Periodicity (q) 1, 2, 7 2^(q-1), q=1 7


Test case #4: Relative Constellation Error for Sounding Symbols
Test setup:
- All test according to MS transmitter relative constellation error are passed for the data burst analysis
according to [1] and [2] 8.4.12.3 for modulated or un-modulated subcarriers
- Measure the RCE on each of the two sounding symbols, independent of data bursts using full band
sounding with the following parameters
- Frame format MS25.2 UL Frame Format 5 is used for the test.

Table 186. Separability parameters P
Value
Symbol #1
Periodicity (q) 1 Sounding in each frame
Symbol #2
Decimation value (D) 2 Every second sub-carrier
Periodicity (q) 1 Sounding in each frame

RCE test 1: measure on first sounding symbol / max power
MS transmits sounding information on all subcarriers using maximum transmit power for BPSK (as
specified in SBC-REQ)

RCE test 2: measure on second sounding symbol / max power
MS transmits sounding information on every second subcarrier using maximum transmit power for BPSK
(as specified in SBC-REQ)
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 230

RCE test 3: measure on first sounding symbol / low power
Same parameter as RCE test 1, but transmit power = maximum power for BPSK -45dB

RCE test 4: measure on second sounding symbol / low power
Same parameter as RCE test 2, but transmit power = maximum power for BPSK -45dB.

- Average for the RCE tests over 10 frames on RCE.
- Verify the RCE in test 1-4 are better than -15 dB for modulated and un-modulated subcarriers (QPSK
value for the allowed relative constellation error versus data rate for MS according to [2], Table 336)

- Pass criteria
a. All frames transmitted by the MS are verified by the RCTT to be correct according to the
parameters set in all the necessary IEs,
b. The RCE in test 1-4 are better than -15dB for modulated and un-modulated subcarriers: RCE < -
15dB. (QPSK value for the allowed relative constellation error versus data rate for SS according
to [2], Table 336)

- Fail criteria
The number of correctly transmitted frames does not meet the pass criteria.

Not applicable.

0.0.1 2006-10-10 Bozo Cesar,
Juergen Otterbach, Philippe
Sehier
Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-11-03 Yi Ling ArrayComm modified draft
0.0.3 2006-11-15 Bozo Cesar,
Juergen Otterbach
Update with Test case#3: Relative constellation error for
sounding symbols
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 231
0.0.4 2006-11-26 Philippe Sehier Reintroduction of most tests from the first version.
Clarification of test list and procedures
0.0.5 2006-12-20 Fred Vook Editorial modifications. Additional desired test cases and
clarifications: added full bandwidth and partial bandwidth
sounding cases
0.0.6 2007-01-10 Bozo Cesar,
Juergen Otterbach
Philippe Sehier
Clarifications for m and D:
Cyclic time shift index (m)
In C80216maint-06_003.pdf: n is used in the equation for
b
k
for Cyclic shift separability instead of m. (m = n *
N/P)
Decimation value (D)
Assumption: In table 316a a value X of 3 bits can be
assigned. D=2^(X+1)
Possible values for d=0D-1
Added explanations on VSA requirements
0.0.7 2007-01-27 Fred Vook Updated to reflect assumption that the UL sounding
command signals n for the cyclic time shift index rather
than m, where n is then directly plugged into Equation
109 of COR2/D1. For sounding periodicity, replaced n
with q to avoid confusion with cyclic shift index n.
0.0.8 2007-01-29 Fred Vook Updates as per Hawaii F2F: Add test outline to
introduction; editorial/formatting fixes; add tests for Band
AMC allocation mode, add tests for a different sounding
zone location, add test for SZ shift value; fixed several
inconsistencies in how the decimation value D was
specified.
Remaining open issues as identified in Hawaii FTF: 1.
Are VSA settings adequately defined? Is a reference to
the MS TX RCE test adequate in this regard? 2. How
does VSA verify PUSC subchannel rotation being on or
off?
0.0.9 2007-03-01 Bozo Cesar Add some examples for the uplink frame structure used
for the different test cases.
UL_ZONE_IE() is required only if more then one UL
zone is allocated.
1.0.0 2007-03-18 Arvind Raghavan Replaced all instances of VSA with RCTT
Added the RCE requirement to the compliance section
1.0.1 2007-03-29 Fred Vook Updates as discussed in conference call of March 22,
2007: In the test outline: itemize frame formats being
used in the different sections of the test. Add one
additional UL frame format and additional explanatory
text for testing the Sounding Zone location. (Change
control marks are relative to version 1.0.0)
1.0.2 2007-04-04 Fred Vook Add additional UL frame format as per discussion in
conference call of March 29, 2007. (Change control
marks are relative to version 1.0.0)
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 232
1.0.3 2007-05-11 Fred Vook Modify Figure 1 Test-Setup according to inputs from Lisa
Ward. Additional editorial inputs from Lisa Ward. New
paragraph clarifying the methodology for confirming UL
subchannel rotation properly turned on & off (response to
Comment 121 as discussed in BF ad-hoc conference
calls)
1.0.4 2007-05-31 Fred Vook New figure 1 (remove green background). Add TBDs for
number of packets and their packet length for the UL
subchannel rotation verification. SNR for UL subchannel
rotation test changed from 20dB to 10dB above
sensitivity as suggested by comment 166.
1.05 2007-05-31 Fred Vook Editorial Changes as suggested in ad-hoc conference call
of 5/31/07 References to COR2/D1 changed to
COR2/D3. (Note that the change-control marks are
relative to version 1.0.3, which was approved by the
Beamforming ad-hoc group)
1.0.6 2007-06-01 Fred Vook Inserting proposed values for the number of packets and
their length for the UL subchannel rotation test. Proposed
values to be reviewed by BF ad-hoc group. (Change-
control marks are still relative to version 1.0.3.)

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 233
10. Tests for Base Stations
10.1 Test procedures
A test code of format XX-nn.m is assigned to all tests where XX is either MS for Mobile Station or Bs for Base
Station, nn is a number assigned to the test and m is 1 for Wave 1 tests and 2 for Wave 2 tests.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 234
10.1.1 BS-01.1: BS receiver maximum tolerable signal
The purpose of this test is to verify the compliance of BS equipment against the receiver maximum tolerable input
signal.

The Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification requires a BS receiver to tolerate
an on channel signal with a level of 10 dBm without damage. The requirement is verified by
introducing the high level signal, removing it and noting that the PER still meets a specific threshold.


Table 187. PICS Coverage for BS-01.1
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.2.1.20 Receive
Requirements, Table A.200 BS
Receiver Requirements, Item 2
T D
2. A.5.1.2.1.2 Cyclic Prefix, Table
A. 137 Cyclic Prefix for BS
T I

This test requires the MSE to be generating UL bursts. The signal level into the BS receiver is set to
the minimum level as specified by the standard at which the PER is less than that specified in
Appendix 1. The attenuation is then decreased until the input level into the BS is -10 dBm. After one
minute the attenuation is increased until the level into the BS is the same as the previous minimum
level.

The BS successfully tolerated the -10dBm signal level if the connection is successfully established.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 235
10.1.1.4 Test setup

Figure 50. Test Setup for BS Receiver Maximum Tolerable Signal

Initial Conditions:

Procedure:
Step 1. Set the level into the BS receiver to the minimum sensitivity as specified in Appendix 1.
Step 2. Note the attenuation setting.
Step 3. Decrease the attenuation until the level into the BE receiver is -10 dBm
Step 4. Wait for one minute.
Step 5. Increase attenuation back to the attenuation setting noted in Step 2.
Step 6. If not established, re-establish the uplink data link connection and perform a PER
measurement according to Appendix 1 for functional test.

Pass verdict:
The number of lost packets as measured in step 6 is less or equal to the limit specified in Appendix
1.

Fail verdict:
The number of lost packets as measured in step 6 is higher than the limit specified in Appendix 1.

The receiver input level uncertainty should be taken into account when setting the receiver input power
level.

Signaling
Unit
(MSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
BS
UUT
AMS/BS
Attenuator
ABS/MS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 236

Table 188. Revision History for BS-01.1
0.0.1 2006-05-11 Eugene Crozier Initial draft

0.0.2 2006-11-10 Eugene Crozier Editorial correction

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 237
10.1.2 BS-02.1: Reserved
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 238
10.1.3 BS-03.1: BS Receive Ranging Support
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of BS equipments against receive ranging support requirements.

Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification require the BS shall transmit the
ranging information in response to the ranging request from MS. The ranging information consists of
the timing adjustment, power adjustment and frequency adjustment.

There are two types of ranging codes mandated by the Mobile WiMAX System Profile:
2 symbols long (for Initial Ranging and HO ranging)
1 symbol long (for Periodic Ranging and BWR).

The initial ranging codes shall be used for initial network entry and association. An initial-ranging
transmission shall be performed during two consecutive symbols. The same ranging code is
transmitted on the ranging channel during each symbol, with no phase discontinuity between the two
symbols. The handover ranging codes shall be used for ranging against a Target BS during handover.
Periodic-ranging transmissions are sent periodically for system periodic ranging. Bandwidth-requests
transmissions are for requesting uplink allocations from the BS.

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Table A.223: Initial ranging T D
2. Table A.226: Periodic ranging T D
3. Table A. 236: MAC Layer HO
Procedures
P D

This test requires the Signaling Unit (MSE) to be generating all types of ranging request. The BS is set
to receive Initial Ranging, Periodic Ranging and Hand off Ranging requests as specified in the PICS.

Signaling Unit (MSE) shall be capable of emulating a frequency deviation between -2 and +2 % of
subcarrier spacing compared to the value corresponding to the nominal frequency. Further, the MSE
shall be capable of emulating two situations: near and far MS.Therefore, the MSE shall be capable of
supporting different RTD values and power levels.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 239
10.1.3.4 Test setup

Figure 51. Test setup for BS receive ranging support test

As a preamble for the test procedure description, the following table summarizes the test conditions,
where the Smin is the minimum receiver sensitivity for the fixed uplink modulation and coding
scheme. The parameters listed in every row will be used for the subtests defined in the test procedure.

Table 190. Parameters for BS Receive Ranging-Support Test
Test parameters
set #
Power level at RAS Input RTD emulated
Signaling Unit (MSE) Carrier
Frequency Deviation
1 -45dBm RTD for 0m +2% of subcarrier spacing
2 -45dBm RTD for 0m -2% of subcarrier spacing
3 Smin+10dB
RTD for maximum allowable
distance
+2% of subcarrier spacing
4 Smin+10dB
RTD for maximum allowable
distance
-2% of subcarrier spacing

The maximum allowable RTD can be derived from following calculation.

Maximum allowable RTD = TTG SSRTG = TTG 50us

To execute the complete test all the following test steps/subtests shall be performed until its final
completion (that is, all actions and measurements within every subtest shall be considered): Subtest 1
(Initial ranging), Subtest 2 (Periodic ranging), Subtest 3 (HO ranging).

Signaling
Unit
(MSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
BS
UUT
AMS/BS
Attenuator
ABS/MS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 240
10.1.3.5.1 Subtest 1: Initial Ranging
This subtest comprises the execution of the following generic subtest employing one specific
parameter set previously listed in Table 190. In order to consider completely executed the subtest it is
necessary to complete the execution of the generic subtest 4 times, each time using one of the 4
parameters set of the referred table.

Generic subtest procedure (to be execute using the parameter set #i described in Table 190 i varies
from 1 to 4)
Initial conditions
The BS UUT and the signaling unit (MSE) are ready to initiate initial ranging, but the
signaling unit has still not send any initial ranging CDMA code. The BS UUT is then
awaiting the first transmission of initial ranging CDMA code from the signaling unit (MSE).
Generic subtest steps
Step 1. The signaling unit (MSE) send a initial ranging CDMA code, using the parameter set #i
listed in Table 190.
Step 2. The BS UUT receives the initial ranging CDMA code and send to the signaling unit (MSE)
the proper corrections.
Step 3. The signaling unit (MSE) receives such corrections and sends another initial ranging
CDMA code with the corrections transmitted by BS UUT.
Step 4. Capture timing correction included in the RNG-RSP message.
Step 5. Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 until MSE receive RNG-RSP message with Success Indicator.
Step 6. End of generic subtest

10.1.3.5.2 Subtest 2: Periodic Ranging
parameter set previously listed in Table 190.

Generic subtest procedure

Initial conditions
The initial network entry including initial ranging has been completed and starting from a
situation where the MSE enters into periodic ranging process.

Step 1. The BS UUT receives the periodic ranging CDMA code and sends to the
signaling unit (MSE) the proper corrections.
Step 2. The signaling unit (MSE) receives such corrections and stores for further
processing the time offset correction.
Step 3. The signaling unit adopts the corrections sent by the BS UUT and sends a
second periodic ranging CDMA code accordingly with these corrections.
Step 4. The BS UUT receives the new periodic ranging CDMA code and sends to the
signaling unit (MSE) the new proper corrections.
Step 6. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 until MSE receive RNG-RSP message with
Success Indicator.
Step 7. End of generic subtest
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 241

10.1.3.5.3 Subtest 3: Handover Ranging
parameter set previously listed in Table 190. In order to consider completely executed the subtest it is
necessary to complete the execution of the generic subtest 4 times, each time using one of the 4
parameters set of the referred table.

Generic subtest procedure (to be execute using the parameter set #i described in Table 190 i varies
from 1 to 4)
Initial conditions
The BS UUT and the signaling unit (MSE) are ready to perform HO process (HO ranging),
but the signaling unit has still not send any HO ranging CDMA code. The BS UUT is then
awaiting the first transmission of HO ranging CDMA code from the signaling unit (MSE).
The internal state of the signaling unit will emulate the initiation of a HO process just for the
purposes of this subtest.
Step 1. The signaling unit (MSE) sends a HO CDMA code, using the parameter set #i
listed in Table 190.
Step 2. The BS UUT receives the HO CDMA code and sends to the signaling unit
(MSE) the proper corrections.
Step 3. The signaling unit (MSE) receives such corrections and sends another HO
CDMA code with the corrections transmitted by BS UUT.
Step 5. Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 until MSE receive RNG-RSP message with
Success Indicator.
Step 6. End of generic subtest.

Pass criteria
The test verdict is Pass if:
Timing correction included in the RNG-RSP message at the time of success indicator or
right before that is within -/+CP/8 for all of the three subtests.

Fail criteria
The test verdict is Fail if:
Timing correction included in the RNG-RSP message at the time of success indicator or
right before that is either smaller than CP/8 or larger than +CP/8 for any of the three
subtests.

Not applicable.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 242


0.0.1 2006-05-11 Eric Jeong Initial draft

0.0.2 2006-05-14 Eric Jeong HO ranging and test parameters are modified.

0.0.3 2006-05-16 Eric Jeong Frequency deviation and periodic ranging test
procedure are modified.

0.0.4

2006-06-18 Eric Jeong
Kwang Jun Ha
4 types of ranging test procedure and compliance
requirements are modified.
Uncertainties are modified.
0.0.5 2006-09-01 Eric Jeong Test procedures and compliance requirements are
modified.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 243
10.1.4 BS-04.1: BS receiver adjacent and non-adjacent channel selectivity
The purpose of this test is to verify that the BS receiver can meet the Adjacent and Non-adjacent Channel
Selectivity defined in IEEE802.16-2004, IEEE802.16e-2005, and the Mobile System Profile.

Reference [2] (IEEE P802.16e-2005) specifies that first adjacent channel selectivity at BER=10
6
for 3
dB degradation C/I and second adjacent channel selectivity at BER=10
6
for 3dB degradation C/I, both
for 16-QAM-3/4 case. This is verified by measuring the packet error lower than the defined limits.

The adjacent and non-adjacent channel selectivity performance depends on both ACLR (Adjacent
Channel Leakage power Ratio) of the interferer transmitter and the ACS (Adjacent Channel
Selectivity) of the receiver. The interference experienced in a realistic environment can come from
different sources depending on the type of interferers and their out-of-band emission masks, as well as
the channel spacing.

ACS is a measure of a receivers ability to receive an OFDMA signal at its assigned channel frequency
in the presence of an adjacent channel signal at a given frequency offset from the centre frequency of
the assigned channel. ACS is the ratio of the receive filter attenuation on the assigned channel
frequency to the receive filter attenuation on the adjacent channel(s).

The Adjacent Channel Interference Power Ratio (ACIR) is the ratio of the total power transmitted from
a source (both BS and MS) to the total interference power affecting a receiver, resulting from both
transmitter and receiver imperfections.

When the ACLR of the interference source is much better than receiver ACS performance, the adjacent
channel selectivity performance is determined by the ACS performance.

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Item3 and 4 in A.5.1.2.1.20 T D

1
1 1
ACIR
ACLR ACS
=
+
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 244
- The adjacent and non-adjacent channel leakage ratio of the test interfering sources should
have negligible impact to the receiver ACS measurement. In particular, the ACLR (adjacent
and non-adjacent) requirement should be better than 40dB and 60dB, respectively. ACLR
performance can be derived from the interfering sources spectrum mask and the channel
spacing (CS). The channel spacing (CS) is determined as the same as channel bandwidth of
the desired system, except for systems with a bandwidth of 8.75MHz. For 8.75MHz channel
BW, CS is defined as 9MHz.
- Interfering source(signal) is an OFDMA signal with the same channel bandwidth,
unsynchronized with the desired signal, and be in a continuous transmission mode with a
default frame structure defined in Appendix. The averaged power of the interference is a time-
triggered measurement only over the duration of the data burst.

10.1.4.4 Test setup
Figure 52 shows the test setup for testing the BS receiver adjacent-channel and non-adjacent channel
selectivity parameters.

Attenuator 2
Signaling
Unit
(MSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
BS
UUT

AMS
Attenuator 1
ABS

+
Interference
Source
Combiner
Attenuator 3

Figure 52. Test Setup for BS Receiver Adjacent and Non-adjacent Channel Selectivity Test

Attenuators 1 and 2 are used to adjust the ratio between the useful and interfering signal. Attenuator 3
allows for a measurable signal at the average power meter.

Adjacent Channel Selectivity

Step 1. A connection is established between the Signaling Unit (MSE) of the adjacent channel and
the BS UUT. The test consists of 2 steps as defined in Table 193.
Step 2. For each step the signal level, modulation and coding, and the interferer level are as
specified in Table 193.
Step 3. With the Signaling Unit (MSE) turned on and the interfering source of the adjacent channel
turned off, the attenuator 1 is adjusted to set received signal level at A
BS
to be S
min
+ 3 dB as
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 245
specified in Table 193. S
min
is the receiver minimum input level specified for modulation
scheme and the RF channels under test in Appendix 1 and Appendix 5.
Step 4. With the Signaling Unit (MSE) turned off and the interfering source turned on, the
attenuator 2 is adjusted to set received interference level at A
BS
to be S
min
+ 14 dB as
Step 5. With both the Signaling Unit (MSE) and the interfering source turned on, an interfering
signal is summed with the signal from the Signaling Unit (MSE).

Table 193. Parameters for BS Receiver Adjacent Channel Selectivity Test
Test
Step
Modulation and
Coding
Level
Interference
Frequency Offset
1 16QAM-3/4 S
min
+ 3 dB S
min
+ 14 dB +1 CS
2 -1 CS

Non-Adjacent Channel Selectivity

Step 1. A connection is established between the Signaling Unit (MSE) of the non-adjacent channel
and the BS UUT. The test consists of 2 steps as defined in Table 194.
Step 2. For each step the signal level, modulation and coding, and the interferer level are as
Step 3. With the Signaling Unit (MSE) turned on and the interfering source of the non-adjacent
channel turned off, the attenuator 1 is adjusted to set received signal level at A
BS
to be S
min

+ 3 dB as specified in Table 194.
Step 4. With the Signaling Unit (MSE) turned off and the interfering source turned on, the
attenuator 2 is adjusted to set received interference level at A
BS
to be S
min
+ 33 dB as
Step 5. With both the Signaling Unit (MSE) and the interfering source turned on, an interfering
signal is summed with the signal from the Signaling Unit (MSE).

Table 194. Parameters for BS Receive Non-adjacent Channel Selectivity Test
Test
Step
Modulation and
Coding
Level
Interference
Frequency
Offset
1 16QAM-3/4 S
min
+ 3 dB S
min
+ 33 dB +2 CS
2 -2 CS


Adjacent Channel Selectivity

Pass Criteria:
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 246
The number of lost packets during all PER measurements is less or equal to the limit
specified in Appendix 1 for Qualitative tests.

Fail Criteria:
The number of lost packets during all PER measurements is bigger than the limit

Non-Adjacent Channel Selectivity

Pass Criteria:
The number of lost packets during all PER measurements is less or equal to the limit

Fail Criteria:
The number of lost packets during all PER measurements is bigger than the limit

Not applicable.

0.0.1 2006-5-15 Sun-Young Choi Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-5-16 Sun-Young Choi Open issues added
0.0.3 2006-9-1 Sun-Young Choi Title and introduction are modified
according to the ACR adhoc agreement.
Open issues deleted.
Structure of the text is modified, i.e. the
section of testing requirements is
segmented into testing requirements, test
setup, test procedure, and compliance
requirements.
Editorial errors are fixed.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 247
10.1.5 BS-05.1: BS Rx Maximum Input Level On-channel reception tolerance
The purpose of this test is to test a BS receiver capability of decoding an on-channel input signal of maximum
required power level.

Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE802.16e-2005 [section 8.4.13.3.2] specifies that BS receiver
shall be capable of decoding a maximum on-channel signal of -45 dBm. This is verified by measuring
the packet error rates which are lower than defined limits at least robust modulation and coding.

10.1.5.2 PICS Coverage
The following PICS items are covered by this test

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Item 1, section A.5.1.2.1.20 T D

10.1.5.3 Test Setup
Figure 53 shows the test setup for testing the BS receiver maximum input signal.

Figure 53. Test Setup for BS Receiver Maximum Input Signal Test.

Initial Condition
Step 1. Network entry has been completed.

Test Procedure
MSE
Average
Power
Meter

BS
UUT
A
MS

Attenuator
A
BS

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 248
BS
to 45dBm.
Step 2. An uplink connection is setup from the Signaling Unit (MSE) to the BS UUT.
Step 3. For the least robust mandatory modulation and coding, the test is performed at 16 QAM with
coding rate and run until the number of packets specified in Table 197 has been transmitted.
Measure the BS UUT receiver packet error rates. The number of packets in error should be less
than the limit indicated in
Step 4. Table 198for Qualitative tests.

Table 197. Parameters for BS Receiver Maximum Input Signal Test
Modulation Coding Rate Packet Payload
Length, bytes
Packet Rate,
packets/second
Minimum
number of
packets to be
transmitted
16QAM 3/4 576

200

30,000

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 249

10.1.5.5 Compliance Requirements
The number of packets in error should be less than the limit indicated Table 198 for Qualitative Test

Message Packet
Length (bits)
Threshold
PER
Number of
packets sent N
Maximum number
of error packets M
Pass/Fail
Default_Packet
w 38 bytes
overhead(if
PING method is
used for PER
measurement)
(576+38) x 8 0.49% 30,000 147
Default_Packet
w 10 bytes
overhead (if
MAC CRC
method is used
for PER
measurement)
(576+10) x 8 0.47% 30,000 141

0.0.1 2006-03-31 Nortel/Motorola Modified from RCT for OFDM
0.0.2 2006-09-01 SangYoub Kim Removed references defined in local.
Added Introduction section.
Editorial change in test procedure
section.
Updated maximum number of error
packets to meet PER threshold.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 250
10.1.6 BS-06.1: BS receiver sensitivity
The purpose of this test is to verify that the BS receiver can meet the minimum input level sensitivity
requirement defined in IEEE802.16e-2005 and the Mobile System Profile for both Convolutional Coding
and Convolutional Turbo Coding modes.

In order to be compliant to the minimum receiver sensitivity requirement, the receiver is required to
achieve a Packet Error Rate (PER) equal to or better than a certain target level when the received
signal is set at the maximum sensitivity level.

In the test, the BS is required to keep count of correct and false MAC-CRCs all the data packets
(bursts) received. The PER, rather than the Bit Error Rate (BER), is calculated over a large number of
frames to verify that the performance is better than or equal to the target PER. For AWGN channels,
the target PER is converted from the packet size and the standard requirement of BER=1e-6, assuming
independent error event after decoding (Appendix 1). For fading channels, the target PER is 10%,
which is assumed to be near the target PER of a first HARQ transmission.

The packet length is chosen to be, after encoding, a single FEC block with a maximum data size
allowed by the CTC sub-channel concatenation rule, i.e., 60/54 bytes depending on the particular MCS
level. Each data packet consists of a 6-byte generic MAC header at the beginning and a 4-byte CRC-
32 at the end, leaving the remaining as payload bits. Random payload bits are used. The CRC is
calculated based on MAC header and the payload.

IEEE802.16e-2005 specifies that the BER measured after the FEC shall be less than 10
6
at the power
levels given by
10 10
114 10log ( ) 10log
s Used
ss Rx
FFT
F N
R SNR R ImpLoss NF
N
| |
= + + + +
|
\ .

Where

SNR
Rx
is the receiver SNR for different levels of coding rate and modulation,
R is the repetition factor, as described in Section 8.4.9,
F
S
is the sampling frequency in MHz as defined in Section 8.4.2.4,
ImpLoss is the implementation loss, which includes non-ideal receiver effects such as channel
estimation errors, tracking errors, quantization errors, and phase noise. The assumed value is 5 dB.
N
F
is the receiver noise figure, referenced to the antenna port. The assumed value is 8 dB.

The specification further defines that the minimum input levels are measured as follows:
Using the defined standardized message packet formats.
Using an AWGN channel.

The test verifies that the BS under test will conform to the minimum performance requirement set forth
in the standard, i.e., under maximum implementation loss of 5 dB and maximal noise figure of 8dB,
i.e.,
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 251
10 10
114 10log ( ) 10log 13
s Used
ss Rx
FFT
F N
R SNR R
N
| |
= + + +
|
\ .

IEEE802.16e-2005 only gives the receiver SNR table (table 338) for a tail-biting convolutional code
(CC). According to the Mobile System Profile, CC is mandatory only for FCH, and CTC is used in all
other transmissions. Therefore, the receiver SNR table defined in the Mobile System Profile will be
used for CTC reception testing Note: the values there are for 60/54/48 bytes only.

In addition to AWGN the test is performed for fading channels Ped B and Veh A.

10.1.6.2 Test Setup
Figure 54 shows the test setup for testing the BS receiver sensitivity. Power should be measured and averaged only
during the symbol times where data are allocated and exist.

Attenuator 2
Signaling
Unit
(MSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
BS
UUT

AMSBS
Attenuator 1
AMS/BS

+
Interference
Source
Combiner
Attenuator 3

Figure 54. Test Setup for BS Receiver Sensitivity Test

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 252
Table 200. PICS Coverage for BS-06.1 BS Receiver Sensitivity
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Table A. 179 A.198 in section
A.5.1.2.1.18
BS Performance Requirements

T D

This test requires the BS successfully establishes a link with the Signaling Unit (MSE) using the
modulation/code rate under test in UL and all sub-channels.
The input signal level, averaged only over the data zone, needs to be set at the appropriate levels,
which may requires a time-triggered measurement. Moreover, the power level should be the average
over data subcarriers only.
The default frame structure defined in Appendix 2 should be used according to to Table 201 below.
Table 201. Number of OFDM symbols in DL and UL.

Bandwidth DL Symbols UL Symbols Uplink control region

CDMA ranging region

3.5 MHz 21 12 3 symbols 2 +1 symbols
6 subchannel
5 MHz 29 18 3 symbols 2 +1 symbols
6 subchannel
6 subchannel
6 subchannel
6 subchannel

An uplink connection is setup from the Signaling Unit (MSE) to the BS UUT.
The received signal level at A
BS
is adjusted to the value specified in Appendix 1.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 253
Test packets are generated such that there is at least one packet per frame with the test configuration;

No fragmentation.
No header suppression.
No SDU packing.
No ARQ.
No encryption.
CRC enabled

The received signal level at A
BS
is adjusted to the limit specified in Table 200.

For each modulation and coding the test is performed for all configurations described in Table 15. The
number of packets in error should be less than the limit indicated in Appendix 1 for Qualitative tests.

MAC-CRC test:
This test should be performed first to verify that the receiver can correctly count MAC-CRC depending on
successful/unsuccessful check. The test procedure is:
- Use allocate one 60-byte QPSK rate-1/2 packet in each frame
- Set the signal level at 10dB above sensitivity
- For a certain percentage (e.g., 50%) of 2000 packets, the CRC bits are flipped (negated). BS UUT
should report counter values corresponding to the number of false and correct packets sent. For
those packets that the MSE expects a CRC pass, only a single (1) error can be allowed (i.e., a
single CRC fail for 1000 packets)

Test case 1: Receiver sensitivity under AWGN

The received signal level at the receiver input is adjusted to the maximum sensitivity level specified in
Table A. 179 A.198 in section A.5.1.2.1.18 BS Performance Requirements of the Mobile WiMAX PICS
for the relevant coding and channel bandwidth (see also Appendix 1) plus the boosting offset. The values
are the same if derived from the required SNR column of Table 202 and the equation:
10 10
114 10log ( ) 10log 13
s Used
ss Rx
FFT
F N
R SNR R
N
| |
= + + +
|
\ .

where F
s
is

the sampling rate and N
used
is the number of used subcarriers.

For each modulation and coding, the test is performed for the different packet according to Table 202 and
run until the number of frames specified in the table has been transmitted. The number of packets in error
should be less than the limit indicated in the last column of the table.

For each MCS below the test is evaluated at 95% confidence level

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 254
Table 202. Parameters for Single-antenna Receiver Sensitivity (CTC, PUSC, AWGN)
Channel
BW
(MHz)
MCS Min
Required
SNR
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots
per
PDU
Packets
(PDUs)
per
frame
# of
frames
PER
(BER=1e-
6)
# of
error
packets
10 QPSK
rate-1/2
2.9 dB 60 10 1 63000 0.048% 21
QPSK
rate-3/4
6.3 dB 54 6 1 70000 0.0432% 21
16QAM
rate-1/2
8.6 dB 60 5 1 63000 0.048% 21
16QAM
rate-3/4
12.7 dB

54 3 1 70000 0.0432% 21
8.75 QPSK
rate-1/2
2.9 dB 60 10 1 56000 0.048% 18
QPSK
rate-3/4
6.3 dB 54 6 1 69000 0.0432% 20
16QAM
rate-1/2
8.6 dB 60 5 1 56000 0.048% 18
16QAM
rate-3/4
12.7 dB

54 3 1 69000 0.0432% 20
7 QPSK
rate-1/2
2.9 dB 60 10 1 56000 0.048% 18
QPSK
rate-3/4
6.3 dB 54 6 1 69000 0.0432% 20
16QAM
rate-1/2
8.6 dB 60 5 1 56000 0.048% 18
16QAM
rate-3/4
12.7 dB

54 3 1 69000 0.0432% 20
5 QPSK
rate-1/2
2.9 dB 60 10 1 60000 0.048% 20
QPSK
rate-3/4
6.3 dB 54 6 1 68000 0.0432% 20
16QAM
rate-1/2
8.6 dB 60 5 1 60000 0.048% 20
16QAM
rate-3/4
12.7 dB

54 3 1 68000 0.0432% 20
3.5 QPSK
rate-1/2
2.9 dB 60 10 1 60000 0.048% 20
QPSK
rate-3/4
6.3 dB 54 6 1 66000 0.0432% 19
16QAM
rate-1/2
8.6 dB 60 5 1 65000 0.048% 22
16QAM
rate-3/4
12.7 dB

54 3 1 66000 0.0432% 19

Frequency Testing Parameters
The test should be repeated at the low, mid and high frequencies as declared by the vendor in line with the sample
test frequencies stated in Appendix 5.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 255
Test case 2: Receiver sensitivity under Ped-B @3Km/h
The received signal level at the receiver input is adjusted to the maximum sensitivity level specified according to the
required SNR column of Table 203 and the equation:
10 10
114 10log ( ) 10log 13
s Used
ss Rx
FFT
F N
R SNR R
N
| |
= + + +
|
\ .

where F
s is
the sampling rate and N
used
is the number of data subcarriers.

The channel emulator is set so that the signal level after the fading channel is the long-term average power (i.e., over
the duration of all frames).

For each modulation and coding, the test is performed for the different packet according to Table 203 and run until
the number of frame specified in the table has been transmitted. The number of packets in error should be less than
the limit indicated in the last column of the table.

Table 203. Parameters for Single-antenna Receiver Sensitivity (CTC, PUSC, Ped-B@3Km/h)
Channel
BW
(MHz)
MCS Min
Required
SNR
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots
per
PDU
Packets
(PDUs)
per
frame
# of frames PER
target
# of
error
packets
10 QPSK
rate-1/2
7.0 60 10 1 21000 10% 2028
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.0 54 6 1 35000 10% 3407
16QAM
rate-1/2
13.5 60 5 1 42000 10% 4098
16QAM
rate-3/4
19.5 54 3 1 70000 10% 6869
8.75 QPSK
rate-1/2
7.0 60 10 1 14000 10% 1341
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.0 54 6 1 23000 10% 2224
16QAM
rate-1/2
13.5 60 5 1 28000 10% 2717
16QAM
rate-3/4
19.5 54 3 1 46000 10% 4493
7 QPSK
rate-1/2
7.0 60 10 1 14000 10% 1341
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.0 54 6 1 23000 10% 2224
16QAM
rate-1/2
13.5 60 5 1 28000 10% 2717
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 256
16QAM
rate-3/4
19.5 54 3 1 46000 10% 4493
5 QPSK
rate-1/2
7.0 60 10 1 10000 10% 950
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.0 54 6 1 17000 10% 1635
16QAM
rate-1/2
13.5 60 5 1 20000 10% 1929
16QAM
rate-3/4
19.5 54 3 1 34000 10% 3308
3.5 QPSK
rate-1/2
7.0 60 10 1 6000 10% 561
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.0 54 6 1 11000 10% 1047
16QAM
rate-1/2
13.5 60 5 1 13000 10% 1243
16QAM
rate-3/4
19.5 54 3 1 22000 10% 2126

The test should be repeated at the low, mid and high frequencies as declared by the vendor in line with the sample
test frequencies stated in Appendix 5.

Test case 3: Receiver sensitivity under Veh-A @60Km/h
The received signal level at the receiver input is adjusted to the maximum sensitivity level limit specified according
to the required SNR column of Table 204 and the equation:
10 10
114 10log ( ) 10log 13
s Used
ss Rx
FFT
F N
R SNR R
N
| |
= + + +
|
\ .

where F
s
is the sampling rate and Nused is the number of data subcarriers.

The channel emulator is set so that the signal level after the fading channel is the long-term average power.

For each modulation and coding, the test is performed for the different packet according to Table 204 and run until
the number of frame specified in the table has been transmitted. The number of packets in error should be less than
the limit indicated in the last column of the table.

For each MCS below, the test is evaluated at 95% confidence level.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 257
Table 204. Parameters for Single-antenna Receiver Sensitivity ( CTC, PUSC, Veh-A@60Km/h)
Channel
BW
(MHz)
MCS Min
Required
SNR
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots
per
PDU
Packets
(PDUs)
per
frame
# of frames PER
target
# of
error
packets
10 QPSK
rate-1/2
8.0 60 10 1 21000 10% 2028
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.5 54 6 1 35000 10% 3407
16QAM
rate-1/2
14.0 60 5 1 42000 10% 4098
16QAM
rate-3/4
20.0 54 3 1 70000 10% 6869
8.75 QPSK
rate-1/2
8.0 60 10 1 14000 10% 1341
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.5 54 6 1 23000 10% 2224
16QAM
rate-1/2
14.0 60 5 1 28000 10% 2717
16QAM
rate-3/4
20.0 54 3 1 46000 10% 4493
7 QPSK
rate-1/2
8.0 60 10 1 14000 10% 1341
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.5 54 6 1 23000 10% 2224
16QAM
rate-1/2
14.0 60 5 1 28000 10% 2717
16QAM
rate-3/4
20.0 54 3 1 46000 10% 4493
5 QPSK
rate-1/2
8.0 60 10 1 10000 10% 950
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.5 54 6 1 17000 10% 1635
16QAM
rate-1/2
14.0 60 5 1 20000 10% 1929
16QAM
rate-3/4
20.0 54 3 1 34000 10% 3308
3.5 QPSK
rate-1/2
8.0 60 10 1 6000 10% 561
QPSK
rate-3/4
13.5 54 6 1 11000 10% 1047
16QAM
rate-1/2
14.0 60 5 1 13000 10% 1243
16QAM
rate-3/4
20.0 54 3 1 22000 10% 2126

The test should be repeated at the low, mid and high frequencies as declared by the vendor in line with the
sample test frequencies stated in Appendix 5.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 258
In order to be compliant to the minimum receiver sensitivity requirement, the receiver is required to,
after accounting for its noise figure and implementation loss, achieve an equal or better Packet Error
Rate (PER) target performance when the received signal is at the maximum sensitivity level.

Sensitivity = R
SS
+ 10log
10
(N
alloc
/N
used
)
Where N
alloc
is the number of subcarriers to which data is allocated.

Table 205. Max BS Sensitivity Level for 3.5 MHz Bandwidth
Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -100.2 -96.1 -95.1
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -99.0 -92.3 -91.8
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -97.5 -92.6 -92.1
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -95.6 -88.8 -88.3

Table 206. Max BS Sensitivity Level for 5 MHz Bandwidth
Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -100.9 -96.8 -95.8
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -99.7 -93.0 -92.5
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -98.2 -93.3 -92.8
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -94.1 -87.3 -86.8

Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -100.1 -96.0 -95.0
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -98.9 -92.2 -91.7
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 259
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -97.4 -92.5 -92.0
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -95.5 -88.7 -88.3

Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -100.5 -96.4 -95.4
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -99.3 -92.6 -92.1
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -97.8 -92.9 -92.4
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -94.6 -87.8 -87.3

Subcarrier
Allocation
Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
AWGN
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Ped-B
@3km/h
(dBm)
Sensitivity
Veh-A
@60km/h
(dBm)
Pass/Fail Comments
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -100.9 -96.8 -95.8
PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -99.7 -93.0 -92.5
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -98.2 -93.3 -92.8
PUSC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -94.1 -87.3 -86.7

Pass verdict:
For all modulation and coding combinations, the number of packets in error is less or equal to the
limit inTable 202, Table 203 and Table 204.
Fail verdict:
For at least one of the modulation and coding combinations, the number of packets in error is
higher than the limit in Table 202, Table 203 and Table 204.

The maximum allowed signal level inaccuracy at the ARP is 0.5dB.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 260
Table 210. Revision History for BS Receiver Sensitivity BS-06.1
0.0.1 2006-05-11 Lars Carln Initial draft Largely derived from MS counterpart.

0.0.2 2006-06-16 Lars Carln Second Revision. Abstract revised. Revision of
Test Requirements, Test Procedure and
Compliance Requirements.

0.3.0 2006-11-10 Lars Carln Removed Open issues. Changed figure for test-
setup. Reworked to reflect the development of the
MS sensitivity test.
0.4.0 2006-11-11 Jiho Jang Removed errors. Modified the min SNR
requirements for fading channels.
0.5.0 2006-12-06 Lars Carln Modified the min SNR requirements for fading
channels to reflect discussions with Jiho Jang.
0.6.0 2006-12-11 Lars Carln Added testing for Low, Mid and High frequencies
for QPSK rate-1/2.
0.6.1 2006-12-12 Anders Lamm Added testing for Low, Mid and High frequencies
for 16QAM at fading conditions
0.7.0 2006-12-13 Anders Lamm Test performed at maximum UL-frame size
according to system profile DL/UL ratio.
UL frame filled up to maximum using 60/54 bytes
packets depending on MCS.
Full coverage of High and Low frequencies as test
time has been largely reduced due to new test data.
0.7.1 2006-12-13 Anders Lamm UL/DL ratio for 8.75 MHz BW changed..
Number of error packets changed to 50%
confidence interval since the test is repeated 3
times at different frequencies for each MCS.
0.7.3 2006-12-14 Anders Lamm Changed number of packets for fading cases as
well as included 95% confidence level for passing
test.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 261
10.1.7 BS-07.1 BS transmitter modulation and coding
The purpose of this test is to verify the base stations (BS) functional capability of transmitting various
Modulation and Coding Schemes (MCS) in the Convolutional Turbo Encoding mode in various zones
of the down-link sub-frame.

This test also covers repetition coding, interleaving and randomization functionalities.

Mobile WiMAX System Profile requires the base station to be capable of transmitting bursts at various
modulations and coding rates.

This set of capabilities of the base station are tested by stimulating the base station to transmit
sequences of data in various bursts with different modulation and coding patterns in different zones
and checking that the test system decodes the received the signals with a limited packet error rate as
stated in the Table 297.

Table 211. BS transmitter modulation and coding in WiMAX Profile and PICS
Modulation

Convolutional Code (CC) Convolutional Turbo Code (CTC)
1 QPSK-1/2 YES for FCH YES
2 QPSK-3/4 NO (see note Table A.28 in PICS) YES
3 16QAM-1/2 NO YES
4 16QAM-3/4 NO YES
5 64QAM-1/2 NO YES
6 64QAM-2/3 NO YES
7 64QAM-3/4 NO YES

Table 212. PICS coverage for BS-07.1
Item Reference Item and Section Number in PICS [6] Partial or
Total
Coverage
(P/T)
Direct or
Indirect
Coverage
(D/I)
1. Section A.5.1.2. BS in PMP topology P
2. Section A.5.1.2.1 PHY functions P
3. Section A.5.1.2.1.10 Channel Coding T
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 262
4. Section A.5.1.1.1.14 Modulation, Table A.35
QPSK (CC) 1/2
T I
5. Table A.152 Repetition for BS T I
6. Table A.153 Randomization for BS T I
7. Table A.155 Convolutional Turbo Code for BS T I
8. Table A.156 Interleaving for BS T I
9. Section A.5.1.2.1.15 Modulation P
10. Table A. 165 Downlink MCS for BS, Convolutional
Turbo Code
T D
11. Table A.168 Pilot modulation for BS (except IO-BF
and IO-MIMO)
P D
12. Table A.169 Preamble modulation for BS T D

The BS is set to transmit the data at different modulation and coding schemes.

The traffic is sent for a long enough time to allow a statistical estimate of the bit error rate at which an
ideal mobile station decodes the traffic data. A power meter or equivalent instrument is used to
measure the output power of the base station at the A
BS
interface. The power at the input port of the
Signaling Unit (MSE) is then Power(A
MS
) = Power(A
BS
) Attenuator.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 263
10.1.7.4 Test setup

Figure 55 shows the set up for BS Modulation and coding test.

Figure 55. Test setup for BS transmitter modulation and coding test

This test will be executed for Low, Mid and High center frequencies of declared frequency range of Band Class
under the test, as specified in A 5 for BS UUT.

For SISO (Wave I) the test procedures are the following:

Step 1. The test system shall be set to decode the FCH with QPSK and repetition factor 4 (four).
Step 2. Initialize the BS to transmit at a given modulation and coding rate with certain frame
structure (down-link zones, number of burst allocations, etc)
Step 3. The test system shall generate the test packets defined in the Appendix 1 and feed them to
the BS. The packets generated based on Appendix 1, in this test, shall use random data (and
not test vectors defined in the appendix) as payload. Other configurations for packets and
testing consideration are based on Qualitative tests option.
Step 4. The test system shall decode the packets sent by the BS.
Step 5. Condition the BS to use the default frame format defined in Appendix 2.
Step 6. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 for other MCS options (as listed in Table 213) and three
different center frequencies (Low, Mid and High).

The packets should be such as to fit into each chosen frame structure depending on the channel
bandwidth, modulation and coding, zones supported, etc.
The packets shall be sent repeatedly for the duration of the test.

Signaling
Unit
(MSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
BS
UUT
Attenuator
ABS
AMS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 264
Table 213. Parameters for BS transmitter modulation and coding test of CTC
Modulation Coding
rate
Repetition Test packet size Maximum packet rate,
[packets/second]
Total number
of packets
sent during
the test
QPSK 1/2 0 Default_Packet
QPSK
200 (1 packet per 5 msec
frame)
30,000
2 Default_Packet
QPSK
frame)
30,000
4 Default_Packet
QPSK
frame)
30,000
6 Default_Packet
QPSK
frame)
30,000
3/4 Default_Packet
QPSK
frame)
30,000
16QAM 1/2 Default_Packet
16QAM
frame)
30,000
3/4 Default_Packet
16QAM
frame)
30,000
64QAM 1/2 Default_Packet
64QAM
frame)
30,000
2/3 Default_Packet
64QAM
frame)
30,000
3/4 Default_Packet
64QAM
200 30,000

The test packets are defined in Appendix 1 Table 283.

The test for SISO is concluded with a Pass Verdict if:
a) A connection is established between the Tester and the BS UUT. This confirms that the FCH is
encoded correctly, and
b) The number of packets in error are less than or equal to those specified in Appendix 1 for Functional
tests.

The test is inconclusive if:
a) No connection is possible between the Tester and the BS UUT, or
b) No packets are received in the DL sub-frame.

If the test is not passed or inconclusive, it is declared failed

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 265
10.1.7.7 Uncertainties/accuracies of the measurement system
a) The bit error rate detection accuracy is 10
-9

b) Bit error rate detection accuracy dependent on faulty data pattern

Table 214. Revision history for BS-07.1
Version Date Author/Team Comment
0.0.1

2006-05-11 Herbert Ruck Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-05-16 Herbert Ruck Updated initial draft based on input from the M-
RCT discussions and the decision taken in MTG
(PICS) to limit the use of CC to the FCH.
0.3.0 2006-06-20 Herbert Ruck Referred test packet length and content to
Appendix A1.
Packet rate to be defined by the base station
vendor. Number of test packets transmitted is
calculated to determine the bit rate error.
Removed channel model other than AWGN from
the test. Added to test set-up procedures.
Turned off tracking changes because the Word
document became unstable.
0.4.0 2006-06-23 Herbert Ruck Modified the text based on the proposals made
during the June 2006 RCT meeting and based on
input from Jose V Asencio-Sanchez, Cetecom.
0.5.0 2006-09-04 Herbert Ruck Modified text in response to comments 145, 146
and 147 from Paul Piggin

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 266
10.1.8 BS-08.1: BS Transmitter Cyclic Prefix, Symbol Timing, and Frame Duration
Timing
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of BS Transmitter duration, useful OFDMA symbol duration, and
the frame duration.

The Mobile WiMAX system profile requires that the cyclic prefix be set to 1/8 of the useful OFDMA
symbol time,
b
T , and the frame duration be set to 5ms, both of which are one of the values specified
in the IEEE802.16 standard. These requirements along with correct useful OFDMA symbol duration
are verified through the following functional test.


Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.2.1.3 Frame Duration
2. A.5.1.2.1.2 Cyclic Prefix

A Vector Signal Analyzer (VSA) that can verify the cyclic prefix duration, useful symbol duration and
frame duration as defined in the Mobile WiMAX system profile and IEEE 802.16 standard is required
for this test.

10.1.8.4 Test setup
A Vector Signal Analyzer (VSA) is connected to the BS UUT that is generating DL bursts in order to
monitor the output of BS UUT.

The VSA timing measurement accuracy is required to be within +/-1us, and RF center frequency error
shall be within +/-2ppm.

The VSA should be configured as follows:
FFT size: 512 (For 3.5/5 MHz bandwidth) or 1024 (for 7/8.75/10 MHz bandwidth)
Center Frequency: Depends on the testing profile
Channel Bandwidth: Depends on the testing profile
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 267

Figure 56. Test Setup for BS Transmitter Cyclic Prefix, Symbol Timing, and Frame Duration Timing

Step 1. Observe the transmitted cyclic prefix with the VSA, and measure the observed cyclic prefix
duration,
g
T .
Step 2. Observe the transmitted useful symbol duration with the VSA, and measure the observed useful
symbol duration,
b
T .

Or, as an alternative to Step 1 and Step 2, confirm that the VSA achieves synchronization with the
transmitted signal.

Step 3. Observe the transmitted frame duration with the VSA, and measure the observed frame duration.

A minimum of ten received OFDMA symbols are observed in order to determine the final measurements
detailed above for the purposes of determining compliance.

The tolerance allowed on the timing measurements for determining compliance is +/-1s.
The test is passed if, when taking into account the allowed tolerance on the timing measurements:
the VSA achieves synchronisation with the transmitted signal; and
the observed frame duration is 5msec.

Test is failed if, when taking into account the allowed tolerance on the timing measurements:
the observed cyclic prefix is not 1/8 of
b
T as defined in Table 2, or
the observed useful symbol duration is not the value defined in Table 2, or the
observed frame duration is not 5msec, or
Signaling
Unit
(MSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
BS
UUT
Attenuator
ABS
AMS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 268
the VSA cannot synchronise with the transmitted signal.
Note: Stable synchronization of the VSA demodulator is sufficient to verify compliance with cyclic
prefix duration and useful symbol duration requirements.
Table 216. Useful Symbol Duration and Cyclic Prefix Duration
BW (MHz) FFT Size Sampling Factor Useful Symbol
Duration (s)
Cyclic Prefix
Duration (s)
3.5 512 8/7 128.00 16.00
5 512 28/25 91.43 11.43
7 1024 8/7 128.00 16.00
8.75 1024 8/7 102.40 12.80
10 1024 28/25 91.43 11.43

Not applicable.

0.0.1 2006-05-17 Mike Hart

Initial draft

0.0.2
0.0.3
0.0.4
0.0.5

0.0.6
2006-07-27
2006-08-11
2006-xx-xx
2006-09-13

2006-09-14
Mike Hart
Mike Hart
Mike Hart
Mike Hart

Mike Hart
Reflect the feedback points

Incorporate comments received duration
RCT conference call (on 2006-09-12)

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 269
10.1.9 BS-09.1: BS Transmit Preambles
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of BS Transmit Preambles.

This is a test of the preamble modulation at the BS. The MS will not be able to connect to this BS when this
preamble symbol is wrong.

The first symbol of the downlink transmission is the preamble; there are three types of preamble carrier sets, they
are defined by allocation of different physical subcarriers sets for each one of them. The subcarriers comprising the
preamble are modulated using a boosted BPSK with a specific Pseudo-Noise (PN) code. According to the
IEEE802.16 standard, the boost applied to the preamble subcarriers should be 9dB relative to the average data
subcarrier power.


Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.2.1.15 Table A.158

A Vector Signal Analyzer (VSA) that can monitor the Preamble pattern defined in IEEE 802.16e is
required for this test.

10.1.9.4 Test setup
A Vector Signal Analyzer (VSA) is connected to the BS UUT in order to monitor the output of BS
UUT.

The VSA should be configured as follows.
FFT size: 512 (For 3.5/5 MHz bandwidth) or 1024 (for 7/8.75/10 MHz bandwidth)
Centre Frequency: Depends on the testing profile
Channel Bandwidth: Depends on the testing profile

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 270

Figure 57. Test Setup for BS Transmit Preambles

Initial Condition
Step 1. Turn the BS UUT power on
Step 2. The BS UUT is set to the maximum output power of the BS minus 10 dB and the power at the
input of the VSA is adjusted to ensure that the input level is appropriate for the specifications of
the VSA.
Test Procedure
Step 1. Set the BS transmit preamble pattern to the first Index of preamble modulation series in Table
309a of IEEE 802.16e (FFT size 1024 case), or Table 309b of IEEE802.16e (FFT size 512 case) .
It is expected that, accordingly with what it is specified in the IEEE specification, the BS sends
continuously (that is, in each frame) at least the specified preamble followed by at least two
OFDM symbols carrying the 4-slot FCH and the DLMAP (normal or compressed, chosen by the
BS vendor)., using QPSK-1/2 with repetition coding of 6. The BS transmission can be followed by
the ULMAP (compressed or normal in burst #1, chosen by the BS vendor) and occasionally by the
UCD/DCD messages. The inclusion of ULMAP, and sometimes DCD/UCD, can introduce a
bigger number of symbols in the DL transmission, but this will not affect to the expected testing
conditions. In all cases the broadcast messages are expected not to be boosted.
Step 2. Configure the VSA for the set preamble index, and to equalize on preamble only. Display the
phase of the equalizer response (flatness). The received preamble pattern is verified by making the
following measurements and observations:
a) Check that the VSA demodulator synchronizes with the received signal (stable constellation).
b) Observe the phase of the frequency response plot is flat to within 45 degrees. (Note that this is
not a phase response test, but rather a go/no-go test for the gross phase errors caused by incorrect
pattern values).
c) Measure the relative power boost of the preamble tones compared to the average power on the
data tones.
Step 3. Set the BS transmit preamble pattern to the next index of the preamble modulation series in Table
309a of IEEE 802.16e (FFT size 1024 case), or Table 309b of IEEE802.16e (FFT size 512 case)
and step 2 is repeated. The test is repeated until all entries in the table are covered.

Test is passed if for every preamble sequence tested:
Signaling
Unit
(MSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
BS
UUT
Attenuator
ABS
AMS
BS
UUT
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 271

The VSA synchronizes to the preamble transmission, and
The phase of the VSA equalizer response is flat to within +/-45 degrees, and
The preamble power boost is measured as 9dB +/- 0.5dB.

The test is failed if any of the compliance requirements listed above is not met.

Not applicable.

0.0.1 2006-05-17 Mike Hart

Initial draft

0.0.2
0.0.3
0.0.4

2006-07-12
2006-07-27
2006-08-11
Mike Hart
Mike Hart
Mike Hart

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 272
10.1.10 BS-10.1: BS transmitter power range
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of BS equipment against the transmitter power range requirements.

The Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification requires a BS transmitter to have
control range of at least 10 dB. The BS transmitted power output is varied and the output measured by
using a power meter or equivalent test instrument.


Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Table A.199 Transmit
requirements for BS, Item 1. Tx
dynamic Range = 10 dB
reference Section 8.4.12.1
T D

This test requires the BS to generate DL bursts. The maximum and minimum BS transmitter power
levels are recorded with a RF power meter or equivalent.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 273

Signaling
Unit
(BSE/MSE)

Packet Generator &
Error Tester

VSA / Avg Power
M eter

BS / MS
UUT

Attenuator

A BS/MS

M BS/MS

A MS/BS

Figure 58. Test Setup for BS Transmitter Power Control Range
Initial Conditions:

Test Procedure
The test should be executed at the Low, Mid and High frequencies as declared by the vendor in line
with the sample test frequencies stated in Appendix 5.

Step 1. Set the BS UUT to its maximum transmitter power output.
Step 2. The maximum output power of the BS UUT is recorded.
Step 3. Set the BS UUT to its minimum transmitter power output.
Step 4. The minimum output power of the BS UUT is recorded.

Pass Verdict:
The difference between maximum and minimum power is greater or equal to 10dB.

Fail Verdict:
The difference between maximum and minimum power is less than 10dB.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 274
The power measurement uncertainty declared by the test facility shall be taken into account when the
pass or fail verdict is decided.

0.0.1 2006-05-11 Eugene Crozier Initial draft

0.0.2 2006-11-08 Eugene Crozier Editorial corrections.
0.0.3 2006-11-09 Eugene Crozier Editorial corrections.
0.0.4 2006-12-11 Eugene Crozier Removal of feedback from the Signaling Unit
back to the Packet Generator and repeat the test
over frequency.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 275
10.1.11 BS-11.1: BS transmitter spectral flatness
The purpose of this test is to verify compliance of BS equipments against spectral flatness requirements.

Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification requires a spectral flatness of 2 dB
from the measured energy averaged over all Nused active tones for spectral lines from Nused/4 to 1
and +1 to Nused/4 and +2/4 dB from the measured energy averaged over all Nused active tones for
spectral lines from Nused/2 to Nused/4 and +Nused/4 to Nused/2. Additionally, the absolute
difference between adjacent subcarriers shall not exceed 0.4 dB, excluding intentional boosting or
suppression of subcarriers. PAPR reduction subchannels are not allocated. Further, the power
transmitted at spectral line 0 shall not exceed 15 dB relative to total transmitted power.

This is to be measured with a vector signal analyzer using spectrum flatness measurement function. By
observing the amplitude deviations from the constellation points this function estimates the flatness as
a function of frequency from ordinary data transmission signals.


Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.2.1.19 Minimum
Transmit Requirements
Item 2
T D

This test requires the BS to be generating DL bursts. A vector signal analyzer is set to vector mode and
the power flatness is read across each burst. The flatness shall be averaged over 40 to 60 OFDM-
symbols to remove spectral fluctuation due to modulation.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 276

Figure 59. Test Setup for BS spectral flatness

Test Pattern:
The parameters shall be combined in all combinations possible. Referred values for power and
frequency are relative to the vendor declared range.

The test shall be performed using PUSC permutation with all subchannels on. Perform the test at the
declared mid frequency for the UUTs band with QPSK at maximum power and then repeat with
64QAM at minimum power. Repeat the test at the declared low and high frequency for the UUTs
band.

For wave 2, the AMC permutation shall also be tested.

Step 1. Establish connection between BS and Signaling Unit (MSE).
Step 2. Configure downlink map corresponding to current test-pattern according to Table 297 and
Appendix 2.
Step 3. Repeatedly send downlink data packages from UUT
Step 4. Measure the spectrum power with the VSA for the required number of OFDM-symbols.
Step 5. Extract the average power level for all active sub-carriers (including data and pilots) from
the measurement data obtained in Step 4.
Step 6. Report the average power level.
Step 7. Extract power measurement for sub-carrier 0.
Step 8. Compare sub-carrier 0 with average power level obtained in Step 5.
Step 10. For each active subcarrier measured in step 4, normalize the power reading by dividing by
the ideal magnitude for its constellation state, including any intentional power boosting.
Step 11. Compute the average normalized power by summing together the individual results of Step
10.
reading for outer
(Nused/2 to Nused/4 and +Nused/4 to Nused/2) for all active sub-carriers.
Step 13. Compare the values from Step 12with average power level obtained in Step 11.
Signaling
Unit
(MSE)
VSA / Avg
Power
Meter
BS
UUT
Attenuator
ABS
AMS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 277
reading for inner
(Nused/4 to 1 and +1 to Nused/4) for all active sub-carriers.
Step 16. Compare the values from Step 15with average normalized power level obtained in Step 11.
Step 18. Compare amplitudes within the measurement data obtained in Step 4 for all sub-carriers
with neighboring sub-carriers including pilots. Comparison shall be made after
normalization to ideal constellation state and compensation for intentional power boosting.
Step 19. Report neighbor sub-carrier deviation.
Step 20. Repeat Step 2 through Step 19for all applicable Test Patterns
Step 21. Repeat Step 1 through Step 20 for Low, Mid and High channel of declared frequency range.

Pass verdict:
a) The leakage power transmitted at spectral line 0 does not exceed 15 dB relative to the
corresponding total transmitted power for all specified combinations of test parameters.
b) All active inner sub-carriers shall be within 2 dB of the corresponding average power level for all
active sub-carriers power for all specified combinations of test parameters.
c) All active outer sub-carriers shall be within +2/4 dB of the corresponding average power level for
all active sub-carriers power for all specified combinations of test parameters.
d) The maximum neighbor sub-carrier deviation for all specified combinations of test parameters is
equal to or below 0.4dB for all active sub-carriers.

Fail verdict:
a) The leakage power transmitted at spectral line 0 exceeds 15 dB relative to the corresponding total
transmitted power for any specified combination of test parameters.
b) Any active inner sub-carriers exceed 2 dB of the corresponding average power level for all active
sub-carriers power for any specified combination of test parameters.
c) Any active outer sub-carriers exceed +2/4 dB of the corresponding average power level for all
active sub-carriers power for any specified combination of test parameters.
d) The maximum neighbor sub-carrier deviation for any specified combinations of test parameters
exceeds 0.4dB for any active sub-carriers.

The maximum flatness measurement uncertainty for individual sub-carriers is 0.05 dB relative to
the average channel power.

Table 223. Revision History for BS-11.1 BS spectral flatness
0.1.0 2006-05-11 Lars Carln First draft.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 278
0.2.0 2006-06-16 Lars Carln Second revision Introduction revised. Test
Requirements corrected. Test Procedure revised.
Measurement uncertainty updated.
0.4.0 2006-10-30 Lars Carln Update according to comments 244, 245, 246 and
247,
0.5.0 2006-11-10 Lars Carln Steps 10, 13 and16 changed to compensate for
intentional boosting in order to measure flatness
on all modulated sub-carriers including pilots.
0.6.0 2006-11-11 Lars Carln Modified test-procedure accordning to suggestion
by Agilent to better reflect the workings of the
VSAs.
0.7.0 2006-12.01 Teck Hu Correction of Step 16 in Section 10.1.11.5 from
power level obtained in Step 5 topower
level obtained in Step 11

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 279
10.1.12 BS-12.1: BS Transmitter Relative Constellation Error
The purpose of this test is to verify BS conformance to transmitter relative constellation error fidelity requirements
as required by the IEEE 802.16e-2005 standard and the TWG profile requirements.

The Standard [1] dictates that all measurements will be referenced to the RF antenna connector (i.e., at PA output
without antenna). To ensure that Receivers SNR will be degraded by no more than 0.5 dB due to transmitters SNR,
the relative constellation RMS error, averaged over subcarriers, OFDMA frames and packets, shall not exceed the
values listed in Table 1. Since the DL sub-frame may contain several different zones, the pilot level may shift when
transitioning from zone to zone. The test may be performed on any permutation zone. In order to verify the
receivers SNR, the EVM test contains actually a receiver in which after PA output the signal is demodulated and
the SNR is measured according to the following steps:

1. The BS transmits the required signal.
2. The preamble is located, i.e. initial coarse frame synchronization is performed.
3. From the preamble timing and frequency estimation is performed.
4. The timing offset is compensated as estimated.
5. The received signal shall be de-rotated according to the estimated frequency offset.
6. The VSA should use all available transmitted pilots, preamble subcarriers and data subcarriers for channel
estimation purposes.
7. Each sub-carrier value is divided by the corresponding channel estimate value.
8. For each sub-carrier value (i.e, data + pilot sub-carriers) we should find the closest constellation point and make a
decision subcarriers.
9. Compute the RMS errors averaged over all data sub-carriers in the packet.

This error is computed using the following formula (per equation 149 in IEEE 2005 std).

Equation 1

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 280
Where:
performed. is t measuremen the where s subcarrier data modulated of group the - S
plane. complex in the symbol OFDMA the of subcarrier
th - k frame, the of symbol OFDMA th - j frame, th - i the of point symbol ideal the - ) ) , , ( , ) , , ( (
plane. complex in the symbol OFDMA the of subcarrier
th - k and frame the of symbol OFDMA th - j frame, th - i the of point observed the - ) ) , , ( , ) , , ( (
t measuremen EVM for the frames of Number -
packet the of length the -
0 0
k j i Q k j i I
k j i Q k j i I
N
L
f
p

Table 224. Allowed relative constellation errors vs. MCS
Burst type Relative constellation error for
BS (dB)
Notes
QPSK 3/4 -18
16 QAM 3/4 -24
64 QAM 5/6 -30

Since the relative constellation error is actually not dependent on the code rate but only on the modulation used, the
test will be done on the all standard allowed constellations with the maximal code rate since these code rates have
more stringent requirements on the TX RCE

10.1.12.2 PICS Coverage
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. PICS Coverage: A.5.1.2.1.19
Item 5, Table A.178
T D

10.1.12.3 Test Requirements
For the purpose of measuring the BS relative constellation error (known also as EVM) a packet generator
(signal generator) is used to generate the required data traffic bytes/bits. The BS under test (BS-UUT) will
frame the data, encode it and modulate it according to 802.16e requirements. The VSA will demodulate the
signal and will calculate the required relative constellation error.. In addition the average power will be
calculated.

The test will be repeated at two output power levels - maximum output power and minimum power which
should be 10 dB less than the maximum power. The test will be repeated at low and high frequencies in the
applicable RF profile. For 5 MHz channels 512 FFT will be employed. For all other channel bandwidths
(7, 8.75 and 10 MHz) 1024 FFT will be employed. The test will be performed with the vendor declared
maximum power.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 281
Demodulation: OFDMA
FFT Size: 512 (For 3.5 and 5 MHz bandwidth) or 1024 (for 7, 8.75 and10 MHz bandwidth)
Center Frequency: Depends on profile, DUT
Channel Bandwidth: Depends on profile, DUT
Cyclic Prefix: 1/8
DL subcarrier allocation: According to permutation used.
Number of OFDMA DL symbols: default symbol ratio in Table 298. Default number of OFDM
symbols in DL and UL subframes in Appendix 2..
Number of frames for averaging = 200
Averaging Type: RMS
Pilot Amplitude Tracking: OFF
Channel Estimation: preamble plus pilot plus data
IDCell: 10
PermBase: 10

10.1.12.4 Test Setup
BS - UUT VSA
Average Power Meter
Packet
Generator

Figure 60. Test Setup for BS Transmitter Relative Constellation Error (BS-12.1)
In this setup, the power at the VSA input shall be adjusted in order to assure correct operation of the VSA.

10.1.12.5 Test Procedure
In the proposed test BS is connected to VSA, which measures the transmitter constellation error. In each
transmission the BS sends one DL sub-frame on the default symbol ratio in Appendix 2, and the VSA decodes it and
computes the metric defined in Equation 1. Each modulation is tested at the lowest and highest channel frequencies
supported by the BS in the applicable RF profile. The reported metric will be the RMS average of the per frame
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 282
measured metric where the averaging period is
p
L should be 200 frames (1sec). The metric proposed at [2](Eq. 149
of IEEE 802.16e-2005) shall be computed based on preamble, data and pilot subcarriers. The output power as
measured by the VSA will be recorded and stored. The Relative constellation error will be measured for PUSC using
the full loading scenario only. The VSA demodulates each frame according to the steps described in Section
10.1.12.1and computes the error vector per frame and after that by RMS averaging the final error vector is
computed. The VSA performs channel estimation on preamble, pilot and data sub-carriers to minimize channel
estimation errors. The test steps are briefly summarized below:
Initial Conditions:
Step 1. Turn BS power on.
Step 2. Configure BS.

Test Procedure:
Step 3. Send DL packets using modulation and coding rate with the default symbol ratio in
Appendix 2 and the chosen permutation to be tested at low frequency
Step 4. Read and record the displayed EVM measured by the VSA.
Step 5. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 for all burst/MCS types listed in Table 224.
Step 6. Repeat Step 3 through Step 5for Mid frequency.
Step 7. Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 for High frequency.

10.1.12.6 Compliance Requirements
For each test and for each frequency the following table will be filled.

The test passes if the RCE< -18.0 dB for QPSK 3/4, and RCE <-24.0 dB for 16-QAM 3/4 and RCE < -
30 for 64QAM 3/4. The test fails if the RCE> -18.0 dB for QPSK 3/4, or RCE >-24.0 dB for 16-QAM
3/4 or RCE>-30 for 64QAM .

Table 226. Test Results for BS-12.1
Burst type Measured Relative constellation error for BS
(dB)
Notes
QPSK
16 QAM
64 QAM

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 283
0.0.1
0.0.2
0.0.3
0.0.3.1
0.0.3.2
2006-05-10
2006-05-18
2006-06-23
2006-07-10
2006-12-13

Amir Francos
Amir Francos
Lisa Ward
Radu Oprea
Jiho Jang
SunYoung Choi
Lars Carlen
Amir Francos
Initial draft
Second draft after Caesarea FTF meeting
Third draft after Monterey FTF meeting
Minor corrections to version 0.0.3

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 284
10.1.13 BS-13a.1: BS synchronization
The purpose of this test is to verify the BS under test meets the frequency synchronization requirements as defined
in 802.16-2004 Section 8.4.14.1 and 802.16e-2005 Section 6.3.2.3.47. These conditions include:
a) BS synchronization in time, slot, frequency, TX reference timing accuracy and frequency accuracy
requirements.
b) BS clock frequency error is +/-2 ppm in non-synchronized work and +/-1% carrier spacing in synchronized
work as required by IEEE802.16-2004 and IEEE802.16e-2005 and the Mobile System Profile.
c) The transmitted center frequency, receive center frequency and the symbol clock frequency are derived
from the same reference oscillator.

In order to reduce interference between different BSs operating in the same geographic area and in
order to allow fast and soft handover of a MS between these BSs time synchronization of the OFDMA
frame and frequency synchronization of the RF signals of the involved BSs is required.

For normal synchronized mode - which is required to minimize interference between different BSs -
Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specifications require that the start of the preamble
symbol, excluding the CP duration, of the downlink radio frame shall be time aligned with 1pps timing
pulse when measured at the antenna port. Mobile WiMAX System Profile requires an accuracy of 1
us for alignment with the 1 pps signal. The allowed BS clock and RF center frequency error in normal
synchronized mode is 2 ppm.

For time and frequency synchronized operation - which is required for fast and soft handovers - Mobile
WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specifications require that the downlink frames transmitted
by a serving BS and the neighbor BS shall be synchronized to a level of at least 1/8 cyclic prefix
length. BS reference clocks shall be synchronized to a level that yield RF center frequency offsets of
no more than 1% of the OFDMA carrier spacing of the neighbor BS. The synchronizing reference shall
be a 1 pps timing pulse and for example a 10 MHz frequency reference (although a different frequency
reference may be used). These signals are typically provided by a GPS receiver.

NOTE: As the test is performed with one BS against the reference signal and not against a second BS,
an additional margin (as described in the system profile document) is taken into account. CP=1/8
corresponds to 1.428 us in 5 and 10 MHz channels. To reflect this and to comply with the system
profile document the timing accuracy of the transmitted signal (as measured at antenna port) should be
1us within the synchronizing external 1 pps signal. Also, RF center frequency offset of no more than
1% of the OFDMA subcarrier spacing of the neighbor BS.

As the requirements for time and frequency synchronized operation are more stringent these will be
used for the requirements of this test.

The following PICS items are covered by this test:

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 285
Table 228. PICS Coverage for BS-13a.1
Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. BS Synchronization in time
/slot
A.5.1.2.1.12
T
D for alignment to 1pps
I for inter-BS time
synchronization
2. TX reference timing accuracy
A.5.1.12.1.19
T D
3. BS Synchronization in
frequency
A.5.1.2.1.12
T D
4. BS to Neighbor BS
Synchronization in frequency
A.5.1.2.1.12
T D

This test requires that the UUT generates DL bursts. A vector signal analyzer capable of processing
802.16e DL frames and detecting the start of the downlink frames to measure the RF center frequency
deviation of the DL signal is required. Also, a high precision 1 pps timing pulse and high accuracy
frequency reference are required for connection to the vector signal analyzer. (Typically, these signals
are provided by a reference GPS receiver.)

Because it is not possible to test if the transmitted center frequency, receive center frequency and the
sampling frequency are derived from the same reference oscillator, the UUT vendor shall provide a
written declaration guaranteeing that this requirement is met. Further, the UUT vendor shall declare
how his UUT achieves synchronization (i.e. internal GPS receiver, external GPS receiver.)

The test setup below is considered as one possible solution for the synchronization measurement. The
BS UUT and the VSA should be connected to highly accurate clock sources as demonstrated in Figure
1 when testing frequency requirement under synchronized conditions. The clock source for the UUT -
the UUT GPS receiver - can be external equipment or can be integrated in the UUT. In the latter case,
a GPS antenna is connected to the UUT to feed the internal GPS receiver. At the BS, the top transmit
frequency will be tested

In case of more than one transmit antenna connector the test shall be performed on one randomly
selected transmit antenna connector. For a case of transmit delay diversity the measurement will be
done on the output port of the non-delayed antenna element.

All tests shall be conducted using the frame configuration given in appendix 2 and shall be performed
at all supported/declared channel bandwidths for the DUT. The MCS shall be 16QAM1/2.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 286

Figure 61. An Example Test Setup for BS Synchronization

High stability frequency and clock sources are used for the VSA and the BS UUT. A modulated signal
from the BS UUT is input to the VSA. Under synchronized conditions the VSA shall verify that the
transmitted center frequency accuracy is better or equal to +/- 1% of the sub-carrier spacing as required
both from the IEEE 802.16e-2005 standard and the system profile. All tests will be conducted at the
antenna port.

Initial Conditions:
Step 1. Make sure that the reference GPS receivers have locked and deliver good signal quality.
Step 2. Make sure that all prerequisites are available to enable the UUT to synchronize. Allow
sufficient synchronization time for the UUT.
Step 3. Set the UUT to operate at maximum specified output power.
Step 4. Make sure the DL connection has been established between UUT and MSE.

Test Procedure:
Test
Controller
MSE
UUT
VSA with
802.16e Support
Reference
GPS
Receiver
UUT
Controller
1pps
10 MHz
Test Control Network
Reference
GPS
Antenna
UUT GPS
Antenna
(if required)
UUT GPS
Receiver
10 MHz
1pps
Attenuator
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 287
Step 1. Set the RF channel frequency to the top RF channel supported by the UUT.
Step 2. Send DL bursts.
Step 3. Using VSA vector mode capture randomly 10 frames per second over 1 second of data and
process each of these frames. Use the 1pps signal from the reference GPS receiver as a
trigger signal for the VSA.
Step 4. Record the following characteristics computed by the VSA:
i. RF center frequency error
ii. Time error of the preamble symbol (without cyclic prefix) with respect to the 1pps trigger
signal.
Step 5. Repeat Step 3and Step 4until at least 400 frames are captured.
Step 6. Report Max and Min frequency error values and Max and Min time errors of the 40
measurements.
Step 7. Disable the time and frequency reference of the UUT to simulate a loss of timing reference.
Step 8. Wait for at least 5 minutes.
Step 9. Re-enable the time and frequency reference for the UUT to test the resynchronization
capability of the UUT.
Step 11. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 to record frequency and time errors after resynchronization
conditions.

The test passes if the time error is less than or equal to 1us and the frequency error is less than or equal
to the maximum allowed frequency error as shown in Table 229 and Table 230 for the channel
bandwidths supported by the UUT.
Note: The lowest OFDMA subcarrier spacing of any channel BW supported by the UUT shall be taken
to compute the allowed frequency error from the 1% requirement

Table 229. Time and frequency error under synchronized conditions
RF Channel BW Max. allowed frequency error (+/-
1% of subcarrier spacing)
Max allowed time error
(modulo 5ms)
Pass Fail
3.5 M 79 (Hz) 1 usec
5M 110 (Hz) 1 usec
7M 79 (Hz) 1 usec
10M 110 (Hz) 1 usec
8.75 98 (Hz) 1 usec

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 288
Table 230. Time and frequency error under resynchronization conditions
RF Channel BW Max. allowed frequency error (+/-
1% of subcarrier spacing)
Max allowed time error
(modulo 5ms)
Pass Fail
3.5 M 79 (Hz) 1 usec
5M 110 (Hz) 1 usec
7M 79 (Hz) 1 usec
10M 110 (Hz) 1 usec
8.75 98 (Hz) 1 usec

The uncertainties of the test setup including the reference GPS receiver shall be at least an order of
magnitude better than the allowed error of the characteristic that needs to be measured (e.g. 0.1 us for
timing).

The measurement uncertainty shall be added to the UUT accuracy requirement in favor of the UUT,
e.g. if the accuracy of the timing measurement is 0.1 us the limit for the UUT timing error is 1.1 us
with respect to the 1 pps signal.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 289
Table 231. Revision History for BS-13a.1
0.0.1 2006-04-31 Friedrich Endress Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-05-08 Friedrich Endress 2nd draft, including comments from contributors
0.0.3 2006-05-15 Friedrich Endress Abstract modified to version approved by the
group
Subsection 3: Vendor has to declare that a
common reference for timing and frequency
generation is used.
Changes in Subsection 5:
a)RF power at which the test is done changed
from nominal to maximum output power.
b)Frequency error measurements now based on
frames instead of bursts.
Note on subcarrier spacing used to compute the
1% requirement moved from subsection 8 to 6.
0.0.4 2006-07-11 Friedrich Endress and
Amir Francos
Tests BS 13.1 and 15.1 were merged to a single
test according to a decision made in Monterey
FTF meeting
0.0.5 2006-08-17 Friedrich Endress and
Amir Francos
The timing accuracy was changed to 1[us] to
comply with system profile document and test
conditions were refined.
0.0.6 2006 -11-13 Friedrich Endress and
Amir Francos
In figure 1 the PCT was changed to MSE ,
and corrections due to comments resolution were
done.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 290
10.1.14 BS-13b.1: BS Network synchronization
For network synchronized BS such as IEEE1588, Mobile WiMAX System Profile requires that
transmit reference timing shall not change by more than 25 nsec integrated in absolute value over any
1 sec period, the transmitted carrier frequency shall not change by more than 10 Hz integrated in
absolute value over any 300 msec period and Tx reference timing accuracy is 2.3 usec.

Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. BS Synchronization in time
/slot
A.5.1.2.1.12
T D for alignment to
1pps
2. BS Synchronization in
frequency
A.5.1.2.1.12
T D
3. BS to Neighbor BS
Synchronization in
frequency
A.5.1.2.1.12
T D

This test requires that the UUT generates DL bursts. A vector signal analyzer capable of processing
802.16e DL frames and detecting the start of the downlink frames to measure the RF center frequency
deviation of the DL signal is required. Also, a high precision 1 pps timing pulse and high accuracy
frequency reference are required for connection to the vector signal analyzer. (Typically, these signals
are provided by a reference GPS receiver.)
The MSE is synchronized with the accuracy of +/-25% of minimum guard interval or better for the
uplink transmission with reference to current NW synchronized BS for which the transmission
pertains.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 291
The test setup below is considered as one possible solution for the synchronization measurement. The
VSA should be connected to highly accurate clock sources as demonstrated in Fig. xxx when testing
frequency requirement. The clock source for the UTT can be provided from an IEEE1588 receiver
which is connected to the grand master clock through Ethernet network. Figure 62 shows an example
of testing setup for NW synchronized BS.
In case of more than one transmit antenna connector the test shall be performed on one randomly
selected transmit antenna connector. For a case of transmit delay diversity the measurement will be
done on the output port of the non-delayed antenna element.

All tests shall be conducted using the frame configuration given in appendix 2 and shall be performed
at all supported/declared channel bandwidths for the DUT. The MCS shall be 16QAM1/2.
Ethernet
Network
IEEE1588
Grand Master
Ethernet Packet
Generator
UUT IEEE1588
Receiver
UUT
MSE
UUT
Controller
Attenuator
VSA with
802.16e
Support
Reference
GPS
Receiver
Reference
GPS
Antenna
Test Control Network
1pps 10MHz
1pps 10MHz
Test
Controller

Figure 62. An Example Test Setup for Network synchronized BS Synchronization

High stability frequency and clock sources are used for the VSA and the BS UUT. A modulated signal
from the BS UUT is input to the VSA. The VSA shall verify that the transmitted center frequency
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 292
accuracy is better or equal to +/- 1% of the sub-carrier spacing as required both from the IEEE
802.16e-2005 standard and the system profile. All tests will be conducted at the antenna port.
Test condition is as follows:
Initial Conditions:
Step 1. Make sure that the reference GPS receivers have locked and deliver good signal quality.
Step 2. Make sure that all prerequisites are available to enable the UUT to synchronize. Allow
sufficient synchronization time for the UUT.
Step 3. Ethernet network in Figure 62 should consist of at least 4 Ethernet switches, all of which are
connected to an Ethernet packet generator.
Step 4. The Ethernet packet generator makes the background traffic packets and transfers them to
Ethernet switches. The number and bandwidth of total generated packets have the traffic
load model as shown in Figure 63.
Step 5. Set the UUT to operate at maximum specified output power.
Step 6. Make sure the DL connection has been established between UUT and MSE.

time
t
r
a
f
f
i
c

l
o
a
d

(
%
)
80%(Max)
20%(Min)
... ...

Figure 63. Background Traffic Model for Network-assisted Synchronization
Test Procedure:
Step 1. Set the RF channel frequency to the top RF channel supported by the UUT.
Step 2. Send DL bursts.
Step 3. Using VSA vector mode capture randomly 10 frames per second over 1 second of data and
process each of these frames. Use the 1pps signal from the reference GPS receiver as a
trigger signal for the VSA.
Step 4. Record the following characteristics computed by the VSA:
i. RF center frequency error
ii. Time error of the preamble symbol (without cyclic prefix) with respect to the 1pps trigger
signal.
Step 5. Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 until at least 400 frames are captured.
Step 6. Report Max and Min frequency error values and Max and Min time errors of the 40
measurements.
Step 7. Disable the time and frequency reference of the UUT to simulate a loss of timing reference.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 293
Step 9. Re-enable the time and frequency reference for the UUT to test the resynchronization
capability of the UUT.
Step 11. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 to record frequency and time errors after resynchronization
conditions.
The test passes if the time error is less than or equal to 2.3us and the frequency error is less than or
equal to the maximum allowed frequency error as shown in Table 233 and Table 234 for the channel
bandwidths supported by the UUT.
Note: The lowest OFDMA subcarrier spacing of any channel BW supported by the UUT shall be taken
to compute the allowed frequency error from the 1% requirement.

Table 233. Time and frequency error for Network synchronized BS under synchronized conditions
RF
Channel
BW
Max. allowed
frequency
error
Max. allowed
time error
(modulo 5ms)
Max. allowed rate
of transmit timing
correction
Max. allowed rate of
transmit carrier freq.
correction
Pass Fail
3.5 M 79 (Hz) 2.3 usec
25ns integrated
abs value over
any 1sec period
10Hz integrated
abs value over any
300 msec period

5M 110 (Hz) 2.3 usec
7M 79 (Hz) 2.3 usec
10M 110 (Hz) 2.3 usec
8.75 98 (Hz) 2.3 usec

Table 234. Time and frequency error for Network synchronized BS under resynchronization
conditions
RF
Channel
BW
Max. allowed
frequency
error
Max. allowed
time error
(modulo 5ms)
Max. allowed rate
of transmit timing
correction
Max. allowed rate of
transmit carrier freq.
correction
Pass Fail
3.5 M 79 (Hz) 2.3 usec
25ns integrated
abs value over
any 1sec period
10Hz integrated
abs value over any
300 msec period

5M 110 (Hz) 2.3 usec
7M 79 (Hz) 2.3 usec
10M 110 (Hz) 2.3 usec
8.75 98 (Hz) 2.3 usec

The measurement uncertainty shall be added to the UUT accuracy requirement in favor of the UUT,
e.g. if the accuracy of the timing measurement is 0.1 us the limit for the UUT timing error is 2.4 us
with respect to the 1 pps signal.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 294
10.1.15 BS-14.1: BS Receive and Transmit HARQ
The purpose of this test is to verify proper handling of HARQ DL traffic including allocations of
ACID and AI_SN indications according to ACK/NACK from MS. The test verifies proper handling of
HARQ UL traffic including proper allocations of ACKCHs, ACID and AI_SN indications. The test
also verifies the ability of the BS receiver to achieve increased gain from chase combining in loss
scenario.

According to the Mobile WiMAX System Profile, only Chase Combining with CTC is mandated and
tested. The HARQ test for BS shall include the followings:
- Construction of proper HARQ DL burst, including padding and CRC, per ACID allocation.
- Proper allocation of ACK region using HARQ ACK region allocation IE for MS to transmit
ACK/NACK indication.
- Allocation of new data transmissions or retransmissions of HARQ DL burst with proper
AI_SN indication per ACID according to ACK/NACK from the MS.
- Allocation for new data transmissions or retransmissions of HARQ UL burst with proper
AI_SN indication according to received CRC.
- Performance improvement due to SNR gain by combining previously erroneously decoded
UL burst and retransmitted UL burst.


Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
4. HARQ
A.5.1.2.1.11
T D

This test requires the Signaling Unit (MSE) to accept packets from the packet generator/analyzer and
send them on the UL to the BS UUT. The Signaling Unit (MSE) should also be able to forward packets
received from the BS UUT to the packet generator/analyzer for inspection.

The Signaling Unit (MSE) should be capable of receiving and decoding a HARQ burst using Chase
CTC transmitted from the BS UUT, and also should be capable of transmitting ACKs/NACKs
according to the detection results for CRC with 1 frame delay.

The Signaling Unit (MSE) should be capable of transmitting a HARQ burst using Chase CTC with
correct CRC or modified CRC (e.g., CRC bar).
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 295

A signal generator, to generate AWGN channel, is needed for this test, to test the combining
performance. Also, a combiner is required to combine the signal from Signaling Unit (MSE) and the
AWGN from signal generator. An attenuator should be used to control the received power at the BS
UUT. A circulator is used to separate the DL and UL channels.

Figure 64 shows the test setup for testing the BS Receiver and Transmit HARQ.

Figure 64. Test Setup for BS Receive and Transmit HARQ

Testing Conditions:
No encryption, No fragmentation, No packing, No PHS, No ARQ

Initial Conditions:

Note: The TLV of HARQ ACK Delay for DL bursts in the UCD is set to 1 frame, and the ACK region
is allocated on every UL sub-frame by the BS UUT.

Procedures:
[The following steps verify that the BS UUT constructs proper HARQ DL bursts per ACID:]
Step 1. Configure the BS UUT to use 4 ACIDs for transmission in HARQ DL bursts and to
schedule a different ACID in each DL subframe in a round-robin manner.
Step 2. Set maximum number of HARQ DL transmissions to 1 (no retransmission) at BS UUT.
Step 3. Configure the BS UUT to use 16QAM 1/2 for transmission in downlink. Set the received
signal level at Signaling Unit (MSE) to be high enough so that MSE can decode downlink
packets transmitted by BS UUT..

Signaling
Unit
(MSE)

VSA /Avg
Power
Meter

BS

UUT

A
M S

Attenuator
1

A
BS
Attenuator 3

Circulator

Circulator

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 296
Step 4. For each ACID allocation, the BS UUT transmits HARQ DL bursts at a rate of 50
packets/second. Each packet has a payload size of 576 bytes (Default_Packet size).
Step 5. Record the number of packets not received by the Signaling Unit (MSE) and record the total
number of packets sents. Divide the number of packets not received by the Signaling Unit
(MSE) by the total number of packets sents. Record this result..

[The following steps verify that the BS UUT transmits new packet according the ACK indicator:]
Step 6. Configure the BS UUT to use only one ACID for transmission in HARQ DL bursts, and to
transmit HARQ DL bursts at a rate of 50 packets/second. Each packet has a size of 576
bytes (Default_packet size)
Step 7. Set maximum number of HARQ DL transmissions to 4 (3 retransmissions) at BS UUT.
Step 8. Configure the Signaling Unit (MSE) to send ACK to the BS UUT even if the packet is
received erroneously
signal level at BS UUT to be A
BS
specified for functional test.
Step 10. Record the number of AI_SN indicators not toggled from the previous one received by MSE
and record the total number of AI_SN indicators. Divide the number of AI_SN indicators
not toggled from the previous one received by Test MS by the total number of AI_SN
indicators and record the result. Note that in the count of number of AI_SN indicators, the
AI_SN included in the new packet allocation for downlink right after 3 retransmissions
should be excluded (Since the maximum number of retransmissions is limited to be 3 in this
test, the AI_SN after 3 retransmissions shall be toggled to indicate new transmission
regardless of ACK/NACK information from Signaling Unit (MSE)).

[The following steps verify that the BS UUT retransmits the same packet previously transmitted
according the NACK indicator:]
Step 11. Configure the BS UUT to use only one ACID for transmission in HARQ DL bursts, and to
transmit HARQ DL bursts at a rate of 50 packets/second. Eack packet has a payload size of
576 bytes (Default_Packet size)
Step 12. Set maximum number of HARQ DL transmission to 4 (3 retransmissions) at BS UUT.
Step 13. Configure the Signaling Unit (MSE) to send NACK to the BS UUT even if the packet is
received successfully.
BS
Step 15. Record the number of AI_SN indicators toggled from the previous one received by MSE
toggled from the previous one received by Test MS by the total number of AI_SN
indicators. Record the result. Note that in the count of number of AI_SN indicators, the
AI_SN included in the new packet allocation for downlink right after 3 retransmissions
should be excluded (Since the maximum number of retransmissions is limited to be 3 in this
test, the AI_SN after 3 retransmissions shall be toggled to indicate new transmission
regardless of ACK/NACK information from Signaling Unit (MSE)).

[The following steps verify that the BS UUT is able to perform proper allocation for HARQ UL
burst according to CRC decoding:]
Step 16. Configure the BS UUT to use only one ACID for transmission in HARQ UL bursts, and to
schedule HARQ UL bursts at a rate of 50 packets/second. Each packet has a size of 288
bytes (short packet).
Step 17. Set maximum number of HARQ UL transmission to 4 (3 retransmissions) at BS UUT.
Step 18. Configure the BS UUT to use QPSK 1/2 for transmission in uplink, and set the received
BS
Step 19. Record the number of AI_SN indicators not toggled from the previous one received by MSE
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 297
not toggled from the previous one received by Test MS by the total number of AI_SN
indicators. Record the result. Note that in the count of number of AI_SN indicators, the
AI_SN included in the new packet allocation for uplink right after 3 retransmissions should
be excluded (Since the maximum number of retransmissions is limited to be 3 in this test,
the AI_SN after 3 retransmissions can not reflect the CRC decoding success/failure at BS
UUT).
Step 20. Configure the Signaling Unit (MSE) to send HARQ UL bursts to the BS UUT with
modified CRC (e.g., CRC bar).
Step 21. Record the number of packets with AI_SN indicator toggled from the previous one received
by MSE and record the total number of AI_SN indicators. Divide the number of packets
with AI_SN indicator toggled from the previous one received by Test MS by the total
number of AI_SN indicators. Record the result. Note that in the count of number of AI_SN
indicators, the AI_SN included in the new packet allocation for uplink right after 3
retransmissions should be excluded (Since the maximum number of retransmissions is
limited to be 3 in this test, the AI_SN after 3 retransmissions can not reflect the CRC
decoding success/failure at BS UUT).

[The following steps verify that there is performance gain from combining retransmissions at the
BS UUT receiver:]
Step 22. Configure the BS UUT to use only one ACID for transmission in HARQ UL bursts, and to
schedule HARQ UL bursts at a rate of 50 packets/second. Each packet has a size of 288
bytes (short packet).
Step 23. Set the MCS for UL bursts to QPSK-1/2 at BS UUT and set the received signal level at BS
UUT to be A
BS
Step 24. Set maximum number of HARQ UL transmissions to 2 (1 retransmission) at BS UUT.
Step 25. This step is to find the minimum AWGN signal level for which packet error rate > 10% in
case of no HARQ chase combination. This AWGN level should be found with at least
0.5dB resolution. For the calculation of packet error rate, the number of AI_SN indicators
not toggled from the previous uplink allocation received by Test MS is counted. Note that in
the count of AI_SN indicators, the AI_SN included in the new packet allocation for uplink
right after 1 retransmission should be excluded (Since the maximum number of
retransmissions is limited to be 1 in this test, the AI_SN after 1 retransmission can not
reflect the CRC decoding success/failure at BS UUT)
Step 26. Configure the signal generator to transmit AWGN signal with a level found in Step 25
Step 27. Set maximum number of HARQ UL transmissions to 4 (3 retransmissions), and increase the
noise level 4dB higher than the previous setting.
Step 28. Record the number of AI_SN indicators not toggled after 2 retransmission and record the
total number of AI_SN indicators. Divide the number of AI_SN indicators not toggled after
2 retransmission by the total number of AI_SN indicators. Record the result. This step is to
verify that the resultant packet error rate is less than 10% in case of HARQ chase combining
with 2 retransmissions maximum. For the calculation of packet error rate, only the number
of AI_SN indicators not toggled even after 2 retransmissions is counted. Note that in the
count of AI_SN indicators, the AI_SN included in the new packet allocation for uplink right
after 3 retransmissions should be excluded (Since the maximum number of retransmissions
is limited to be 3 in this test, the AI_SN after 3 retransmissions can not reflect the CRC
decoding success/failure at BS UUT).
Step 29. Repeat Step 23 through Step 28 for all other MCSs (QPSK 3/4, 16QAM 1/2, 16QAM 3/4).

Note: Step 1 through Step 21 shall be executed under ideal conditions (no fading, no interference, no
noise injection) to ensure basic HARQ functionality prior to running performance test.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 298
Table 236. Values required in testing in each step
Number of
packets not
received by
Signaling Unit
(MSE)
(Step 1-Step 5)
Number of
AI_SN indicators
not toggled in
case of ACK
(Step 6-Step 10)
Number of AI_SN
indicators toggled
in case of NACK
(Step 11-Step 15)
Number of AI_SN
indicators not
toggled in case of
correct CRC
(Step 18-Step 19)
Number of AI_SN
indicators toggled in
case of modified
CRC
(Step 20-Step 21)
< 0.0069 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.0023 < 0.0023

Pass Criteria:

1. The result recorded in step 5 is less than the limit set in table 157 for number of packets not received by
the MSE. AND
2. The result recorded in step 10 is less than the limit set in table 157 for number of AI_SN indicators not
toggled in case of ACK. AND
3. The result recorded in step 15 is less than the limit set in table 157 for number of AI_SN indicators
toggled in case of NAK. AND
4. The result recorded in step 19 is less than the limit set in table 157 for number of AI_SN indicators not
toggled in case of correct CRC. AND
5. The result recorded in step 21 is less than the limit set in table 157 for the number of AI_SN indicators
toggled in case of modified CRC. AND
6. The result recoreded in step 28 is less than 10% for number of AI_SN indicators not toggled after 2
retransmissions.

Fail Criteria:

1. The result recorded in step 5 is not less than the limit set in table 157 for number of packets not received
by the MSE. OR
2. The result recorded in step 10 is not less than the limit set in table 157 for number of AI_SN indicators
not toggled in case of ACK. OR
3. The result recorded in step 15 is not less than the limit set in table 157 for number of AI_SN indicators
toggled in case of NAK. OR
4. The result recorded in step 19 is not less than the limit set in table 157 for the number of AI_SN
indicators not toggled in case of correct CRC. OR
5. The result recoreded in step 21 is not less the limit set in table 157 for number of AI_SN indicators
toggled in case of modified CRC. OR
6. The result recoreded in step 28 is not less than 10% for number of AI_SN indicators not toggled after 2
retransmissions.

Not applicable.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 299

0.0.1 2006-05-12 Jiho Jang Initial draft
Abstract and Introduction sections inserted.
0.0.2 2006-05-18 Jiho Jang PICS coverage, Testing requirements, Test
setup and Test procedures are added
0.0.3 2006-06-22 Jiho Jang Third draft
0.0.4 2006-08-30 Jiho Jang Fourth draft
0.0.5 2006-09-20 Jiho Jang Fifth draft after receiving feedback
0.0.6 2006-11-11 Jiho and Lisa Added pass/fail verdict section, and modified
texts

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 300
10.1.16 BS-15.1: Reserved

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 301
10.1.17 BS-16.1: BS receive/transmit switching gaps
The purpose of this test is to verify BS compliance to the min Transmit/receive Transition Gap (TTG)
and Receive/transmit Transition Gap (RTG) requirements.

This test shall make certain that the BS can perform switching between receive and transmit states
quick enough to meet the PICS requirements. In order to perform these measurements the start and end
of the two switching events must be defined.

For testing purposes the TTG is defined as the time between end of the last sample of the last OFDM-
symbol of the DL and the start of the first sample of the first OFDM-symbol of the UL frame, see
Figure 65.

For testing purposes the RTG is defined as the time between end of the last sample of the last OFDM-
symbol of the UL and the start of the first sample of the preamble of the following DL frame.
To be certain that the UUT can perform the switching it is not sufficient to measure that an RF-signal
is present at these positions of the MAC-frame, the UUT also need to have some level of performance
at these points. In order to ensure this both downlink and uplink traffic must be tested.

When testing RTG performance, the BS shall set up the test-MS to send and receive data at fixed
positions in the MAC-frame, the pattern to be repeated continuously for the duration of test. PER shall
be measured on a burst prolonged as long as to reach the end of UL frame and Relative Constellation
Error shall be measured on the first symbol of the DL frame averaged over 100 bursts.

The TTG shall be tested with the same approach. The BS shall command the test-MS to send and
receive data at fixed positions in the MAC-frame, the pattern to be repeated continuously for the
duration of test. Relative Constellation Error shall be measured on the last symbol of the DL frame
averaged over 100 bursts and error rate shall be measured on a first 3 symbols in the UL frame. Note
that the first 3 symbols in the UL frame are allocated for ranging channels, CQICHs and ACKCHs for
default frame structure in Appendix 2.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 302

Time
1st Sample DL 1st Sample UL
Last Sample DL Last Sample UL
Test BS
Transmission
Preamble
MS
Transmission
1st UL OFDM
Symbol
TTG
RTG
Amplitude

Figure 65. Definition of RTG and TTG


Number in PICS [6]
Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. Table A.129 and A.130 in
A.5.1.2.1.4 TTG/RTG

T D

This test requires the BS to to show sufficient performance both transmission and reception for the
guard times as listed in Table 240. This test shall use the default frame structure requirements of
Appendix 2 modified according to Table 239.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 303

Figure 66. Test Setup for BS Receive/Transmit Switching Gaps

Table 239. MSE pattern parameters
Parameter Values
Number of subchannels used All subchannels
Spreading PUSC
Modulation 16QAM 3/4
Transmit Power Max Output Power
Frequency (according to
Appendix 5)
Low Mid High

The frame-structure used during the test should conform to that described in Appendix 2. The test
packets transmitted by the MSE should reach the end of UL frame for the test of RTG. The packet-size
that corresponds to this is dependant on the size of the FFT of the profile, the modulation and coding
and the type of PER-measurement mechanism to be used. The BS shall be configured to transmit on all
subchannels during the last 2 OFDMA symbols for the test of TTG. Also, for the test of TTG, the MSE
shall transmit a randomly chosen CQI codeword in the CQICH slot according to the CQICH allocation
IE command.

The RCE-measurements shall be averaged over 100 packets.
Signaling
Unit
(BSE/MSE)
BS / MS
UUT
Attenuator
ABS/MS
AMS/BS
VSA / Avg Power
Meter
Combiner
+
Attenuator
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 304

Procedure for RTG:
Step 2. Configure downlink map to allocate bursts which fill up whole downlink subframe. These
bursts can have arbitrary CIDs other than the CID for UUT. This helps VSA to estimate
channel in measuring the RCE on preamble.
Step 3. Configure uplink map to accommodate the UL packet specified in Table 241.
configuration.
Step 5. Measure the RTG gap with the VSA. Note the value.
Step 6. Check that the gap duration is according to the requirement in Table 238. If not, adjust the
Signaling Unit (MSE) timing position and repeat from 5.
Step 7. Measure PER for the UL connection. The PER must conform to receiver sensitivity
requirements. Note the value. Note that the RCE requirement for preamble is not specified
in the IEEE standard or Mobile WiMAX System Profile document. Therefore, in this test
the RCE requirement value for QPSK 3/4 will also be used for preamble.
Step 8. Measure RCE for the preamble of the DL connection with the measurement-window
centered within the OFDM-symbol. The value shall be averaged over 100 frames.. The RCE
must conform to Relative Constellation Error requirements. Note the value.
Step 9. Report the values from Step 5-Step 8.

Procedure for TTG:
Step 2. Configure uplink map to allocate fast feedback channel in the first 3 symbols of UL frame
as described in Appendix 2.
Step 3. Configure downlink map to contain user data in all sub-channels using 64 QAM at the
last 2 symbols in the DL frame.
configuration.
Step 5. Measure the error rate of detecting the codeword in the CQICH transmitted by MSE. The
error rate should be less than 1% at the same received power level for sensitivity test
described in Appendix 2. Note the value.
Step 6. Check that the gap duration is according to the requirement in Table 238. If not, adjust the
Signaling Unit (MSE) timing position and repeat from Step 5.
Step 7. Measure PER for the UL connection. The PER must conform to receiver sensitivity
Step 8. Measure RCE for the last symbol of the DL frame with the measurement-window centered
within the OFDM-symbol. The value shall be averaged over 100 frames. The RCE must
conform to Relative Constellation Error requirements. Note the value.
Step 9. Report the values from Step 5-Step 8.

For the applicable TTG and RTG settings in Table 240, the BS must meet the PER requirements
stated Table 241 and the RCE requirement as stated in Table 149 in Section 10.1.12.1

Table 240. TTG and RTG timing performance requirement for BS
Maximum TTG and RTG Switching Time per Channel Band-Width
BW (MHz) fs PS (s) RTG RTG TTG TTG (s) BW
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 305
(MHz) (PSs) (s) (PSs) (MHz)
3.5 4 1 60 60 188 188 3.5
5 5.6 0.714286 84 60 148 105.7142857 5
7 8 0.5 120 60 376 188 7
8.75 10 0.4 186 74.4 218 87.2 8.75
10 11.2 0.357143 168 60 296 105.7142857 10

Values are derived from PICS Table A.139 and A.140 in Section A.5.1.2.1.4 TTG/RTG

Table 241. PER requirements for reception of UL packets.
Conformance requirements for packet reception
Test Method
FFT
size
Packet
length
(bytes) No. packets
Threshold
PER [%]
Maximum
No. of error
packets
MAC-CRC
(with 10 bytes
overhead) 512 296+10 60000 0.245 126
PING (with 38
bytes overhead) 512 268+38 60000 0.245 126
MAC-CRC
(with 10 bytes
overhead) 1024 620+10 30000 0.503 130
PING (with 38
bytes overhead) 1024 592+38 30000 0.503 130

Table 242. CQICH error rate requirements for reception during the first symbols of UL.
Conformance requirements for CQICH reception
FFT size
No. of CQICHs
transmitted by MSE
Threshold error rate
[%]
Maximum No. of
CQICH errors
512 20000 1.0 176
1024 20000 1.0 176

The measurement accuracy for TTG and RTG should be 1s or better.
The PER rates are calculated for a confidence level of 95%.

Pass verdict:
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 306
For all modulation and coding combinations and test cases, the number of packets in error is less or
equal to the limits in Table 36, Table 37 and Table 38.

Fail verdict:
For at least one of the modulation and coding combinations in one of the test cases, the number of
packets in error is higher than the limits in Table 36, Table 37 and Table 38.


0.0.1 2006-05-11 Lars Carln Initial draft
0.0.2 2006-05-15 Lars Carln Revised test-method with more explicit details of
the test. Open issues resolved.
0.3.0 2006-10-11 Lars Carln Additional information on test signal requirements
added. Added tables for BSRTG and BSTTG
requirement values.
0.4.0 2006-10-18 Lars Carln Test signal updated with regards to PER-
measurements based on HARQ and PING
methods. Resolved TBD-items. Updated
according to comments.
0.4.0 2006-10-18 Lars Carln Corrected Packet lengths, changed HARQ to
MAC-CRC, Table 3 units updated
0.5.0 2006-10-26 Jiho Jang Corrected frame structure for uplink and test
procedures
0.6.0 2006-10-31 Lars Carln Correction of cut-and-paste errors, corrected
references, language correction.
0.7.0 2006-11-01 Jiho Jang Correction of Table 165. Addition of Table 165a.
0.7.1 2006-11-02 Lars Carln Formatting changes.
0.7.2 2006-11-06 Jiho Jang Added RCE conformance value for preamble in
Step 8 for RTG test.
0.7.3 2006-11-09 Jiho Jang and Lars
Carln
Added full allocation for downlink burst to help
MSEs channel estimation in measuring the RCE
on preamble.
Fixed editorial errors.
Added that the RCE-measurements shall be made
with the measurement-window centered within the
OFDM-symbol . Specified 64 QAM for last 2
symbols of DL-subframe in TTG-test.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 307
10.1.18 BS-17.2: BS AMC receive and transmit operation
The purpose of the test is to verify proper handling of AMC subchannel and band-AMC mechanisms at the BS. The
following aspects of AMC operation are tested:
1) Proper construction of AMC subchannel in the downlink
2) Receiver sensitivity for AMC subchannel in the uplink
3) Proper construction of STC_DL_zone_IE to allocate downlink AMC zone, and UL_zone_IE to allocate
uplink AMC zone and
4) Proper construction of REP-REQ message to command physical CINR report for band-AMC

Mobile WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification requires the BSs are able to send downlink AMC by
constructing adjacent subcarrier permutations of 2 bins by 3 symbols AMC subchannel structure, and to send REP-
REQ message to instruct band-AMC CINR report. Also, the BSs shall have the capability to receive AMC
subchannels which are transmitted by MSs. This test is to verify correct subchannel construction and decoding for a
BS and the BS is capable of generating proper REP-REQ message to command physical CINR report for band-
AMC.

PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
1. A.5.1.2.1.6 Subcarrier allocation mode.
Table A.132 DL subcarrier allocation
for BS. Supported features for AMC
2x3
T D
2. A.5.1.2.1.6 Subcarrier allocation mode.
Table A.133 UL subcarrier allocation
for BS. Supported features for AMC
2x3
T D
3. A.6.1.11 PDUs for band AMC. Table
A.273 BS sending MAC PDUs for band
AMC. Supported features for REP-REQ
message
T D

A Vector Signal Analyzer (VSA) that can demodulation the AMC subchannel defined in IEEE 802.16e
is required for this test.
BS vendor shall provide a way to trigger this REP-REQ message transmission.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 308

The BS vendor will declare which frame structure among those in Figure 68 and Figure 69 is being
used in this test.

A Vector Signal Analyzer (VSA) is connected to the BS UUT that is generating DL bursts in order to
demodulation the output of BS UUT.

BS
UUT
Signaling
Unit
Attenuator 2
Attenuator 1
VSA/Avg
Power Meter

Figure 67.Test setup for BS AMC operation

Figure 67 shows the test setup for testing the BS AMC operation. This test is performed in AWGN
channel only.

The default frame structure defined in Appendix 2 should be modified so that DL subframes and UL
subframes can accommodate the AMC subchannel zones according to Figure 68 and Figure 69, and the
system profile according to Table 245 below. The BS vendor will declare which frame structure among
those in Figure 68 and Figure 69 is being used in this test.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 309
P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
N
o
r
m
a
l

D
L

M
A
P
DL Burst
#1
(Normal
UL MAP)
DL Burst #3 (Burst of interested)
M (time-slot) x N (subchannel)
0 1 2 3
0
1
2
3
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub-frame
TTG RTG
4
DL Burst #4
0 1 2 3 4
4
5
Downlink Sub-frame
UL Burst #2 (Burst of interested)
UL Burst #3
Bursts
with QPSK 1/2
dummy symbols
if needed
Bursts
with QPSK 1/2
dummy symbols
if needed
FCH
Time
DL PUSC zone DL AMC zone UL PUSC zone UL AMC zone
DL Burst
#2
UL
Burst #1

Figure 68. Frame structure with Normal MAP

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 310
P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d

D
L

M
A
P
Time
0 1 2 3
0
1
2
3
Ranging
Region
ACK
Region
CQICH
Region
Uplink Sub-frame
DL PUSC zone
TTG RTG
4 0 1 2 3 4
4
5
Downlink Sub-frame
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
e
d

U
L

M
A
P
UL sub-bursts
with QPSK 1/2
dummy symbols
if needed
HARQ DL MAP IE
HARQ UL MAP IE
FCH
DL AMC zone UL PUSC zone UL AMC zone
UL sub-burst #2
(burst of interest)
UL sub-burst #3
DL Burst
#1
UL
Burst #1
DL sub-burst #2 (burst of interest)
M (time-slot) x N (subchannel)
DL sub-burst #3
DL sub-bursts
with QPSK 1/2
dummy symbols
if needed

Figure 69. Frame structure with Compressed MAP

Table 245. Number of OFDM symbols in DL and UL

CDMA ranging region

6 subchannel
6 subchannel
6 subchannel
6 subchannel
6 subchannel

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 311

Testing Conditions:
MAC CRC enabled.

Initial Conditions:
Network entry has been completed

Test Procedures:
This test is performed in AWGN channel only. Also, this test is performed under the setting of full
usage of physical bands in AMC zone (i.e., DL/UL AMC allocated physical bands bitmap in
DCD/UCD is 0xFFFFFFFFFFFF or not used). In case of using HARQ_DL_MAP_IE in allocating
sub-bursts in the frame structure with compressed MAP in Figure 69, the HARQ function for both DL
and UL will be disabled (i.e., ACK disable bit is set or AI_SN is toggled for the same ACID
regardless of the ACK/NAK)

[Capable of proper modulation]
Step 1. Set the received power level at signaling unit is at least 10dB higher than the sensitivity
level in AWGN defined in Appendix 1 for AMC subcarrier allocation mode.
Step 2. For each DL sub-frame, the BS UUT indicates the switch to the adjacent subcarrier
permutation using STC_DL_Zone_IE() which includes no STC but AMC type defined as
two bins by three symbols (permutation=0b11, STC=0b00, and AMC type=0b01). .
Step 3. Record the STC_DL_Zone_IE() received at the signaling unit.
Step 4. BS UUT allocates AMC subchannels in a downlink. Data subcarrier permutation is
performed according to PermBase in STC_DL_Zone_IE().
Step 5. BS UUT transmits the default packet with 576 bytes defined in Appendix 1 for QPSK 1/2,
16QAM 1/2 and 64QAM 1/2 MCS with CTC.
Step 6. Measure the power boosting value for pilots in AMC subchannels with VSA.
Step 7. Measure the receiver packet error rates at the signaling unit based on MAC CRC.
Step 8. End of test

[Capable of proper demodulation & decoding]
Step 9. Set the received power level at BS UUT is at least 10dB higher than the sensitivity level in
AWGN defined in Appendix 1 for AMC subcarrier allocation mode.
Step 10. For each UL sub-frame, the BS UUT indicates the switch to the adjacent subcarrier
permutation using UL_Zone_IE() which includes AMC type defined as two bins by three
symbols (permutation=0b10 and AMC type=0b01).
Step 11. Record the UL_Zone_IE() received at the signaling unit.
Step 12. Set the received power level at BS UUT is the same as sensitivity level defined in Table 247
through Table 251 depending on supported bandwidth and MCS level under test.
Step 13. BS UUT allocates AMC subchannels in an uplink and the signaling unit transmits the
default packet with 576 bytes defined in Table 296 for QPSK 1/2, QPSK 3/4, 16QAM 1/2,
and 16QAM 3/4 with CTC.
Step 14. Measure the receiver packet error rates at BS UUT based on MAC CRC.
Step 15. End of test

[Construction of REP-REQ message]
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 312
Step 16. Set the received power level at signaling unit is at least 10dB higher than the sensitivity
level in AWGN defined in Appendix 1 for AMC subcarrier allocation mode.
Step 17. Set the BS UUT to transmit REP-REQ message for band CINR report (channel type request
with type=1.3 and value=0b01). Note: BS vendor shall provide a way to trigger this
REP-REQ message transmission.
Step 18. Record the received REP-REQ message at the signaling unit.

The test passes if:
1. The bit fields in STC_DL_Zone_IE recorded at signaling unit in Step 3 are correct
(permutation=0b11 and STC=0b00 and AMC type=0b01),
AND
2. The power boosting value for pilots measured in Step 6 is 2.50.5dB higher than the average power
for data tones,
AND
3. The number of packets in error measured at signaling unit in Step 7 is less than the limit indicated in
Table 246 for functional tests.
AND
4. The bit fields in UL_Zone_IE recorded at signaling unit in Step 11 are correct (permutation=0b10
and AMC type=0b01),
AND
5. The number of packets in error measured at BS UUT in Step 14 is less than the limit indicated in
Table 296 for sensitivity tests
AND
6. The bit fields in REP-REQ message recorded at signaling unit in Step 18 are correct (channel type
request with type=1.3 and value=0b01),

The test fails if:
1. The bit fields in STC_DL_Zone_IE recorded at signaling unit in Step 3 are incorrect
(permutation0b11 or STC0b00 or AMC type0b01),
OR
2. The power boosting value for pilots measured in Step 6 is not 2.50.5dB higher than the average
power for data tones,
OR
3. The number of packets in error measured at signaling unit in Step 7 is not less than the limit
indicated in Table 246 for functional tests.
OR
4. The bit fields in UL_Zone_IE recorded at signaling unit in Step 11 are incorrect (permutation0b10
or AMC type0b01),
OR
5. The number of packets in error measured at BS UUT in Step 14 is not less than the limit indicated in
Table 296 for sensitivity tests,
OR
6. The bit fields in REP-REQ message recorded at signaling unit in Step 14 are incorrect (channel type
request with type1.3 or value0b01),

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 313
Message Packet Length
(bits)
Threshold
PER
Number of
packets sent N
Maximum
number of
error packets M
Notes
Default_Packet w 10
bytes overhead (6
bytes for MAC header
and 4 bytes for MAC
CRC)
(576+10) x 8 0.47% 6,000 19 Applicable for
frame structure
with Normal
MAP
Default_Packet w 12
bytes overhead (6
bytes for MAC header,
4 bytes for MAC CRC
and 2 bytes for HARQ
CRC)
(576+12) x 8 0.47% 6,000 19 Applicable for
frame structure
with
Compressed
MAP

Table 247. BS Receiver Sensitivity Level for 3.5 MHz Bandwidth in AWGN channel
Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity (dBm) Pass/Fail Comments
AMC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -92.8
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -87.1
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -83.0

Table 248. BS Receiver Sensitivity Level for 5 MHz Bandwidth in AWGN channel
Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -85.7
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -81.6

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -84.1
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -80.0
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 314

Table 250. BS Receiver Sensitivity Level for 8.75 MHz Bandwidth in AWGN channel
Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -83.1
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -79.0

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -82.6
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -78.5

Table 252. Parameters for Sensitivity tests and Acceptance Limit
Message Packet
Length (bits)
packets sent
N
Maximum
number of
error packets
M
Notes
Default_Packet w 10
bytes overhead (6
bytes for MAC
header and 4 bytes
for MAC CRC)
(576+10) x 8 0.47% 30,000 141 Applicable for frame
structure with Normal
MAP
Default_Packet w 12
bytes overhead (6
bytes for MAC
header, 4 bytes for
MAC CRC and 2
bytes for HARQ
CRC)
(576+12) x 8 0.47% 30,000 141 Applicable for frame
structure with
Compressed MAP


WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 315
0.0.1 2006-11-08 Jiho Jang Initial draft containing only abstract
0.0.2 2006-11-24 Jaehong Chon Add Test Setup and Procedure
0.0.3 2006-11-27 Jiho Jang
0.0.4 2006-12-08 Jaehong Chon Apply the agreement of 3rd CC
0.0.5 2007-01-10 Jiho Jang Added frame structure and corrected editorial errors
0.0.6 2007-01-19 Jiho Jang Modify frame structures to accommodate normal
PUSC zones in DL and UL
0.0.7 2007-01-29 Jiho Jang Added a sentence The BS vendor will declare
which frame structure is being used in this test.
Error correction for pilot boosting from 3dB to
2.5dB
0.0.8 2007-02-28 Jiho Jang Editorial corrections and clarifications
0.0.9 2007-03-09 Jiho Jang Clarifications in case of using compressed MAP -
HARQ function will be disabled.
Clarifications for the physical bands bitmap in
DCD/UCD - full usage of physical bands in AMC
zone.
Additional packet size for compressed MAP with
HARQ MAP IE - 2 bytes overhead for HARQ CRC
is added.
0.0.9a 2007-03-17 Jiho Jang Modifications during Orlando FtF meeting
0.1.0 2007-04-09 Jiho Jang Clarification in the first paragraph in Test
Procedures Section.
0.1.0a/b 2007-04-18 Jiho Jang Added clarifications based on feedbacks from test
equipment vendors
0.1.0d 2007-04-29 Sun-Young Choi, Lisa
Ward
Added clarifications based on feedbacks from test
equipment vendors

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 316
10.1.19 BS-18.2: BS receive Collaborative MIMO
The purpose of the test is to verify that the BS receiver can support the collaborative MIMO features as specified in
the PICS document and the mobility system profile. The following aspects of BS receive collobrative MIMO are
tested:
1. BS receiver functionality in demodulation and decoding Collaborative Spatial Multiplexing transmission
from two MSs and
2. BS Receiver sensitivity from mixed MCS with different transmit power from two MSs under same channel
condition.

This test is to verify that the BS receiver can demodulate and decode the collaborative MIMO transmission from two
MSs. The minimum performance will be given in terms of received power at BS antenna from each MS. There are
two sets of requirements for BSs with two and four antenna. Vendors need to do a declaration on the number of
antenna. In the case of 2 antenna declaration, a baseline 7 dB implementation loss is used. In the case of 4 antenna
declaration, measurements are performed on multiple pairs of antenna with 3 dB additional margin (total of 10 dB)
relative to the baseline 7 dB implementation loss.The receiver is required to achieve a target Packet Error Rate
(PER) at these minimum performance powers regardless of MCS level and various channel conditions:
- MSE(x2) transmitting packets according to Matrix-B
- MCS level and channel model for each test case are defined in Table 254.
- Channel Model applied shall be dual independent 1x2 SIMO channel model. Since all scenarios where
MS1 and MS2 have the same channel model, all MSs fadings are independent. Also it was agreed to
assume zero correlation between BS Rx antennas. Different fading channel models for MS1 and MS2
are excluded.

Table 254. MCS level and channel models of MSE for test
MCS of MS #1 Channel Model of MS
#1
MCS of MS #2 Channel Model of MS
#2
1 QPSK-1/2 ITU-VA 60 km/h QPSK-1/2 ITU-VA 60 km/h
3 QPSK-1/2 ITU-PB 3 km/h 16-QAM-3/4 ITU-PB 3 km/h
5 QPSK-3/4 ITU-VA 60 km/h 16-QAM-1/2 ITU-VA 60 km/h
6 16-QAM-1/2 ITU-PB 3 km/h 16-QAM-1/2 ITU-PB 3 km/h
7 16-QAM-3/4 ITU-PB 3 km/h 16-QAM-3/4 ITU-PB 3 km/h
8 QPSK-1/2
ITU-VA 120 km/h with
10 usec for last tap
QPSK-3/4
ITU-VA 120 km/h with
10 usec for last tap

In the test, the BS is required to keep count of correct and false MAC-CRCs and the data packets (bursts)
received. The PER, rather than the Bit Error Rate (BER), is calculated over a large number of frames to verify that
the performance is better than or equal to the target PER. For fading channels, the target PER is 10%, which is
assumed to be near the target PER of a first HARQ transmission.

- Test sequences are defined Appendix 1.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 317
- The MIMO burst size including the number of packets in the allocation and the size of the packet are
described in Table 255. Number of packets in error is evaluated at 95% of confidence level.
- For the test UL burst shall be mapped from the forth symbol of the UL subframe and parameters for
the test packets are shown in Table 255.
- The test will be performed at a frequency in the applicable RF profile. For 3.5 and 5[MHz] channels
512 FFT will be employed. For all other channel bandwidths (7, 8.75 and 10[MHz]) 1024 FFT will be
employed. Detailed information is described in Table 256.

Table 255. Test burst allocation (CTC, PUSC)
MCS Payload
(bytes)
PDU size
(bytes)
Slots per
Packet
Packets(PDUS)
per frame
# of frame PER
target
# of error
packets
QPSK 8 18 3 1 20,000 10% 1,929
rate-1/2
QPSK 17 27 3 1 20,000 10% 1,929
rate-3/4
16QAM 26 36 3 1 20,000 10% 1,929
rate-1/2
16QAM 44 54 3 1 20,000 10% 1,929
rate-3/4

Table 256. Basic Parameters for BS Receive Collaborative MIMO (CTC, PUSC)
BW (MHz) FFT Size Sampling Factor Useful Symbol Duration
(s)
Cyclic Prefix Duration
(s)
3.5 512 8/7 128.00 16.00
5 512 28/25 91.43 11.43
7 1024 8/7 128.00 16.00
8.75 1024 8/7 102.40 12.80
10 1024 28/25 91.43 11.43

Table 257. PICS Coverage for BS18.2
PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
1. Table A.43 Supported Features for UL P D
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 318
PUSC MIMO for MS of A.5.1.1.1.16

2. Table A.38 Pilot Modulation for MS of
A.5.1.1.1.14

P D
3. Table A.164 Supported Features for UL
PUSC MIMO for BS of A.5.1.2.1.17

P D

This test requires two MSE elements to be generating UL bursts at the same sub-channels with different
pilot pattern, pilot pattern A and pilot pattern B. The output signal levels from MSEs, averaged only over
the data region, needs to be set at the appropriate levels, which may require a time-triggered
measurement. The BS UUT is required to receive, demodulate and successfully decode each MSE signal
and provide a measurement of the Rx PER in order to complete the test.

In addition BS shall be capable of counting packets received and CRC errors.


Figure 70 UL Collaborative MIMO Test Setup

Initial Conditions
Step 1. Program the MIMO fader to implement two independent 1x2 SIMO channel model with
zero correlation between MSEs and zero correlation at BS Rx antenna.
Step 2. Establish a connection between two MSEs and the BS UUT as depicted in Figure 70.
Step 3. MSEs have successfully completed initial ranging process.

Attenuator
Attenuator
MSS MBS
ASS2
MAC PHY-BB PHY-RF
MAC PHY-BB PHY-RF
PHY-RF
PHY-RF
PHY-BB MAC
Gated
Power Meter
Gated
Power Meter
ASS1
Packet CRC Check
MIMO
Fader
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 319
Step 4. Make sure the UL collaborative MIMO data link connection has been established between
UUT and RCTT according to parameters defined in Table 256
Notes:
i. PUSC subchannel rotation is ON.
ii. Power offset between two users should be maintained as defined both at receiver and at
transmitter antennas.

Test Procedure

Step 1. Select the first test step from Table 258
Step 2. Adjust transmitting power from MSE #1 so that the received SNR of MSE #1 per each BS
antenna meets minimum required value in each test.
Step 3. Adjust transmitting power from MSE #2 so that the received SNR of MSE #2 has offset
relative to SNR of MSE #1 as defined in each test.
Step 4. Set the signal level at ONE BS UUT receiver antenna input at maximum sensitivity level
specified in each test.
Step 5. Test packets are generated and transmitted by the MSE in the uplink subframe that is
allocated in Step 1. Make sure that the MSE #1 use pilot pattern A at certain data sub-
channels.

S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
Data subcarrier
subcarrier
subcarrier
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
Data subcarrier
subcarrier
subcarrier
Null
Pilot

Figure 71 Pilot Pattern-A
Step 6. Test packets are generated and transmitted by the MSE in the uplink subframe that is
allocated in Step 1.Make sure that the MSE #2 use pilot pattern B at certain data sub-
channels.

S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
Data subcarrier
subcarrier
subcarrier
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
S
5
S
6
S
7
S
8
Data subcarrier
subcarrier
subcarrier Pilot
Null

Figure 72 Pilot Pattern-B

Step 7. Measure the PER of each link (or MSE) separately.
Step 8. Repeat Step 2 ~ Step 5 for all test cases in Table 258
Step 9. End of test for one channel BW case
Repeat Step 2 ~ Step 5 for other channel BW cases.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 320
The minimum power values given in tables below are the value of power averaged only over the data zone in terms
of time and subcarriers.
The performance numbers in the tables are derived from the reference performance. The reference performance is
obtained from floating point simulation results based on ML (maximum Likelihood) receiver with ideal channel
estimation. Implementation loss is added to reference performance to obtain actual minimum performance numbers.
Implementation loss will take degradations from channel estimation, quantization error, RF chain (filtering and
imbalance) and other losses into consideration. The results from floating point simulation can be converted into
actual sensitivity as follows:
) 1 ( log 10
log 10 ) ( log 10 114
10
10 10 1
A + +
+ +
|
|
.
|
\
|
+ + = NF IMPLoss
N
N F
R SNR R
FFT
used s
MS perAntenna SS
(dBm)

where,

- Rss is the BS receiver sensitivity of one antenna,
- SNR
perAntennaMS1
is the received SNR of MSE#1 per antenna for different levels of coding rate and
modulation,
- R is the repetition factor, as described in 8.4.9,
- F
S
is the sampling frequency in MHz as defined in 8.4.2.4,
- ImpLoss is the implementation loss. In the case of 4 antenna declaration, measurements are performed on
multiple pairs of antenna with 3 dB additional margin (total of 10 dB) relative to the baseline 7 dB
implementation loss.
- NF is the receiver noise figure, referenced to the antenna port. The assumed value is 8 dB,
- is the linear scale of power offset of MS #2 relative to MS #1. The exact value is specified in Table 258
through Table 262 in dB for each test case.

In the above equation sensitivity Rss is defined based on the assumption of full utilization of subchannels. However,
only a single subchannel shall be transmitted from MSE in this test.
Therefore, the actual received power that corresponds to the same SNR value shall be 1/Ntotal (in linear scale) of
the sensitivity value. Or equivalently received power becomes, in terms of dBm

) / 1 ( log 10
10 total ss received
N R R + =

Here Ntotal denotes the total number of subchannels that is 35 and 17 for 1024 and 512 FFT size respectively. The
actual measured values of received power are shown in the last column of the tables.

Table 258. MAX BS Sensitivity Level for BS Receive Collaborative MIMO in BW 3.5 MHz
Test
Step
MCS of
MS #1
Channel
Model of MS
#1
MCS of
MS #2
Channel
Model of MS
#2
Power
offset of
MS #2
relative to
MS #1
Minimal
Received
SNR per
antenna by
MSE #1 (dB)
Received
Power
(dBm) (2
antenna)
Received
Power
(dBm) (4
antenna)
1 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
0 dB 3.0 -100.2 -97.2
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 321
2 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 60
km/h
5 dB 2.3 -97.7 94.7
3 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-
QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
10 dB 3.0 -92.8 -89.8
4 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 60
km/h
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 60
km/h
0 dB 6.7 -96.5 -93.5
5 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 60
km/h
16-
QAM-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
- 1 dB 8.6 -95.1 -92.1
6 16-
QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-
QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 9.4 -93.8 -90.8
7 16-
QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-
QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 13.9 -89.3 -86.3
8 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
120 km/h
with 10 usec
for last tap
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 120
km/h with
10 usec for
last tap
5 dB 2.2 -97.9 -94.9

Table 259. MAX BS Sensitivity Level for BS Receive Collaborative MIMO in BW 5 MHz
Test
Step
MCS of
MS #1
Channel
Model of
MS #1
MCS of
MS #2
Channel
Model of
MS #2
Power
offset of
MS #2
relative to
MS #1
Minimal
Received
SNR per
antenna by
MSE #1
(dB)
Received
Power
(dBm) (2
antenna)
Received
Power
(dBm) (4
antenna)
1 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
60 km/h
0 dB 3.0 -98.8 -95.8
2 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
5 dB 2.4 -96.2 -93.2
3 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-
QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
10 dB 3.0 -91.4 -88.4
4 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
0 dB 6.8 -95.0 -92.0
5 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
16-
QAM-
1/2
ITU-VA
60 km/h
- 1 dB 8.7 -93.6 -90.6
6 16-
QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-
QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 9.6 -92.2 -89.2
7 16-
QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-
QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 14.0 -87.8 -84.8
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 322
8 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
120 km/h
with 10
usec for
last tap
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
120 km/h
with 10
usec for
last tap
5 dB 2.2 -96.4 -93.4

Test
Step
MCS of
MS #1
Channel
Model of
MS #1
MCS of
MS #2
Channel
Model of
MS #2
Power
offset of
MS #2
relative
to MS #1
Minimal
Received
SNR per
antenna by
MSE #1
(dB)
Received
Power
(dBm) (2
antenna)
Received
Power
(dBm) (4
antenna)
1 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
0 dB 3.1 -100.2 -97.2
2 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 60
km/h
5 dB 2.4 -97.7 -94.7
3 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
10 dB 3.2 -92.6 -89.6
4 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 60
km/h
0 dB 6.8 -96.4 -93.4
5 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
16-QAM-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
- 1 dB 8.8 -94.9 -91.9
6 16-
QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 9.7 -93.6 -90.6
7 16-
QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 14.2 -89.1 -86.1
8 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
120 km/h
with 10
usec for
last tap
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
120 km/h
with 10
usec for
last tap
5 dB 2.0 -98.0 -95.0

Table 261. MAX BS Sensitivity Level for BS Receive Collaborative MIMO in BW 8.75 MHz
Test
Step
MCS of
MS #1
Channel
Model of
MS #1
MCS of MS
#2
Channel
Model of MS
#2
Power offset
of MS #2
relative to
MS #1
Minimal
Received
SNR per
antenna by
MSE #1
(dB)
Received
Power
(dBm) (2
antenna)
Received
Power
(dBm) (4
antenna)
1 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
0 dB 3.0 -99.3 -96.3
2 QPSK- ITU-VA QPSK- ITU-VA 60 5 dB 2.3 -96.8 -93.8
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 323
1/2 60 km/h 3/4 km/h
3 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
10 dB 3.1 -91.8 -88.8
4 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 60
km/h
0 dB 6.7 -95.6 -92.6
5 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
16-QAM-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
- 1 dB 8.7 -94.1 -91.1
6 16-
QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 9.6 -92.7 -89.7
7 16-
QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 14.0 -88.3 -85.3
8 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
120 km/h
with 10
usec for
last tap
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
120 km/h
with 10
usec for
last tap
5 dB 2.1 -97.0 -94.0

Test
Step
MCS of
MS #1
Channel
Model of
MS #1
MCS of
MS #2
Channel
Model of
MS #2
Power
offset of
MS #2
relative to
MS #1
Minimal
Received
SNR per
antenna
by MSE
#1 (dB)
Received
Power
(dBm) (2
antenna)
Received
Power
(dBm) (4
antenna)
1 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
0 dB 3.1 -98.7 -95.7
2 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 60
km/h
5 dB 2.4 -96.2 -93.2
3 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
10 dB 3.0 -91.4 -88.4
4 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA 60
km/h
0 dB 6.8 -95.0 -92.0
5 QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
60 km/h
16-QAM-
1/2
ITU-VA 60
km/h
- 1 dB 8.8 -93.5 -90.5
6 16-
QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-QAM-
1/2
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 9.5 -92.3 -89.3
7 16-
QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
16-QAM-
3/4
ITU-PB 3
km/h
0 dB 14.0 -87.8 -84.8
8 QPSK-
1/2
ITU-VA
120 km/h
with 10
QPSK-
3/4
ITU-VA
120 km/h
with 10
5 dB 2.1 -96.5 -93.5
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 324
usec for
last tap
usec for
last tap

Pass Verdict: when
a) PER measured for both MSEs in the test procedures can meet the PER requirement of 10%.

Fail Verdict: when
a) BS cant be configured to receive packets transmitted from MSEs in UL subframe with UL MIMO
enabled.
b) Either MSE fail to meet the PER requirement of 10%.

The maximum allowed signal level inaccuracy at the A
BS
is +/- 0.5 dB.

Table 263 Revision History for BS Receive Collaborative MIMO BS-18.2
0.0.1 2006-11-06 David Donald
Wen Tong
Initial draft based on contributions by W. Tong.
0.0.2 2006-11-28 Hong-Sup shin Changes Test setup flow, adds test parameters table,
and compliance requirements tables.
0.0.3 2006-12-01 Hong -Sup Shin,
Donghun Kim &
Byoung Seong park
Add test criterion, pre test, burst parameters
0.0.4 2007-01-09 SangYoub Kim Add abstract and modify a few statements.
0.1.0 2007-01-25 SangYoub Kim Add Noise Figure value.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 325
0.1.1 2007-02-01 Hassan Yaghoobi Added Editors note and [TBD] for further
discussion
0.1.2 2007-02-28 SangYoub Kim Editorial clean up. Modified test cases.
0.1.3 2007-03-07 SangYoub Kim Move Note into initial condition.
Added a note, PUSC subchannel roation is ON.
Sampling factor for 8.75 Mhz is corrected.
0.1.5 2007-04-18 SangYoub Kim Added power offset column
0.1.6 2007-05-02 SangYoub Kim Modified the Sensitivity Equation

0.1.7 2007-05-12 SangYoub Kim Filled out TBD of sensitivity values
0.1.8 2007-05-14 SangYoub Kim Modified definition of receive sensitivity and
Equation.
Same SNR value for difference channel bandwidth
per test case
0.1.8 Option 1 2007-06-07 SangYoub Kim Adjust receiver sensitivity to reflect ONE
subchannel allocation in uplink

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 326
10.1.20 BS-19.2: BS transmit MIMO processing

The purpose of the test is to verify that the BS transmitter can support the MIMO features as specified in the PICS
document and the Mobile System Profile. In particular, this test verifies BS MIMO transmit functionality including
pilot formatting for both Matrix-A and Matrix-B and per-chain EVM performance.

This test is to verify that the BS transmitter can support both Matrix-A and Matrix-B operation. The minimum
performance will be given in terms of relative constellation error per transmit chain and output power imbalances
between transmit chain. The transmitter is required to achieve a RCE equal to or better than these minimum
performance values while operating at the maximum output power. Also the per-chain transmit power imbalance
shall meet the requirement defined within the RCT.


PICS [6]
(P/T)
(D/I)
1. A.5.1.2.1.17 Multiple Input Multiple
Output (MIMO), Table A.163
Supported Features for DL PUSC
MIMO for BS
T D


WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 327
BS UUT
Ant 0
Ant 1
Signaling Unit
(MSE)
Ant 0
Ant 1
AT
0
AT
1
VSA
Average
Power meter
VSA
Average
Power meter

Figure 73. Test Setup for BS Transmit MIMO Processing (static channel)

The RCTT shall be able to monitor the signals in the two RF branches separately, either
simultaneously (using two separate physical RF connectors) or at different intervals in time
(switching from one branch to the other). If the latter approach is used, the measurement instants
shall be selected in such a way that it is ensured that the same physical characteristics exist in
both branches (i.e, the same data and frame configuration are used for each measurement)

Initial Conditions:
Step 2. Make sure the data link connection has been established between BS UUT and testing
equipment

Test #1 Pilot modulation for MIMO transmission (Functional Test)
In the proposed test, a downlink connection is established between the BS UUT and the testing
equipment, which measures the power level at pilot subcarriers and data subcarriers. In each
transmission the BS UUT sends one DL sub-frame on the maximum DL sub-frame size allowed by the
profile.

The testing equipment shall report the average power for pilot subcarriers and data subcarriers in DL
PUSC STC zone with Matrix-A and Matrix-B.

The testing equipment performs channel estimation both on pilots and data sub-carriers to minimize
channel estimation errors.

A single MCS is sufficient to show that the BS UUT is modulating pilots in the DL PUSC STC zone
properly. As such, this portion of the test requires only QPSK to be tested.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 328
This test requires the test setup in Figure 73.

The test steps are briefly summarized below:

Step 9. Configure BS UUT to transmit MIMO signal with Matrix-A.
Step 10. BS UUT sends DL packets in DL PUSC STC zone using QPSK 3/4 with the maximal DL
sub-frame size at middle frequency that BS UUT supports.
Step 11. Testing equipment reads and records the average power level at pilot subcarriers, data
subcarriers and null subcarriers (punctured pilot subcarriers) respectively in DL PUSC STC
zone. The averaging will be done over 200 frames.
Step 12. Configure BS UUT to transmit MIMO signal with Matrix-B and repeat Step 10 and Step
11.

Test Results #1 Pilot modulation for MIMO transmission
For each test the following table will be filled.

Table 265 Pilot Modulation Test Results for BS-19.2

MIMO matrix
type
Average power
level at data
subcarriers
Average power
level at pilot
subcarriers
Average power
level at null
(punctured pilot)
subcarriers
Compliance
Requirement
Pass/Fail
Matrix-A
5.50.5 dB
boosting for pilot
subcarriers, and -
18dB for null
subcarriers

Matrix-B
5.50.5 dB
boosting for pilot
subcarriers, and -
18dB for null
subcarriers

Test #2 Formatting MIMO signals with Matrix-A or Matrix-B (Functional Test)
In the proposed test, a downlink connection is established between the BS UUT and the testing
equipment, which measures the packet error rates (PER) in DL PUSC STC zone.

The testing equipment shall report the measured PER for downlink packets in DL PUSC STC zone.

The testing equipment performs channel estimation both on pilots and data sub-carriers to minimize
channel estimation errors.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 329

A single MCS is sufficient to show that the BS UUT is formatting MIMO signals in the DL PUSC
STC zone properly. As such, this portion of the test requires only QPSK to be tested. In addition,
the received power level at testing equipment shall be sufficiently high so that the testing equipment
can demodulate and decode the DL signals.

This test requires only the test setup in Figure 73.


Step 14. Configure BS UUT to transmit MIMO signal with Matrix-A.
Step 15. Set the received power level at testing equipment is sufficiently high, i.e., at least 10dB
higher than the minimum sensitivity level defined in Table 266 for the same conditions.
Step 16. BS UUT sends DL packets with format in Table 267 using DL PUSC permutation in STC
zone at middle frequency the BS UUT supports.
Step 17. Testing equipment captures the number of packets in error in DL PUSC STC zone.
Step 18. Configure BS UUT to transmit MIMO signal with Matrix-B and repeat Step 15 through
Step 17.

Table 266 Sensitivity Level for DL PUSC in AWGN channel
Bandwidth
(MHz)
Subcarrier allocation
mode
Modulation and Coding
Scheme
Sensitivity AWGN
(dBm)
Comments
3.5 PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -89.5
8.75 PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -85.6
10.0 PUSC CTC-QPSK-3/4 -85.1

Table 267 Parameters for Functional tests and Acceptance Limit
MIMO
matrix
type
MCS
level
PDU
Size
(bytes)
Slots
per
PDU
Packets
(PDUs)
per frame
Number
of frames
PER
(BER=1e-6)
PER
(BER=1e-6)
Maximum
number of
error
packets
Matrix-A QPSK
3/4
540 60 1 30,000 0.43% 0.43% 129
Matrix-B QPSK
3/4
540x2 60 1 30,000 0.86% 0.86% 258

Test Results #2 Formatting MIMO signals
For each test the following table will be filled.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 330

Table 268 Formatting MIMO signal Test Results for BS-19.2
MIMO matrix type Number of frames
transmitted
number of error packets
received
Pass/Fail
Matrix-A 30,000
Matrix-B 30,000

Test #3 RCE and Transmit Power Imbalance (Performance Test)
In the proposed test a downlink connection is established between the BS UUT and the testing
equipment, which measures the transmitter constellation error and the average transmitter output
power per transmit chain. In each transmission the BS UUT sends one DL sub-frame on the maximum
DL sub-frame size allowed by the profile. Each modulation is tested at the lowest, middle and highest
channel frequencies supported by the BS in the applicable RF profile.

For the test of RCE, the reported metric will be the RMS average of the per frame measured metric
where the averaging period is should be 200 frames (1sec). The metric proposed at Eq. 149 of
IEEE 802.16e-2005 shall be computed based on both data and pilot subcarriers in DL PUSC STC zone
to minimize channel estimation errors. The Relative constellation error will be repeatedly measured
only for DL PUSC STC zone per transmit chain. The testing equipment demodulates each frame
according to the steps described in 10.1.12.1 (M-RCT BS-12.1) and computes the error vector per
frame and after that by RMS averaging the final error vector is computed.

For the test of Transmit Power Imbalance, the testing equipment captures the transmitter output power
per chain only from DL PUSC STC zone and averages the captured output power where the averaging
period is should be 200 frames (1sec). The average output power measured by the testing
equipment will be recorded and stored.

This test requires only the test setup in Figure 73.


Step 20. Configure BS UUT to transmit MIMO signal with Matrix-A
Step 21. Send DL packets in DL PUSC STC zone using modulation and coding rate specified in
Table 224 with the maximal DL sub-frame size at low frequency.
Step 22. Read and record the displayed EVM per transmit chain measured by the testing equipment.
Step 23. Read and record the displayed Average Output Power per transmit chain measured by the
testing equipment.
Step 24. Repeat Step 21 through Step 23 for all MCS types specified in Table 224.
Step 25. Repeat Step 21 through Step 24 for middle frequency.
Step 26. Repeat Step 21 through Step 24 for high frequency.
Step 27. Configure BS UUT to transmit MIMO signal with Matrix-B.
Step 28. Repeat Step 21 through Step 26
p
L
p
L
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 331

Table 269. Allowed relative constellation errors vs. MCS
MCS type Relative constellation error for
BS (dB)
Notes
QPSK 3/4 -18
16 QAM -24
64 QAM -30

For the test of RCE, since the relative constellation error is actually not dependent on the code rate but
only on the modulation used, the test will be done on the all standard allowed constellations with the
maximal code rate since these code rates have more stringent requirements on the Trransmitter RCE.

For the test of Transmit Power Imbalance, since the output power is actually not dependent on the code
rate but only on the modulation used, the test will be done on the all standard allowed constellations
with the maximal code rate.

For each test (vs. frequency) the following tables will be filled.

Test Results #3-1: RCE
Table 270 RCE Test Results for Matrix-A for BS-19.2
MCS type Measured BS RCE ([dB])
Ant 0 Matrix A
Measured BS RCE ([dB])
Ant 1- Matrix A
Pass/Fail
QPSK
16 QAM
64 QAM

Table 271 RCE Test Results for Matrix B for BS-19.2
MCS type Measured BS RCE ([dB])
Ant 0 Matrix B
Measured BS RCE ([dB])
Ant 1 - Matrix B
Pass/Fail
QPSK
16 QAM
64 QAM

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 332

Test Results #3-2: Transmit Power Imbalance
The requirement for this test is not specified in the Standard or Mobile System Profile. However,
within the RCT, we set the requirement of output power imbalance as 4dB for this test.

Table 272 Output Power Test Results for Matrix-A for BS-19.2
Burst type Measured BS
Output Power for
Ant 0 (PA0
[dBm]) Matrix
A
Measured BS Output
Power for Ant 1 (PA1
[dBm]) Matrix A
Compliance Requirement Pass/Fail
QPSK
Abs(PA0-PA1) 4[dB]

16 QAM
Abs(PA0-PA1) 4 [dB]

64 QAM
Abs(PA0-PA1) 4 [dB]

Table 273 Output Power Test Results for Matrix-B for BS-19.2
Burst type Measured BS
Output Power for
Ant 0 (PA2 [dBm])
Matrix B
Measured BS Output
Power for Ant 1
(PA3 [dBm])
Matrix B
Compliance Requirement Pass/Fail
QPSK
Abs(PA2-PA3) 4[dB]

16 QAM
Abs(PA2-PA3) 4 [dB]

64 QAM
Abs(PA2-PA3) 4 [dB]

Pass verdict:
d. The measured average pilot power is 5.50.5 dB greater than the average power of data
subcarriers.
AND
e. The measured average power of null subcarrier is below the average power of data subcarriers by
the amount of at least 18dB for QPSK 3/4.
AND
f. The number of error packets received is less than the acceptance limit (129 packets for matrix-A
and 258 packets for matrix-B).
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 333
AND
g. The RCE< -18.0 dB for QPSK 3/4, and RCE <-24.0 dB for 16-QAM 3/4 and RCE < -30 for
64QAM 3/4.
AND
h. The transmit power imbalance between two antennas is less than 4dB.

Fail Verdict
a) The measured average pilot power is not 5.50.5 dB greater than the average power of data
subcarriers.
OR
b) The measured average power of null subcarrier is not below the average power of data subcarriers
by the amount of at least 18dB for QPSK 3/4.
OR
c) The number of error packets received is not less than the acceptance limit (129 packets for matrix-
A and 258 packets for matrix-B).
OR
d) The RCE> -18.0 dB for QPSK 3/4, or RCE >-24.0 dB for 16-QAM 3/4 or RCE>-30 for 64QAM
3/4.
OR
e) The transmit power imbalance between two antennas is not less than 4dB.
OR

Not applicable.

0.0.1

2006-12-10

David Donald
Wen Tong
Initial draft
0.4 2006-12-10 Jiho Jang Modified Table 4
0.5 2007-01-19 Jiho Jang Removed questionnaires
0.6 2007-01-30 Jiho Jang Re-formatted. Added detailed conditions i.e., packet
size, number of packet transmitted etc.
Merged tests for RCT and Transmit Power
Imbalance.
Added compliance requirements section
0.7 2007-02-01 Hassan Yaghoobi
0.8 2007-02-27 Jiho Jang Modified test setup and test conditions for Test#2.
Corrected editorial errors
0.8a 2007-04-29 Sun-Young Choi, Lisa
Ward
Added clarifications based on feedbacks from test
equipment vendors
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 334
10.1.21 BS-20.2: BS transmitter Beamforming

The purpose of this test is to verify the BS transmitter beamforming functionality which includes PUSC with
dedicated pilots and AMC 23 with dedicated pilots. This test also includes verifications of BS transmitter
beamforming performance and proper handling of UL channel sounding.

Assuming that a given BS complies with all single-antenna transmit requirements, then this test, in particular, covers
the following items:
1. The BS does not transmit pilots in the region not allocated for downlink bursts when using PUSC with
dedicated pilots and AMC with dedicated pilots.
2. The BS allocates downlink bursts spanning over a major group for PUSC with dedicated pilots.
3. The transmitted pilot signals are beamformed in the same manner as data.
4. The BS correctly constructs the STC DL zone IE (DIUC=15 & extended DIUC=0x01) in the DL MAP
message. In case that the BS supports IO-SND, BS correctly constructs, the sounding zone IE
(UIUC=13) and the UL sounding command IE (UIUC=11 & extended UIUC=0x04) in UL MAP
message.
In the case that the BS supports IO-BF AND IO-MIMO then the following tests shall be conducted:
5. The BS does not transmit pilots in the region not allocated for downlink bursts when using PUSC with
dedicated pilots in the DL STC zone,
6. Functional test for proper construction of signals in Matrix-A or Matrix-B format with dedicated pilots
in the DL PUSC STC zone.

The capability of beamforming is described in the IEEE 802.16 standard under the name of AAS
(Advanced Antenna Systems). In the WiMAX PICS the beamforming features are grouped under the
heading of IO-BF and IO-SND.

The radio transmission in beamforming is asymmetric in the sense that the downlink and uplink
operations are different but complementary. The base station performs the beamforming of the radio
signal and the mobile station sends sounding signals that assist the base station in estimating the
downlink channel characteristics. The implementation of the beamforming algorithms is not part of the
standards and therefore also not part of the certification testing.

This test also addresses BS that supports IO-BF AND IO-MIMO by conducting simplified functional
tests on the operation of DL PUSC STC zone with dedicated pilots.

The test setup is described with eight antennas. The same test rack may be used to test a BS having
between two and eight antenna ports (N
A
).

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 335
Item Reference Item and Section Number in PICS [6] Partial or Total
Coverage (P/T)
Direct or Indirect
Coverage (D/I)
1. A.5.1.2.1.6 Subcarrier Allocation Mode
Table A.132 DL subcarrier allocation for BS

Item 3. PUSC with dedicated pilots (8.4.6.1.2.1,
8.4.5.3.4)
T D
2. A.5.1.2.1.6 Subcarrier Allocation Mode
Table A.132 DL subcarrier allocation for BS

Item 6. AMC 23 with dedicated pilots (8.4.6.3, 8.4.5.3.4)
T D
3. A.5.1.2.1.7 UL channel sounding
Table A.134 UL Sounding 1 for BS

Item 1. Type A with Cyclic shift- support for P values other
than 9 and 18 (8.4.6.2.7.1)

Item 2. Type A with Cyclic shift Support P values of 9 and
18 (8.4.6.2.7.1)

Item 3. Type A with Decimation, 8.4.6.2.7.1

Item 4. Power Assignment Method: Equal Power (0b00)
(8.4.6.2.7.1, 8.4.6.2.7.2)

Table A.135 UL Sounding 2 for BS

Item 1. Sounding response time capability = Next Frame
(8.4.6.2.7.1, 11.8.3.7.14)

Item 2. max number of simultaneous sounding instructions =
2 (8.4.6.2.7.1, 11.8.3.7.14)

T D
4. Test 4, part 1
A.6.2 MAP IEs, Table A.277,

Item 3. DL-MAP IE (DIUC 15: Extended DIUC General)
(8.4.5.3)
T D
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 336
5. Test 4, part 2
A.6.2 MAP IEs
Table A.278 BS sending MAP IEs for UL

Item 4. UL-MAP IE (UIUC 13: PAPR reduction and safety
zone allocation)

T D
6. Test 4, part 3
A.6.2 MAP IEs

Table A.278 BS sending MAP IEs for UL

Item 7. UL-MAP IE (UIUC 11: Extended UIUC2 General),
(8.4.5.4, 8.4.5.4.3)

T D
7. Table A.157
Item 6. Pilot Modulation for MIMO PUSC with dedicated
pilot
T D

This test requires the BS successfully establishes a full (UL and DL) link with the MS emulator
(signaling unit) using the modulation/code rate under test in DL.
Figure 74 describes the test setup for the BS transmitter beamforming processing. Figure 75
describes the BS transmitter beamforming test in DL PUSC STC zone.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 337

BS
(UUT)
A1
1
A2
1
A3
1
A4
1
A5
1
A6
1
A7
1
A8
1

MSE
MS1
MS2
AT1

Figure 74. Test configuration for the BS transmitter beamforming processing test

BS
( UUT)
AT
2
A1
S
4
1
3
5
7
MSE
MS
1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
2
4
6
8
MS
2
S
5
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
AT
3

Figure 75. Test configuration for the BS transmitter beamforming test in DL PUSC STC zone

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 338
Note 1: The test setup in Figure 75 supports up to eight antennas, but the BS may be tested with two to
eight antennas.
Note 2: The fixture represented in Figure 75, must insure that the equivalent MIMO channel is not singular. To
achieve this objective, the lengths of the connecting cables (BS UUT to S
4
and S
5
) should not be identical, rather,
they should have random length differential of up to 4 cm, independent of the test frequency.

No active additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN) sources are used in any of the test setups for this section.
Attenuators and resistive losses are the only source of AWGN. This assures that AWGN at each BS antenna port is
uncorrelated with AWGN at other ports.

Variable attenuators AT
1
through AT
3
may consist of fixed and variable attenuators in series. They must have at
least 30 dB attenuation range and a minimum step size no larger than 0.5 dB. The attenuation value is chosen to
deliver a power range of -40 dBm to -70 dBm typical burst-averaged available power at the MSE antenna ports.

Test Parameter Configurations
Tests are repeated for all combinations of all the following conditions:

1. All supported numbers of antennas greater than one. For example, if the BS can be configured for 4
or 8 antenna operation, both configurations are tested.
2. Each bandwidth certification group (BCG) the BS supports, as defined in the Mobile Certification
Profile document.
3. TDD duplex arrangement only
4. For all supported BCGs, the one on-raster carrier frequency nearest the center of each band class
5. All supported bandwiths of each supported BCG
6. DL permutation schemes:
a. PUSC with dedicated pilots
b. AMC with dedicated pilots
7. QPSK modulation and 1/2 rate CTC coding schemes, no other MCS schemes

Table 275. Frame configuration numbers of test packets (PDUs), and error packets for different
bandwidths. MCS is always QPSK, with rate-1/2 CTC.
Channel BW
(MHz)
PDU Size
(bytes)
Slots per
PDU
N
P
, PDUs per
frame
N
F
, number of
frames
PER
target
N
PE
, number of error
packets
10 60 10 21 12000 10% 24950
8.75 60 10 14 12000 10% 16600
7 60 10 14 12000 10% 16600
5 60 10 10 12000 10% 11830
3.5 60 10 6 12000 10% 7070

BS Antenna port connection
The number of BS antenna ports N
A
may range from 2 to 8. . When testing a BS with N
A
< 8, the antenna ports A
1

through A
8
at BS UUT are used in order (for example, if N
A
= 2 use A
1
and A
2
). Unused antenna ports must be
terminated with 50 O matching loads.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 339

Frame structures

The default frame structure defined in Appendix 2 should be modified so that DL subframes and UL subframes can
accommodate the zones for PUSC dedicated pilots and AMC with dedicated pilots according to Figure 76 and
Figure 77 if BS supports IO-SND. If BS does not support IO-SND, UL frame does not contain the sounding symbol.
Note that in these figures, the structure for UL PUSC zone or UL AMC zone is only for the purpose of illustration,
and therefore the structure for UL subframe is not limited to these figures. Also, the downlink subframe is assumed
to be using HARQ MAP IE structure for DL burst allocation.

Figure 76. Frame structure for the test of PUSC with dedicated pilots

Figure 77. Frame structure for the test of AMC with dedicated pilots


Testing Conditions:
Test packets are generated such that there is at least one packet per frame with the test
configuration;
D
L

F
r
a
m
e

P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
F
C
H
,

B
r
o
a
d
c
a
s
t

M
A
P
s

(
P
U
S
C
)
R
a
n
g
i
n
g
,

C
Q
I
C
H
,

H
A
R
Q

A
C
K

(
U
L

P
U
S
C
)
UL Frame N
DL PUSC Zone
(Dedicated Pilots)
DL Frame N+1
UL PUSC Zone
(no subchannel rotation)
U
L

S
Z

(
D
e
c
i
m
a
t
e
d
)
D
L

F
r
a
m
e

P
r
e
a
m
b
l
e
F
C
H
,

B
r
o
a
d
c
a
s
t

M
A
P
s

(
P
U
S
C
)
AAS User 6 (AMC)
AAS User 7 (AMC)
AAS User 8 (AMC)
AAS User 9 (AMC)
R
a
n
g
i
n
g
,

C
Q
I
C
H
,

H
A
R
Q

A
C
K

(
U
L

P
U
S
C
)
AAS User 1 (AMC)
AAS User 2 (AMC)
AAS User 3 (AMC)
AAS User 4 (AMC)
AAS User 5 (AMC)
UL Frame N DL Frame N+1
UL AMC Zone DL AMC Zone
U
L

S
o
u
n
d
i
n
g

Z
o
n
e
DL Training
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 340
Encryption not enabled
Fragmentation not enabled
SDU packing not enabled
Packet header suppression (PHS) not enabled
ARQ not enabled
HARQ not enabled
CRC enabled.

Initial Conditions:

Setting and Test Procedure:

Test 1
The following steps verify that the BS UUT does not transmit pilots in the region not allocated for
downlink bursts when using PUSC with dedicated pilots and AMC with dedicated pilots.

This test is performed for test setup configuration specified in Figure 74.
Step 1. Set the Attenuator AT
1
as minimum attenuation.
Step 2. Program the BS UUT and the MS emulator (signaling unit) for a downlink and uplink
transmission with the permutation (PUSC with dedicated pilots, and AMC with dedicated
pilots) under test.
Step 3. For each permutation, the test is performed for 96 bytes packet for 10 repeated frames. The
modulation is set QPSK and the channel coding is Convolutional Turbo Code rate 1/2.
Step 4. For each packet sent, the VSA verifies that the pilots are not transmitted in the region not
allocated for downlink bursts. This means that the average power for pilot locations in the
region not allocated for downlink burst shall be lower than 15dB (since the RCE
requirement for QPSK 1/2 is -15dB) compared with average power for the allocated data
subcarriers. Note that in case of PUSC with dedicated pilots, all the pilots within a major
group are beamformed together until the end of burst allocation in time axis. Therefore, in
this case the pilot positions outside of burst allocation in time axis and outside of allocated
major group shall be considered in calculation of average power for pilot locations in the
region not allocated for downlink burst.

Test 2
The following steps verify that the BS UUT beamforms pilots spanning over a major group that
contains the burst for PUSC with dedicated pilots.

1
Step 6. Program the BS UUT for a downlink with the permutation of PUSC with dedicated pilots on
any of major groups.
Step 7. The test is performed for 96 bytes packet for 10 repeated frames. The modulation is set
QPSK and the channel coding is Convolutional Turbo Code rate 1/2.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 341
Step 8. For each packet sent, the VSA verifies that all the pilots are beamformed in the major group
that contains the downlink burst. This means that the average power for pilot locations in
the major group shall be 2.5dB0.5dB higher than the average power for allocated data
subcarriers. Note that the pilots outside of burst allocation in time axis are not transmitted,
and therefore, only the pilots within the major group until the end of burst allocation shall be
considered in calculation of average power for pilot locations in the major group.

Test 3
The following steps verify that the BS UUT correctly constructs the STC_DL_zone_IE (DIUC=15 &
extended DIUC=0x01); and in the case that the BS supports IO-SND, the
PAPR_Reduction_Safety_Sounding_Zone_Allocation_IE (UIUC=13) and the
UL_Sounding_Command_IE (UIUC=11 & extended UIUC=0x04) correctly.


1
Step 10. Program the BS UUT and the MS emulator (signaling unit) for a downlink and uplink
transmission with the permutation (PUSC with dedicated pilots, and AMC with dedicated
pilots) under test.
Step 11. For each permutation, the test is performed for 96 bytes packet for 10 repeated frames. The
modulation is set QPSK and the channel coding is Convolutional Turbo Code rate 1/2.
Step 12. For each packet sent, the MS emulator (signaling unit) verifies that the STC_DL_zone_IE
(UIUC=15 & extended DIUC=0x01) in DL MAP message is valid for each permutation
(i.e., the field of Dedicated Pilot shall be set to be 1).
In case that the BS supports IO-SND, continue with Steps 13 and 14.
Step 13. If the MS emulator (signaling unit) receives the
PAPR_Reduction_Safety_Sounding_Zone_Allocation_IE (UIUC=13) in UL MAP message,
it verifies that the sounding zone IE is valid (i.e., the field of sounding zone shall be set to
be 1).
Step 14. If the MS emulator (signaling unit) receives the UL_Sounding_Command_IE (UIUC=11 &
extended UIUC=0x04) in UL MAP message, it verifies that the UL sounding command IE
is valid.

Test 4
The following steps verify that the BS UUT does not transmit pilots in the region not allocated for
downlink bursts when using PUSC with dedicated pilots in the DL STC zone.

This test is performed for test setup configuration specified in Figure 75. Repeat the test sequence for
Matrix-A and Matrix-B in DL PUSC STC zone, both with dedicated pilots.

Step 15. Set the Attenuators AT
2
and AT
3
Step 16. Program the BS UUT and the MS emulator (signaling unit) for a downlink transmission
with PUSC with dedicated pilots in DL STC zone.
Step 17. The test is performed for 96 bytes packets for 10 repeated frames. The modulation is set
QPSK and the channel coding is Convolutional Turbo Code rate 1/2.
Step 18. For each packet sent, the VSA verifies that the pilots are not transmitted in the region not
allocated for downlink bursts. This means that the average power for pilot locations in the
region not allocated for downlink burst shall be lower than 15dB (since the RCE
requirement for QPSK 1/2 is -15dB) compared with average power for the allocated data
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 342
subcarriers. Note that in case of PUSC with dedicated pilots, all the pilots within a major
group are beamformed together until the end of burst allocation in time axis. Therefore, in
this case the pilot positions outside of burst allocation in time axis and outside of allocated
major group shall be considered in calculation of average power for pilot locations in the
region not allocated for downlink burst.

Test 5

The following steps verify the proper construction of signals in Matrix-A or Matrix-B format with
dedicated pilots in the DL PUSC STC zone.

This test is performed for test setup configuration specified in Figure 75. Repeat the test sequence for
Matrix-A and Matrix-B in DL PUSC STC zone, both with dedicated pilots:

Step 19. Set the Attenuators AT
2
and AT
3
as minimum attenuation. Make sure that the received
power level for each antenna port at signaling unit (MS emulator) shall be at least 10dB
higher than sensitivity level specified in Table 276.
Step 20. For each DL sub-frame, the BS UUT indicates the switch to the DL STC zone with PUSC
with dedicated pilots using STC_DL_Zone_IE().
Step 21. BS UUT transmits the default packet with 576 bytes defined in Table 277 for QPSK 1/2,
16QAM 1/2 and 64QAM 1/2 MCS with CTC.
Step 22. Measure the number of packets in error at the signaling unit based on MAC CRC over all
6000 frames as in Table 277.
Table 276. Sensitivity Level at MS emulator for DL PUSC in AWGN channel
Bandwidth Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and Coding
Scheme
Sensitivity (dBm) Comments
3.5MHz PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -92.9 Sensitivity
requirements for
DL PUSC in
AWGN for SISO
PUSC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -87.2
5MHz PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -91.5
8.75MHz PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -89.0
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 343

Table 277. Parameters for Dedicated Pilot in DL PIUSC STC zone functional tests and acceptance
limit
(bits)
sent N
Maximum number of
error packets M
Default_Packet w 10
bytes overhead (6
bytes for MAC header
and 4 bytes for MAC
CRC)
(576+10) x 8 0.47% 6,000 19

The test passes if:
The pilots are not transmitted in the region not allocated for downlink bursts in Step 4,
AND
The pilots are beamformed over a major group that contains the downlink burst span over set by BS UUT
in Step 8,

AND
The STC_DL_zone_IE (UIUC=15 & extended DIUC=0x01) in DL MAP message is valid for each
permutation in Step 12,
AND
In the case that the BS supports IO-SND,
The sounding zone IE (UIUC=13) is valid in Step 13,
AND
In the case that the BS supports IO-SND
The UL sounding command IE is valid in Step 14,
AND
In the case that the BS supports IO-BF AND IO-MIMO,
The pilots are not transmitted in any major group not allocated for downlink bursts in Step 18,
AND
The number of packets in error measured in Step 22 is less than the limit specified in Table 277.

The test fails if:
The pilots are transmitted in the region not allocated for downlink bursts in Step 4,
OR
The pilots are not beamformed over a major group that contains the downlink burst set by BS UUT in Step
8,

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 344
OR
The STC_DL_zone_IE (UIUC=15 & extended DIUC=0x01) in DL MAP message is not valid for each
permutation in Step 12,
OR
The sounding zone IE (UIUC=13) is not valid in Step 13,
OR
The UL sounding command IE is not valid in Step 14,

OR
In the case that the BS supports IO-BF AND IO-MIMO
The pilots are transmitted in any major group not allocated for downlink bursts in Step 18,
OR
The number of packets in error measured in Step 22 is not less than the limit specified in Table 277.

The maximum power measurement uncertainty shall be1.0 dB.

Table 278. Revision history for BS-20.2
0.0.1 2006-10-16 Jiho Jang Initial draft for outline.
0.0.2 2006-11-01 Herbert Ruck Added test procedures for PUSC and AMC 2x3
with dedicated pilots. Recommend separate tests for
uplink sounding support by the BS and for
BF+MIMO.
0.0.3 2006-11-03 Jiho Jang Modified text in Introduction. Included protocol
tests for UL sounding and STC DL zone IE.
Removed test part1 (test for same weight for data
and pilots) and set as TBD for test setup and
procedure for test part2 (test for transmit
beamforming gain). Removed Table 2,3, and 4.
0.0.4 2006-11-5 Herbert Ruck I accepted Jihos changes. I organized the procedure
into four tests and added text for the test of the
beamforming gain using two antennas.
0.0.5 2006-12-05 Herbert Ruck Added PICS items for Test 4. Editorial changes in
information elements. Added other possible to test
setups.
0.0.6 2007-01-12 Jiho Jang Modified test setup, clarified test procedures, and
added frame structures and test packet definitions
0.0.6a Draft with comments from ArrayComm
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 345
0.0.7 2007-01-15 Jiho Jang Updated with minor error corrections
0.0.8 2007-01-29 Jiho Jang Updated with BF+MIMO tests
0.0.9 2007-01-29 Jiho Jang Updated based upon comments during BF ad-hoc
discussion in Hawaii FtF meeting
0.1.0 2007-03-12 Jiho Jang Added clarifications in various sections.
Added test setup and test procedures in Test #5 and
Test #6 for MIMO+BF functional test.
0.1.1 2007-03-17 Jiho Jang Modified during Orlando FtF meeting.
0.1.2 2007-03-26 Jiho Jang Error correction in Fig. 2.
TBD_IL 2.5dB
Modified packet size for Tests #1,2,4&5
0.1.3 2007-04-17 Jiho Jang Modified during Sophia FtF meeting.
0.1.4 2007-04-20 Philippe Sehier Calibration unit inserted+ new test method with
dephasors introduced
0.1.8 2007-06-18 Herbert Ruck Removed E3, E4, E5, P1, P2, P3 and phase shifts
0.1.9 2007-06-19 Philippe Sehier Test 3, BF combiner, removed, Figures and test list
updated accordingly

10.1.22 BS-21.2: BS Receiver Beamforming Processing
The purpose of this test is to verify

1. BS reception of UL PUSC without subchannel rotation
2. BS receiver multi antenna combining gain for PUSC with and without subchannel rotation and AMC.

Tests in this section measure only the sensitivity gain of the BS when performing signal combining, compared with
SISO sensitivity. The BS absolute sensitivity is measured in BS06, and that measurement is not repeated here. BS
signal combining is confirmed by comparing RF path loss at sensitivity when all antenna ports receive signal with
path loss at sensitivity when only one antenna port receives a signal. Testing covers only the lowest MCS and a
single coding rate, since BF does not depend directly on these transmission properties. Testing covers all supported
band classes as defined in the Mobile Certification Profile, and all allocation schemes (AMC, PUSC with and
without subcarrier rotation enabled). Allocation schemes do affect multi-antenna performance in frequency-
selective fading conditions.

In the test, the BS is required to keep count of correct and false MAC-CRCs for sets of FEC blocks received. To
minimize test rack calibration, sensitivity is measured indirectly through path loss between the mobile station
emulator (MSE) and the BS. Calibrated variable attenuators contribute part of this path loss, and these are the only
calibrated components required for testing.


Table 279. PICS Coverage for BS21.2
Item Reference Item and Section Number in Partial or Total Coverage Direct or Indirect Coverage
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 346
PICS [6] (P/T) (D/I)
2. A.5.1.1.1.5, UL subcarrier allocation
for MS, item 2, PUSC without
subchannel rotation
T D
3. A.5.1.2.1.6, UL subcarrier allocation
for BS, item 2, PUSC without
subchannel rotation
T D

10.1.22.3 Prerequisite tests
For each antenna port, the BS must pass the tests in section BS06 (BS receiver sensitivity) using only that single
port. During SISO testing, the unused BS ports must be connected to 50 O terminations so that no extra RF signal
is available to the BS.

BS
(UUT)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8

S
p
l
i
t
t
e
r
AT

Channel
Emulator

MSE
Test controller
Packet generator
M

Figure 78. Test equipment configuration for the BS receiver beamforming processing test.
The test equipment supports up to eight antennas, but the BS may be tested with two to eight antennas

10.1.22.4 Test equipment and test equipment requirements
RF switches SW
5
through SW
8
have two states: on and off. In the on state, the switches have low insertion
loss variation (see Figure 78). In the off state, they have greater than 60 dB insertion loss compared with the on
state. There is no requirement on insertion loss in the on state other than what is stated in the next paragraph.

The path loss from any BS port Ai to M through switch SWi in the on state, splitter, attenuator and channel
emulator must match the path loss from every other BS port within 1 dB.

In both on and off positions, the switches should present a matched impedance of 50 to the corresponding
antenna port.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 347
No active additive white Gaussian noise (AWGN) sources are used in any of the test setups for this section.
Attenuators and resistive losses are the only source of AWGN. This assures that AWGN at each BS antenna port is
uncorrelated with AWGN at other ports.

Note that there is no requirement for phase-matching cable lengths.

The Tester should be able to deliver a RF power to any of the BS antenna ports, accordingly with the following
requirements:
- minimum RF power of -80 dBm at any of the BS antenna ports (or lower value accordingly with the BS
requirements to execute test step #2).
- minimum RF dynamic range at the BS antenna ports of 30 dB
- minimum RF step size at the at the BS antenna ports of 0.5 dB

10.1.22.5 Test Parameter Configurations
Tests are repeated for all combinations of all the following conditions:

1. All supported numbers of antennas greater than one. For example, if the BS can be configured for 4 or 8
antenna operation, both configurations are tested.
2. Each bandwidth certification group (BCG) the BS supports, as defined in the Mobile Certification Profile
document.
3. TDD duplex arrangement only
4. For all supported BCGs, the one on-channel-raster carrier frequency nearest the center of each band class
5. All supported bandwidths of each supported BCG
6. UL permutation schemes:
a. PUSC with subcarrier rotation enabled
b. PUSC with subcarrier rotation disabled
c. AMC
7. QPSK modulation and 1/2 rate CTC coding schemes, no other MCS schemes
8. AWGN channel model (no Doppler spreading), Pedestrian-B channel model (3 km/hr Doppler spreading),
and Vehicular-A channel model (60 km/hr Doppler spreading)

10.1.22.6 BS Antenna port connection
The number of BS antenna ports N
A
may range from 2 to 8. BS antenna ports connect to switches SW
1
through
SW
8
. When testing a BS with N
A
< 8, the connections SW
1
through SW
8
are used in order. Unused test ports are
terminated with 50 O match loads.

The test in this section is repeated for all supported bandclasses. Within each bandclass, the tests are repeated with
the BS configured to use UL allocation schemes AMC, PUSC with and without subcarrier rotation enabled, for the
channel conditions described above.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 348
Configure test equipment as shown in Figure 78 or as in the alternate configuration described at the end of Section
10.1.22.4.

Configure the BS, MSE and test equipment:
- Use only QPSK, rate-1/2 CTC MCS for the UL data
- Up to two uplink zones shall be used: a first PUSC zone for control regions and UL PUSC data (when
testing PUSC), and a second zone for AMC data (when testing AMC); This second zone will be
configured for AMC, while the first zone will be configured for PUSC, either with or without subchannel
rotation.
- Configure for a stream of UL subframes, using the parameters from Table 281. In all cases the data consist
of 60-byte PDUs, allocated as 10 slots/PDU. Each UL subframe uses 3 control symbols.
- HARQ off
- BW-dependent test parameters as given in Table 281.

Step 1. Set at least -75 dBm to any of the BS antenna ports as RF input power, without exceeding -45
dBm. All the BS antenna ports should receive the same RF power, within a tolerance level of 1
dB.
Step 2. Antenna 1 test
a. Configure SW
1
to on, and all other switches to off
b. Transfer N
FR
(given in Table 281) frames of data between the MSE and the BS. Count the
number of UL FEC blocks with successful checksum.

c. If 90 percent or more of the UL FEC blocks have successful checksum, decrease the input
power at each BS antenna by 0.5 dB and repeat from Step 2b.
Step 3. Other antennas test. Let k be the antenna index. Do for k=2 to N
A

d. Configure all switches to off, then set SW
k
to on
e. Transfer N
FR
(given in Table 281) frames of data between the MSE and the BS. Count the
number of UL FEC blocks with successful checksum.
f. If less than 90 percent of the UL FEC blocks have successful checksum, decrease the
attenuation at AT by 0.5 dB and repeat from Step 3e.
Step 3. Let A
1
be the attenuation value between M and any of the BS antenna ports at the end of Step 3
Step 4. Increase the attenuation between M and any of the BS antenna ports to A
2
= A
1
+ 10 log(N
A
) 2.
Where the last term (2 dB) represents combining algorithm implementation loss.
Table 280. Diversity Gain
Nant FFT Permutation Channel Gd (dB)
2 1024/512 PUSC AWGN 0
2 1024/512 AMC AWGN 0
4 1024/512 PUSC AWGN 0
4 1024/512 AMC AWGN 0
8 1024/512 PUSC AWGN 0
8 1024/512 AMC AWGN 0
2 1024/512 PUSC VehA/PedB 1.5
2 1024/512 AMC VehA/PedB 2.5
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 349
4 1024/512 PUSC VehA/PedB 0
4 1024/512 AMC VehA/PedB 0
8 1024/512 PUSC VehA/PedB 0
8 1024/512 AMC VehA/PedB 0

Step 6. Beamforming gain measurement
a. Configure all switches to on
b. Transfer N
FR
(given in Table 281)frames of data between the MSE and the BS. Count and
record the number of UL FEC blocks with failed checksums. This is defined as E

It is permissible to increase attenuation in larger steps or evaluate the FEC failure rate with fewer frames, if the
process subsequently returns to lower attenuation, makes smaller attenuation steps and determines within 0.5 dB the
maximum attenuation with 90 percent FEC block success on sets of N
FR
frames.

Table 281. Parameters for tests.
Channel Model and BW Dependent Test Parameters
BW, MHz N
ULsyms
N
PDUF
N
FR
N
CS

10 21 21 3000 6300
8.75 15 14 4000 5600
7 15 14 5000 7000
5 21 10 6000 6000
3.5 15 6 10000 6000

For all configurations tested, the number of erroneous checksum measured at the end of Step 6 (E) must be inferior
to the corresponding N
CS
limit set in Table 281.

To be compliant, equipment must meet requirements in all supported bandclasses, and within each bandclass for UL
allocation schemes AMC, PUSC with and without subcarrier rotation enabled, for all enumerated channel
conditions.

The values E
2
through E
NA are determined by stepping attenuators AT
M1
and AT
M2
. Accuracy of the measurement is
limited by:

- The attenuators minimum step size
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 350
- Attenuator relative accuracy (from one setting to another)
- The statistical uncertainty of PER measurement.
- Path loss imbalance to different BS ports, limited to 0.5 dB

For the case where N
A
= 2, both attenuators are used as reference so their path imbalance does not add to
measurement uncertainty. Therefore, uncertainty is: 0.5 + 0.5 + 0.5 = 1.5 dB. Otherwise, total uncertainty is: 0.5 +
0.5 + 0.5 + 0.5 = 2.0 dB.

0.0.1 20060927 Frank Muennemann Initial draft
0.1.3 20070201 Frank Muennemann Modify diversity gain equation, update tables
0.2.0 20070201 Yi Ling Formatting and document naming modified
1.0.0 20070302 Frank Muennemann Resolve TBDs, update equations and tables.
1.0.1 20070307 Frank Muennemann Add difference highlighting, editorial changes
1.0.2 20070308 Frank Muennemann Remove references to 8-channel fader, clarify
AWGN sources.
1.0.3Propose 20070417 Frank Muennemann Attenuator tolerance 0.5 dB, special case for NA =
2.
1.0.4 20070425 Frank Muennemann Editorial change to introduction (comment 95)
1.0.5 20070511 Frank Muennemann Remove diversity gain and table of GD
1.0.6 20070606 Dave Pechner Updated diversity gain table
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 351
Appendix 1.

This section provides generic test packets, receiver sensitivity requirements, Bit Error Rate (BER) to Packet Error
Rate (PER) conversion and Qualitative tests versus Functional tests methodology.

A 1.1 Test Packets
Test messages for measuring Receiver Sensitivity shall be based on a continuous stream of MAC PDUs, each with a
payload consisting of a R times repeated sequences S
modulation
. A different sequence is defined for each modulation
as follows:
SQPSK = {0xE4, 0xB1, 0xE1, 0xB4} for QPSK;
S16QAM = {0xA8, 0x20, 0xB9, 0x31, 0xEC, 0x64, 0xFD, 0x75} for 16QAM;
S64QAM = {0xB6, 0x93, 0x49, 0xB2, 0x83, 0x08, 0x96, 0x11, 0x41, 0x92, 0x01, 0x00,
0xBA, 0xA3, 0x8A, 0x9A, 0x21, 0x82, 0xD7, 0x15, 0x51, 0xD3, 0x05, 0x10,
0xDB, 0x25, 0x92, 0xF7, 0x97, 0x59, 0xF3, 0x87, 0x18, 0xBE, 0xB3, 0xCB,
0x9E, 0x31, 0xC3, 0xDF, 0x35, 0xD3, 0xFB, 0xA7, 0x9A, 0xFF, 0xB7, 0xDB}
for 64QAM.
Table 283 specifies the (R,S
modulation
)-tuples for each modulation and message length, where the first parameter, R, is
the number of times that the sequence, S
modulation
, is repeated.
Table 283. Payload Characteristics for Test Messages
Test
Message
Payload
Length, bytes
Payload for
QPSK
Payload for
16QAM
Payload for
64QAM
Default_Packet 576 (144,SQPSK) (72,S16QAM) (12,S64QAM)
Default_Packet
with repetition 2
288 (72,SQPSK) N/A N/A
Default_Packet
with repetition 4
Default_Packet
with repetition 6

Table 284. Payload Characteristics for Test Messages in Uplink Tests for 512-FFT (Bandwidths of
3.5MHz and 5MHz)
Test
Message
Payload
Length,
bytes
Payload for
QPSK
Payload for
16QAM
Payload for
64QAM
Default_Packet
for 5 MHz
288 (72,SQPSK) (72,S16QAM) (12,S64QAM)
Default_Packet
for 3.5MHz
Default_Packet
with repetition 2
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 352
for 5 MHz
Default_Packet
with repetition 2
for 3.5MHz
Default_Packet
with repetition 4
for 5 MHz
Default_Packet
with repetition 4
for 3.5MHz
Default_Packet
with repetition 6
for 5 MHz
Default_Packet
with repetition 6
for 3.5MHz
4 (1,SQPSK) N/A N/A

Table 285. Payload Characteristics for Test Messages in Uplink Tests for 1024-FFT (Bandwidths of
7, 8.75, and 10MHz)
Test
Message
Payload
Length,
bytes
Payload for
QPSK
Payload for
16QAM
Payload for
64QAM
Default_Packet
(7/8.75/10 MHz)
576 (144,SQPSK) (72,S16QAM) (12,S64QAM)
Default_Packet
with repetition 2
(8.75/10 MHz)
Default_Packet
with repetition 2
(7 MHz)
Default_Packet
with repetition 4
(8.75/10 MHz)
Default_Packet
with repetition 4
(7 MHz)
Default_Packet
with repetition 6
(10 MHz)
Default_Packet
with repetition 6
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 353
(7/8.75 MHz)

A 1.2 Receiver minimum sensitivity

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
PUSC CC-QPSK-1/2 -90.8

Only applicable for FCH. FCH has repetition
factor of 4, means sensitivity improves ~6dB.
RCT test is recommended.
PUSC CTC-QPSK-1/2 -92.4
AMC CTC_16QAM-1/2 -86.7
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -82.6
AMC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -81.5
AMC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -78.4
AMC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -77.3
AMC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -75.4
Comments: Sensitivity numbers are calculated based on assumption of repetition factor R = 1.

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
PUSC CC-QPSK-1/2 -89.4 Only applicable for FCH. FCH has repetition
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 354
AMC CTC_16QAM-1/2 -85.2
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -81.1
AMC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -80.0
AMC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -76.9
AMC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -75.8
AMC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -73.9

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
AMC CTC_16QAM-1/2 -83.7
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -79.6
AMC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -78.5
AMC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -75.4
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 355
AMC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -74.3
AMC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -72.4

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -82.7
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -78.6
AMC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -77.5
AMC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -74.4
AMC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -73.3
AMC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -71.4

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 356
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -82.2
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -78.1
AMC CTC-64QAM-1/2 -77.0
AMC CTC-64QAM-2/3 -73.9
AMC CTC-64QAM-3/4 -72.8
AMC CTC-64QAM-5/6 -70.9

The sensitivity numbers of Table 291to Table 295 are based on utilization of all subchannels in Uplink.

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -87.1
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -83.0

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 357
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -85.6
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -81.5

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -84.1
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -80.0

Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -83.1
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -79.0
Subcarrier
Allocation Mode
Modulation and
Coding Scheme
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Comments
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 358
AMC CTC-16QAM-1/2 -82.6
AMC CTC-16QAM-3/4 -78.5

A 1.3 Bit Error Rate (BER) versus Packet Error Rate (PER)
The relationship between the BER and PER is valid for an ideal communication system that transmits data over
binary symmetric channel with uncorrelated noise. This relationship is not valid for correlated noise channels and is
dependent on the specific receiver implementation. The length of the packet in bits is n and the bit error probability
for the channel is p
b
. Any packet that has one bit or more in error is discarded and the probability p of getting a
packet in error is given by:
( )
n
b n
p p = 1 1 Equation 2
p
n
is the packet error rate (PER) and p
b
is the bit error rate (BER). If we transmit N packets the probability to get k
packets in error is binomially distributed.

A real communications system is considered equivalent to the ideal system if they have the same PER. The
equivalency means that the real system has the same packet throughput as the reference ideal system having the
known BER=10
-6
. The PER is determined exclusively by the BER and the number of bits in the packets data
payload and is not dependent by how the data is encoded or what happens during the transmit-receive process.
Therefore the relationship between PER and BER is given by:
n
BER PER ) 1 ( 1 = Equation 3

The PER is defined as the limit of the ratio between the number of the packets in error (Npe) to the number of the
packets transmitted (Npt) when Npt goes to infinity. Therefore PER cannot be measured in a finite time
measurement. Instead we define experiments that, once validated, will give a defined level of confidence that the
PER is less than the requirement.

An experiment is defined by the level of confidence o, the value of the PER, the total number of N packets
transmitted and the maximum number M of packets that can be in error for the experiment to be considered valid. M
is determined from N, PER and o such that the probability for a system that has a PER higher than the nominal one
to pass the test is less than 1-o. The number M is the highest one that verifies the inequality:

( ) o s
|
|
.
|
\
|

=
=
1 1
1
k N
n
k
n
M k
k
p p
k
N
Equation 4

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 359
A 1.4 Qualitative tests and functional tests
Qualitative tests, like receiver sensitivity or adjacent channel rejection, measure the PER in order to assess the
quality of the UUT. The base standard requires some minimum value for the performance of the UUT and the test
ensures that the capability of the UUT meets that requirement.
For qualitative tests the number N of packets to be transmitted is determined such that M is high enough for the
experiment to be significant and N is not excessively high in order to limit the test duration. For an arbitrarily
chosen M value between 100-200, and for the payload sizes of the test packets, Table 296 summarizes the
parameters for 50% level of confidence:

Table 296. Parameters for Qualitative tests and Acceptance Limit
(bits)
packets sent N
Maximum
number of error
packets M
Default_Packet w 38
bytes overhead
(576+38) x 8 0.49% 30,000 147
Default_Packet w 8
bytes overhead
(576+8) x 8 0.47% 30,000 141

Functional tests make sure a function is implemented in the UUT and that the UUT responds to the control signals
commanding this feature. In this case the quality of the UUT is not measured, but it is simply required that the
receiver receives data correctly when a high quality signal is transmitted.

Functional tests make sure a function is implemented in the UUT and that the UUT responds to the control signals
commanding this feature. In this case the quality of the UUT is not measured, but it is simply required that the
receiver receives data correctly when a high quality signal is transmitted. Therefore in many tests the S/N ratio is
adjusted to be approximately 10 dB above the actual threshold to ensure the quality of the signal. For an ideal
receiver the BER would be very low with a 10 dB margin. In reality we cannot demand more than what is required
in the standard which is BER=10-6. So receives data correctly means BER<= 10-6 after FEC. The receiver input
level for functional tests is 10 dB higher than Sensitivity numbers of Table 125-134 unless specified otherwise in
test procedure.

For functional tests, in order to limit the test duration, we chose arbitrarily the number of packets to be sent one fifth
of the number of packets sent in qualitative tests. For 95% level of confidence we have:
Message Packet Length (bits) Threshold PER Number of
packets sent N
Maximum
number of error
packets M
Default_Packet w 38 bytes
overhead
(576+38) x 8 0.49% 6,000 20
Default_Packet with repetition
2, w 38 bytes overhead in
8.75/10 MHz BW (288+38) x 8 0.26% 12,000 21
1, w 38 bytes overhead for
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 360
uplink test in 5MHz BW
4, w 38 bytes overhead in
8.75/10 MHz BW
(144+38) x 8 0.15% 18,000 17
uplink test in 5/7MHz BW
uplink test in 3.5MHz BW
6, w 38 bytes overhead in 10
MHz BW
(96+38) x 8 0.11% 24,000 17
uplink test in 7/8.75MHz BW
(48+38) x 8 0.069% 48,000 23
(24+38) x 8 0.05% 60,000 20
(4+38) x 8 0.03% 72,000 15
Default_Packet w 8 bytes
overhead
(576+8) x 8 0.47% 6,000 19

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 361
Appendix 2.
Unless a specific setup other than specified here is needed in a test, parameters in this section is used for the tests.

A 2.1 RF Center Frequency
Mid sample test center frequency of Table 132 is used.

A 2.2 MS Received Power Reference

For MS test cases in which MS received power is measured, the portion of the DL sub-frame signal listed in Table
298 is used for the power measurements.

Table 298. MS Received Power Mesaurement Reference
Test Case MS Received Power Reference
MS-01 Preamble for Step 3
Data for Steps 2 and 7
MS-02 Data
MS-04 Preamble
MS-05 Preamble
MS-07 Data
MS-08 Data
MS-09 Data
MS-10a Data
MS-10b Data
MS-11 Preamble
MS-12 Data
MS-13 Data
MS-16 Preamble
Preamble
Single BS configuration:
Preamble Index = 4
Dual BS configuration:
Serving BS: Preamble Index = 4
Interfering BS: Preamble Index = 5
FCH
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 362
Table 299. Default FCH configuration
Field Value
Used Subchannel Bitmap 0b111111
Repetition_Coding_Indication 0b11
Coding_Indication 0b010

A 2.3 Downlink and uplink allocation
Network Entry
Unless otherwise specified, the MS or MSE shall complete initial network entry.

BW Requests
The MSE shall initiate UL allocations by sending bandwidth requests to the BS UUT.
Frame structure
- FFT Size: 512 for 3.5 and 5 MHz and 1024 for 7, 8.75 and 10 MHz BW
- Cyclic Prefix is 1/8.
- Regular DL/UL MAP IE to be used.
- Downlink frame contains a number of symbols in DL and UL subframes given in theTable 300.
- In the UL subframe, the control region covers 3 symbols. In this control region, the CDMA region is
composed of one ranging subchannel, with one Initial Ranging region and one Periodic Ranging region.
The remaining slots of the control region are used if needed for fast feedback and/or HARQ-ACK.

Table 300. Default number of OFDM symbols in DL and UL subframes

CDMA ranging region

6 subchannel
6 subchannel
6 subchannel
6 subchannel
6 subchannel
- For DL sub-frame in MS test, a data PUSC/AMC zone starts from a new symbol after 1st PUSC zone for
MAP and DCD, until the end of DL sub-frame
- For UL sub-frame in BS test, the data zone starts from the 4th symbol (after control message region) to the
end
- In DL sub-frame, desired burst(s) has CID to the UUT, and the rest of the data zone can have random
QPSK symbols. In DL-MAP, these slots will be associated with a different CID
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 363
This ensures the data symbols and subcarriers should be fully-occupied as in actual system operation
The rest of dummy symbols are to make the power level measured on the entire data zone the same
as the power of the desired burst(s)
This enables the VSA to measure over the entire data zone (an integer number of symbols)

Figure 79. Default Frame Structure with Normal MAP
In the above default frame structure, M and N dimensions of Burst of Interest is defined in Table 301.

Table 301. Dimensions of Burst of Interest for Default Frame Structure with Normal MAP
MCS Data Size in slot
(576+38 bytes)
M N
CTC-QPSK-1/2 ~104 8 13
CTC-QPSK-3/4 ~72 8 9
CTC-16QAM-1/2 ~52 4 13
CTC-16QAM-3/4 ~36 4 9
CTC-64QAM-1/2 ~36 4 9
CTC-64QAM-2/3 ~26 2 13
CTC-64QAM-3/4 ~24 2 12
CTC-64QAM-5/6 ~22 2 11
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 364

Figure 80. Default Frame Structure with Compressed MAP
In the above default frame structure, the number of slots are defined in Table 302.
Table 302. Dimensions of Burst of Interest for Default Frame Structure with Compressed MAP
MCS Number of slots (based on 576 payload bytes+8
bytes overhead)
CTC-QPSK-1/2 98
CTC-QPSK-3/4 65
CTC-16QAM-1/2 49
CTC-16QAM-3/4 33
CTC-64QAM-1/2 33
CTC-64QAM-2/3 25
CTC-64QAM-3/4 22
CTC-64QAM-5/6 20
Permutation
Unless the test targets another sub-carrier allocation mode specifically, in downlink and uplink, PUSC permutation
is used. In downlink, all major groups will be activated. The single mandatory PUSC zone is used.
Data packet channel coding
- Default modulation for DL and UL is QPSK
- CTC Forward Error Correction
- No repetition coding
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 365

A 2.4 Wave 1 Testing of 2-Antenna MSs
Wave 1 MS receiver tests were designed for single antenna devices and specify receive power at the antenna port.
MS receivers with multiple antennas are allowed and are supposed to be treated fairly by the test setup. For MS
receivers having 2 antenna ports, the vendor may select one of two configurations:
1. Single channel connected to one antenna port while the second antenna port is terminated. In this case, the
device is treated identically to a single-antenna receiver.
2. Single channel connected to dual antenna through splitter or alternatively through two equal channels. For
this case, the test system is calibrated to the antenna ports and identical signals and power levels (+/- 0.3
dB) are applied to each antenna port. Several tests are affected as follows:
a. MS1-09 Receiver Sensitivity. Although the standard doesnt require MRC combining gain, two-
antenna receivers tested with this setup can be assumed to provide this feature. An MRC gain of 2.0 dB
will be assumed, so power levels at each antenna port should be set 2.0 dB below the value required
for the single channel test
b. Other Receive tests. Other tests specify various nominal receive power levels. These power levels
should be provided to each antenna port without modification
c. MS1-04 Receive RSSI. The reported value for RSSI will be the sum of the power on each antenna
port. Since the levels at each port are set to the specified test value, the reported value will be 3.0 dB
higher, so this should be accounted for in the test evaluation
d. MS1-05 PCINR. The reported PCINR is the sum of the PCINR on each port, so it will be 3.0 dB
higher than the test specifies. This should be accounted for in the test evaluation. Note that in this case,
the interference is coherent on the two inputs, so the receiver will not realize a benefit from this higher
reported value

Note that for Wave 2 tests, dual antennas are mandatory for the MS and the tests explicitly define the required power
levels.
Single channel connected to a single antenna

|-------- P
r
dBm into MS Rx port 1
RCTT ----- P
r
dBm -----|
| MS Rx port 2 terminated.
|
Pwr measurement

Single channel connected to dual antenna through splitter or alternatively through two equal channels

|-------- P
r
RCTT ----- P
r
+ ~3dBm -----|
|-------- P
r
|
|
Pwr measurement
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 366
Appendix 3.
A 3.1 Measuring PER for MS
Measuring PER using Ping Method
For the PER measurement, the Signaling Unit (BS emulator) uses the Ping command to send some payload
to the MS UUT at an interval of 5ms (one frame). The MS will send the payload back if it is decoded
successfully. Hence, a packet error rate (PER) can be measured. PER, rather than Bit Error Rate (BER), is
calculated over a large number of frames to verify that the performance is better than or equal to the target
PER. The header size in a Ping message is 28 bytes with 8 bytes of ICMP control message. In addition to
the 28 bytes header in each Ping message, there will be a 6 byte generic MAC header at the beginning and
a 4-byte CRC-32 at the end.

The burst is allocated in a data PUSC/AMC zone after the first PUSC zone for control message (MAP and
DCD) The data zone extends to the end of the DL sub frame. The allocation starts from slot 1+mod(n,
Nsch) where n is the frame index and Nsch is the number of slots in the frequency domain (e.g., 15 in 512
point FFT PUSC). The rest of slots in the data zone (before and after the allocated burst) can use random
QPSK symbols. Corresponding to those slots, BSE should use a different CID in the MAP message. The
per subcarrier transmit power level of the rest of the data zone is kept the same as the per subcarrier of the
data burst so that the signal power measured for the entire data zone is the same as that in the allocation to
the MS UUT.
Measuring PER using ACK/NACK Method
For the PER measurement, the Signaling Unit (BS emulator) uses the ACK/NACK command to send 1
HARQ packet to the MS UUT at an interval of 5ms (one frame). The BS emulator should set the Maximum
Number of HARQ retransmissions to 0 (no retransmissions), and that the DL HARQ ACK Delay should be
set to 1 frame. In addition, the BS emulator should allocate a feedback region at each frame that follows the
frame with DL HARQ bursts.
The MS, per packet, will send a reported ACK if it is decoded successfully and Nack otherwise. Hence, a
packet error rate (PER) can be measured by counting the number of NACK message. PER, rather than Bit
Error Rate (BER), is calculated over a large number of frames to verify that the performance is better than
or equal to the target PER.

The HARQ packets are allocated in a data PUSC/AMC zone after the first PUSC zone for control message
(MAP and DCD) The data zone extends to the end of the DL sub frame. The allocation starts from slot
1+mod(n, Nsch) where n is the frame index and Nsch is the number of slots in the frequency domain (e.g.,
15 in 512 point FFT PUSC). The rest of slots in the data zone (before and after the allocated burst) can use
random QPSK symbols. Corresponding to those slots, BSE should use a different CID in the MAP
message. The per subcarrier transmit power level of the rest of the data zone is kept the same as the per
subcarrier of the data burst so that the signal power measured for the entire data zone is the same as that in
the allocation to the MS UUT.
A 3.2 Measuring PER for BS

Measuring PER using MAC CRC Method
For the PER measurement in the uplink, the Signaling Unit (MS emulator) always inserts MAC CRC at the
end of each packet to transmit. The BS UUT calculates and shows the PER based on its received packets by
checking the MAC CRC. Hence, a packet error rate can be measured. Packet error rate (PER), rather than
Bit Error Rate (BER), is calculated over a large number of frames to verify that the performance is better
than or equal to the target PER. The overhead for the MAC CRC method is 10 bytes including 6 byte
generic MAC header at the beginning and a 4-byte CRC-32 at the end.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 367

Measuring PER using Ping Method
For the PER measurement, the Signaling Unit (MS emulator) uses the Ping command to send some payload
to the BS UUT at an interval of 5ms (one frame). The BS will send the payload back if it is decoded
successfully. Hence, a packet error rate can be measured. Packet error rate (PER), rather than Bit Error Rate
(BER), is calculated over a large number of frames to verify that the performance is better than or equal to
the target PER. The header size in a Ping message is 28 bytes with 8 bytes of ICMP control message. In
addition to the 28 bytes header in each Ping message, there will be a 6 byte generic MAC header at the
beginning and a 4-byte CRC-32 at the end.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 368
Appendix 4.
This section provides testing channel models for SISO and MIMO/BF.

A 4.1 Test Channel Models
A 4.1.1 Purpose of channel modeling
The purpose of channel modeling in RCT is to provide a realistic and standard setting for the performance testing of
mobile fading environment. In particular, the setting covers the frequency-time variation characteristics of both
SISO and MIMO systems.

SISO channels
SISO channel characterization
SISO channel models
Compliance to the following three channel models as specified in [7] is required.
- AWGN
- ITU Pedestrian B 3 km/h
- ITU Vehicular A 60 km/h

Model description
Refer to [7].

Channel parameters
Refer to [7].

A 4.1.2 MIMO channels
Introduction
Mobile WiMAX
RCT requires the use of MIMO channel models. ITU models (Ped-B & Veh-A: 6-tap TDL) were
chosen for SISO RCT test. This model was extended to 2x2 MIMO channel models with the definition of a per-tap
spatial correlation. Three levels of channel correlation have been defined, to serve as three options for the RCTs.
Note that the content of this appendix is relevant to downlink.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 369
ITU Tapped-Delay-Line (TDL) Based Channel Model

Figure 81. Per tap MIMO correlation matrices

ITU propagation scenarios are extended to spatial dimension by defining mean azimuth angle, azimuth spread and
Laplacian shaped power azimuth spectrum for each tap. Tap-wise MIMO correlation matrices can be calculated
based on the spatial information combined with specific antenna configuration. Per tap azimuth spread in both
scenarios and with all taps is 2 on BS side (AoD) and 35 on MS side (AoA).

Propagation scenarios are based on ITU Pedestrian B and Vehicular A power delay profiles PDP. The Doppler
spectra and amplitude distributions are in all the cases Classical and Rayleigh, respectively. The Classical Doppler
spectrum is defined as for f e [-f
D
, f
D
]. The channel model parameters (PDP, AoA,
AoD) are shown in Table 303.

Table 303. PDP and Spatial Channel Model Parameters
Path ITU Pedestrian B, 3 km/h ITU Vehicular A, 60 km/h
Relative
Delay [ns]
Relative
Mean
Power
[dB]
Mean
AoA
Mean
AoD
Relative
Delay [ns]
Relative
Mean
Power
[dB]
Mean
AoA
Mean
AoD
1 0 0 147.34 18.11 0 0 142.22 165.11
2 200 -0.9 50.84 24.48 310 -1.0 13.92 170.43
delay []
power
{ }
2
) , (
n
t h E t
tap #1
tap #2
tap #n
(
(
(
(
=
1 ) , ( ) , ( ) , (
) , ( 1 ) , ( ) , (
) , ( ) , ( 1 ) , (
) , ( ) , ( ) , ( 1
1 43 1 42 1 41
1 34 1 32 1 31
1 24 1 23 1 21
1 14 1 13 1 12
1
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
R
(
(
(
(
=
1 ) , ( ) , ( ) , (
) , ( 1 ) , ( ) , (
) , ( ) , ( 1 ) , (
) , ( ) , ( ) , ( 1
43 42 41
34 32 31
24 23 21
14 13 12
n n n
n n n
n n n
n n n
n
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
t t t
R
5 . 0 2
) ) / ( 1 /( 1 ) (
D
f f f S
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 370
3 800 -4.9 139.08 21.11 710 -9.0 110.94 182.2
4 1200 -8.0 49.50 6.47 1090 -10.0 45.25 162.44
5 2300 -7.8 260.03 23.85 1730 -15.0 98.38 170.6
6 3700 -23.9 128.93 24.24 2510 -20.0 50.41 155.68
Total
AS
67.91 4.99 69.9 4.99

Definition of Correlated MIMO Channel Model
The MIMO correlation matrices of the three 2x2 antenna configurations obtaining high, medium, and low
correlation are defined by (1)-(3). Extremely high correlation can be considered later. In the equations below (
.
)
*

denotes complex conjugate. Parameters for the matrices are given in Table 304. Derivation of the correlation
matrices is described in details in the Appendix A, the associated reference antenna configurations is shown in
Appendix B

High correlation:
(
(
(
(
=
1
1
1
1
* * * *
* *
* *
| o | o
| | o o
o o| |
o| o |
MIMO
R (1)

Medium correlation:
(
(
(
(
=
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
MIMO
R (2)

Low correlation:
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 371
(
(
(
(
=
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
*
*
o
o
o
o
MIMO
R (3)

Where,

Table 304. MIMO correlation parameters

Pedestrian B Vehicular A
Tap | o | o
1 -0.1468 + 0.4156i 0.0303 + 0.7064i 0.7264 -0.2366 + 0.4312i 0.6883 + 0.1211i 0.7264
2 -0.4467 + 0.4227i -0.4007 - 0.6073i 0.1388 + 0.2343i -0.3508 - 0.5926i
3 -0.2906 + 0.4347i -0.6664 + 0.2620i -0.6443 + 0.3650i 0.3884 - 0.5604i
4 -0.4273 + 0.4259i -0.6522 + 0.2088i -0.3620 + 0.4331i 0.1899 + 0.6795i
5 -0.7026 - 0.3395i -0.5378 - 0.4866i -0.7074 + 0.3372i -0.3933 - 0.5650i
6 -0.4500 + 0.4222i -0.4564 - 0.5655i -0.4405 + 0.4238i -0.4383 - 0.5800i

MIMO Channel Model Generation
There are different ways in generating the correlative channel coefficients. For example, the generation of both
temporal and antenna correlation can be done as shown in Figure 82 below.

(
=
1
1
*
o
o
BS
R
(
=
1
1
*
|
|
MS
R
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 372
Interpolation to
final sampling
frequency
Gaussian i.i.d.
noise
generation
Time correlation
shaping filters
Tap k
Tx ant 1
Rx ant 1
Complex
WGN
H
doppler
(f)
Complex
WGN
Complex
WGN
Tap k
Tx ant 1
Rx ant 2
Tap k
Tx ant N
Rx ant M
A
n
t
e
n
n
a

c
o
r
r
e
l
a
t
i
o
n

g
e
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
(
l
i
n
e
a
r

t
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
)
X
X
X
) (nT h
s
k
11
) (nT h
s
k
21
) (nT h
s
k
MN
T/T
s
T/T
s
T/T
s
H
doppler
(f)
H
doppler
(f)
k
P
k
P
k
P

Figure 82. Block diagram of correlated channel coefficient generation.

Above P
k
is the power of tap k in the power delay profile. Gaussian random numbers are generated with sample
interval T, which has to satisfy Nyquist criterion with maximum Doppler frequency f
max
(1/T > 2f
max
). Antenna
correlation generation is a matrix multiplication C = MH
d
, where M = R^(1/2) or M = chol(R), H
d
is a MN x K
matrix with uncorrelated rows and (Doppler) correlated columns, K is the number of time samples (columns). After
antenna correlation generation the channel coefficients fulfil correlation matrix R.

1. Take an Hermitian square-root (e.g. Cholesky) of the correlation matrix (
2 / 1
MIMO
R ) and multiply the
vectorized form of H
iid,

) ( ) (
2 / 1
iid MIMO
vec vec H R H =
2. For each pair of MS-BS antennas and for each subcarrier, the signal, Y, at the output of MIMO channel is
the result of multiplication of the matrix H with the transmitted signal, S, i.e. S Y = H .
3. H structure is H
R,T
where MS (Rx) elements are on rows and BS (Tx) elements on columns. For the sake
of clarification, for BS antennas 1 and 2 and for MS antennas 1 and 2, the channel H is according to the
following:

(

=
(
=
2 2 2 1
1 2 1 1
22 21
12 11
MS BS MS BS
MS BS MS BS
h h
h h
H ,

and correlation between MIMO channels is defined by

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 373
( ) ( ) | |
(
(
(
(
(
= =
*
22 22
*
12 22
*
21 221
*
11 22
*
22 12
*
12 12
*
21 12
*
11 12
*
22 21
*
12 21
*
21 21
*
11 21
*
22 11
*
12 11
*
21 11
*
11 11
vec vec
h h h h h h h h
h h h h h h h h
h h h h h h h h
h h h h h h h h
E E
H
MIMO
H H R .

Long channel and high speed mobility
In order to entertain the requirement of supporting long channel impulse response (10 s) and high mobility (120
km/h), the following channel will be used (Table 305):
o ITU Veh. A channel (Table 303) with the alteration that the last tap will be moved from 2510 ns to
10,000 ns where its magnitude will remain the same (-20dB)
o Associated speed will be doubled from 60km/h to 120km/h
o Correlation matrices for all taps would include the exact same values as for the non-modified Veh. A
(Table 304).

Table 305. PDP and Spatial Channel Model Parameters for Large Delay Spread
Path Large delay spread channel, 120 km/h
Relative
Delay [ns]
Relative
Mean Power [dB]
Mean AoA Mean AoD
1 0 0 142.22 165.11
2 310 -1.0 13.92 170.43
3 710 -9.0 110.94 182.2
4 1090 -10.0 45.25 162.44
5 1730 -15.0 98.38 170.6
6 10000 -20.0 50.41 155.68
Total AS 69.9 4.99

A 4.2 Derivation of the correlation matrices
Spatial correlation
Spatial correlation can be calculated based on antenna geometry and the power azimuth spectrum (PAS). Per tap
azimuth spread in both scenarios and with all taps is assumed 2 on BS side and 35 on MS side. Power azimuth
spectrum with all taps is assumed Laplacian shaped. Mean AoA and AoD angles for each tap were taken to be the
ones tabulated in Table 303. Laplacian PAS with 1 rms azimuth spread is modelled by 20 offset angles of Table
306. Finally offset angles Au
k
with rms azimuth spread Y are calculated by
k k
Ye u = A .

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 374
Table 306. Ray offset angles within a tap, given for 1 rms angle spread
Ray
number k
Basis vector of offset
angles e
k

1,2 0.0447
3,4 0.1413
5,6 0.2492
7,8 0.3715
9,10 0.5129
11,12 0.6797
13,14 0.8844
15,16 1.1481
17,18 1.5195
19,20 2.1551

Spatial correlation between two antenna elements is calculated by
( ) ( ) ( )
=
A + =
K
k
k
D j
K
D
1
0
sin 2 exp
1
u u t , (4)
where D is separation of antenna elements in wave lengths, K = 20, u
0
is mean AoA (AoD) and Au
k
is the kth offset
angle in radians.

Spatial correlation is the only source of correlation with reference antenna configuration high correlation. For the
high correlation case the MIMO correlation matrix is derived with the following procedure:

As an example, spatial correlation between BS antenna elements is
( ) ( ) ( )
=
A + = =
20
1
0
sin 4 2 exp
20
1
4
k
k
j u u t o , (5)
where e.g. for the first tap of Pedestrian A scenario u
0
= 18.11 and
k k
e u = A 2 . Angles must be converted to
radians before substituting to eq. (5). Derivation of spatial correlation | between MS antenna elements is analogous.

Now correlation matrix of BS antenna array is
(
=
1
1
*
o
o
BS
R (6)
and correlation matrix of MS antenna array is
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 375
(
=
1
1
*
*
|
|
MS
R . (7)
Finally the MIMO correlation matrix for reference antenna configuration high correlation is

(
(
(
(
=
(
= =
1
1
1
1
* * * *
* *
* *
*
| o | o
| | o o
o o| |
o| o |
o
o
MS MS
MS MS
MS BS MIMO
R R
R R
R R R . (8)

Polarization correlation
Correlation between polarized antennas results from the cross polarization power ratio (XPR). The polarization
matrix is given by:

(
(
=
hh hv
vh vv
s s
s s
S , (9)

where v denotes vertical and h horizontal polarization, the first index denoting the polarization at BS and the second
the polarization at MS. In the ITU scenarios we assume -8 dB per-tap power ratio between vertical-to-horizontal and
vertical-to-vertical polarisations (also P
hv
/P
hh
= -8dB). This results to mean power per polarization component

{ }
{ }
{ }
{ } 1 dB 0
0.1585 dB 8
1585 . 0 dB 8
1 dB 0
2
2
2
2
= = =
= = =
= = =
= = =
hh hh
hv hv
vh vh
vv vv
s E p
s E p
s E p
s E p
(10)

For the medium correlation case the MIMO correlation matrix is derived with the following procedure:

The MS polarizations are vertical and horizontal, but the BS polarizations are slant +45 and -45. The MS and BS
polarization matrices P
MS
and P
BS
respectively are rotation matrices, which map vertical and horizontal polarizations
to MS and BS antenna polarizations.

(
=
1 0
0 1
MS
P (11)

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 376
(
=
1 1
1 1
2
1
BS
P (12)

The total channel is the matrix product of the BS polarization, the channel polarization, and the MS polarization:
(

+ +
= =
hh vh hv vv
hh vh hv vv
MS BS
s s s s
s s s s
2
1
P S P Q (13)

The covariance matrix of the channel is

{ }
( )( ) ( )( ) ( )( ) ( )( )
( )( ) ( )( ) ( )( ) ( )( )
( )( ) ( )( ) ( )( ) ( )( )
( )( ) ( )( ) ( )( ) ( )( )
(
(
(
(
+
+
+
+
=
(
(
(
(
(
+ +
+ + + + + +
+ +
+ + + + + +
=
=
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
hh vh hh vh
hh vh hh vh
hv vv hv vv
hv vv hv vv
hh vh hh vh hh vh hh vh hv vv hh vh hv vv hh vh
hh vh hh vh hh vh hh vh hv vv hh vh hv vv hh vh
hh vh hv vv hh vh hv vv hv vv hv vv hv vv hv vv
hh vh hv vv hh vh hv vv hv vv hv vv hv vv hv vv
H
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
p p p p
s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s
E
vec vec E
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
2
1
2
1
) ( ) ( Q Q

Above the property of uncorrelated fading between different elements in S (i.e. { } l j k i s s E
kl ij
= = =
-
, , 0 ) has
been used to simplify the expressions. When all of the diagonal elements are equal, the covariance matrix can be
further normalised to correlation matrix:

(
(
(
(

=
1 0 0
1 0 0
0 0 1
0 0 1

MIMO
R (14)

Value of depends only on XPR. With different orientations of MS and BS antenna polarizations, also the
covariance matrix structure will be different.
Note, this correlation matrix derivation is actually done for the H
TR
case. Transforming it into an H
RT
form the
channel elements h
1,2
and h
2,1
are switched and thus the 2
nd
and 3
rd
rows and columns should be switched as well,
resulting in the form:

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 377
(
(
(
(
=
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
MIMO
R

Spatial plus polarization correlation
With the antenna configurations resulting to both spatial and polarization correlation, the two MIMO correlation (or
covariance) matrices can be derived separately and combined by element-wise matrix product .
The reference antenna configuration low correlation is combination of spatial and polarization correlation.
A 4.3 Reference antenna configuration
Three different antenna configurations are defined for three different levels of MIMO correlation:

High correlation: may be obtained from an MS ULA with a half-wavelength spacing and BS ULA with four
wavelength spacing.

Figure 83. High correlation antennas configuration

Medium correlation: may be obtained from a cross polarized MS antenna and a slant cross-polarized BS antenna,
\ is TX antenna number 1, / is TX antenna number 2, | is RX antenna number 1, and is RX antenna
number 2.

Figure 84. Medium correlation antennas configuration

BS
MS
BS
MS
BS
MS
x
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 378
Low correlation: May be obtained with the same spatial parameters as in the high configuration but with cross-
polarized antennas

Figure 85. Low correlation antennas configuration

Channel model for Dedication Pilot in STC Zone in DL (informative example)
Channel Model for Dedicated Pilot in STC Zone can be a natural extension of the MIMO channel model, based on
the folowing:
1. Generating an i.i.d. channel, H
iid
- For a 4x2 and a 8x2 antenna configuration selecting respectively a
4x2 and a 8x2 i.i.d fading matrices based on Ped. B or Veh. A channel
2. Correlation:
1. The 2x2 received correlation matrix, R
MS,
is the one used in the regular 2x2 MIMO case
2. The Tx correlation matrix R
BS
is now a 4x4 or 8x8 matrix (for the 4x2 and 8x2 configuration
respectively). The calculation of these matrices follow the procedure described in the MIMO
channel model (above) but using the different distances between each pair of antennas for
calculating the related matrices elements.
3. For a linear array, the overall correlation matrix is
MS BS
R R R =
3. The effective channel is then (in vector form): vect(H)=sqrt(R)vect(H
iid
)

Choosing antenna configuration as follows:

4 = d

5 . 0 = d
BS
MS

4 = d

5 . 0 = d
BS
MS
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 379
{ {
{

4
3 , 1
a
3 , 2
a
4 , 1
a
4 , 3
a
2 , 1
a
4 , 2
a

Figure 86. Antenna Configuration for Dedicated Pilot in STC Zone

For this configuration the spacing between antennas are:

5
4
3
4 , 1
, 4 , 2 3 , 1
3 , 2
4 , 3 2 , 1
=
= =
=
= =
D
D D
D
D D

The correlation matrix is:
(
(
(
(
(
= =
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
4 , 3
*
4 , 2
*
4 , 1
4 , 3
*
3 , 2
*
3 , 1
4 , 2 3 , 2
*
2 , 1
4 , 1 3 , 1 2 , 1
|
|
o o o
o o o
o o o
o o o
MS BS MIMO
R R R

Using the equalities between the different s ' o (see below) the correlation matrix is then expressed in Eq. 18

4 4 , 1
3 4 , 2 3 , 1
2 3 , 2
1 4 , 3 2 , 1
a
a
a a
a
=
= =
=
= =
o
o o
o o

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 380
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
=
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
* *
1
* *
1
*
1
*
1
*
3
* *
3
*
3
*
3
*
4
* *
4
*
4
*
4
1
*
1
1 1
* *
2
* *
2
*
2
*
2
*
3
* *
3
*
3
*
3
3
*
3
3 3
2
*
2
2 2
* *
1
* *
1
*
1
*
1
4
*
4
4 4
3
*
3
3 3
1
*
1
1 1
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
a a
MIMO
R

The values of the per-tap parameters for Ped. B channel are listed in Table 307.

Table 307. Per tap parameters for Ped B channel using s ' | from Table 304
Tap a
1
a
2
a
3
a
4

1 -0.364 -
0.90831i
0.74898 +
0.33995i
0.030322 -
0.70636i
-0.54975 +
0.1956i
-0.1468 +
0.4156i
2 -0.84105 -
0.5036i
0.038607 -
0.83508i
-0.4007 +
0.60728i
0.54842 -
0.26651i
-0.4467 +
0.4227i
3 -0.62399 -
0.75477i
0.72576 -
0.39943i
-0.66635 -
0.26197i
0.18727 +
0.56467i
-0.2906 +
0.4347i
4 0.74211 -
0.63477i
-0.42392 -
0.68757i
-0.65216 -
0.20882i
-0.51201 +
0.21596i
-0.4273 +
0.4259i
5 -0.80752 -
0.55544i
0.19447 -
0.81151i
-0.53779 +
0.48664i
0.6011 - 0.083037i -0.7026 -
0.3395i
6 -0.82868 -
0.52356i
0.098425 -
0.82958i
-0.45644 +
0.56546i
0.57528 -
0.19866i
-0.4500 +
0.4222i

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 381
Appendix 5.
A 5.1 Sample Test Center Frequency
Table 308 lists the set of test center frequencies for MS that are recommended to sample on low, mid and high
portion of spectrum for various Band Classes.
Table 308. Sample Test Center Frequencies
Item RF Profile Name Channel
BW (MHz)
Fstart (MHz) Nrange n(Low, Mid,
High)
1.
Prof1.A_2.3 8.75 2304.5 {0, , 324) (0, 162, 324)
2.
Prof1.B_2.3-5
Prof1.B_2.3-10
5 2302.5 {0, , 380) (0, 190, 380)
10 2305 {0, , 360) (0, 180, 360)
3.
Prof2.A_2.305 3.5 2306.75 and 2346.75 {0, , 46} (0, 23, 46)
4.
Prof2.B_2.305 5 2307.5 and 2347.5 {0, , 40} (0, 20, 40)
5.
Prof2.C_2.305 10 2310 and 2350 {0, , 20} (0, 10, 20)
6.
Prof3.A_2.496 5
Prof3.A_2.496 10
5 2498.5 {0, , 756} (0, 378, 756)
10 2501 {0, , 736} (0, 368, 736)
7.
Prof4.A_3.3 5 3302.5 {0, , 380) (0, 190, 380)
8.
Prof4.B_3.3 7 3303.5 {0, , 372) (0, 186, 372)
9.
Prof4.C_3.3 10 3305 {0, , 360) (0, 180, 360)
10.
Prof5.A_3.4 5 3402.5 {0, , 1580) (0, 790, 1580)
Prof5L.A_3.4 {0, , 780) (0, 390, 780)
Prof5H.A_3.4 {800, , 1580) (800, 1190, 1580)
11.
Prof5.B_3.4 7 3403.5 {0, , 1572) (0, 786, 1572)
Prof5L.B_3.4 {0, , 772) (0, 386, 772)
Prof5H.B_3.4 {800, , 1572) (800, 1186, 1572)
12.
Prof5.C_3.4 10 3405 {0, , 1560) (0, 780, 1560)
Prof5L.C_3.4 {0, , 760) (0, 380, 760)
Prof5H.C_3.4 {800, , 1560) (800, 1230, 1560)

In Table 308:

range c start n
N n F n F Channel RF e A + = ,

Where:
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 382
sta rt
F
is the start frequency for the specific band,
c
F A
is the center frequency step,
ra n g e
N
is the range values for the n parameter

To put back all the RF profile columns from PICS so that the Equations are well defined.

For BS, the low, mid and high center frequencies shall be identified according to the vendors declared range and
includes the first, last and a center frequency that is at the average of low and high up to a frequency step size of 250
KHz quantization.
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 383
Appendix 6.
A 6.1 RCTT functional requirements

These are the minimum functional requirements that a generic RCTT should be able to support. They are divided in
several subsets of categories in order to locate easily a certain type of requirement.
Signaling Unit functionality
- MAC services included:
o The signaling unit shall provide, by means of a LMAC entity, all necessary functionality to
establish service flow with the UUT.
o The signaling unit shall include a LMAC entity to support initial NW entry including initial
ranging)..
o The WiMAX SU shall use TTCN-3 for the upper PHY/lower MAC signaling. The WiMAX
PCTs ETSI-harmonized TTCN-3 scripts should be reused/leveraged wherever possible.

- Data flow establishment and its parameters
- Test mode signaling
- Modulation and FEC
- MIMO signaling
- Zone types
- Frame structure
- DL/UL ratio management
- Packet generation and packet analyzer.
- Ranging capabilities
- Station personalities:
o The signaling unit shall be configurable as a BS emulator
o The signaling unit shall be configurable as a MS emulator
- Configuration of PHY parameters:
o the RCTT shall be able to generate an OFDMA frame including maps, zones and messages
o The RCTT shall be able to parse OFDMA frames including maps, zones, and PDUs.

Instrument functionality
- Signal analysis:
o Spectral flatness:
Spectral flatness resolution measurement shall be better than 0.1 dB
o EVM
o Carrier frequency deviations:
Frequency deviation measurement shall have an accuracy of 4 ppm.
o (Time Analysis) Frame length
o Time accuracy:
The time accuracy shall be better than 1% of subcarrier spacing.
o TTG/RTG duration
o Sample frequency
o Subcarrier spacing
- Power measurements
o Range
- Channel emulation
o The test system shall implement a flexible and reconfigurable channel model simulator.
- others
Interface functionality
- RF interfaces
WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 384
- Sync and trigger signals:
o GPIO's (general purpose input/output) shall be used for external control and synchronization of
the RCTT.
o
- Log functionality
- Connectivity with other external devices

A 6.2 Signaling Unit (BSE) Requirements:
- The Signaling Unit (BSE) shall be capable to shift its carrier frequency and sampling frequency (hence the
carrier frequency and sampling frequency) in the range [-2 .. 2] ppm with respect to the nominal value with
an accuracy better than 0.1 ppm.
- Unless required otherwise in a test, the Signaling Unit (BSE) shall be compliant with Mobile WiMAX
System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification and shall behave as expected.
- The Signalling Unit (BSE) shall behave as required for every test. This means that it is required that the SU
shall provide the necessary functionality to behave like if it is a compliant implementation with Mobile
WiMAX System Profile and IEEE 802.16 specification and at the same time it shall provide the specific
not (necessarily) compliant functionality that it is required by every test.
- The Signalling Unit (BSE) shall be calibrated in power, time and frequency.

WiMAX Forum

WiMAX Forum

Mobile RCT
Page - 385
Appendix 7.
A 7.1 Test Modes
TBD

WMF T25 002 R010v05 - RCT

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WMF T25 002 R010v05 - RCT

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WiMAX FORUM PROPRIETARY

WiMAX Forum Proprietary

Mobile Radio Conformance Tests

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

air interface requirements.

radio conformance testing

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

System Profile [4] and PICS [7].

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Mobile Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) Proforma WMF-T24-

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05

Air Test Procedures WMF-T25-002-R010v05